BLLT J2 Vol 2 Specification 131212 Rev14

Contract
Package J2 Civil Works

km 24+503 to km 29+264
Cha Bridge and Viaduct
Volume 2
Specification
Project: North-South Expressway Construction

Project (Ben Luc - Long Thanh Section)
Employer: Vietnam Expressway Corporation
Contract – Volume 2 – Specification

North-South Expressway Construction Project (Ben Luc - Long Thanh Section)
Package J2: July 2014
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................. 1-1
SECTION 01100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................... 1-1
SECTION 01200 - RELOCATION OF UTILITIES...................................................................... 1-25
SECTION 01300 - ENVIRONMENTAL OBLIGATIONS ........................................................... 1-27
DIVISION 2 SITE CLEARING........................................................................................................ 2-1
SECTION 02100 - SITE CLEARING ............................................................................................. 2-1
SECTION 02200 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND
OBSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................................ 2-3
DIVISION 3 EARTHWORKS.......................................................................................................... 3-1
SECTION 03100 - COMMON EXCAVATION............................................................................... 3-1
SECTION 03200 - STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION ....................................................................... 3-5
SECTION 03300 - BORROW MATERIAL .................................................................................. 3-11
SECTION 03400 - EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION............................................................. 3-14
SECTION 03500 - SOFT SOIL IMPROVEMENT MEASURES ................................................. 3-27
DIVISION 4 DRAINAGE WORKS ................................................................................................. 4-1
SECTION 04100 - PIPE CULVERTS.............................................................................................. 4-1
SECTION 04200 - DITCHES .......................................................................................................... 4-6
SECTION 04300 - CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES, INLETS, AND OUTLETS.......................... 4-9
SECTION 04400 - MORTARED STONEWORK ......................................................................... 4-12
SECTION 04500 - GABIONS ....................................................................................................... 4-15
SECTION 04600 - BRICK MASONRY ........................................................................................ 4-18
DIVISION 5 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES ............................................................................ 5-1
SECTION 05100 - AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE............................................................ 5-1
SECTION 05200 - ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE ........................................................... 5-9
SECTION 05300 - DRY LEAN CONCRETE BASE.................................................................... 5-11
DIVISION 6 PAVEMENT ................................................................................................................. 6-1
SECTION 06100 - PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT ................................................................... 6-1
SECTION 06200 - ASPHALT CONCRETE BINDER AND SURFACE COURSES..................... 6-7
SECTION 06300 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (PCCP) ......................... 6-29
SECTION 06400 - DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT (DBST)...................... 6-45
SECTION 06500 - ASPHALT CONCRETE LEVELING COURSE ............................................ 6-50
DIVISION 7 STRUCTURAL WORKS............................................................................................ 7-1
SECTION 07100 - CONCRETE AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES............................................ 7-1
SECTION 07200 - PRECAST CONCRETE PILES...................................................................... 7-27
SECTION 07250 - SOIL INVESTIGATION BORINGS .............................................................. 7-36
SECTION 07300 - BORED PILE.................................................................................................. 7-40
SECTION 07350 - PILE DYNAMIC TESTING........................................................................... 7-54
SECTION 07400 - STEEL PIPE PILES - Not used....................................................................... 7-56
SECTION 07450 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ........................................................................ 7-57
SECTION 07500 - REINFORCING STEEL ................................................................................. 7-70
SECTION 07600 - STEEL STRUCTURES - Not used................................................................. 7-76
SECTION 07650 - RAILINGS ...................................................................................................... 7-77
SECTION 07660 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ......................................................................... 7-80
SECTION 07680 - FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM (CABLE STAYED BRIDGE) - Not used ......... 7-83
SECTION 07700 - CABLE-STAYED BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION - Not used .......................... 7-83
SECTION 07720 - STAY CABLE - Not used................................................................................ 7-83
SECTION 07740 - WIND TUNNEL TEST - Not used ................................................................. 7-83
SECTION 07800 - BRIDGE BEARINGS ..................................................................................... 7-84
SECTION 07840 - WATERPROOFING........................................................................................ 7-94
SECTION 07850 - EXPANSION JOINTS .................................................................................... 7-97
SECTION 07900 - BRIDGE DRAINAGE .................................................................................. 7-102
SECTION 07910 - RELOCATION OF NAVIGATION CHANNEL - Not used ......................... 7-104
Contract – Volume 2 – Specification i
SECTION 07920 - MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION AND MONITORING EQUIPMENT - Not
used............................................................................................................................................... 7-104
DIVISION 8 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................... 8-1
SECTION 08100 - CEMENT MORTAR ......................................................................................... 8-1
SECTION 08200 - LANDSCAPING............................................................................................... 8-3
SECTION 08300 - TOPSOILING ................................................................................................... 8-8
SECTION 08500 - TRAFFIC SIGNS AND KM POSTS .............................................................. 8-11
SECTION 08600 - GUARDRAIL ................................................................................................. 8-16
SECTION 08700 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS.............................................................................. 8-19
SECTION 08800 - PAINTING ...................................................................................................... 8-23
SECTION 08900 - CONCRETE CURB ........................................................................................ 8-30
SECTION 08910 - INTERLOCKING BLOCK PAVEMENT (BRICK / BLOCK) ...................... 8-32
SECTION 08950 - SLOPE PROTECTION................................................................................... 8-34
SECTION 08960 - FENCING AND NOISE BARRIERS............................................................. 8-36
SECTION 08970 - ANTI-GLARE PANELS ................................................................................. 8-39
SECTION 08980 - MECHANICALLY STABILISED EARTH WALL ........................................ 8-40
DIVISION 9 LIGHTING AND POWER SUPPLY ......................................................................... 9-1
SECTION 09100 - LIGHTING AND POWER SUPPLY WORKS................................................. 9-1
SECTION 09200 - CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS ................................................ 9-15
SECTION 09300 - DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR (DEG) SET - Not used ............................. 9-22
SECTION 09400 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) - Not used ......................... 9-22
SECTION 09500 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH - Not used .......................................... 9-22
Contract – Volume 2 – Specification ii

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. ABBREVIATIONS AND UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

In addition to the abbreviations given in the General Conditions of Contract and the
Preamble to the Bills of Quantities, the following abbreviations are used in the
Specifications:
CBR - California Bearing Ratio
Cov.Pl. - Cover plate
Dia. - Diameter
Diaph. - Diaphragm
Drg. or Dwg - Drawing
Ea - Each
Guss. - Gusset
HP - Horsepower(s)
Max. - Maximum
Min. - Minimum
mm - Millimeter(s)
No. - Number
P.C - Pre-stressed Concrete
R.C - Reinforced Concrete
Sht. - Sheet
Spl. - Splice
sq. cm or cm2 - Square centimetre(s)
sq. m or m2 - Square meter(s)
t or ton - Metric tonne (1,000 kg)
W or Wt - Weight
QA - Quality Assurance Scheme
All units of measurement used in these specifications and in the Bid Price Schedule follow
the Standard International (SI) system of weights and measures unless otherwise noted.
When measuring works for payment, quantities shall generally be calculated to 2 decimal
places, or 3 decimal places for steelwork or reinforcement if measured in tons.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 QUALITY
Unless otherwise specifically provided in this Contract, all items incorporated in the
completed work, such as equipment, materials and other articles are to be new and the most
suitable grade for the purpose intended.
Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-1 01100

2.2 TRADE NAMES
Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, reference to any equipment, material,
article, or patented process, by trade name, make, or catalogue number, shall be regarded as
establishing a standard or quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition, and the
Contractor may, at his option, use any equipment, material, article, or process which, in the
judgment of the Engineer, is equal to that named.
2.3 CONTROL OF MATERIAL
2.3.1 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish samples of all materials to be
incorporated in the Works. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the proposed sources
and supplier(s) of materials at the earliest possible date and expedite the inspection and
testing of materials. When sources of supply for previously approved materials do not
produce uniform and satisfactory products, or if the product from any source proves
unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish samples of materials, and relevant
information, from other sources.
2.3.2 LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES
The Engineer shall approve all materials prior to their incorporation into the Works. In the
case of imported materials, the Engineer shall approve materials prior to placing an order for
the supply of the materials.
Except for commercially operated sources, no work shall be performed within a source until
the Engineer approves in writing a plan of operations for the development of the source.
Sources selected by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the following applicable
requirements.
 When the Contractor selects to use materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for
determining that the materials in the source selected will meet the Contract quality
requirements; that an adequate quantity is available; and that the amount and type of
equipment and work required to produce materials will meet the specifications.
 The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring all material sources. The
Contractor shall acquire the necessary rights to take materials from the source and
shall bear all costs related thereto, including those needed for development,
exploration, erosion control, restoration, and hauling.
 Approval for the use of material from the sources selected by the Contractor will be
contingent upon the Contractor furnishing the Engineer with satisfactory evidence of
laboratory test results that indicate acceptable quality material is available and will
be produced from the source. However, the Engineer may, during production,
obtain or require samples for testing to verify the quality of the material and to assure
conformance with the applicable specifications.
If the test results show that the materials do not meet the quality requirements of the Contract,
the Contractor shall not be permitted to incorporate any of the materials into the Works. The
Contractor shall bear all costs associated with disposing of the material and providing
another source.
2.3.3 INSPECTION OF MATERIAL
All materials are subject to inspection, sampling, testing, re-testing, and rejection at any time
prior to acceptance of the Works.
Any work in which untested materials are used without approval will be performed at the
Contractor’s risk. Materials found to be unacceptable and unauthorized shall not be paid for
and shall be removed at the Contractor expense.

2.3.4 CONTRACTOR INSPECTION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an adequate inspection system along with all
personnel, equipment, supplies and facilities necessary to obtain samples, perform tests and
provide inspection of the Works. The Contractor’s inspection system shall be part of his
Quality Assurance Organization in accordance with this Specification, Part I, Section 4:
“Quality Assurance and Site Laboratory”.
2.3.5 MEASURED OR TESTED COMPLIANCE
The Contractor shall provide all necessary production and processing of the work and
Quality Assurance and performance of the work so that all of the work complies with the
Contract requirements.
2.3.6 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
When sampling and testing are required under the Contract, the Engineer may permit such
materials to be incorporated into the work prior to sampling and testing provided they are
accompanied by the Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials fully comply with
the requirements of the Contract.
When a certification is required under the Contract and or Specifications, a Certificate of
Compliance in which the lot is clearly identified shall accompany each lot of such materials
delivered to the work.
Certificates initiated by the manufacturer and, when required, supported by tests performed
by the manufacturer shall accompany commercially manufactured materials. Copies of such
test results shall be furnished to the Engineer.
A Production Certification shall accompany each shipment of material and shall identify the
date and place of manufacture as well as the lot number or other means of cross referencing
to the inspection and testing system. The Contractor shall furnish specific test results on
material from the same lot upon request by the Engineer.
2.4 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Materials shall be stored to ensure that they remain fit for purpose. Stock piled materials
shall be stored in such a way that they are free draining, free from contamination and
properly separated to prevent cross contamination. The Contractor shall ensure that all
materials are available for inspection as required by sub-clause 7.3 of the Conditions of
Contract. Materials which are subsequently found to be defective due to inadequate storage
shall be rejected in accordance with sub-clause 7.5 of the Conditions of Contract.
Stored materials, even though approved before storage, may again be inspected prior to their
incorporation into the Work. Approved portions of the right-of-way may be used for storage
purposes and for the placing of the Contractor’s plant and equipment, but the Contractor at
no cost to the Employer may provide any additional space required therefore. Private
property shall not be used for storage purposes without a written agreement of the owner and
lessee and payment to them, if necessary. All temporary storage areas and plant sites shall be
restored to their original condition by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer
and at no cost to the Employer.
3. CONTRACTOR'S PROGRAM FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall provide a Programme and a supporting report for the execution of the
Works, in accordance with the requirements noted in Sub-clause 8.3 of the Conditions of
Contract and as noted herein.
The Programme shall be prepared using CPM (Critical Path Method) in Microsoft Project or
equivalent software as coordinated with the Engineer. The Programme shall show activity
durations, activity descriptions, early and late start and finish dates, and activity float and
activity dependencies. The Programme shall incorporate a CPM (Critical Path Method) by
which means the Contractor shall be able to identify the single series of activities that
determines the shortest possible length of time for completion of the whole of the Works. All
activities in the Programme shall be tied to one start date (the Commencement Date) and one
end date (issuance of Taking-Over Certificate).
The Contractor’s Programme shall be cost and resource loaded. Cost loading shall indicate
calculated or estimated costs included for each item, to equal the total Contract Price, minus
Provisional Sums.
The detail and number of activities incorporated in the Contractor’s Programme shall be
sufficient to manage the total works and identify restraints, delays and effects on the Works
by dependent activities. All activities shall be organized in a logical work breakdown
structure, indicating work stages and phases, and shall clearly indicate critical path(s) of
each facility and/or segment of the Works. All activity descriptions shall be unique, each
describing discrete elements of work with duration expressed in calendar days. With due
regards to the requirements of Sub-clause 8.3(a) and (b) of the Conditions of Contract the
Contractor’s Programme shall incorporate all activities that will affect the Works from
commencement to completion including, but not limited to:
 the Contractor’s mobilization and demobilization;
 all site investigation activities;
 all surveying and setting out ;
 all key and milestone dates;
 all interface dates between the Contractor, any interfacing contractors and
sub-contractors for the Works;
 all material and Plant Submittals and Shop Drawing preparation and Submittals;
 time for review by the Engineer of Submittals;
 all activities associated with the procurement, purchase, fabrication and shipment of
materials and Plant to be incorporated into the Works;
 all activities associated with the procurement and shipment of all Contractor’s
Equipment, necessary for the execution of the Works, to the Site;
 all construction activities for each phase and section of the Works, including testing
and commissioning and defects and deficiencies work;
 all activities (including required testing) associated with the approval of materials
and equipment to be incorporated in the Works;
 all public and site holidays; and
 such other activities that the Engineer may require to be monitored.
All programme submissions shall include both printed versions of the programme as well as
an electronic copy.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM (QA)

The Contractor shall put in place a comprehensive Quality Assurance system in accordance
with sub-clause 4.9 of the Conditions of Contract. Such QA system shall cover the
Contractor’s entire construction process and shall be managed by the QA engineer included
in the list of key staff. The system shall include the generation and maintenance of registers
for and the storage of all communications, including e-mails. Requirements relating to the

QA system shall also be properly reflected in the Contractor’s programme issued in
accordance with sub-clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract.
In addition the QA system shall include or refer to the activities detailed below for
permanent works items in the Contract.
Drawings
Generation and maintenance of registers and referencing system
Management of current and superseded issues
Control of issue
Storage
Survey
Generation and maintenance of register
Monitoring of checking and correction procedures
Materials approvals
Generation and maintenance of registers
Management of materials approvals process
Programming
Ensure QA procedures are reflected in the programme
Method statements
Generation and maintenance of register
Monitoring of generation and issue (to both Engineer and construction staff)
Materials testing
Generation and maintenance of registers
Management of routine testing and approvals process
Conformance and non-conformance procedures
Management of conformance and acceptance by the Engineer
Management of non-conformance
Management of remedial works proposals and acceptance by the Engineer
Monitoring of remedial works and subsequent acceptance by the Engineer
These activities are expected to be included or referred to in “work” or “inspection” sheets
issued to the Contractor’s supervisory staff on site and to the Engineer attached to the
relevant notices issued by the Contractor.
The QA engineer is expected to ensure that the Contractor’s staff comply with the QA
procedures. The QA engineer is expected to check QA documents prior to submission to the
Engineer for approval. Any such checks shall include conformance / non-conformance
procedures. The Contractor is expected to advise the Engineer if any non-conformance is
recorded. In the case of non-conformance the Contractor shall put forward remedial
measures for the acceptance of the Engineer. No remedial work shall commence until such
acceptance has been given. The Contractor should note that it is his responsibility to check
and confirm the quality of his work prior to requesting the acceptance of the Engineer.
The Engineer will confirm acceptance of the Contractor’s QA documents, if appropriate, at
“hold points” in the construction process beyond which further work cannot proceed without
such acceptance and on satisfactory completion of work items.
The Contractor should note that the Engineer will carry out his own procedures to confirm
the quality of the Works in parallel with the Contractor’s own QA. If the Engineer, during
his own quality assurance procedures, detects a non-conformance not detected or not
reported by the Contractor “a Notice to Correct” shall be issued in accordance with
sub-clause 15.1 of the Conditions of Contract. The affected part of the works will be
suspended until such time as a correction is made.
No payment will be made against work items unless the quality of those items has been
assured by the Contractor’s QA procedures. The Contractor shall include in his monthly
statements documentation demonstrating that each item for which payment has been
requested has complied with the quality requirements of the contract and been accepted as
doing so by the Engineer.
The QA system is considered to be an integral part of the Contractor’s activities and its cost
therefore distributed across all bill items. No separate payment will be made for this activity.
5. PROVISION OF BONDS AND INSURANCE

The Contractor shall provide Insurance in accordance with clauses 18 of the Conditions of
Contract.
The Contractor shall extend the validity of all bonds and insurance as appropriate should the
Works not be completed within the original Time for Completion stated in the Conditions of
Contract.
Payment for the cost of bonds shall not be made separately and shall be considered included
in the cost of mobilization.
The pay items detailed below shall be considered to cover payment in full for the provision
of insurance.
Pay Item Description Unit
01100-01 Provision of Insurance provisional sum
The Contractor shall submit a copy of insurance policies for approval by the Employer for
payment before carrying out the work. The percentage for the Contractor’s overhead charges
and profit shall be fixed at 5% for this work, and is included in the provisional sum amount
shown in the Bill of Quantities.
6. MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

6.1 DESCRIPTION
This section consists of the general provisions for the mobilization and demobilization work
by the Contractor.
6.2 REQUIREMENT
6.2.1 REFERENCES
These requirements shall be applied complementarily, and without detriment, to the
requirements and provisions stated in:
Sub-Clause 4.3 “Contractor’s Representative”,
Sub-Clause 6.9 “Contractor’s Personnel”,
Sub-Clause 8.3 “Program”,
and
Clause 11 “Defects Liability” of the Conditions of Contract.

6.2.2 MOBILIZATION PROGRAM
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his review and Approval, a detailed
Mobilization Program. This Program shall be submitted as an attachment of the “Program to
be submitted” specified in Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Mobilization Program and all other Programs shall be prepared using MS Project or
equivalent software.
The Program shall include a schedule noting the anticipated arrival of all construction
equipment and facilities as well as the arrival of all key personnel of the Contractor and
subcontractors.
Moreover, the mobilization Program shall include a layout plan noting the location, size and
arrangement of all temporary facilities, including security fencing and entrance and exit
gates, sewage and water lines and systems, electrical supply and access and facility roads.
6.2.3 SUPERINTENDENTS AND ASSISTANTS
The Contractor shall mobilize and keep all the key staff as required in the Contract.
The Contractor shall not remove his staff from the site without the express written
permission of the Engineer. Within fourteen (14) days of any such removal, or notice of
intent of removal, the Contractor shall nominate a replacement staff for the Engineer’s
Approval.
6.2.4 LAND FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES, DETOURS, PLANT AND OTHER
USES
The Contractor shall acquire all additional working areas and any additional areas required
for construction purposes and access or other uses.
Before entering the work site, the Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall give separate notices to each owner and occupier or authority having
jurisdiction over the work sites.
Before entering any additional work areas the Contractor shall obtain, and forward to the
Engineer, a copy of the written consent of the owner and occupier or authority having
jurisdiction over the land, and shall state the purposes for which such land is to be used. The
Contractor shall define the extent and period of occupation for which such consent is
granted.
The Contractor shall select, arrange for and, if necessary, pay for the use of sites for
construction purposes, detours, plant and other uses necessary for the execution of the
Works.
Before using any land belonging to the Government or to a private landowner for any
purposes in connection with the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer’s Approval for such use.
If any utility passing through the temporary site is affected by the Works, the Contractor
shall at his own expense provide an appropriate plan for re-alignment or relocation of such
utility in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the utility and the Engineer,
before cutting or removing or relocating the existing utility.
On completion of the Contract, or earlier if so directed by the Engineer, all plant, temporary
facilities and any other encumbrances shall be removed, the site and land use areas shall be
properly cleaned, all damage made good, and reinstated as it was before.
6.2.5 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
All construction plant and equipment provided by the Contractor shall, when brought on to
the Site, be deemed to be exclusively intended for the construction and completion of the

Works and the Contractor shall not remove the same or any part thereof without the approval
of the Engineer.
6.2.6 CONTRACTOR’S SITE OFFICE, STORES AND LIVING QUARTERS
The Contractor shall supply, equip and maintain for the Contract period all his own living
accommodation, site offices, sheds and stores necessary for the execution of the Works, and
shall make his own arrangements, subject to the approval of the Engineer, with the owner of
any land required and, if necessary, pay for its use.
6.2.7 CONTRACTOR’S WORKSHOP AND WAREHOUSE
The Contractor shall have on the Site a suitable workshop, adequately equipped and
provided with utilities, to allow for repairs of the equipment employed to carry out the
Works. He shall also provide a warehouse for the equipment spare parts, mainly for the parts
that frequently fail or are difficult to procure. A chief foreman qualified for mechanical
repairs, with an adequate labour force shall be assigned for management and operation of the
workshop.
6.2.8 SUBSIDIARY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR’S FACILITIES
(a) Design and Drawings
Before constructing Contractor’s facilities, the Contractor shall submit the general
construction design for the approval of the Engineer and the related local authorities. The
Contractor shall submit the detailed drawings for temporary facilities or structures when
requested by the Engineer. Such detailed drawings shall include centerline, profiles,
cross-section profiles, road-surface structure, signs, lighting systems, technical design for
temporary bridge and jetty (if any) and utilization period of these structures, and the method
for clearing and reinstatement of the site after the completion of works prior to handing over
to the owner(s).
(b) Access Roads
The Contractor shall design and construct access and site roads, temporary bridges, and
temporary jetties as required to carry out the Works. The Contractor shall have a sole
responsibility for any damage or problem arising from the temporary facilities provided by
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall acquire all additional working areas and any additional areas required
for construction purposes and access or other uses.
Materials used in the construction of access and temporary roads and bridges shall belong to
the Contractor and may be disposed of as determined by the Contractor on completion of the
Works. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings all temporary roads and bridges shall be
removed from the site on completion of the Works.
Where stated on the drawings, temporary roads or bridges may be required by the Employer
for use as maintenance access routes to the permanent works. In such case the Contractor
shall hand over to the Employer the temporary roads and their associated drainage works,
and temporary bridges in a functional condition and having minimum dimensions and
quality as stated on the drawings.
(c) Electrical Power Supply
The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting for all buildings at Site, to protect the
Works and maintain suitable working conditions. Temporary lighting shall be maintained
until the Employer has accepted the Works.
The Contractor shall provide and install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution
boxes located so that power and lighting are available throughout the construction site. This
includes responsibility for agreeing with the Electric Power Company (EVN) the location of

power receiving point of the EVN substation, and design and installation of transmission
line and necessary items to his substation from EVN’s substation.
Generators with a suitable capacity shall be furnished by the Contractor to cope with the
cases of power supply cut-off.
(d) Sanitary Facilities
The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the Site, as provided herein, for
the needs of all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services on
the Project. Sanitary facilities shall have reasonable capacity, be properly maintained
throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical
extent. If chemically treated type toilets are used, at least one such toilet shall be furnished
for every 20 people. The Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all
personnel at the Site.
(e) Water
All water required for and in connection with the equipment and plant, devices, dust control,
for settling of backfill material or for any other use as may be required for proper completion
of the Works, shall be provided by and at the expense of the Contractor.
In case of shortage of water for use in the construction works, the Contractor shall draw
water from a well or wells dug at the Contractor’s expenses, after Approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide a sufficient supply of bottled drinking water from an acceptable
source to all of the Contractor’s employees, including all necessary devices for keeping the
water in good condition (hot and cold water).
(f) Sewage
All sanitary facilities shall be connected to a suitable sewage system.
(g) Communication System
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and pay all installation and usage
charges for the communication system in his offices at the Site.
(h) Disposal Areas
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements, pay fees, survey and investigate
suitable areas for disposal of debris and material. The Contractor shall cooperate with local
authorities in order to obtain their permission to dispose of debris, unsuitable soil which is
not permitted to remain at the Site. All costs associated with the Contractor’s disposal of
debris and unsuitable soil shall be borne by the Contractor.
(i) Reinstatement of Local Roads which have been used for Construction
Prior to the start of transporting materials, goods and equipment, and construction, the
Contractor shall carry out an inspection witnessed by the Engineer and adequately record
the existing condition of the roads intended to be used as the access routes to the Site,
including bridges located on those roads, During construction, the Contractor shall repair
any damage to the local roads and bridges caused by its operations, and respond to any
complaints by local residents regarding damage to the road caused by its operations. Upon
completion of the works the Contractor shall reinstate the roads to their original condition
including but not limited to reinstatement of pavement, shoulders, side and crossing
drainage, bridges and culverts. Prior to handover of the Works, the Contractor shall carry out
final cleaning of the local roads used for access to remove dirt or debris arising from
construction traffic.

6.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
6.3.1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Mobilization shall not be measured, but shall be paid as a lump sum.
6.3.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Mobilization shall include:
Transport of Construction Plant or any additional equipment or plant required, from the port
of unloading in Vietnam to the sites and their installation;
The supply, installation and maintenance of the Contractor’s vehicles, living quarters,
offices, workshops, stores, communication system, facilities, etc.;
Such other items as are expressly stated in this Specification Section;
The dismantling of the work site by the Contractor, with the removal of all the installations,
constructional plant and equipment, so that the site is restored to the state it was in before the
installations or placing; and
All the works including the costs for all incidental works necessary to comply satisfactorily
with the requirements of this Specification Section.
Payment for mobilization and demobilization shall be made in lump sum by the following
instalments:
 20% (Twenty percent) on completion of the Site offices, and facilities as specified in
clauses 6.2.6, 6.2.7 and 6.2.8 above and upon the acceptance by the Engineer;
 50% (fifty percent) on completion of mobilization in accordance and proportionally
with the Contractor’s Mobilization Program, and upon the acceptance by the
Engineer; and
 30% (thirty percent) in the Final Certificate on completion of all necessary
dismantling and restoration of the Site.
Payment for construction and maintenance of access and temporary roads shall be made in
lump sum by the following instalments:
 50% on completion of provision of access to the whole length of the site from start
point to end point,
 30% shall be equally divided for the operation months and
 20% shall be paid when finishing the demolition and site restoration
Payment for reinstatement and final cleaning of local roads which have been used for
construction, including the repair of damage to the roads during the construction period,
shall be made under a provisional sum. The work of condition survey of the roads and
bridges intended to be used as the access routes to the Site shall not be measured separately
for payment.
01100-02 Mobilization and Demobilization lump sum
01100-03 Construction and Maintenance of access and temporary roads lump sum
01100-04 Reinstatement and final cleaning of local roads which have been
used for construction provisional sum

7. LABORATORY
7.1 REQUIREMENT
The Contractor shall supply, equip and maintain for the duration of the Contract approved
laboratory facilities. These facilities shall include equipment and apparatus, qualified
personnel, means of transportation, furniture, computers and printers, office equipment and
secure supplies of power and water as necessary. The facilities shall be for the use of both the
Contractor and the Engineer as may be necessary. The facilities will be operated by the
Contractor, and in particular under the management of his QA engineer, all subject to the
direct monitoring the Engineer.
The facilities shall be provided with all the equipment, apparatus and materials necessary for
the performance of all the standard tests required by the Specifications. Testing facilities
available on site shall include as a minimum testing of soil, concrete, bentonite support fluid,
and bitumen. However, at the Contractor’s option, the tests detailed below, may be carried
out at an external laboratory approved by the Engineer. In such case the equipment and
apparatus required for these tests need not be provided. Additional tests may be added to this
list strictly subject to the consent of the Engineer.
1. Tests on Portland cement (M85)
2. Tests on Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe (M86)
3. Extraction of Bitumen (T164)
4. Effect of Water on Bituminous Mixtures (T165)
5. Tests on Bridge Bearings
6. Tests on Expansion Joints
7. Tests for Electrical Equipment
8. Tests for Lighting (lamps)
9. Tests on Prestressing cable
Laboratory building, equipment, apparatus, furniture and staff/assistants materials necessary
for all other tests required under the Contract shall be supplied and fixed by the Contractor in
the laboratory. The Contractor shall ensure that records of the maintenance and calibration
of all equipment and apparatus used in tests for the Contract shall be kept whether or not
such equipment and apparatus is in the Contractor’s laboratory or in an external laboratory.
Details of the Contractor’s proposed building, equipment and apparatus, including the
proposed suppliers, the proposed laboratory facilities and staff/assistants shall be submitted
to the Engineer for his approval not later than 30 days after the issue of notice to proceed.
These laboratory facilities shall include a field laboratory provided by the Contractor at the
location agreed with the Engineer in order that the Engineer may monitor the material used
for bituminous pavements and the operation of bituminous mixing plants.
When the Contractor establishes his own site laboratory or rents an outside laboratory, such
laboratory shall be provided in accordance with the regulations by Ministry of Constructions
and the Contractor shall obtain an acceptance from LAS (Laboratory Accreditation System).
All the costs related to the provision of the Laboratory shall not be measured but paid as a
lump sum.

Payment shall include all costs necessary and required for building (or establishing),
operating, maintaining and dismantling the Contractor’s Laboratory, and all the costs for
proper administration, reporting and submittals, materials, equipment, instruments and
devices, sampling, testing, labour, supporting technical staff, any other incidentals.
Payment shall include all costs for furnishing, installing, maintaining, providing
utilities/services, equipment, instruments, or devices, including any other incidental
necessary for the Engineer’s office inside the Laboratory.
Payments shall be made in the following three instalments:
 20% (twenty percent) upon issuance of the Engineer’s consent to the Contractor’s
proposed laboratory (including proposals for testing at external laboratories)
 30% on completion of construction and equipping of the laboratory, and receipt of
LAS acceptance
 50% (fifty percent) over the duration of the Contract Construction Period split in
partial payments in proportion to the Work progress.
01100-06 Provision and Maintenance of Laboratory and Equipment lump sum
8. SETTING OUT THE WORKS

Primary original points, lines and levels of reference are included in the Contract Documents
in accordance with sub-clause 4.7 of the Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall
assume responsibility for the protection and maintenance of these points on taking
possession of the site, until the Employer’s taking over of the Works at which time they shall
be handed over to the Employer. After taking possession of the site the Contractor shall
check the accuracy and condition of all primary survey points and advise the Engineer of any
errors in the given values or damage to the survey points. The Engineer will issue
appropriate instructions should any error or damage be reported by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall set out the Works in relation to the primary points. All other secondary
points, temporary points, stakes and all other markings shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be sufficient for the Contractor to comply with his responsibility for the
correct positioning of the Works. Details of the Contractor’s survey proposals shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his acceptance prior to the start of any of the Works on site. No
work shall start on site until such time as the Engineer has accepted the proposals.
All survey points shall be included in a register. The register shall include a unique reference
for each point and record its value and the date on which it was checked or established. All
survey points shall be checked for accuracy and condition on at least a monthly basis as part
of the Contractor’s Quality Assurance scheme. Any errors or damage found shall be
promptly reported to the Engineer together with the Contractor’s proposals for rectifying
such errors or damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Survey proposals shall be included in all method statements submitted by the Contractor for
each stage or element of the Works. The Contractor should note that method statements will
not be accepted if they include survey points that have not been checked in accordance with
the QA scheme.
9. NOTICE OF OPERATIONS
The Contractor shall give 48 hours notice in writing to the Engineer of his intention to start
any stage, element or part of the Permanent Works. In particular the Contractor’s attention is
directed at sub-clause 7.3 of the Conditions of Contract concerning work to be covered up,
put out of sight or packaged for storage or transport. Such notices shall be supplemental to
any information provided in the Contractor’s programme issued in accordance with
sub-clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract. When issuing such notices the Contractor
should note the requirements to be included in his QA scheme.
In addition to the programme submitted in accordance with sub-clause 8.3 of the Conditions
of Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with notice of his intended detailed
programme of works on a weekly basis. This notice shall be issued on the last day of the
week preceding the week to which the notice applies. The notice shall include steps to be
taken to recover any delays in the work detailed in the notice for the previous week. Where
such delays accumulate to the point where there is a significant effect on the Contractor’s
overall programme submitted in accordance with sub-clause 8.3 of the Conditions of
Contract, the Engineer may consider action under sub-clause 8.6 of the Conditions of
Contract concerning the rate of progress.
10. HEALTH AND SAFETY

10.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN
The Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety plan detailing how he intends to comply
with the requirements of sub-clause 6.7 of the Conditions of Contract concerning his staff
and labour and how he intends to comply with the requirements of sub-clause 4.8 concerning
safety procedures related to work on site. The plan should also make appropriate reference to
the Contractor’s obligations concerning facilities for his staff and labour as required in
sub-clause 6.6 of the Conditions of Contract. The plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for
his consent not later than 30 days after the date of commencement or 7 days prior to the start
of significant work, including temporary works, on site, whichever is sooner. The plan shall
include but not be limited to the following.
a) Safety control staff organizational structure, which should identify the personnel
to be engaged solely for safety assurance (including the Contractor’s Safety
Officer who will be responsible for all safety on the Site), the responsibilities of
the participants and the subdivision of the project safety assurance tasks into
elements which can be effectively controlled, technically and managerially
b) Criteria for appointment of principal staff
c) Proposed interaction and communication procedures between the Contractor’s
construction personnel and safety assurance staff, including proposals for radio
communication facilities. In particular, the establishment of a regular
communication and reporting system
d) An undertaking signed by the managing director of the Contractor to the effect
that the Contractor will ensure that safety and industrial health are given the
highest priority in all aspects of the Works and in discharging his contractual
obligations
e) The powers vested in the Safety Staff which would enable them to take urgent
and appropriate and direct action to make safe the Site and prevent unsafe
working practices, undue disruption to the environment, correct improper or
inadequate traffic control measures or other infringements of the Safety Plan or
statutory regulations;
f) The means by which Safety and industrial health matters and requirements will
be communicated to Subcontractors of all tiers and their due compliance with
the Safety Plan and all relevant statutory regulations is ensured;
g) Method by which the Safety Plan procedures and practices proposed by
subcontractors will be reviewed for compliance with the Site Safety Plan and
statutory regulations;

h) The safety equipment, rescue apparatus and protective clothing which will be
required for the Works, including the quantity, sourcing, standards of
manufacture, storage provisions and means of ensuring proper utilization by all
workmen and staff employed directly or indirectly by the Contractor and repair
to or replacement of damaged equipment. Such equipment shall include, but not
be limited to, goggles and other eye protectors, hearing protectors, safety
harnesses, safety equipment for working at heights, underground and in the
confined spaces, rescue equipment, fire extinguishers, first aid equipment,
lanyards, hard hats and, where appropriate, associated shock absorbers, chest
harnesses;
i) The means by which safety equipment, scaffolding, guardrails, working
platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access, lifting, lighting, signing,
and guarding equipment shall be inspected, tested and maintained and the
standards below which such items will be removed from the Site and replaced
j) The means by which all hazards associated with working on, adjacent to and
above water shall be accommodated including but not limited to details of
proposed rescue boats, safety nets, warning signs, warning and navigation lights,
search procedures, life saving equipment, watching for persons entering the
water and any other appropriate equipment or procedure.
k) Provision of first aid training to selected staff
l) Provision for access to emergency facilities close to the site
m) Provision for minor medical attention on site
n) Means of recording, statistical measurement, and reporting of health and safety
incidents. Means by which the site safety and industrial health performance of
the Contractor, Subcontractors, and lower tier subcontractors can be compared
with local and international norms
o) Provision of safety training to supervisory staff and staff and labour in general (it
is recommended that all staff and labour be given at least one hour of health and
safety instruction before or soon after their employment on site. Particular
instruction should be given concerning working at height and near to heavy
equipment).
p) Provision of health and safety equipment to staff, labour and visitors to site
q) Provision of emergency equipment in all Contractor’s facilities
r) Details of emergency procedures in the case of a major event including details of
safety drills to be conducted periodically
s) a hazardous materials statement
t) An assessment of industrial health risks likely to be associated with the Works
and proposals for minimisation of the risks associated with such hazards.
u) Requirements to be included in traffic management plans to ensure the
protection of the public
v) Requirements to be included in working methods to ensure the proper control of
contractor’s vehicles travelling within the site
w) Requirements for site security to prevent unauthorised access to the site by the
public. Requirements for barricades, sign posts and illumination (if necessary)
of all excavations, plant or items of potential danger to the public
x) Requirements for provision of sufficient watchmen to ensure the safety of the
public at all times

y) Details of a suitable HIV prevention programme for the Contractor’s staff and
labour
z) Details of staff and labour welfare facilities including those required by
sub-classes 6.13 and 6.14 of the Particular conditions of the contract.
All such provisions shall be made in accordance with current local regulations applicable to
the health and safety of staff and labour and the public. The Contractor should note that
details of all health and safety incidents are to be included in his monthly report.
10.2 SAFETY OFFICER
The appointment of Safety Officer shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall not undertake any works on the Site until the Safety Officer has
commenced duties on Site unless specifically agreed in writing by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not remove the Safety Officer from the Site without the express written
permission of the Engineer. Within fourteen (14) days of any such removal or notice of
intent of removal, the Contractor shall nominate a replacement Safety Officer for the
Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall provide the Safety Officer with supporting staff in accordance with the
staffing levels set out in the Safety Plan. The supporting staff shall include at least one (1)
Deputy Safety Officer whose appointment shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
Deputy Safety Officer shall be capable of assuming the duties and functions of the Safety
Officer as contained in the Site Safety Plan whenever necessary.
The Contractor shall empower the Safety Officer and his staff to instruct employees of the
Contractor or of its Subcontractors of any tiers to cease operations and take urgent and
appropriate action to make safe the Site and prevent unsafe working practices or other
infringements of the Safety Plan or the statutory regulations.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Safety Officer maintains a daily site diary, such diary
comprehensively recording all relevant matters concerning site safety, inspections and
audits, related incidents and the like. The site diary shall be available at all times for
inspection by the Engineer.
Safety Officers Lines of Communication: The Contractor’s Staff Organization Plan shall
show direct lines of communication and reporting between the Safety Officer and the
Contractor’s Project Manager and between the Safety Officer and the Contractor’s Director
responsible for the Contract. The Contractor shall instruct and require the Project Manager
and the Director responsible to be directly accountable in all matters concerning site safety
and proper traffic control.
10.3 SAFETY REPORTS
The Contractor shall submit regular site safety reports to the Engineer as a requirement of
the Safety Plan. A summary report shall be submitted as part of the Monthly Progress
Report. Prior to submission, the Contractor’s Project Manager shall endorse the Report.
Site safety reports shall comprehensively address all relevant aspects of site safety and
industrial health regulations and, in particular, report on all site safety audits undertaken
during the period covered by the report.
10.4 BREACHES OF SITE SAFETY PLAN
Any breaches of the Safety Plan or the statutory regulations or disregard for the safety of any
persons may be the reason for the Engineer or Employer to exercise his authority to require
the Contractor’s employee, Subcontractor’s employee and or the Contractor’s Project
Manager’s removal from the Site.

10.5 SUB-CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PLAN
The Contractor shall provide his Subcontractors with copies of the Safety Plan and shall
incorporate into all sub-contract documentation provisions to ensure the compliance with
such plan at all tiers of the sub-contracting.
The Contractor shall, unless the Engineer’s approval in writing is given, require all
subcontractors to appoint a safety representative who shall be available on the Site
throughout the operational period of the respective sub-contract. In the event of the
Engineer’s approval being given, the Safety Officer or safety staff, without prejudice to their
other duties and responsibilities, shall ensure that employees of subcontractors of all tiers are
conversant with appropriate parts of the Safety Plan and the statutory regulations.
10.6 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEETINGS
 Weekly/Daily Safety and Environmental Protection Meetings
The Contractor’s Safety Officer shall, in cooperation with Environmental Specialist,
convene weekly and/or daily safety and environmental protection meetings in accordance
with the Safety Plan and shall require attendance by the safety officer, safety representatives
of Subcontractors and their low-tier of subcontractors, Contractor’s site engineers,
supervisors and inspectors.
 Monthly Safety and Environmental Protection Meetings and Safety Patrol
The Contractor’s Project Manager shall convene the Monthly Safety and Environmental
Protection Meeting together with all Work Forces on the Site in which the Safety Officer
and/or the Contractor’s Project Manager shall address the safety, security and environmental
protection. All Monthly Safety and Environmental Protection Meetings shall be notified in
advance to the Engineer who shall attend the said Meeting.
After the Monthly Meeting, the Contractor’s Project Manager, Safety Officer, the Engineer
and Engineer’s key personnel shall conduct Safety Patrol all around the Site in order to
survey the current conditions of safety and environmental protection. The Engineer shall
have authority to suspend the Works or part of the Works should he find non-conformity
with Safety Plan.
The records of all Monthly Safety and Environmental Protection Meetings and Safety Patrol
shall be taken and sent to the Engineer within seven (7) days of the meeting.
 Safety Talks with Newly Employed Work Forces
When the Contractor, Subcontractors and their lower-tier subcontractors employ new Work
Forces, the Contractor’s Safety Officer or safety staff shall conduct “safety and
environmental talks” with them occasionally before new employees start their work on the
Site so as to maintain the highest standard of the safety and environment protection.
10.7 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING
The Contractor shall ensure that safety equipment and protective clothing as described in the
Safety Plan are available on Site at all times and that measures for the effective enforcement
of proper utilization and necessary replacement of such equipment and clothing are
incorporated into the Site Safety Plan.
10.8 SAFETY INSPECTIONS
The Contractor shall, in addition to the Monthly Safety Patrol as mentioned in 6.10 (b) above,
regularly inspect, test and maintain all safety equipment, scaffolding, guardrails, working
platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access, lifting, lighting, signing and guarding
equipment. Lights and signs shall be kept clear of obstructions and legible to read.
Equipment, which is damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not in working order, shall be
repaired or replaced immediately.

10.9 PLANT & EQUIPMENT
All Construction Plant and equipment used on or around the Site shall be fitted with
appropriate safety devices. These shall include but not be limited to:
 effective safety catches for crane hooks and other lifting devices,
 Functioning automatic warning devices and, where applicable, an up-to-date test
certificate, for cranes and hoists.
10.10 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
Only suitably qualified personnel with valid licenses of each heavy equipment operation
issued by the relevant authority shall operate all construction plant and equipment used on or
around the Site. The Contractor shall keep on the Site the records of detailed license for
heavy equipment for each operator for the inspection by the Engineer.
10.11 NOTIFICATION OF ACCIDENTS
Within six (6) hours of the occurrence of any accident, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of any accidents occurred whether on-site or off-site in which the Contractor, his
personnel or Construction plant, or those of his Subcontractors and their low-tier
subcontractors are directly or indirectly involved and which result in any injuries to any
persons. Such initial notification may be verbal and shall be followed by a written
comprehensive report within 24 hours of the accident. In case of fatality and serious
accident, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer by the quickest available
means.
10.12 PAYMENT
All requirements associated with the Safety, Environmental Protection and Sanitation at Site,
the Safety Officer and safety staff of the Contractor in accordance with the requirements
described in these Specification provisions shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of
the Contractor under the Contract and shall be deemed to be included in the relevant unit
rates and prices of Bid Price Schedule.
No additional or separate payment shall be made in this regard and no claims will be
permitted in connection with any such cost or costs.
11. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

The Contractor shall comply with the Decision No 04/2006/QD-BGTVT dated 9/01/2006
“Regulations on traffic safety during construction within the area for roadworks”, Decision
No 2525/2003/QD-BGTVT dated 28/08/2003 “Regulations for construction on roads in
operation” and Law On Inland Waterway Navigation Ref No. 23/2004/QH11 issued by The
National Assembly dated June 15, 2004 and the relevant guidelines under this law.
11.1 PART 1
The Contractor shall submit a Traffic Management Plan detailing how he intends to comply
with the requirements the Conditions of Contract, applicable local laws and regulations, and
the requirements of the local authorities and police concerning the management of traffic
affected by the Works. The plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his consent not later
than 30 days after the date of commencement or 7 days prior to the start of significant work,
including temporary works, on site, whichever is sooner. It is expected that the initial plan
will be supplemented by specific plans for particular parts of the Works at appropriate times
during the construction.
The Contractor’s traffic management plans shall ensure that necessary care is taken at all
times during the execution of the Works to ensure the convenience and safety of the
travelling public on any public highway, footway or waterway that may be affected by the
Works and of residents along or adjacent to the Works on any public highway, footway or
waterway that may be affected by the Works. Such roads, footways and waterways shall
include those directly affect by the Construction of the Works and those used by the
Contractor for access to and from the site and the supply or removal of materials to and from
the site.
Public roads, footways and waterways shall be kept open for the duration of the Contract or
until such time as they are diverted onto completed parts of the Works. Where necessary,
traffic plans shall include phases to maintain traffic flows by the provision of diversions or
detours for roads, footways and waterways that require re-routing as a consequence of the
works. However the plans shall ensure that the existing number of traffic lanes and the same
traffic capacity are maintained at all times during the Works.
Notwithstanding the above, and subject to the prior agreement of the local authorities and the
police, the Engineer may give his consent to reductions in traffic capacity. Any such consent
will be subject to the Contractor demonstrating a specific need for the reduction and that the
reduction will not cause excessive delay to traffic. In order to avoid excessive delay it is
anticipated that the period when the reduction in capacity may be applied will be limited to
off peak traffic periods and that the reduction in capacity will be removed during peak
periods for the traffic movement under consideration.
Traffic plans shall include where necessary and in accordance with local traffic regulations
suitable traffic signs, lights, flares, barricades, cones, traffic lights and temporary traffic
ramps and other necessary facilities. Where required the Contractor shall station trained,
competent flag-men whose sole duties shall consist of directing the movement of traffic
through or around the Works. Any street lighting affected by the works shall be relocated as
necessary to maintain the same standard of lighting during the course of the works until new
lighting facilities are brought into operation. The Contractor shall provide all plant labour
and materials necessary to execute his traffic management plans on site and to maintain all
traffic management systems in a clean sound condition.
The Contractor shall ensure the safety of vessels and boats passing through or adjacent to the
Site during the construction of the Works. The safety measures for waterborne traffic
maintenance includes the installation of buoys, signboards, signal lights and other auxiliary
devices, aiming to direct the navigation of vessels operating on inland waterways; and the
system of inland waterway signs and warning system including but not limited to:
 Channel signs, which indicate the channel limits or the directions for ships to
proceed;
 Dangerous position signs, which indicate the places where exist obstructions or
other dangerous positions on channels.
 Notice sign, which display ban notices, restriction notices or instructions on
circumstances related to channels.
Where required by the maritime safety agency, the Contractor shall provide safety boats
stationed at the worksite.
Payment for traffic management in part 1 of this section will be made as follows:
Construction of diversion / detour roads and maintenance and protection of road traffic for
footpaths and minor roads shall not be measured and paid separately.
Construction of diversion / detour roads and maintenance and protection of road traffic for
National Roads, or Provincial Roads shall be paid under a provisional sum. The unit rates to
be applied for the works carried out under the provisional sum shall be the unit rates for
relevant items in the priced bill of quantities. Where a suitable rate, in the sole opinion of the
Engineer, does not exist, the work shall be measured and paid using Dayworks rates.
By way of clarification, it is noted that payment under these pay items includes the cost of
construction of detour and diversion roads for use by the public. In contrast, the pay item for
Construction and Maintenance of access and temporary roads (under Mobilization) covers
the cost of roads for use by the Contractor.
Maintenance and protection of waterway traffic shall be measured and paid under a
provisional sum. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the regulating
authority to agree the scope of works required, obtaining quotations for the work,
management and coordination of the work, and administration of the subcontractor carrying
out the work.
01100-07 Construction of diversion / detour roads and maintenance and
protection of road traffic provisional sum
01100-08 Maintenance and protection of waterway traffic provisional sum
11.2 PART 2
The Contractor shall also provide a plan for the management of traffic within the site to
ensure that the site remains a safe working environment. In particular the Contractor shall
ensure that all entry and exit points at public roads have a positive traffic control provided
either by flagmen, a traffic light system or a removable barrier operated by a gate man.
Where any large or extraordinary loads are to be transported to the site the Contractor shall
provide a specific traffic management plan for each load. The Contractor shall in particular
comply with the requirements of sub-clause 4.16 of the Conditions of Contract and shall be
responsible for carrying out any necessary investigations, obtaining of approvals, licences,
escorts, and any other necessary facilities in order to enable extraordinary traffic to be
transported on public roads or waterways to the site and within the site.
No separate payment will be made for the work in part 2 of this section. The Contractor’s
costs will be assumed to be distributed as necessary across all rates in the Bills of Quantities.
12. LOCATION AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

Before commencing construction work the Contractor shall undertake a survey to confirm
the detailed location of all utilities affected by the Works including the trial pits to confirm
the actual locations. The detailed locations shall be recorded in plan form and a copy
provided to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the temporary protection
and support of the utilities so located for the duration of the contract. Appropriate markings,
barriers and warnings shall be erected to ensure the utilities are not damaged during the
Construction of the Works.
Particular attention should be given to overhead services such as high tension cables.
Barriers and warning signs shall be erected to ensure such services are not damaged by tall
vehicles such as cranes or the raised bodies of dump trucks and to ensure the health and
safety of personnel on the site.
Payment for the cost of location and protection of utilities shall not be made separately and
shall be considered included in the cost of mobilization.
13. DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with the intent expressed in the
drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any error
or omission in the drawings or specifications or any discrepancy between the drawings and
specifications. The Engineer will provide a clarification concerning any error, omission or
discrepancy so notified bearing in mind the requirements of sub-clause 1.5 of the Conditions
of Contract.
Dimensions shall not be scaled from the drawings. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer
when dimensions are not given or cannot be computed. In such case the Engineer shall
determine appropriate dimensions in consultation with the Contractor.
Drawings prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for his approval shall be
of A3 size and conform to the format of the contract drawings. They shall be produced using
appropriate software compatible with the software used to produce the Contract Drawings.
Drawings prepared by the Contractor are assumed to include the “As built” drawings.
Drawings shall be submitted in the numbers required by the Conditions of Contract. In
addition a soft copy of all drawings submitted shall also be provided.
Working drawings shall be submitted with design calculations and supporting data in
sufficient detail to permit a structural review of the proposed design of temporary works.
When concrete is involved, such data shall include the sequence and rate of placement.
Payment shall be made as a lump sum covering all costs of survey and preparation of
working and as-built drawings. Survey includes but is not limited to topographic and
geological survey required for preparation of working drawings, and for the design and
construction of access, temporary, detour and diversion roads, and the reinstatement of local
roads which have been used for construction. As built records shall be prepared in
accordance with the formats and requirements of 22TCN 273-01 Specification for Road
Design.
01100-11 Survey and Design of Construction Drawings lump sum
Payment will be made in instalments as follows: 30% of payment after completing survey
and receiving approval of the Engineer, 60% of payment in the period of implementation (6
months), 10% of payment after approval of the as-built drawings.
14. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS

The Contractor shall, within the mobilization period indicated in his programme, erect
project information signs made of rigid steel frame and plate with concrete foundation at
beginning and end point of the this package (detailed locations will be confirmed later). The
height and width of project information sign shall be 4x2.5m, the height of sign post is 5.9m
and the contractor shall submit a drawing which shows clearly the details of project
information inclusive of location map and the proposed features of the expressway for
approval by the Engineer before starting the construction. Payment shall be made against the
item detailed below.
01100-12 Project Information Signs each
15. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall obtain copies of all standards referred to in the Specification.
Reference to particular standards within this specification shall refer to the latest revision of
the particular standard 28 days prior to the submission of tenders, unless stated otherwise.
Should the Contractor propose the use of an alternative standard he shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that the alternative specification is equivalent or superior to the original standard.
An element of the Works specified in accordance with a particular international standard
may be substituted by an element specified in accordance with an alternative international
standard. Where an element of the Works is specified in accordance with Vietnamese
Standards the element of the Works may be substituted by an element meeting
internationally accepted standards which ensure quality equivalent to or superior to the
standard specified.
However approval of alternative standards or alternative elements of the Works shall remain
the sole discretion of the Engineer and Employer. Responsibility for demonstrating the
equivalence of proposed alternatives shall remain entirely with the Contractor. He shall
ensure that all such proposals are made in a timely manner, making due allowance for the
Engineer’s and Employer’s approvals procedures, and shall not cause any delay to the
construction of the Works. The Contractor shall also ensure that any such proposals are
properly co-ordinated with the provision of laboratory facilities and the testing of the Works.
16. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING DRAINAGE

The Contractor shall maintain existing drainage that enters or crosses the site or affects the
construction of the Works. Such maintenance shall include the clearing and cleaning of all
such existing drainage upstream and downstream up to an extent of 100 m beyond the limits
of the Site.
No payment shall be made for the maintenance of existing drainage. However, should any
such drainage, in the opinion of the Engineer, require repair, remedial or reconstruction
work the Engineer will instruct the extent of such work and issue an appropriate variation
order, unless such work is required due to damage caused by the Contractor.
17. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO

Sub-clause 4.21 of the Conditions of Contract requires the Contractor to include in his
monthly report photographs showing the status of manufacture and of progress on the site.
Photographs shall be good quality digital photographs. Photographs shall be taken by a
competent photographer and shall be properly referenced. The referencing shall include the
date on which the photograph was taken, the subject of the photograph and where necessary
the stationing and direction from which it was taken. A portion of the photographs taken
each month should be taken from the same position to record the sequential progress of the
works. Photographs should be taken to record specific or significant events, conditions or
features that occur on site. Photographs should also be taken to indicate the condition of
roads or property which may be affected by both the Permanent Works and the Contractor’s
temporary works prior to the start of work on site. A selection of the photographs taken
during the month shall be included in the Contractor’s monthly report. The Contractor shall
provide a copy of all photographs taken in both print and soft copies.
The Contractor shall supplement the photographs taken by compiling a filmed record of the
works at six monthly intervals. The film shall be provided on a video CD and shall be at least
30 minutes playing time. The film shall include significant activities which took place
during the period. Where a narration is included two versions of the film shall be provided:
one in English and one in Vietnamese. On completion of the Works the Contractor shall
provide a compilation film of not less than 60 minutes playing time which shall include the
major activities that took place during construction.
All photographs and films shall be treated as details which are to be kept confidential in
accordance with sub-clause 1.12 of the Particular Conditions of Contract.
No separate payment will be made for this work. The Contractor’s costs will be assumed to
be distributed as necessary across all rates in the Bills of Quantities.
18. CONTRACTOR’S SUBMISSIONS

Where required in the Contract Documents to make a submission the Contractor shall make
such submissions within the time limits given. If no time limit is given the Contractor shall
make timely submissions well before any work associated with the submission is
programmed to start on site. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for the Engineer to
review and comment on the submission. The Contactor shall allow sufficient time for any
re-testing, additional trials, further design and drawing or other work that may be necessary
and for any re-submission that may result from the Engineer’s comments. The Contractor
shall remain responsible for the effect of late submissions on the programming of the Works.

19. PROJECT MEETINGS
19.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The pre-construction conference, to be held at a mutually agreed time and place, will take
place after conclusion of the Contract Agreement, including signatures thereon, and delivery
of securities and insurance, and prior to the commencement of work.
The purpose of this conference is to designate the responsible personnel and establish a
working relationship between the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor, the utility
firms, and any other related governmental agencies.
The conference shall be attended by the following:
 Employer
 Engineer’s Representatives
 Contractor’s Project Manager, Deputy Project Manager
 Representatives from each partners consisting of Joint Venture (in case the
Contractor is Joint Venture)
 Contractor’s Project Engineers
 Contractor’s Quality Control Manager
 Contractor’s Safety Officer and the Environmental Specialist
 Governmental representatives, as appropriate
 Others, as requested by the Employer, the Engineer, or the Contractor
Unless previously submitted to the Engineer, the Contractor shall bring to the conference the
following:
 Tentative construction progress schedule
 Tentative design schedule required in the Contract Documents
 Tentative schedule of values for progress payment purposes
 Tentative submittal schedule of shop drawings and other submittals
The Engineer will inform the agenda in advance to the conference, preside at the conference,
and arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance.
19.1.1 PROGRESS MEETING
The progress meeting between the Engineer and the Contractor shall be held at intervals as
required by the Engineer, but not exceeding one month.
a) The Engineer shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings either monthly,
weekly or at any other times as required by the Employer, the Engineer or
proposed by the Contractor, or as required by the progress of the Works.
b) The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Works,
maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve
problems. The Engineer will preside at the meetings and take care of keeping
and distributing the respective minutes.
c) The Contractor’s Project Manager, Quality Assurance Manager, Safety Officer,
Programming Manager, and other key personnel as required by the Engineer,
or as necessary for presentation of relevant information and data shall attend
the progress meetings.
d) The Contractor shall give to the Engineer at the meeting the details of his
progress to date and next coming schedule in relation to the Programme.
e) All the Contractor's unit prices shall include any and all costs associated with the
attendance by the Contractor's personnel at the meetings in accordance with
requirements indicated herein or as may otherwise be required by the
Employer or the Engineer during the execution of the Works.
No additional payment will be made in this regard and no claims will be permitted in
connection with any such cost or costs.
20. GRAVES
Any graves found during earthwork operations shall be reported to the Engineer for
appropriate Instructions.
21. MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING

21.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, before issuance of the final Taking-Over
Certificate, a maintenance manual in English language with Vietnamese translation covering
all the proprietary products and other items as selected by the Engineer together with the
as-built drawings. The submission shall be two (2) printed copies in hard covers plus two (2)
CD copies. The draft of the manual shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer at
least fifty six (56) days in advance to the final submission.
The Maintenance Manual shall comprehensively cover all aspects of the Contractor’s
supplied equipment and systems. Maintenance manuals shall be prepared by system for
each facility of the Works and will show schematically each system, its parts and fully
describe the maintenance and operation requirements and procedures for the system and all
equipment within the system. The manuals shall identify all parts, equipment and
accessories of each system, their location(s) as well as all wiring diagrams, circuits,
equipment layouts, terminal and cable listings.
For all equipment of each system the maintenance manuals shall include:
a) a complete spare parts listing with manufacturers’ part identification numbers,
b) approximate cost of each spare part (at time of manual preparation),
c) manufacturers’ recommended 3 and 5 year spare parts inventory lists, and
d) contact information (telephone, fax and address) and delivery times for ordering
spare parts and replacement parts and replacement equipment,
e) For all equipment of all systems, the maintenance manuals shall fully describe
and detail requirements, procedures and servicing intervals for planned
preventive maintenance and provide sufficient information on all equipment
principles and practices to enable first line fault diagnosis and rectification by
technical staff.
f) All special equipment necessary for the maintenance of all systems and all
system equipment shall be noted in the manuals, as well as necessary fuels and
lubricants.
g) Procedures for the maintenance of all systems and all equipment of each system,
including normal operation, start-up and shutdown as well as emergency
start-up and shut-down, shall be included in the manuals.
21.1.1 CONTENTS OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The maintenance manual shall contain but not limited to the following:

 Operating and maintenance instructions or manuals from suppliers or
manufacturers attached to any item of mechanical and electrical equipment or
appliances handed over to the Employer under the Contract,
 Schedule and method of inspection and monitoring for major components of the
Permanent Works,
 Schedule and method of routine and periodic maintenance for the major
components of the Permanent Works,
 Specifications for materials and work methods for routine and periodic
maintenance and repairs for possible accidental damages, as well as
 As-built drawings.
21.1.2 MANUAL MAINTENANCE TRAINING
The Contractor shall instruct designated maintenance personnel, in the operation,
maintenance and adjustment requirements and procedures of all systems and all equipment
to their complete understanding for the operation and maintenance on a continuing basis.
O&M training shall include “hands on” instruction and demonstration of systems and
system equipment as well as classroom instruction.
The Contractor’s maintenance manuals shall be used as a basis for its maintenance training.
Prior to the completion of the Works or any section of the Works, the Contractor shall meet
with the Engineer to review and establish detailed procedures and requirements for its
maintenance training.
21.1.3 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION
Issuance of a Certification of Completion for the Works or any part of the Works shall not be
made until the Operations and Maintenance Manuals and O&M training has been completed
and received the approval of the Engineer.

SECTION 01200 - RELOCATION OF UTILITIES
1. DESCRIPTION
This specification section describes the work required for the relocation of utilities affected
by construction of the Permanent Works to be carried out by the Contractor. The relocation
work is to be carried out under the responsibility of the Contractor, to be reimbursed against
provisional sums. The Employer has arranged the relocation of electrical power, telephone
and communication lines, and gas pipelines. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
relocation of fresh water, sewerage / waste water, and any remaining utilities of whatever
nature which have not already been relocated by the Employer’s operations.
2. THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings show the location of above ground and below ground utilities as surveyed
during the detailed design. Where agreement has already been reached with the relevant
utility company regarding the design of a relocation, removal, or re-routing of a utility, the
details of the agreed relocation are shown on the Drawings. In some locations, provision has
been made on the Drawings for ducts to permit passage of utilities beneath the expressway,
however indication of these ducts on the drawings does not indicate approval by the relevant
utility for such a relocation.
3. DUTIES OF EACH PARTY

3.1 THE CONTRACTOR
Duties of the contractor are the following, for each type of utility:
a) survey of utilities, to confirm location, nature, and capacity of each utility, of
existing fences, irrigation ditches and canals, drainage ditches and canals, buried,
exposed or overhead utilities within the Site. Such utilities shall include power
cables and wires, telephone cables, gas, water or drainage pipes, manholes and
all other like structures and systems. From the survey the Contractor shall draw
up plans showing the exact locations of all fences, irrigation and drainage
ditches, culverts and canals and utilities and submit them to the Engineer.
b) design of the relocation, preparation of a construction plan and schedule, and
obtaining agreement of the utility owner
c) cost estimate for the relocation
d) identifying potential contractors to implement the relocation and confirmation
of their qualification to undertake the relocation work
e) preparation of documentation for procurement of the relocation, and obtaining
quotations for the relocation
f) assist the Employer in negotiation of a price for the relocation
g) discussion and agreement with the Employer to determine the selected utility
relocation contractor
h) contract administration and site supervision of the work of the utility relocation
i) management of the schedule for the entire utility relocation work to ensure
completion of the Works within the Time for Completion.
j) handover of the relocated utility to the utility owner (including receiving the
acceptance of the utility owner)
If, during the course of the Contract, any utilities are uncovered, which were not recorded by
the survey noted above, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, whether direct,
indirect, incidental or consequential for any damage or hindrance arising from his failure for
whatever reason, to discover and record such utility or utilities.
The Contractor’s programme submitted under Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract shall
include completion of the entire work of utility relocation within 175 days of the
Commencement Date.
The above tasks are the responsibility of the Contractor, but should be carried out in
coordination with the relevant utility owners. If permitted by the authority owning, or
responsible for, the fences, ditches, canals or utilities, the Contractor may remove, divert or
protect same to the approval of the said authority and of the Engineer.
The work of design and cost estimation of the relocation may be carried out either by the
Contractor, or by a specialist company, or by the utility owner. The relocation design must
be approved by the utility owner.
The cost estimate is subject to the approval of the Employer.
The Contractor shall not, in any way whatsoever, interfere with any fence, ditch, canal or
utility other than those to be removed, replaced, diverted or renovated under the Contract.
Upon completion of relocation of a utility, the Contractor shall continue to protect the utility
from damage as required under this Specification.
3.2 DUTIES OF THE EMPLOYER
Duties of the Employer are the following:
a) to provide introduction letters or official letters as required for the Contractor to
undertake its duties for utility relocation
b) to promptly review and agree or comment on cost estimates
c) to promptly review and approve or reject the Contractor’s written proposal and
supporting data of a list of potential contractors
d) to promptly negotiate and agree with the utility owner the share of cost to be
borne by the Employer, and the proportion to be borne by the utility owner in
case of betterment, or where required in accordance with Vietnamese
regulations.
e) the Employer shall delegate in writing relevant authority to the Contractor to
manage and administer the utility relocation contracts once signed
f) reimburse expenditure by the Contractor for design and implementation of
utility relocations
g) pay the Contractor for overhead and profit at the contracted rate
3.3 NATURE OF SUBCONTRACTS
If the utility company determines that the work of design or implementation of the utility
relocation can only be undertaken by their organisation, that utility company shall become a
Nominated Subcontractor under the Contract.
4. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made under a provisional sum. This sum shall reimburse the costs of the
work of design and implementation of each utility relocation, which will likely be
undertaken in a number of separate contracts, and may be divided into components for
design and for implementation.
01200-01 Relocation of Utilities provisional sum

SECTION 01300 - ENVIRONMENTAL OBLIGATIONS
1. GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works
covered by this Specification Section:
 QCVN 09-08 Water quality - Ground water quality standard
 QCVN 26-10 Acoustics - Noise in public and residential areas -
Maximum permitted noise level.
 QCVN 27-12 Vibration and shock - Vibration causing by vehicles -
permitted maximum level in public and residential
areas
 QCVN 03-08 Soil quality standards - Maximum allowable
concentration of heavy metal in soil.
 QCVN 02-09/BYT Domestic supply water − Quality requirements
 QCVN 05-09 Air quality - Ambient air quality standards
 QCVN 06-09 Air quality - Maximum allowable concentration of
hazardous substances in ambient air
 QCVN 40-11 Industrial waste water - Discharge standards
In addition , when working with hazardous chemicals, the Contractor shall comply with
manufacturers recommendations regarding transport, storage, handling, and disposal of each
product.
1.2 COMPLIANCE
The Contractor shall strictly comply with Vietnamese Laws and Standards regarding the
environment on all works associated with the Contract.
The Contractor shall comply with the donor’s safeguard policies by undertaking all
environmental and social requirements set out in the Contract Provisions.
A draft Environmental Management Plan forms part of the Contract. The Contractor shall
take ownership of this document and develop it by identifying particular environmental risks
arising from the Works, the mitigation measures to be applied, and monitoring to be carried
out. The plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his consent not later than 30 days after
the date of commencement or 7 days prior to the start of significant work, including
temporary works, on site, whichever is sooner.
1.3 ORGANIZATION
The Contractor shall appoint an Environmental Officer with environmental/social
qualifications who shall remain in place for the duration of the Contract Period and shall be
responsible for ensuring implementation of all of the Contractor’s responsibilities regarding
environmental issues. The Environmental Supervision Officer shall report directly to the
Contractor’s project manager
2. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
The environmental monitoring program shall commence promptly after commencement in
order to obtain baseline data prior to the start of construction activities, and shall continue
throughout the duration of the construction works. The environmental monitoring shall also
make reference to baseline data to be provided by the Engineer which was obtained during
the design phase of the project.
The Contractor shall undertake a condition survey for all areas and locations likely to be
affected by the construction of the Works, including but not limited to the Site and areas
adjacent to the site, access routes to and from the site and the Contractor’s off site working
areas, offices, accommodation, workshops and quarries. The condition survey shall be
carried out before the commencement of construction work.
The Contractor shall put in place monitoring and reporting procedures to measure the effect
of the construction work on the areas included in the condition survey and to ensure early
detection of conditions that necessitate particular mitigation measures. Monitoring will be
conducted by properly equipped and qualified personnel. The Contractor shall provide
specific descriptions and technical details of monitoring measures, including the parameters
to be measured, methods to be used, sampling locations, frequency of measurements,
detection limits (where appropriate), and definitions of thresholds that will signal the need
for corrective actions or mitigating measures. The Contractor shall also ensure that sound
engineering practices are followed and encourage on–the–job behaviour conducive to
environmental protection.
All monitoring shall be co-ordinated with provincial and local officials, community groups,
government departments, etc. concerned with environmental issues and shall include
obtaining the necessary clearances from the regulatory authorities. The Contractor shall:
 report monitoring results directly to the Construction Supervision Consultant.
 furnish information on the progress and results of any mitigation measures.
 undertake additional monitoring when requested.
 immediately report any potential environmental issues that could hinder the progress
of the Works.
3. MITIGATION MEASURES
The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing and managing mitigation measures
during the construction of the Works. Refer to the draft Environmental Management Plan.
4. REPORT
The Contractor shall prepare a monthly Environmental and Social report which shall include
at least the following items. The report shall be included in the Contractor’s monthly report
required by the Conditions of Contract.
 The current work schedule for environmental management.
 Monitoring results for routine checks and any spot checks.
 Action taken to resolve unsatisfactory results from monitoring.
 Details of any grievances or complaints from residents or other members of the
public including action taken to resolve the issue.
However if any incident or monitoring results indicate serious adverse impact or damage to
the environment, such incident or results shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and
the Employer.
No separate payment will be made for this work. The Contractor’s costs will be assumed to
be distributed as necessary across all rates in the Bills of Quantities.

DIVISION 2 SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02100 - SITE CLEARING
1. DESCRIPTION
The clearing and grubbing shall comprise the removal and disposal of material within the
construction limits including but not limited to all vegetation and debris, and the removal of
top soil, except where objects or areas are designated to remain in place or are to be removed
in accordance with other Specifications sections.
This work shall include the protection and preservation of all areas and objects designated to
remain.
2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
2.1 GENERAL
The limits of the work and objects to be preserved are defined on the drawings. Where
required the Engineer will confirm the limits of work and the designation of objects to
remain. All disposal shall be to an approved waste disposal site provided by the Contractor.
2.2 PROTECTION OF AREAS DESIGNATED REMAIN
The Contractor will be responsible for the protection and routine maintenance of existing
shrubs, trees and grassed areas designated to remain and for all objects designated to remain.
On completion of the Works these areas and objects will be returned to the Employer in the
same condition they were in prior to the start of the Works. Any damage due directly or
indirectly to the Contractor's operations shall be made good at his own expense.
2.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING AND TREE REMOVAL
All surface objects, trees, fallen timber, rotten wood, stumps, roots, snags, brush, other
vegetation, rubbish, and other protruding obstructions, with the exception of objects
designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed.
In areas of embankment all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth at least 50 cm
below the original ground surface and at least 80 cm below the bottom of the lowest
pavement layer.
In areas of cut, all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of not less than 50 cm below
the finished subgrade level.
All pits, channels and ditches shall be cleaned of unsuitable material.
All voids left after clearing and grubbing shall be filled with suitable compacted material.
2.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
Refer to Specification 03100 Common excavation
2.5 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED MATERIAL
Saleable timber shall be neatly stored in an approved accessible location as directed and
shall be trimmed and stacked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate
Government agency.
The Contractor shall not use un-saleable timber or saleable timber.
All timber, brush, stumps, roots, logs, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing
operation and topsoil not required for re-use shall be disposed to an approved waste site
provided by the Contractor. The site shall be outside of the right of way

No accumulation of debris shall remain and the right of way and adjacent areas shall be left
in a neat and tidy condition.
3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3.1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
The following methods of measurement will only be used to assess payment against the
lump sum in interim payment certificates.
Clearing and grubbing, topsoil stripping and storage for re-use, and protection of designated
areas and objects, will together be considered as Site Clearing and will be measured in
square meters. Quantities will be based on field measurements approved by the Engineer.
Tree removal will not be measured separately and shall be included in the work of clearing
and grubbing.
Clearing and grubbing, tree removal and protection of areas or objects in disposal sites,
material sites, imported borrow pit sites, haul roads and all temporary construction areas
shall not be paid for when such sites are outside the areas designated for clearing and
grubbing. The Contractor is permitted to exercise his own option as to whether he elects to
use such disposal sites or borrow pit sites.
3.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The work shall be paid for in accordance with the applicable Unit Prices as indicated in the
Bill of Quantities and given below. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to do the work specified.
Payment shall be inclusive of all necessary, removal and proper disposal of materials.
02100-01 Clearing and Grubbing m2

SECTION 02200 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING
STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
1. DESCRIPTION
Demolition and Removal of Existing Structures consists of the removal, wholly or in part,
and satisfactory disposal of structures and obstructions including but not limited to blocks of
masonry of an individual size greater than 1 cubic meter, of all buildings, hedges, fences,
structures, pavements regardless of its nature (asphalt, concrete, etc.), curbs, wells or
underground water tanks, soakaways or latrines, and any other obstructions which are not
designated or permitted to remain. Demolition includes the salvaging of designated
materials and proper backfilling (in accordance with specification requirements) of any and
all trenches, holes and pits resulting from demolition and removal work.
Right of way acquisition may not be complete in all areas at the start-up of the construction
period and the Contractor shall schedule the work associated with this Specification section
accordingly.
Obstructions or other items that are designated for removal and disposal elsewhere in the
Contract Documents shall be dealt with in accordance with stipulated requirements.
2. SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer, for respective approval prior to
start the work, the following:
 Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisions of Specification section 04100,
including detailed information regarding to the drainage structures, curbs, pavement,
etc. to be demolished and removed in accordance with the provisions and indications
of this Specification section.
 Complete detail of the method, equipment and schedule to perform the demolition
and removal work pertinent to this item.
 Inventory of the materials that could be recovered from demolition work, stockpiling
of suitable material from stripping that the Contractor pretends to use further in other
items.
 Detailed drawing showing the area for disposal of material from this item, or for
stockpiling of recovered material when it is planned to use further for other items.
3.1 GENERAL
Demolition and Removal of Existing Structures by the Contractor shall be provided, within
and adjacent to roadways, and on the right-of-ways, as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer.
The Engineer may instruct that materials recovered from demolition work shall remain the
property of the Employer unless specifically provided otherwise in the Contract Documents.
All designated saleable material shall be removed, without unnecessary damage, in sections
or pieces that may be readily transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at specified
places on the project as directed by the Engineer.
Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be back-filled with acceptable material
to the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the prism of construction, shall be
compacted in accordance with Specification section 03400 “Embankment Construction”.
There will be no separate payment for backfilling and compaction the resulting cavities.

Demolition and Removal of Existing Structures includes salvage of materials removed, their
custody, preservation, and storage on the right-of-way or any other locations as may be
designated by the Engineer or the Employer, or disposal as provided herein.
3.2 REMOVAL OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Bridges, asphalt or concrete pavement, culverts and other drainage structures in use by
traffic shall not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate
traffic.
The removal of existing culverts within embankment areas will be required only as
necessary for the installation of new structures. Abandoned culverts shall be broken down,
crushed and sealed or plugged.
All culvert sections removed, which are not designated for stockpiling or relaying, shall
become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the project or disposed of in a
manner approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise directed, the substructures of existing structures shall be removed down to
the natural stream bottom and those parts outside of the stream shall be removed down to at
least 300 mm below natural ground surface.
Where portions of the existing structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new
structure, they shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the construction of the
proposed structure. Where only a section of the existing structure is to be demolished, the
Contractor shall execute this work in such a way as to avoid damage to the section
designated to remain. All details of the Contractor's proposed working method shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Any structures designated to become the property of the Contractor shall be removed from
the right-of -way.
Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or obstruction,
which may damage new construction, shall be completed prior to placing the new work,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Existing bridges or other structures, when specified by the Engineer to be salvaged, shall be
carefully dismantled without damage. Salvaged members shall be match-marked, unless the
Engineer waives such match marking. All salvaged material shall be stored as requested by
the Engineer.
Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all concrete removed that is of suitable size for
rip-rap and not needed for such use on the Project, shall be stockpiled at locations designated
by the Engineer, for use by the Employer.
3.3 REMOVAL OF CURBS
Existing curbs designated for removal, including their bases, shall be broken into pieces, the
size of which shall not exceed 300 mm in any dimension and stockpiled at designated
locations on the site for use of the Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the
Engineer.
Removal of existing curbs shall be undertaken in such a manner as to avoid damage to
existing pavements and curbs which are designated to remain.
3.4 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS, FOOTPATHS, ETC.
Irrespective of its thickness or its nature, all asphalt or concrete pavements, footpaths, or
other hard surfaces designated for removal, shall be broken into pieces, the size of which
shall not exceed 300 mm in any dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the site
for use of the Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.

Removal of pavement shall be carefully undertaken to avoid damage to abutting sections of
pavement or structures designated to remain.
If removal of sections of old pavement, footpaths or other hard surfaces of an individual size
less than 10 cubic meters or excavation of ballast, gravel or similar sub-base or base material
is necessary, this work shall be considered as Common Excavation, and shall conform to
Specification section 03100 “Common Excavation”, for construction, measurement and
payment.
3.5 REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
Where directed, traffic signs including steel frames shall be carefully dismantled, removed
and stored where directed by the Engineer.
Concrete foundations shall be broken into pieces removed and stockpiled at designated
locations on the site for use of the Employer or shall be otherwise disposed of as directed by
the Engineer.
3.6 REMOVAL OF BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
Upon receipt of notification by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take over all responsibility
for the building or buildings then acquired and vacant and shall proceed with the removal
thereof as specified.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
complete the demolition, dismantling, removal and disposal of buildings and structures
together with all foundations and retaining walls, piers, partitions and columns, regardless of
scale.
Walls shall be broken into pieces not exceeding 60 square centimetres for any area of surface,
mixed with previous backfill material and placed in basement areas.
Basement floor slabs shall be broken and displaced into pieces not exceeding 60 square
centimetres for any area of surface and shall be left in place. Excess debris shall be removed
and disposed. All other foundations, concrete floor slabs, sidewalks, signs, sheds, garages
and fences and all other incidental and collateral work necessary to fully complete the
removal of the buildings and appurtenances shall be removed and disposed.
The Contractor shall inspect each building he is to remove and determine for himself the
work involved and the equipment and the materials required for such demolition work.
The Contractor shall arrange for the discontinuance of all utility services that serve the
building or buildings in accordance with the respective requirements and regulations of the
appropriate government agencies, and the utility agencies involved.
The Contractor shall disconnect and properly seal, in a manner approved by the local
government agency or agencies responsible and the Engineer, all sewer outlets that serve
any building or buildings that the Contractor is directed to remove.
The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed of his plans for the performance of any
work in connection with the sealing off of such outlets in order that proper inspection may be
provided at the time the work is performed.
The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a manner as to avoid hazards to persons
and vehicles. After work is started on any building, the work on that building shall be
continued to completion, promptly and expeditiously.
All debris shall be removed from basement areas and concrete floors broken. The area shall
then be filled with previous backfill material simultaneously with the breaking of the
foundation walls so that the previous backfill material will be well integrated with the pieces
of broken concrete.

Concrete slabs resting on earth and forming walks, driveways, or the first floor slabs of
buildings without basements except as indicated on the Drawings shall be broken up and
removed from the site.
The Contractor is responsible for removing any additional small “out’ buildings or
miscellaneous structures which have not been indicated on the Drawings.
Existing underground storage tanks on the site or within the buildings shall be removed and
disposed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the
removal of the fluid within the tanks and the removal of the existing tanks. Where tanks are
removed, the Contractor shall backfill with fine aggregate.
Structures designated to become the property of the Contractor shall be removed from the
right-of-way.
Operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or obstruction, which may
damage new construction, shall be completed prior to placing the new work, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract.

Demolition and removal of existing structures and obstructions shall not be measured for
payment but shall be paid as a single lump sum.
Demolition and removal of pavement, regardless of its nature (asphalt, concrete, etc.) under
this Specification section is applicable only when pavement removal is required in
conjunction with site clearing.
In locations where pavement removal is required along with the removal of base, sub-base
and/or sub-grade materials, pavement demolition and removal shall not be paid separately,
but be included in the cost of excavation in accordance with the provisions of Specification
section 03100 “Common Excavation”.
Payment for work as provided above as a lump sum shall be paid on the percentage
completion basis, as agreed by the Engineer, during the duration of the Works, with 100%
payment for the Lump Sum upon completion of all necessary demolition associated with the
Pay Item. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to do the work and for doing all the demolition in the
designated locations or areas in accordance with these Specifications, including back-filling
if necessary.
The Unit Price for any work under this Specification section will be deemed to include any
precautions or special working methods necessary to avoid damage to abutting material
designated to remain. The Contractor at his expense shall rectify any such damage.
All work shall be as directed by the Engineer including the removal and disposal of all the
resulting material.
02200-01 Demolition and removal of Existing Structures and obstructions lump sum

DIVISION 3 EARTHWORKS
SECTION 03100 - COMMON EXCAVATION
1. DESCRIPTION
Common Excavation consists of all excavation within the limits of the site after the
completion of clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil, with the exception of
structural excavation which is specified in Section 03200 “Structural Excavation”.
Common Excavation shall include the removal, handling and proper use or disposal of all
excavated materials regardless of their nature or existing condition, and the shaping and
preparation of the exposed surface of the excavation in accordance with these specifications
to the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the Drawings subject to
approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his method statement for the earthworks which
shall include an earthworks balance schedule or plan. The earthworks balance schedule or
plan shall include details of the use of suitable material, in particular the locations and
volumes for excavation and placement of materials. The plan shall be updated on a weekly
basis, in accordance with the progress of the works, and submitted with the Contractor’s
weekly work schedule until completion of the roadway excavation. Where appropriate the
Contractor shall use comparatively better materials in the upper levels of embankment
construction.
2. CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
Common Excavation shall be in four categories: a) Topsoil b) Soil Excavation, c) Rock
Excavation, and d) Excavation of Unsuitable Materials.
2.1 TOP SOIL
Topsoil shall be removed from the areas and to the depths indicated on the drawings and
subject to confirmation by the Engineer.
Topsoil removal shall be confined to the removal of soil which is sufficiently fertile to
encourage and sustain the growth of vegetation
Where “waterlogged” or “swampy” soils exist in place of topsoil in areas and depths
indicated on the drawings or otherwise determined by the Engineer such soils shall be
excavated and classified and treated as “unsuitable materials”.
2.2 SOIL EXCAVATION
All excavation except for Soft Rock, Hard Rock and Boulders regardless of the nature of the
soil or its existing condition.
This soil class includes all the types of soil excavation described in the Vietnamese
Standards for soil classification (Decision No.24/2005/QD-BXD), except for soft rock, and
boulders.
2.3 ROCK EXCAVATION
Common excavation classified as “Rock” shall be composed of the following materials:
 Hard Rock: excavation that, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not practical without
the use of pneumatic tools or drilling and blasting operations. Hard rock shall not
include material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be loosened or excavated
with standard equipment. This soil class includes all the types of rock described in
the Vietnamese Standards for soil classification (Decision No.24/2005/QD-BXD).

 Soft Rock: Soft rock shall comprise weathered rock, sandstone, limestone and such
materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be loosened or excavated by
picking, ripping or other similar means with standard equipment and without
resorting to blasting.
 Boulders: Boulders shall comprise solid pieces of rock that are weathered on all
faces and are between 0.25 m3 and 1.0 m3 in volume. Boulders with a dimension
exceeding the above-stated volume and that cannot be pulverized without the use of
pneumatic tools, drilling and blasting operations, or by standard tractor or backhoe,
shall be classified as Hard Rock. Boulders that are smaller than the above-stated
volume shall be classified as soil.
2.4 EXCAVATION OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
Common excavation will be classified as “Excavation of Unsuitable Material” when it is
composed of:
 Materials below the natural ground surface in embankment areas and, in excavation
areas, below the grading plane or other limits shown in the Drawings or determined
by the Engineer, that are unsuitable for the further use.
 Surplus material over the amount required for the construction of embankment,
provided however that it is not material rendered surplus by reason of the Contractor
having opened borrow pits solely for his own convenience.
 Surplus topsoil over the amount required for re use on embankments, other areas
indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer, provided that where the
contractor has disposed of surplus topsoil and left in sufficient on site for re-use he
shall make up the short fall at his own cost.
 Materials such as highly organic clays and silts, peat, muck, soil containing a large
amount of roots, grass and other vegetal matters, domestic or industrial waste, might
be classified as unsuitable under this Specification Section.
 Soils with a liquid limit exceeding 55% and a plasticity index exceeding 27%.
 Highly expansive soil (classification method may be either of the following: free
expansion over 3%; or having an Activity Value greater than 1.0 or a degree of
expansion classified by AASHTO T258 Standard Method of Test for Determining
Expansive Soils or other equivalent specification as Very High or Extra High .
The Activity Value shall be measured by the Plasticity Index/Percent Clay Size
ratio.)
 Materials having hazardous chemical or physical properties.
 Soil that cannot be properly compacted in accordance with Specification
requirements.
 Suitable materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, were contaminated by the
actions of the Contractor during excavation operations. In such a case these materials
will not be considered as unsuitable for purposes associated with payment.
3.1 PREPARATION WORK
Prior to excavation all clearing and grubbing shall have been completed in accordance with
the appropriate specification to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Before the start of any excavation the Contractor shall carry out a topographical survey of
the area and prepare and submit the cross section and profile drawings to the Engineer for his
approval. These drawings shall be used as a basis for the computation of the actual volume
of excavated materials.
3.2 USE OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
All materials removed from the excavation, that are evaluated by the Engineer as “suitable”,
shall be used in the formation of the road embankment, sub-grade, shoulders, slopes,
bedding, surcharge and counterweights, backfill for structures, topsoiling or for other
purposes shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. Excavation
operations shall be conducted so that material outside the limits of slopes will not be
disturbed.
3.3 REMOVAL OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
No materials shall be classified as unsuitable and remove from site without quantification by
the Contractor and approval by the Engineer.
When material below sub-grade level in cut or below embankment foundation level not in
area soft soil treatment which is found to be unsuitable and the Engineer confirms it is to be
removed, the soil remaining after the removal of the unsuitable material shall be compacted
where practical to a depth of 20 cm and a density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density
determined in accordance with AASHTO T99. Payment for such compaction shall be
deemed included in the unit rate for excavation.
Unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed to disposal areas provided by the
Contractor and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall comply with all local environmental regulations when disposing of
unsuitable material and shall include in his Environmental Management Plan all relevant
details for the hauling and disposal of unsuitable materials.
3.4 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
Finished grades, alignment and formations after excavation shall not vary from those
detailed in the drawings by more than 20 mm at any point.
All exposed finished excavated surfaces shall be properly graded and uniform, and shall
have sufficient slope to ensure that they are free draining and free from ponding during
rainfall.

Excavation of Soil and Rock, regardless of the soil nature, existing conditions or geological
classification, shall be made measured only in the case where the material has been classified
as “unsuitable material” in accordance with this specification.
Excavation of all materials other than “unsuitable materials” shall be considered to be
included in work measured in accordance with of specification 03400 “Embankment
Construction” and specification 08300 “Topsoiling” and no payment shall be made in this
specification.
The volume of Unsuitable Materials shall be computed for payment by calculating all
excavation from the average cross section areas as shown on the design drawings and
subsequently deducting the volume of materials for reuse.

The quantities of excavated material measured in this section shall not be adjusted for any
design changes made by the Contractor without the approval of the Engineer or for any
material classified as “unsuitable” without the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor is required to take due care of the Works and no measurement shall be made
for over break or excavation outside the lines, grades and levels in the drawings or
subsequently approved by the Engineer.
The quantities of excavated material measured in this section shall not be adjusted for any
material used by the Contractor in his own temporary works.
The accepted quantities as Unsuitable Materials, measured as provided above, shall be paid
at the contract price per unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed
below.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work detailed in this specification including all
preparation, assembly, installation, excavation, removal, ripping, blasting, haulage, placing
and compaction for backfilling and reusing or satisfactory disposal of site excavation, for
shaping and completion of all surfaces, works for planning and updating, and for furnishing
all labour, materials, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as shown on
the Drawings and as required in accordance with these specifications subject to approval by
the Engineer.
03100-01 Excavation of Unsuitable Material m3

SECTION 03200 - STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
1. DESCRIPTION
1.1 GENERAL
Structural Excavation consists of the excavation for foundations to bridges, culverts,
sub-drains and other structures, excluding specific details which may be contained in other
specifications, as shown on the Drawings subject to the approval of the Engineer.
All material from structural excavation, so far as it considered suitable and subject to the
approval of the Engineer, shall be utilized for backfill or embankment construction, or shall
be removed from the Site if surplus to requirements.
All materials surplus to requirements shall be classified “Excavation of unsuitable material”
in accordance with the requirements of item 2(c) of specification 03100 “Common
Excavation” subject to the approval of the Engineer.
plan shall include details of all structural excavation, in particular the locations and volumes
for both excavation and placement of materials. The plan shall be updated on a weekly basis,
in accordance with the progress of the works, and submitted with the Contractor’s weekly
work schedule until completion of the roadway excavation. Where appropriate the
Contractor shall use comparatively better materials in the upper levels of embankment
construction.
Structural Excavation shall include all necessary materials and equipment for keeping the
excavation free of surface run-off and groundwater.
This Specification includes supplying, placing and compacting granular back-fill adjacent to
structures in the areas indicated on the drawings subject to the approval of the Engineer.
This Specification includes the supply and placing of approved foundation fill material to
replace unsuitable material encountered below the foundation level of structures.
Structural excavation shall include all necessary diversion of live streams, bailing, pumping,
draining, sheeting, bracing, necessary construction of cribs and cofferdams, and supply of
materials required and subsequent removal of cribs, cofferdams and remaining unsuitable
material and placing of all necessary backfill.
1.2 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATION
Structural Excavation shall be classified as either
a) structural excavation in rivers (applicable only for the named piers listed in the Bill of
Quantities), and
b) structural excavation (for all other cases of structural excavation)
All classes of structural excavation shall be deemed to include all required equipment,
labour, incidentals, temporary materials and works necessary for and associated with the
excavation, including but not necessarily limited to:
 providing pumps, cofferdams (regardless of their type or material), braced sheet
piling or any other methods proposed by the Contractor and subject to the approval
of the Engineer;
 the Contractor’s observance of all rules and regulations of competent authorities
regarding the interference or maintenance of flow in the relevant canals, water
courses, channels or pipes;

 provisions for and driving and removal of sheet piles including providing
certification by an Independent Engineer;
 provisions for placement and removal of temporary Jetty/Guide frames;
 provisions for underwater works;
 provisions for any necessary underwater concrete, or blinding concrete;
 provisions for pumps and dewatering by submersible pumps;
 provisions for all necessary barges; and
 provisions for all necessary tug boats and auxiliary river craft.
2.1 GROUNDWATER
Whenever groundwater is encountered or the excavation is taking place adjacent to
free-surface water, the Contractor shall take such measures as necessary to ensure that the
excavation and footing are kept free of water and in a stable condition. All such measures
shall be included in his method statement and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2 COFFERDAMS
Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used wherever water-bearing strata
are encountered above the elevation of the bottom of the excavation.
The Contractor shall submit drawings showing his proposed method of cofferdam
construction together with calculations based on 10% water level (H10), an allowance for
local and general scour of the river bed and the minimum ship impact requirements to the
Engineer for his approval. At the Contractor’s expense, all designs shall be checked by an
Independent Professional Engineer who shall certify the adequacy and safety of the
proposed details.
Cofferdams or cribs for foundation construction shall extend well below the bottom of the
foundations and shall be well braced and as nearly water-tight as practicable.
The interior dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the
construction of formwork and the inspection of their exteriors, and to permit pumping
outside the forms.
Cofferdams or cribs that have tilted or moved laterally during the process of sinking shall be
righted or enlarged so as to provide the necessary clearance.
When conditions are encountered which render it impractical to dewater the foundation
before placing the footing the construction of a concrete foundation seal of such dimensions
as shown on approved shop Drawings may be permitted all subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The foundation shall then be dewatered and the footing placed. When weighted
cribs are employed and the weight is utilized to partially overcome the hydrostatic pressure
acting against the bottom of the foundation seal, special anchorages such as dowels or keys
shall be provided to transfer the entire weight of the crib to the foundation seal. Where a
foundation seal is placed under water, the cofferdam shall be vented or ported at low water
level. Pumping for dewatering shall not commence until the seal has set sufficiently to
withstand the hydrostatic pressure.
Cofferdams shall be constructed so as to protect green concrete against damage from sudden
rises in the water level and to prevent damage to the foundation by erosion. No timber or
bracing shall be left in cofferdams or cribs without the approval of the Engineer.
Any pumping that may be permitted from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be
done in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete materials
being removed. Any pumping required during concrete placing or for a period of at least 24
hours afterwards shall use a suitable pump located outside the concrete forms.
Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall remove cofferdams or cribs, together with
all associated sheets and braces, after the completion of the substructure. Removal shall be
effected in such a manner as not to disturb or damage any finished work.
The Contractor may propose a suitable alternative method to coffer dam construction. The
details of any such alternative shall be complete with all necessary drawings and calculations
certified by an independent engineer and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All
costs associated with making such a proposal, whether it is accepted or rejected by the
Engineer, shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.3 PRESERVATION OF CHANNEL
Unless otherwise permitted, no excavation shall be made outside caissons, cribs, cofferdams
or sheet piles, and the natural stream bed adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed
without the approval of the Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at the site of the
structure before caissons, cribs, or cofferdams are sunk in place, the Contractor shall,
backfill all such excavations to the original ground surface or stream bed with material
satisfactory to the Engineer after the foundation base has been completed. Material
deposited within the stream area from the foundation or other excavation or from the filling
of cofferdams shall be removed and the stream area kept free from obstruction.
2.4 EXCAVATION
Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, the Contractor shall :
 ensure that all necessary Site Clearance and Demolition in that area has been
approved by the Engineer.
 ensure that all cross-sectional elevations and measurements have been taken of the
undisturbed ground and submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
 take steps on his own initiative to regulate the natural drainage of the surface water in
the area to prevent flooding of excavations.
Excavations for structures or structural footings shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placing of foundations of the full width and length shown indicated on the drawings. The
sides of excavations shall be adequately supported at all times. The elevations of the bottoms
of footings as shown on the Drawings shall be considered as approximate only and the
Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as may
be deemed necessary to secure a satisfactory foundation.
Boulders, logs, and any other unsuitable materials encountered in excavation shall not be
used for back-filling purposes and shall be disposed of.
After each excavation has been completed the Contractor shall submit the foundation to the
Engineer for his approval. No foundation or bedding material shall be placed until such
approval has been given.
All rock or other hard material encountered in foundations shall be cleaned of all loose
material and cut to a firm surface, either level, stepped or serrated, and all seams or crevices
shall be cleaned out and grouted, all subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where the foundation is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to the final level shall
not be carried out until just before the foundation is to be placed. Where the foundation
material is soft or otherwise unsuitable, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material
and replace it with granular backfill to the approval of the Engineer. The granular fill shall be
placed and properly compacted in layers not exceeding 15cm up to the foundation elevation.
However where the foundation material has been rendered unsuitable for reasons
attributable to the Contractor he may replace the unsuitable material with granular material
as described above or suspend works on the foundation until such time as the material
becomes suitable. Either solution shall be at the Contractor’s expense without revision to the
contract period.
Where foundation piles are used the excavation of pile driving pits shall be completed before
pile driving begins and any blinding stone required shall be placed after piles have been
driven. Where it is not possible to drive piles after excavation, piles shall be driven from the
natural ground level subject to the approval of the Engineer. In such case surplus pile lengths
will not be measured for payment.
After both the excavation and the driving have been completed, all loose and displaced
material shall be removed to leave a smooth, solid bed on which to place the foundation.
Where a box culvert is to be located in embankment, the excavation shall be performed after
the embankment has been constructed to the proposed sub-grade level and properly
compacted subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.5 BACKFILLING
On completion of the structure, excavated areas shall be back-filled with approved material
to the level of the finished ground surface.
Where terms “K95” or “K98” are used on the Drawings and the compaction standard is not
indicated, this shall be understood to refer to compaction to AASHTO T180 e.g. K95 refers
to compaction to 95% of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO
T180.
2.5.1 SOIL BACKFILLING
Back-fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 15 cm and compacted to 95% of the
maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T180 (alternatively the Contractor
may choose to compact to 98% of mdd to AASHTO T99).
For soil backfill to pile caps for viaduct, back-fill may be placed in layers not exceeding
25cm thickness, and shall be compacted to 90% of the maximum dry density determined
according to AASHTO T180 (alternatively the Contractor may choose to compact to 95% of
mdd to AASHTO T99).
2.5.2 GRANULAR BACKFILLING
Granular backfilling required for specific structures or other locations detailed in the
drawings or as required by the Engineer shall be placed in layers not exceeding 15 cm and
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T180
(alternatively the Contractor may choose to compact to 98% of mdd to AASHTO T99).
The material shall be well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel, stone, rock-fill or natural
sand or a well-mixed combination of any of these. Grading requirements for Granular
Backfill shall be as follows:
Maximum size 5 cm
Passing 4.75 mm sieve 25% to 90%
Liquid limit TCVN4197-95 30% max.
2.6 BLINDING STONE
Blinding stone for use in foundations for structures as shown on the Drawings or as required
by the Engineer shall be provided as detailed below.
Blinding stone shall be approved cobble-stone or crushed rock of the maximum size
compatible with the thickness of the layer shown on the drawings subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Large stones shall have a minimum dimension of 7 cm. Large stones shall be
closely packed by hand to the dimensions shown on the drawings and then rammed by
mechanical rammer. Smaller stones with a minimum dimension of 3 cm shall then be placed
between the larger stones and the surface brought to the finished level shown on the
drawings or as required by the Engineer. The final surface shall be thoroughly compacted to
the satisfaction of the Engineer using a mechanical rammer or vibrating roller.
The Contractor may propose an alternative to the above process based on the use of graded,
crushed stone of a maximum size less than 5 cm. The proposal shall include the maximum
thickness of one layer, the proposed compaction methods and the suitability of the proposal
for use in a restricted working area all subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3.1.1 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION GENERAL
Structural excavation shall be measured as the number of cubic meters of material measured
in its original position after the completion of clearing and grubbing and the removal of
topsoil.
The volume of structural excavation shall be calculated in accordance with specific details
shown in the drawings. Where no detail is shown, the volume of structural excavation shall
be based on the net horizontal plan area of the foundation projected vertically up to ground
level taken after the completion of clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil. The net
horizontal plan area shall be considered to include blinding concrete where this is shown on
the drawings.
Where Contract Drawings require excavation in excess of the size of the structural member,
such as for culverts requiring granular backfill, the net horizontal plan area shall be that
required for the complete works as detailed on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer or as required for the placing of
granular material or blinding stone, measurement for structural excavation shall not include
any material removed from below the footing grade, from beyond the specified limits of
excavation, or material considered to compensate for anticipated swell or as a result of
effective swell during pile driving or additional material resulting from slides, slips, cave-ins,
silting or filling.
Where excavation after the embankment has been placed has been carried out with the
approval of the Engineer, such excavation in the embankment shall be measured for
payment as structural excavation.
3.1.2 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION IN RIVERS
Structural excavation in rivers shall be measured as lump sums for the piers named in the
Bill of Quantities. Structural excavation for piers other than those named in the Bill of
Quantities shall not be considered as structural excavation in rivers, regardless of whether or
not the work may be considered to be located in a tidal zone, flood plain or in a water course.
3.1.3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION IN RIVERS USING STEEL PIPE PILE
COFFERDAMS
Structural excavation in rivers using steel pipe pile cofferdams which also form part of the
structural foundations of the permanent works shall not be measured separately for payment,
but shall be a subsidiary item to the works paid under section 07400 Steel Pipe Piles.
3.1.4 BLINDING STONE AND GRANULAR BACKFILL
The volume of granular material and blinding stone measured for payment shall be the
number of cubic meters of material completed in accordance with this specification and
calculated using the nominal dimensions shown on the drawings or as approved by the

Engineer. Materials placed in excess of the requirements and dimensions given on the
drawings or as required by the Engineer shall not be measured for payment.
All granular material required as a consequence of the Contractor’s method of working or
due to his convenience shall be placed and compacted at the Contractor’s expense.
Structural Excavation and Blinding Stone for pipe culverts is included in the relevant
specifications for such work and shall not be measured or paid for under this specification.
All requirements for dealing with water flows shall be deemed included in the rates and unit
prices for structural excavation and shall include all necessary provisions for dealing with
ground water.
3.1.5 OTHER
Blinding concrete or underwater concrete shall be measured and paid in accordance with
section 07100 Concrete and Concrete Structures.
The disposal of material excavated and classed as unsuitable shall be measured and paid in
accordance with section 03100 Common Excavation. This payment shall be additional to the
payment for structural excavation.
Material excavated and used in the works shall be measured and paid in accordance with
section 03400 Embankment Construction. This payment shall be additional to the payment
for structural excavation.
Soil backfilling will not be measured separately for payment, and its payment shall be
deemed included in the payment for structural excavation.
The accepted quantities, measured as provided above, shall be paid at the contract price per
unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including all
preparation, assembly, installation of sheet piles and their propping or support, pumping and
temporary drainage work, excavation, removal, ripping, blasting, haulage, placing and
compaction for backfilling, for shaping and completion of all surfaces, works for planning
and updating, and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and any incidentals
to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as required in accordance with these
Specifications or as required by the Engineer.
03200-01 Structural Excavation m3
03200-05 Structural Excavation in River (for piers named in the BOQ) lump sum
03210-01 Blinding crushed stone m3
03210-02 Granular Backfill m3

SECTION 03300 - BORROW MATERIAL
1. DESCRIPTION
This specification describes requirements and procedures for the provision of materials from
borrow pits for the following categories of work.
 Borrow material for capping layers.
 Borrow material for sub-grade.
 Borrow material for road and counterweight embankment.
 Borrow material for cohesive slope.
The Contractor shall use suitable material from borrow pits for constructing embankment,
backfill, sub-grade, shoulders, cohesive slope and other parts of the work as shown on the
drawings subject to the approval of the Engineer. Borrow material shall be provided from
sources which have been approved by the Engineer and only in those locations shown on the
drawings subject to the approval of the Engineer.
plan shall include details of the use of suitable material, in particular the locations and
volumes from which borrow material is to be provided. The plan shall be updated on a
weekly basis, in accordance with the progress of the works, and submitted with the
Contractor’s weekly work schedule until completion of the roadway excavation.
2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS FOR MATERIALS
2.1.1 SHOP AND WORKING DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall submit his method statement for the earthworks including complete
sets of drawings and schedules for the use of borrow materials to the Engineer for his
approval.
The Contractor’s method statement shall include a schedule of borrow materials he intends
to provide together with all necessary supporting information concerning the source. The
schedule of materials shall be properly incorporated into the Contractor’s earthworks
balance schedule or plan for the earthworks operation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all borrow pits have all necessary
licenses and approvals from the appropriate local and regulatory authorities for the operation
of the pit and the extraction of the borrow materials. All such licenses and approvals shall be
submitted with the supporting information. The supporting information concerning the
sources of borrow material shall also include, but not be limited to, the following:
 The location of the material sources and the routes and procedures for delivery of
material to the Site.
 The approximate anticipated volume of material to be supplied from each source
together with the dimensions and depths of borrow pit excavations.
 The intended location for the use in the permanent works of material from each
borrow pit.
 Proposed procedures for the testing and acceptance of materials from each source.

 Construction details for the each pit which shall include, construction of detours,
temporary or permanent drainage facilities, excavation slopes or retaining walls and
soil-water conservation drainage details,
 The excavation methods, limits, volume and depths for each stage of abstraction.
 The safety, environmental and traffic management measures to be used.
The Contractor shall make all his submissions for approval to the Engineer well before the
programmed start of the work on site.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making and completing all arrangements and
necessary work required to return the area of the borrow pit to the original owners or
organizations responsible for its management in a condition acceptable to the owners or
managers.
2.1.2 SAMPLES AND TESTING
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for testing samples of each distinct material type
to be supplied for use as borrow material.
The Contractor’s method statement shall include details of his own sampling and testing
schedule to monitor the quality and continuing suitability of all borrow material provided to
the site. The results of the monitoring and testing shall be included in the Contractor’s
reporting obligations to the Engineer in a format subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2 BORROW MATERIAL FOR EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
The borrow materials to be used for embankment construction shall be in accordance with
the requirements for materials stated in clause 2.3 of the specification for embankment
construction (Section 03400).
All suitable materials provided from borrow sources shall be used and placed to the grades,
cross sections and other requirements indicated on the drawings subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
During the operation of the borrow pit the Contractor shall ensure the pit remains in a safe
properly drained condition. The drainage shall be kept functioning and in as good condition
as practicable and the sides and ends of borrow pits shall be maintained at the slopes
included in the Contractor’s submission.
Where a borrow pit includes materials of distinctive types, excavation shall be carried out in
a manner that ensures each type remains separate and that no mixing occurs. Excavation
shall also be carried out in such a way that excavated surfaces are free draining and that the
as dug moisture content of borrow material remains unaffected.
During excavation of the borrow pit temporary drainage shall be provided and maintained in
order to prevent excessive surface run off and the erosion and possible sliding of materials
onto adjacent properties or public roads. Temporary drainage shall be directed into the
existing local drainage system subject to suitable measures being taken to prevent silting or
flooding from such existing drainage.
All hauling trucks and other construction plant leaving the borrow area or the area of
placement on the site shall have wheels, wheel arches and other dirty sections washed before
entering onto public roads.
Trucks used for hauling borrow materials shall not be overloaded.
Trucks used for hauling borrow materials shall be covered with canvas to prevent materials
from being blown or falling off the truck.

The Contractor shall ensure that all operations related to the excavation and provision of
materials from borrow pits comply with his approved Health and Safety plan, his approved
Environmental Management plan and his approved Traffic Management plans.
The Contractor shall not obtain borrow material from locations other than the borrow areas
approved by the Engineer for the Project.
The Contractor shall include in his method statement for earthworks and his earthworks
balance schedule or plan the maximum rate for the re-use of the material used for the
construction of surcharge embankments and counterweight berms.

Performance of this work shall not be paid for separately, but shall be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor for which full payment is in accordance with
applicable unit prices indicated on the Bill of Quantities for the work items in which it is
called for or required.

SECTION 03400 - EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
1. DESCRIPTION
1.1 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
This specification describes requirements and procedures for the construction of the capping
layer, sub-grade, roadway embankment, and embankments and berms required for
surcharge.
1.2 SETTING OUT THE WORK, STAKING AND SURVEYING
This specification also describes the requirements and procedures for surveying, setting out
and staking.
Surveying, setting out and staking shall be performed by technically qualified survey crews
using survey instruments and supporting equipment fit for purpose, capable of achieving the
specified survey tolerances and the construction tolerances included in this and other
specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish the necessary equipment and material to survey, calculate, and
record data for the control of work and acceptable tools, supplies, and stakes and other
materials necessary to set out the works of the type and quality normally used in highway
survey work and suitable for the intended use.
covered by this Specification Section.
 TCVN 4447-12 Earth works – Construction and Acceptance
 22TCN 346-06 Testing procedure on definition of compaction of road
foundation and embankment by sand cone method
 22TCN 333-06 Procedures of soil and macadam compaction in
laboratory
 22TCN 332-06 Testing procedures on definition of CBR value for soil
and macadam in laboratory
 22TCN211-2006 Flexible Pavement
 TCVN4195 - 4202-12 Construction soil
 TCVN 9436-12 Highway embankment – construction and acceptance
 AASHTO M145 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for
Highway Construction Purposes
 AASHTO T11 Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
 AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
 AASHTO T87 Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil Aggregate
Samples for Test

 AASHTO T99 Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density
Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and
a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop
 AASHTO T146 Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for Test
Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and
 AASHTO T224 Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction
Test
 ASTM D1140 Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200
(75-µm) Sieve
2.2 SUBMITTALS
plan shall include details of all elements of embankment construction, in particular the
re-use of material used for surcharge embankments and berms. The plan shall include the
construction of trial sections to prove the adequacy of the Contractor’s methods, equipment
and materials. The plan shall be updated on a weekly basis, in accordance with the progress
of the works, and submitted with the Contractor’s weekly work schedule until completion of
the embankments. The Contractor shall submit his method statement together with all shop
drawings, schedules and other supporting information to the Engineer for his approval. The
Contractor’s plan and schedule shall include the temporary drainage system which maintains
the site as dry as possible discharging by the natural gradient during construction.
The earthwork balance schedule or plan for operation for embankment construction shall
include:
 The use of suitable material obtained from common excavation within the site limits
or from excavation for channel relocation.
 The use of borrow material stipulated in specification 03300 “Borrow Materials”.
 The use and re-use of material as applicable used for the surcharge embankments
and surcharge berms.
For each item the schedule or plan shall identify the location of the material source, the
location where material is to be placed, the approximate timing of the operations and the
quantities involved. When approved by the Engineer, the plan shall be used for monitoring
of quantities
2.2.2 SCHEDULE FOR SETTING THE WORK, STAKING AND SURVEYING
The Contractor shall submit a method statement for survey work and the setting out of the
works. The statement shall comply with the requirements for setting out the works included
in the general items and shall include but not be limited to the items detailed below. No work
shall commence on site until the Contractor’s method statement has been approved by the
Engineer.
 Checking and any necessary correction of primary survey points detailed in the
contract documents.

 Details of the Contractor’s own survey network established from the primary points
provided. Such details shall include the structure of the network and the referencing
of the various types of survey points in the network.
 Details of the network shall particularly refer to fixed points to be maintained at the
site of bridges, other structures along the road alignment and temporary points to be
established and re-established to suit the construction of embankments, excavation
work (staking) or paving work.
 The marking, protection and maintenance of all survey points, including the primary
survey points.
 The registering, routine checking and correction if necessary of all survey points.
 Any other procedures and controls necessary for the work
2.3 MATERIALS
The material for embankment, whether from common excavation or from borrow, shall be
mostly composed of granular material, sand or gravel, or classified soil, complying with the
requirements described in this specification. All materials shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Materials shall be tested according to the requirements of current Vietnamese
standards or subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.3.1 CAPPING LAYER
The material used for the 30 cm. capping layer shall be laterite or suitable material with a
minimum CBR of 12% according to 22TCN 332-06; compacted to 98% of the maximum dry
density determined according to AASHTO T180, and provided in accordance with
22TCN211-2006.
The Contractor shall without additional payment conduct site tests to measure the modulus
of elastic deformation of the capping layer at a test frequency of one test every 50m along the
carriageway in each direction. The objective of the testing is to confirm that the design value
of E0≥54MPa has been achieved. If failure to meet the modulus is attributed to the
Contractor’s workmanship or failure to meet the specifications, the Contractor shall be
responsible for undertaking remedial measures; if the design modulus has not been achieved
through no fault of the Contractor’s workmanship, the Engineer will modify the design and
instruct the Contractor accordingly.
2.3.2 TOP 50 CM EMBANKMENT - SUB-GRADE LAYER
The material used for embankment construction in the top 50 cm layer (sub-grade layer)
shall be hill soil or equivalent suitable material compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density determined according to AASHTO T180; CBR value (saturated sampling for 96
hour) of more than 8% or equivalent, Liquid Limit (LL) ≤ 40% according to TCVN4197 -95,
Plasticity Index (PI) ≤ 17% according to TCVN4197-95.
2.3.3 EMBANKMENT BELOW 50 CM SUB-GRADE LAYER
Embankment layers below the 50 cm sub-grade layer shall comply with requirements for
each soil classification as appropriate given in Table No.1 below. Where the selected
material is hill soil, Liquid Limit (LL) ≤ 55% according to TCVN4197-95, Plasticity Index ≤
27% according to TCVN4197-95
The minimum CBR more than 50cm below sub-grade shall be 5% according to
22TCN332-06.
Compaction shall be to 95% of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO
T180 (alternatively the Contractor may choose to compact to 98% of mdd to AASHTO
T99).

Table 1 Classification of Material Suitable for Embankment include capping layer
General Classification: Granular Materials (35% or less passing sieve
0.075mm)
Group Classification: A-1 A-3 A-2(*)
A-1-a A-1-b A-2-4
Sieve analysis, percent passing:
2.00 mm (sieve No.10) 50 max --- --- ---
0.425 mm (sieve No.40) 30 max 50 max 51 Min ---
0.075 mm (sieve No.200) 15 max 25 max 10 max 35 max
Characteristics of fraction passing 0.425 (sieve No.40):
Liquid Limit: --- --- --- 40 max
Plasticity Index: 6 max 6 max N.P. 10 max
Types of significant constituent Stone fragments, Fine Silty or clayey gravel
materials gravel and sand sand and sand
General rating Excellent to Good
Use of the following materials in embankment is specifically prohibited:
- Peat, highly organic soils (group A-8 according to AASHTO M145);
- Soils with organic content greater than 10%, soil with grass and roots, and waste
(AASHTO T267-86);
- Soils with soluble salt content exceeding 5% (TCVN 9436:2012 Appendix D);
- Clays with oedometer free swell greater than 3% (22 TCN 332-06);
- Clays classified as class A-7-6 (AASHTO M145) and with group index of 20 or more;
Use of the following materials is not permitted in embankment below the flood water or
ground water level:
- Soils groups A-4 and A-5 (AASHTO M145)
2.3.4 ROCK FRAGMENTS AND BOULDERS
Rock fragments and boulders with a maximum dimension of 10 cm may be used in
embankment construction subject to inclusion in the Contractor’s method statement and its
subsequent approval by the Engineer. Where the use of rock fragments and boulders has
been approved by the Engineer, filling material around and between the large rock fragments
and boulders shall be finer material, composed of rock fragments, gravel, sand or soil, in
accordance with the requirements this clause of these specifications and capable of being
placed and compacted to fill all voids between the large rock fragments and boulders
2.3.5 COHESIVE SLOPE MATERIAL
Materials to be used on the sloped surface of the embankment shall comply with the
following requirements:
 clay fraction > 25% (particles smaller than 0.002mm)
 Limit Liquid: LL ≤ 50% according to TCVN4197-95;
 17% ≤ PI ≤27% according to Standard TCVN4197-95
 Maximum dry density : γc max ≥ 1.5 ton/m3;
Compaction shall be to 90% of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO
T180 (alternatively the Contractor may choose to compact to 95% of mdd to AASHTO
T99).
For material to be placed at locations particularly prone to erosion, the cohesive slope
material shall be a clay of high plasticity, having
 20% ≤ PI ≤40% according to Standard TCVN4197-95
Locations prone to erosion are a) within 10m each side of culvert inlets and outlets, and b)
under concrete slab slope protection at bridge abutments, and extended for 10m beyond the
concrete slab slope protection.
3.1 GENERAL
Prior to the construction of roadway embankments, all necessary clearing and grubbing,
removal of topsoil and surface drainage in the area shall have been performed in compliance
with the relevant specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Embankment construction shall consist of:
 constructing roadway embankments, including preparation of the area upon which
they are to be placed;
 placing and compaction of approved material within roadway areas where unsuitable
material has been removed;
 placing and compaction of embankment material in holes, pits, and other
depressions within the roadway area; and
 construction of embankments and berms required for the surcharging associated
with soft ground treatment.
 constructing the temporary drainage system which maintains the site as dry as
possible discharging by the natural gradient during construction.
Materials for embankments shall contain no muck, peat, sod, roots or other deleterious
matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid, bulky materials shall not be placed in
embankment areas where piling is to be placed or driven.
Where indicated on the drawings, the slopes of the embankment shall be constructed using
cohesive material.
3.2 SETTING OUT THE WORK, STAKING AND SURVEYING
3.2.1 APPROVALS
No survey work shall start until the Contractor’s method statement has been approved by the
Engineer in accordance with clause 2.2.2 of this specification. No work shall start on site
until the setting out of the work has been approved by the Engineer.
3.2.2 NOTICE
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 48 hours notice of intention to start any survey or
setting out work on site.
3.2.3 SURVEY POINTS
The Contractor shall check and correct as necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer all
primary survey points provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall establish
his own network of secondary survey points sufficient to control the lines, grades, levels and
position of the Works.
3.2.4 CROSS SECTION MARKERS AND CONTROL POINTS
The Contractor shall establish cross section markers at 20 m. intervals, or other intervals that
may be required by the Engineer, set out perpendicular to the centre line of the road. The
Contractor shall establish control points at the site of each structure, foundation or culvert.
Control points shall be positioned or of a sufficient number that there is a clear sight line to
all significant parts of the structure, foundation or culvert. Cross section markers and control
points shall be within the site boundary but outside areas directly affected by the Works.
Additional reference markers shall be established so that cross section markers and control
points can be re-established should they be damaged or destroyed during construction work.
All cross section markers, control points and reference markers shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
3.2.5 CROSS SECTIONS
The Contractor shall take cross sections at 20 m intervals or such intervals as may be
required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare and submit cross section drawings to
the Engineer for his approval. Drawings shall be provided in both hard and soft copies.
3.2.6 OTHER MARKERS, STAKES OR CONTROL POINTS.
The Contractor shall establish all other markers, stakes or control points necessary for the
correct setting out of the Works. Such items may be permanent for the duration of the works
or temporary for the particular work item. Such items shall include centre line markers,
stakes, profile boards and other markers required to set out and control each stage of the
construction of the road and drainage works and such markers or control points that may be
necessary to set out and control each stage of the construction of a particular structure,
foundation or culvert.
3.2.7 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
The Contractor shall ensure that there are sufficient survey points, control points, cross
section markers, stakes and other markers to ensure that all Works are constructed within the
construction tolerances given in this and other sections of the specification.
3.2.8 REGISTER
The Contractor shall maintain a register of all survey points, control points, cross section
markers, stakes and other markers. The register shall record all checks carried out and all
events that may affect the items registered.
3.2.9 SURVEYING TOLERANCES
Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical
Control points ± 5 mm ± 3 mm
Centreline points (a) - (PoC), (PoT), (PoT), and (PoC) ± 5 mm ± 3 mm
including references thereto
Other center line points ± 10 mm ± 10 mm
Cross-section points, slope stakes, and slope stake references ± 20 mm ± 10 mm
(b)
Culverts, ditches, and minor drainage structures ± 10 mm ± 10 mm
Retaining walls ± 10 mm ± 10 mm
Railroad crossing structures ± 3 mm ± 3 mm
Bridge substructure ± 5 mm ± 5 mm
Bridge superstructure ± 3 mm ± 3 mm
Clearing and grubbing limits ± 200 mm -
Roadway subgrade finish stakes ± 10 mm ± 10 mm
Roadway finish grade stakes ± 3 mm ± 3 mm
Note:
(a) Center line points are point of curve (PoC), point of tangent (PoT) and point on curve (PoC).
(b) Take the cross sections normal to the centreline within ±1 degree (0.02 rad).
3.2.10 PERMANENT MONUMENTS AND MARKERS
The Contractor shall protect all existing land survey monuments and property markers
within or on the site boundary.

3.3 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION
Where practical embankment material generally shall be transferred directly from the
excavation or borrow areas to the prepared surface and spread during dry weather.
Stockpiling of embankment material shall generally not be permitted, especially during the
wet season.
With the exception of surcharge embankments and berms, roadway embankment materials
shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 25cm thick in loose measurement or such
other thickness as may be confirmed by the Contractor’s trial sections. Each layer shall be
compacted as specified, tested for density and accepted by the Engineer, before the next
layer is placed. Effective spreading equipment shall be used on each lift to obtain uniform
thickness prior to compaction. Each layer shall be placed in a manner that ensures a uniform
density. Water shall be added or removed as necessary in order to obtain the required density.
Removal of water shall be accomplished through aeration by ploughing, blading, disking, or
other methods subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Surcharge embankments and berms placed over areas of PVD soft ground improvement
shall be constructed in two stages as detailed on the drawings. The maximum thickness,
placed and compacted, of each layer used to construct the embankment and berms in stage 1
and stage 2 shall not exceed 15 cm and 10 cm respectively such that the average rate of
increase in the height of each stage shall not exceed the rate indicated on the drawings. There
shall be a period of 90 days between the two stages during which time no embankment
material shall be placed or compacted. Instrumentation shall be installed in and around the
embankment and berm as detailed in the section of this specification concerning
instrumentation of soft ground treatment. The embankment and berms shall remain in place
for the time detailed on the drawings subject to the results obtained from the instrumentation
confirming the stability of the embankment and subject to confirmation by the Engineer.
When the surcharge embankment has reached a stable condition, and subject to the approval
of the Engineer, the embankment shall be trimmed and adjusted as necessary to the profile
indicated in the drawings for the applicable typical cross section, and construction of the
sub-grade, capping layer and cohesive material sections of the embankment may proceed.
Where embankment is to be constructed across soft ground that will not support the weight
of trucks or other hauling equipment, the lower part of the embankment may be constructed,
subject to the approval of the Engineer, by dumping successive loads of material in a
uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than that necessary to support the
hauling equipment when placing subsequent layers.
No placing and/or compaction of material under saturated or flooded conditions shall be
carried without the express approval of the Engineer.
Any rock fill shall be covered with one or more layers of well graded material 20 cm thick
containing no stones larger than 5 cm and capable of filling all the interstices in the top of the
rock fill. These layers shall be constructed to the density requirements for embankment
given in this specification.
Dumping and spreading and compaction areas shall be kept separate and no work shall be
permitted on completed layers until such time as compaction complies with the requirements
of this specification and the layer has been approved by the Engineer
Hauling and spreading equipment shall be routed over each layer of the fill in such manner
as to make use of the compactive effort provided and to minimize rutting and uneven
compaction.
Lower embankment layers shall be compacted and shaped with a 4% cross fall from the
centre of the embankment to allow drainage of rainwater during construction. The cross fall
shall be gradually reduced in the upper layers such that the required design cross fall is
achieved below the pavement structure.

3.4 COMPACTION OF EMBANKMENT MATERIAL
3.4.1 SUB-GRADE LAYER AND GENERAL EMBANKMENT LAYER
All layers shall be compacted to a uniform moisture content of -3% to +1% of the optimum
moisture content for the particular material being laid. All layers shall be placed to a
maximum thickness of 25 cm and compacted to a uniform density. These requirements shall
be subject to the completion of satisfactory trial sections as detailed in this specification and
3.4.2 EMBANKMENT LAYERS BELOW THE SUB-GRADE LAYER
The Contractor may of his own choice place material below the sub-grade layer to a
maximum thickness of 50 cm. prior to compaction. The Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Engineer a specific method statement for placing layers to such a thickness. The
method statement shall in particular refer to the equipment used to place and compact the
material. The Contractor shall carry out trial sections, as detailed in this specification, to
demonstrate that his proposed method will produce work that complies with this
specification. The method statement and the trial sections shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Where any such layers are of significantly different materials these materials
shall be referred to in the method statement and separate trial sections shall be carried out for
each material and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.4.3 TESTING METHOD
During progress of the Works the Contractor shall carry out density tests on compacted
material in accordance with 22TCN346-06, or other approved field density tests, including
the use of properly calibrated nuclear testing devices. Such calibration shall include
comparison with direct measurement of in-situ density in the field in accordance with
22TCN346-06. Tests shall be carried out on the full depth of the layer at locations subject to
approval by the Engineer. For backfill around structures or in culvert trenches, at least one
test per complete layer of backfill placed shall be carried out. In embankments, at least one
test shall be performed in.
3.4.4 TESTING FREQUENCIES
Testing frequencies are as follows:
Embankment Upper 50cm of 30 cm capping Cohesive slope

No. Test Items Test method fill (sand) embankment layer (laterite) material
(subgrade)
1 Sieve Analysis TCVN-342(86) 1 / 5,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1/ 2,000m3
2 Moisture content ASTM-D2216 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3
Liquid
3 limit,Plastic limit ASTM-D4318 1 / 5,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3
and Plastic index
Internal Friction
4 ASTM-D3080 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3
angle
5 Cohesion ASTM-D2434 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3
6 CBR ASTM-D1883 1/ 5,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 2,000m3 -
7 Organic Content ASTM-D2974 1 / 2,000m3 1 / 1,000m3 1/ 1,000m3 1/ 1,000m3
AASHTO-T99
Moisture-Density
8 / AASHTO 1/ 5,000m3 1/ 2,000m3 1/ 2,000m3 1/ 5,000m3
Relation
T180

Embankment Upper 50cm of 30 cm capping Cohesive slope
No. Test Items Test method fill (sand) embankment layer (laterite) material
(subgrade)
AASHTO
T205
9 In situ density 2 / 1,000m2 2 / 1,000m2 2 / 1,000m2 2 / 1,000m2
AASHTO
T191
Soluble salt
Source approval, Source approval, Source approval, Source approval,
10 content and 3 tests 3 tests 3 tests 3 tests
gypsum
Oedometer free
1/ 20,000m3 1/ 20,000m3
11 swell (surcharge ASTM D2435 (clay only) (clay only)
1/ 5,000m3 -
of 7 kPa)
For backfill to bridge abutments the above test frequencies for embankment fill shall be
increased by 2 times. For backfill to culverts the above test frequencies for embankment fill
shall be increased by 10 times.
3.4.5 CORRECTIONS
A correction for coarse particles may be made in accordance with 22TCN333-06. If by such
tests, the Engineer determines that the specified density and moisture conditions have not
been attained, the Contractor shall perform additional works as may be necessary to attain
the specified conditions.
3.5 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
Equipment used for the compaction of embankment shall be fit for purpose and in sound
condition and may be of any type, provided that it is capable of compacting each lift of
material as specified.
All equipment shall be operated by trained and experienced operators and the compaction of
embankments shall be carried out by skilled and experienced labour.
The Contractor shall carry out trial sections to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer
that his proposed methods, equipment and labour are capable of constructing embankments
in accordance with this Specification. Suitable compaction equipment is as follows:
 Sheep’s foot, tamping or grid rollers shall be capable of exerting a force of 45
Newton per mm of length of roller drum.
 Steel wheel rollers other than vibratory rollers shall be capable of exerting a force of
not less than 45 Newton per mm of width of the compression roller.
 Vibratory steel wheel rollers shall have a minimum mass of 6 tons. The compactor
shall be equipped with amplitude and frequency controls and specifically designed
to compact the material on which it is used.
 Pneumatic-tire rollers shall have smooth tread tires of equal size that will provide a
uniform compacting pressure for the full width of the roller and capable of exerting a
ground pressure of at least 550 kPa.
Unsatisfactory work produced as a consequence of inadequate equipment and labour shall
be rejected. Work will not be allowed to proceed until such time as the Contractor provides
suitable equipment and experienced labour and operators able to produce satisfactory work
in accordance with this specification. In such case the Engineer may at his discretion instruct
the Contractor to carry out further trial sections to demonstrate the capabilities of the
replacement equipment and labour.

3.6 COMPACTION TRIALS
No work can begin on the formation of embankments until the Contractor has carried out
trial sections in accordance with his method statement for the compaction of each type of fill
material to be used in the Works. The trials shall be carried out using the equipment and
labour the Contractor intends to use for the permanent works. The trials shall determine the
relation between the types of compaction equipment, the number of passes required and such
methods as may be necessary for adjusting moisture content in order to construct
embankments in accordance with this specification. Trials areas shall be not less than 10 m
wide and 50 m long subject to the approval of the Engineer. All trial sections shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer before embankment works can begin.
Materials used in trial sections shall be sampled and tested in accordance with this
Specification to confirm compliance with the requirements of this Specification. The trials
shall be used to determine the target densities for the materials used and the densities shall be
determined in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. Work may be
suspended and new trial sections may be required, subject to confirmation by the Engineer,
if the Contractor fails to achieve the target densities determined in the trial sections during
construction of the embankment.
Compaction trials for each of the specified embankment layers may be carried out on
completed and approved sections of the underlying layer subject to the approval of the
Engineer. However no work on the respective layer can begin until the trial has been
approved.
Trial sections may be included in the permanent works subject to the approval of the
Engineer. However should the trial section be unsatisfactory it shall be removed entirely and
the layer beneath the trial section shall be made good at the Contractor’s cost and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall adhere to the compaction procedures, materials, labour, equipment and
methods used on approved trial sections for the duration of the work. If during construction
of the Works, the character and properties of the fill material change, or the Contractor
changes his compaction equipment or methods new trial sections shall be carried out. Work
shall be suspended until such time as the new trials have been successfully completed
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.7 PROTECTION OF ROADBED AND SLOPE DURING CONSTRUCTION
Embankment construction shall comply with clause 3.3 of this Specification. Cross falls
shall be maintained in such condition that embankments will be well drained at all times.
Drainage for seepage water, if any, shall be taken into consideration and where necessary
temporary ditches or gutters shall be so constructed as to prevent damage to embankments
by erosion. The Contractor is expected to take all necessary measures to ensure that
embankments under construction are protected from damage due to rain.
3.8 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES
If embankment can be placed on one side only of abutments, wing walls, piers or culvert
headwalls, care shall be taken to ensure that the area immediately adjacent to the structure is
not compacted to the extent that it will cause overturning or excessive pressure against the
structure. When noted on the Drawings, the fill adjacent to the end bent of a bridge shall not
be placed higher than the bottom of the back wall of the bent until the superstructure is in
place. When embankment is to be placed on both sides of a concrete wall, box type structure
or other structures, operations shall be so conducted that there is no significant difference in
the elevation of the embankment on either side of the structure.
3.9 ROUNDING AND WARPING SLOPES
Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes, including the slopes of drainage
ditches, shall be rounded to a 1m tangent length from shoulder edge. At intersections of cuts
and fills, slopes shall be adjusted and wrapped to flow into each other or into the natural
ground surfaces without noticeable break.
3.10 FINISHING ROADBED AND SLOPES
On completion of the embankment the finished surface shall be free of any soft or other
unsuitable material that has not compacted properly and free of low sections, holes or
depressions. Any necessary corrections by scarifying, blending, scraping, dragging, rolling,
or other methods of work shall be performed to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed
shaped to the grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings and subject to approval by
the Engineer.
All slopes shall be reasonably uniform, without any noticeable break, and in reasonable
conformance with the drawings and with no variations readily discernible as viewed from
the road subject to approval by the Engineer,
3.11 COMPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION
After completion of embankment construction and before the placement of any base
material for pavement, all culverts, transversal drains, ducts and the like (including their
fully compacted backfill), ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be completed.
The Contractor shall is responsible for protecting the surface of the completed embankment
and maintaining it in an acceptable condition until such time as he completes aggregate base
courses. Damage caused to the completed surface after its acceptance and prior to
subsequent work shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense and all repair work shall be
Proof rolling shall be conducted after completion using 25 tons minimum weight roller at
locations subject to approval by the Engineer. If the deflection is more than 5mm the
embankment shall be checked and replaced if necessary, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
3.12 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES AFTER COMPACTION
Irrespective of the tolerances given below, all exposed finished fill surfaces shall be
sufficiently smooth and uniform, and shall have sufficient slope to ensure that they are free
draining and that no ponding occurs.
Items Tolerance Frequency

Embankment Width on Top Not less than 50m
design width
Center line elevation +10 / -15 mm
Centerline position on plan ±50 mm
Thickness of one layer ±40 mm
Final grades levels ±30 mm
Slope Slope angle Not more than 50m
10% steeper than
design
Thickness of cohesive soil ±50 mm
Surface irregularity from the 30 mm
Specified profile by 3m rule
Capping Layer Center-side Location ±10 mm 50m
and Subgrade Width Not less than
design width
Thickness ±15 mm
Level ±15 mm
Surface irregularity by 3m straight ±10 mm
 0.3%
edge
Cross-fall or camber

Longitudinal grade over 25 m length  0.1%
Unlined ditches Elevation of bottom of ditch +0, -20mm 50m
Cross section width Not less than
design width
Side slope angle Not steeper than
design slope
Lined ditches Centerline location on plan ±50mm 50m
Cross section dimensions Not less than
design width
Thickness of lining Not less than
design thickness
Elevation of bottom of ditch ±10mm

4.1.1 GENERAL
The quantities for embankment construction shall be measured in cubic meters and
computed by the method of average-end-areas from the permanent works cross sections
shown in the Drawings, to which quantity shall be added the approved volume of excavation
of unsuitable material beneath the embankment.
The quantities of embankment construction shall not be measured in the field, except for
embankment for settlement compensation.
The quantities of surcharge placed and removed shall not be measured separately for
payment.
4.1.2 MEASUREMENT OF VOLUMES SUBJECT TO CONSOLIDATION
SETTLEMENT
For surcharge embankments placed over unconsolidated ground identified in the drawings
as requiring “soft soil treatment”, measurement of embankment volume for settlement
compensation shall be measured by field survey of settlement plates as follows:
Survey (1) after preparation of a working platform and prior to the installation of PVDs or
Sand Drains;
Survey (2) immediately after consolidation reaches the required value.
The volume of embankment for settlement compensation shall be calculated based on the
method of average-end-areas from the cross sectional area bounded by the toes of the
embankment as shown on the Drawings (assumed to have zero settlement), and straight lines
between the displacements measured at the settlement plates.
4.1.3 MEASUREMENT OF VOLUMES NOT SUBJECT TO CONSOLIDATION
SETTLEMENT
The work of excavation and disposal of unsuitable material, its replacement by embankment
fill, and the preparation of a platform for PVD installation is not considered to require
allowance for consolidation settlement and shall be measured in the conventional manner.
For embankments placed over ground which was not identified in the drawings as requiring
“soft soil treatment”, but where settlement has occurred due to differential consolidation, no
separate payment shall be considered for adjusting the embankment to compensate for the
settlement and the cost of any such adjustment shall be deemed an incidental cost included in
the prices and rates for embankment construction.

4.1.4 OTHER
Additional embankment required due to work carried out by the Contractor at his
convenience to facilitate his own construction methods or due to any over excavation by the
Contractor shall not be measured and shall not be considered for payment.
Deduction for Structures: The volume of pipe culverts, box culverts, underpasses and
bridges, and the volume of backfill around such structure and fillings which has been paid
for under other items of work, shall be deducted from the volume of embankment placed.
Payment shall be full compensation for the entire work prescribed in this Section including
preparation of foundations for embankment (over unconsolidated ground or other ground
approved by the Engineer), classified soil material (from borrow or excavation from the
project Site), layering, blending (if required), watering, construction of cohesive slope,
temporary drainage, hauling, compacting, placement and removal of surcharge, shaping,
trimming, finishing and maintaining embankments and for furnishing all labour, materials,
tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as
required in accordance with these Specifications and subject to approval by the Engineer.
No payment shall be made for survey or setting out work which shall be considered
incidental to the works as a whole and deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and
prices.
03400-01 Earthwork Measured in Embankment m3
03400-02 Earthwork for Settlement Compensation m3
03400-04 Construction of Cohesive Slope m3
03400-05 Construction of Subgrade m3
03400-06 Construction of Capping Layer m3

SECTION 03500 - SOFT SOIL IMPROVEMENT MEASURES
1. PREFABRICATED VERTICAL DRAINS (PVD)

1.1 DESCRIPTION
Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) shall consist of a filter jacket of non-woven geotextile
surrounding a plastic core. The two elements can be fixed together or separated.
The selection of type/make of PVD shall be based on three main criteria:
 Possibility to provide a safe installation of the drain, which is also dependent on the
installation procedure,
 Long term performance of the drain, during preloading and later, with respect to the
following properties:
 Ability to permit pore water from the soil to seep into the drain without the filter
being clogged,
 Ability to convey water along the drain,
 Ability to suffer deformations from large settlements in the surrounding ground
without reduction of the discharge capacity of the drains due to folding or bending.
 Proven records of excellent functioning in full-scale installations under similar soil
conditions.
The Contractor shall submit detailed information on the type of PVD he proposes to use, the
properties, and relevant experience records. The type of drain is subject to approval by the
Engineer.
The main characteristics to be documented in the submission are:
 Average opening size and other characteristics of the filter
 Discharge capacity of the drain
 Strength, flexibility and durability of the core/jacket system
 Relevant test results
 Documentation of relevant reference projects
 Procedure used for drain installation.
1.2 MATERIALS
1.2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
 ASTM D 1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of
Rigid Cellular Plastics.
 ASTM D3776 Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area
(Weight) of Fabric
 ASTM D3786 Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile
Fabrics—Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
 ASTM D 4491 Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of
Geotextiles by the Permittivity method.
 ASTM D 4533 Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Geotextiles.
 ASTM D 4632 Test Method for Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles (Grab Method).
 ASTM D 4716 Test Method for Determining the (In-plane) Flow Rate
per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a
Geosynthetic Using Constant Head.
 ASTM D4751 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent
Opening Size of a Geotextile
 ASTM D 4833 Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of
Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products.
 ASTM D 5101 Measuring the Soil-Geotextile System Clogging
Potential (By the Gradient Ratio).
 ASTM D 5321 Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient
of Soil and Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and
Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method.
 ASTM D 5567 Hydraulic Conductivity Ratio (HCR) Testing of
Soil/Geotextile Systems.
1.2.2 MATERIALS
PVD shall consist of a continuous plastic drainage core surrounded by a non-woven
geotextile filter material. Paper filter shall not be permitted. The geotextile shall be wrapped
tightly around the core, and shall be securely seamed in a manner that, under the confined
pressure, will not permit the entry of the filter or other materials that may cause any
obstruction and impede the flow in the channels of the core.
The drains shall be free from defects, rips or holes. During shipment, the drains shall be
protected from damage. During storage on site, the storage area shall be such that the drains
are protected from direct sunlight, mud, debris and detrimental substances.
Manufacturer’s certification shall be provided for all drain materials delivered to the project.
The characteristic data of weight, width and thickness of the drains as specified by the
manufacturer shall be submitted with the Tender, which is particularly suitable for vacuum
consolidation method. Such values shall be routinely checked in the quality control of the
PVDs delivered to the site.
At least 28 (twenty eight) days before commencement of the drain installation inclusive of
Trial Section, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three samples selected at random
from the initial 50,000 m consignment of PVD. The samples shall be tested at an approved
laboratory. In addition, a sample of any proposed splicing of the prefabricated drain, of
sufficient length and extended minimum 1.0 m on each side of the splice, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
Later on, one samples shall be selected at random from every 10,000 m or when changing
the consignment of PVD drain for routine testing at an approved laboratory as directed by
the Engineer. The routine tests shall include, but not limited to, the weight, width, thickness
and apparent opening size of the filter. Other tests shall be done at the direction of the
Engineer.
The PVD materials shall conform to the following specifications:
Properties Test Requirements VN standard
Designation 22 TCN 262
2000

Apparent Opening Size (AOS) O95, ASTM D Less than 75 Less than 75
µm 4751-87
Grab Tensile Strength, kN ASTM D Greater than 1 Greater than 1

(longitudinally only) 4632-91
Discharge Capacity (m3/yr) at 1 day, ASTM D Greater than 500 Applied pressure
200kPa and hydraulic gradient i of 1. 4716-87 of 350kPa
Permeability of filter, m/sec ASTM D 4491 Greater than Greater than

1 x 10-4 1 x 10-4
The Contractor may propose alternative PVD material which has equivalent or better
characteristics with sufficient track record in a similar field.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
PVDs shall be installed by use of a mandrel. The installation method and equipment shall
satisfy the following criteria:
 No frictional resistance between inside of the mandrel and the drain.
 Minimal size of the mandrel compared with the drain to reduce the zone of smear.
 An anchor shall prevent fines from entering into the mandrel during installation and
shall anchor the PVD efficiently during withdrawal of the mandrel.
 The installation rig shall have proper means to assure that the mandrel is kept
vertical during the drain installation period.
The Contractor shall submit details of the sequence and method of installation. The
submittal shall as a minimum contain the following detailed information:
 Size, type, weight, maximum pushing force, and configuration of the installation rig.
 Dimensions and length of mandrel.
 Dimension and details of anchor.
 Description of proposed installation procedures.
 Proposed methods for overcoming obstructions.
 Proposed methods of splicing drains.
Approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to install
PVDs in accordance with the plans and specifications. If, at any time, the Engineer considers
that the method of installation does not produce satisfactory drains, then the Contractor shall
alter his method and/or equipment as necessary to comply with the Contract.
The mandrel shall protect the prefabricated drain materials from tear, cuts and abrasion
during installation and shall be withdrawn after the installation of the drain. The drain shall
be provided with an anchor plate at the bottom, to anchor the drain at the required depth at
the time of mandrel removal. Dimension of anchor shall be (85x140)mm or as otherwise

Full production of PVD installation shall not commence before the Engineer has verified,
through trials within the work area that Contractor’s equipment, methods and materials are
functioning satisfactorily in accordance with these specifications.
The drains shall be installed vertically, or as directed by the Engineer.
The top of the drain shall be placed within in tolerance of 100 mm from the specified
location, and the drains shall be installed with a tolerance of 1:20 from the vertical and 1%
according to designed depth.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with suitable means for verifying the position of
the mandrel and the depth of the drain at any time.
Drains that are damaged, or improperly installed, will be rejected. The rejected drains may
be left in place. Replacement drains shall be placed as close to the correct position as
possible. All rejected drains shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Splices or connections in the vertical drain material shall be carried out in a professional
manner in order to ensure continuity and without reducing the flow characteristics of the
PVD.
Supply and installation of drains as described in this section will be measured by the linear
metre of installed PVD. Each drain shall be measured from top elevation of the sand blanket
to the tip elevation of the drain. Additional lengths required for splicing and the lengths
protruding above the top of the sand blanket shall not be measured.
Payment for prefabricated vertical drains will be made at the contract unit price per linear
meter, which price shall be full compensation for the cost of furnishing the full length of
drain material, installing the drain in accordance with the plans and specifications, and shall
also include the cost of furnishing all tools, materials, labour, equipment and all other costs
necessary to complete the required work. No direct payment will be made for unacceptable
drains or for any delays or expenses incurred through changes necessitated by improper or
unacceptable material or equipment, but the costs of such shall be included in the unit price
bid for this work.
03500-01 Prefabricated Vertical Drain (PVD) m
2. PREFABRICATED HORIZONTAL DRAINS

2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of supply and installation of prefabricated plastic horizontal strip
drains (PHD) installed at the base of embankment to facilitate discharge of water discharged
from prefabricated vertical drains (PVD). The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labour,
equipment, and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of the
horizontal strip drains in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and with the
requirements of these specifications. The drains shall consist of a polymeric core enclosed in
a suitable filter material and shall be spaced and arranged as shown on the plans or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
As for PVDs.

2.2.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
The strip drain shall be a prefabricated type made up of a polymeric drainage core wrapped
in a filter made of a non-woven fabric of continuous filaments of 100% polypropylene. The
core shall be fabricated with suitable drainage channels.
Both filter and core structure should be strong and flexible, able to follow to topographical
change without breaking and cutting. The filter material should be resistant to clogging and
the core structure able to resist heavy pressure, whilst still maintaining long term high level
drainage ability.
Drain Criteria Standard
Width (min) 200 mm Indicative dimension only
Thickness (min) 8 mm Indicative dimension only
Compressive strength (min) 600 kN/m2 ASTM D1621
Fungus resistance No growth ASTM G21
Discharge capacity 75 lpm ASTM D4716
Fabric
Fabric Weight (min) 120 gm/m2 ASTM D3776
Grab tensile strength (min) 400N ASTM D4632
Elongation at break >40 % ASTM D4632
Puncture strength (min) 260N ASTM D4833
AOS 215 micron ASTM D4751
Flow rate (min) 3,000 lpm/m2 ASTM D4491
Permeability (min) 0.30 cm/sec ASTM D4491
UV Resistance, 500 hr. 80% retained ASTM D4355
The Contractor shall submit drain samples and indicate the source of the proposed materials
prior to delivery to the site and shall allow sufficient time for the Engineer to evaluate the
material.
Prior to the installation of drains within the designated area the Contractor shall demonstrate
that his equipment, method and materials produce a satisfactory installation in accordance
with these specifications. For this purpose, the Contractor will be required to install trial
drains at locations designated by the Engineer. Payment will be at the bid price per linear
meter for the drains. Payment will not be made for installing unsatisfactory trial drains.
As a minimum experience requirement, the contractor shall have successfully completed
three drain installation projects. The three projects shall be identified by project name,
location, project description, size, completion date, and contract manager.
Approval by the Engineer of the method and equipment used to install the trial drains shall
not constitute, necessarily, acceptance of the method for the remainder of the project. If at
any time, the Engineer considers that the method of installation does not produce a
satisfactory drain, the Contractor shall alter his method and/or equipment as necessary to
comply with these specifications.
Drains will be located by the Engineer. The location of the drains shall not vary by more than
150mm from the locations indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Drains that are out of their proper location by more than 150 mm or drains that are damaged
in construction, or drains that are improperly completed shall be rejected by the Engineer,
and no compensation will be allowed for any materials furnished or for any work performed
on such drains.
The contractor shall provide the Engineer with suitable means of making a linear
determination of the quantity of drain material used.

Splices or connections in the drainage material shall be done in a workmanlike manner and
so as to insure continuity of drain material.
The Contractor shall observe precautions necessary for protection of instrumentation
devices. After instrumentation devices have been installed, the Contractor shall replace at
his cost any equipment that is damaged or becomes unreliable as a result of his negligence.
Prefabricated horizontal drains will be measured by the linear meter for the full length of
drain complete and in place.
Payment for prefabricated horizontal drains will be made at the contract unit price per linear
meter, which price shall be full compensation for the cost of furnishing the full length of
drain material, installing the drain in accordance with the plans and specifications, provision
of channels to dispose of water discharging from the horizontal drains, and shall also include
the cost of furnishing all tools, materials, labour, equipment and all other costs necessary to
complete the required work. No direct payment will be made for unacceptable drainage
drains or for any delays or expenses incurred through changes necessitated by improper or
unacceptable material or equipment, but the costs of such shall be included in the unit price
bid for this work.
03500-02 Prefabricated Horizontal Drain m
3. SURCHARGE FILL
3.1 DESCRIPTION
The surcharge fill shall be placed gradually at the rate indicated on the Drawings. The
assumed duration of surcharging is shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare
their schedule based on this surcharge duration. The Engineer shall be responsible for
determining when consolidation requirements have been met, and will notify the Contractor
when the requirement has been met, and the surcharge may be removed. If the Engineer
determines that a longer surcharge duration than that shown on the drawings is required, and
the surcharging is a critical path activity, this may be the basis for a claim for an extension of
time.
Filling and waiting periods. The suggested filling period for improving the stability and the
estimated waiting period for the consolidation work are described on the Drawings. The rate
of filling has to be controlled to minimise any instability problem.
The side slope shall not be greater than 1 (V): 2 (H).
The Engineer’s criterion for acceptance of completion of consolidation is based on the
degree of settlement (defined as the ratio of the current settlement to the projected final
settlement estimated from Asaoka’s method) as stated on the Drawings. If not otherwise
stated on the Drawings, residual settlement (post-construction settlement) for acceptance in
15 years shall be less than:
 10 cm near bridge abutment
 20 cm near culvert
 30 cm in fill area other than bridge abutment and culvert zone

Materials for surcharge fill shall comply with the requirements of specification section
03400 – Embankment Construction.
Surcharge fill shall be placed to lines and levels shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The construction requirements shall be in accordance with specification section
03400 – Embankment Construction.
Provision and placement and removal of surcharge shall not be measured separately for
payment.
4. INSTRUMENTATION
4.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall throughout the works supply, install and monitor various types of
instruments for monitoring settlement, horizontal deformation, pore water pressure and
ground water table in the fill and natural ground.
The instruments shall be placed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer,
and shall be maintained by the Contractor during the construction period and up to the end of
the Contract.
The Contractor shall take utmost care to ensure that none of the instrumentation is damaged
or disturbed in any way, and kept in good working order as long as they are required. For all
those instruments, which project through and above the fill suitable barriers at a distance of
minimum 0.75 m around each individual instrument or group of instruments shall be
installed and warning signs shall be erected. Heavy construction equipment shall not be used
within 1.0 m distance of projecting instruments. Any instrumentation damaged or disturbed
by construction operations shall be replaced or repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
All instruments shall be labelled with their reference number at the location where the
readings or measurements are taken. The labelling shall be according to a system and
method to be agreed with the Engineer.
The installation of all instrumentation shall be as specified on the Drawings. All instruments
shall comply with the requirements in section 2.7 of this Specification for each particular
type.
Boreholes for instruments shall be drilled by a suitable method to provide a clean and stable
hole of the required diameter to the correct depth. Boreholes shall be cased as required.
Boreholes shall be drilled using clean water. Drilling mud or polymer additives shall only be
used with the approval of the Engineer.
During drilling, care shall be taken to ensure that a minimum of material is lost from outside
the casing. Surging of casing shall not be allowed, and flushing of drilling water up the
outside of the casing shall be kept to a minimum.
For any borehole or part thereof that requires grouting during the installation of instruments,
the grout shall be poured into the boreholes using a tremie pipe.
4.2 INSTRUMENT TYPES AND REQUIREMENTS
4.2.1 SETTLEMENT PLATE
Settlement plates shall consist of a base plate 500×500 mm connected to steel extension rods
and protection pipes as shown on the Drawings. Length of each extension rod shall be
exactly 1.0 m.

The plates shall be installed on the top of the working platform in such a way that the top of
the base plate rests horizontally. Before placing of any embankment material, the Engineer
shall inspect the complete installation and check the initial elevations on top of the base plate
and on top of the rod. The rod and pipe shall be extended as the embankment construction
advances.
Based on the settlement records, the Contractor shall calculate and record the bottom
elevation of the working platform for each settlement plate.
4.2.2 OBSERVATION WELL
The observation wells shall consist of 75 mm dia. galvanized iron pipe with a perforated
section at the end as shown on the Drawings.
4.2.3 ELECTRICAL PIEZOMETER
Electric piezometers shall be supplied from a reputed manufacturer. Information on the
proposed type and brand shall be submitted with the tender together with technical
documentation.
4.2.4 INCLINOMETER
Each inclinometer access tube shall be installed in a pre-bored hole to a depth specified on
the drawings. The type of inclinometer and method of installation shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Inclinometer access tubes shall be ABS plastic self- aligning casing with couplings. The four
internal key ways shall be oriented at 90 degrees to each other. A biaxial inclinometer probe
unit, a rechargeable probe unit and a rechargeable portable digital readout unit shall be used.
The probe shall be waterproof and corrosion proof, and shall incorporate two force-balanced
servo-accelerometers housed in a stainless steel case. The body of the inclinometer probe
shall be provided with two pairs of spring loaded stainless steel wheels. Measurement range
shall be ± 30 degrees from the vertical.
4.2.5 GROUTING
For all instruments placed in bore holes where grouting is required, the grout shall be a
bentonite - cement mixture, containing sufficient water to achieve a pumpable mix. The
proportions of the mix shall be such as to conform as closely as possible to the strength or
consistency of the natural soils present. Trials shall be conducted with different mixes of
bentonite and cement (ratio by weight from 4:1 to 8:1) to ascertain the relationship with
strength. Specimens shall first be cured and stored, and then tested in unconfined
compression at intervals of 1 day, 3 days, 7 days and 14 days. Three specimens shall be
tested on each occasion. On the basis of the trials, the bentonite/cement ratio shall be decided.
The sources of bentonite and cement shall be the same as those used to be used for
installation.
For instruments being removed during or after the works the hole in the ground shall
immediately be sealed by bentonite/cement grout for the full depth.
The grouting procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
4.2.6 STABILIZING ELECTRONIC READOUT DEVICES
All electronic readout devices and transducers shall be shaded from direct sunlight during
use. Probes that are used inside access tubes shall be placed inside the tube and allowed to
come to a stable temperature for at least 10 minutes before use. Zero or starting values shall
only be taken once the temperature stabilization is complete.

4.3 INSTALLATION AND MONITORING
4.3.1 PERSONNEL
Personnel involved in the installation and monitoring of instrumentation shall consist of the
following:
 Senior Instrumentation Technician: At least two (2) years experience in
instrumentation installation.
The Instrumentation Technician shall be on site throughout the installation, commissioning
and all monitoring. He shall be responsible for installation and monitoring, and shall ensure
that all the instruments are in working order. Monitoring shall be carried out as directed by
the Instrumentation Engineer.
No separate payment shall be made for the cost of providing the services of the
Instrumentation Engineer and Instrumentation Technician, which shall be considered
incidental to the works.
4.3.2 INSTALLATION RECORDS
Installation records of each instrument shall be prepared containing the following
information as appropriate for each instrument type:
 Existing ground level at the time of installation.
 Weather conditions.
 Lengths, width, diameters, orientation, and depth.
 Plant and equipment used, and diameter and depth of any drill casing used.
 Readings required during installation to ensure that all previous steps have been
followed correctly, including acceptance tests.
 Simplified log of ground conditions (in drill holes).
 Type of backfill used.
 Problems encountered, delays, unusual features of installation, and any events that
may have a bearing on instrument behaviour.
 A record of commissioning information and readings.
4.3.3 INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION REPORT
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer an Instrument Installation Report,
which shall incorporate the installation records for all individual instruments and shall
include but not be limited to the following information:
 Text describing the work carried out and the types of instruments installed.
 All installation record sheets.
 Plan and cross-section drawings at a scale of 1:200 showing the locations, elevations
and details of all instruments.
 Values of all base readings taken together with any subsequent readings till the time
of commissioning.
4.3.4 BASE READINGS AND COMMISSIONING
After installation, the functioning of each instrument shall be checked. As a part of the
commissioning, three sets of readings shall be taken and compared. If significant differences

or anomalies are found, then new readings shall be made until the results are satisfactorily
uniform. The base reading shall be taken as the average of the last three readings.
As a basis for commissioning, instrumentation records containing the following information
shall be provided:
 Instrument reference number and type.
 Chainage and offset (coordinates if appropriate)
 Date of installation.
 Initial readings.
4.3.5 MONITORING
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the frequency for taking readings of instruments
shall be as follows:
Stage Lateral Settlement Piezometer Inclinometer
displacement plate
stakes
Filling period - Weekly Weekly Weekly Weekly
Fill elevation <
+2m
Filling period - Daily Daily Daily Daily
Fill elevation >
+2m
Waiting period Weekly Weekly Weekly Weekly
Any instrument found to be faulty, shall promptly be brought to the Engineer’s attention so
that remedial measures can be investigated.
Whenever sets of data are measured, they shall be compared to previous sets of data. If
anomalous readings are present which may differ from the expected value or trend, then
further readings shall be taken immediately and the Engineer shall be kept informed. If the
anomalous values persist, then the Engineer shall be informed and an investigation shall be
carried out to ascertain the reasons for the anomalous readings.
The records of instrumentation readings shall include but not be limited to the following
information:
 Instrument type, reference number
 Location by coordinates, or by chainage offset.
 Date of installation, and base reading.
 Date and result of readings
 Initials of personnel responsible.
 Relevant comments or remarks.
4.3.6 MONITORING REPORTS
The Contractor shall submit a monitoring report at the end of each calendar month. A
proposal for the format of the report shall be submitted to the Engineer (including all
graphical presentations) for approval at least two weeks before the submission of the first
monthly report.
Each monthly report shall include but not be limited to:
 A description of monitoring works performed during the previous month.
 Information on reading anomalies or corrections, and factors which may have
influenced the measured data.
 Observations and remarks.
 Drawings showing installed locations of instruments (taken from installation report).
 Data tabulations or plots of instrument readings as described hereafter.
The Contractor shall have suitable software for generation of the required plots and
tabulations. The zero time and time axis to be used in all the plots and tabulations shall be
agreed with the Engineer. The time axis shall be marked in days from “day zero” and an
indication of date or month shall be included in the axis. The plots and tabulations presented
each month shall include all previous readings.
All plots, where time forms the horizontal axis shall have same scale for the time axis. The
development of piezometric pressure (vacuum) in the PVD and settlement records shall
always be plotted against fill thickness (fill and PVD installation history). The plot for
ground water table shall also include rainfall records. Where the above measurements have
been done in the same location, all these plots shall be combined on the same sheet, where
possible. Final layouts, scales and details for the presentations shall be agreed with the
Engineer at the time of submitting the format.
The tabulations and plots shall include, but not be limited to, the information given in the
table below:
Instrument Plots and Summaries Required
Settlement Plate Settlement vs. Time (Tabulation and plot)
Lateral displacement observing Maximum horizontal movement relative to base

stake Lateral displacement vs. time (tabulations and plot).
Inclinometer Graphs of horizontal movement of access tube relative

to base readings against depth.
Piezometer/ Vacuum Gauge Excess piezometric pressure / vacuum versus time for
each piezometer / gauge and versus depth for latest set
of readings (plots).
4.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantities of instruments to be paid for shall be the actual number of each type of
instrument supplied, installed and commission.
Monitoring and reporting shall not be measured separately for payment.
4.4.2 PAYMENT
This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate for each
particular instrument supplied and installed, which rates and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labour, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work. This includes the maintenance of all
instruments during the contract period, and monitoring and reporting of all results.
Pay Items:
03500-03 Settlement Plate each

03500-04 Observation Well each
03500-05 Electrical Piezometer each
03500-06 Inclinometer each
03500-07 Lateral displacement observing stake each
5. GEOTEXTILES
5.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of supplying and installing approved geotextile material as a part of
the road earthworks.
5.2 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the materials to be
used shall be as follows:
(a) Separation Geotextile: Non-woven
Non-woven geo-textile sheets shall be UV-stabilized, made of 100% polypropylene yarns
which may be mechanically or thermally bonded from continuous filament.
The tensile strength shall be more than 12 kN/ m to ASTM D 4595 in both directions at the
breaking elongation of not more than 40%. Puncture resistance to ASTM D 4833 shall be at
least 350N.
(a) High Strength Geotextile: Woven
The geotextile sheets shall be UV-stabilized and made of polypropylene yarns.
The ultimate tensile strength to ASTM D 4595 shall be more than 200 kN/ m in both
directions at breaking elongation of not more than 20%.
5.3 CONSTRUCTION
Geotextile sheets shall be installed at the specified locations in the arrangement as shown on
the Drawings. Prior to laying of the geo-textile all preceding works shall have been
completed and the ground surface shall be cleared of all sharp materials that could puncture
or tear the fabric. The ground surface shall be flat and level and any unevenness shall not
exceed 100 mm and the inclination shall be less than 5%.
Laps in the geotextile material sheets shall be made by either overlapping each sheet by a
minimum of 300 mm or stitching using a 30 mm double overlocking seam. If vertical soil
drains are to be installed after the laying of the geo-textile, the Engineer may require the use
of stitched joints to minimize the disturbance to the geotextile during the subsequent work
on the soil drains joint direction.
Geotextile sheet shall be measured by square metres for the net area of geotextile shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. No measurement will be made for joints or for
surplus material laid outside the requirements of the Engineer.
The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for
the pay items as listed below. The prices and payment shall be full compensation for all costs
including furnishing, hauling, placing joining and for all materials, labour, tools, equipment
and incidentals necessary to complete the works as described in this Clause.
03500-09 Separation Geotextile (12kN/m non-woven) m2

03500-10 High Strength Geotextile (200kN/m woven) m2
6. DEEP MIXING METHOD (SOIL CEMENT COLUMN)

6.1 DESCRIPTION
Deep mixing or the soil cement column method is the process of improving properties of
existing soils, which are essentially soft clay, by mixing stabilizing material, i.e. cement,
with existing soils. Soil cement columns can be installed by mechanical mixing method by
means of wet mixing (slurry type). The mixing of stabilizing material to the existing soils at
various levels shall create soil columns with a predetermined strength, depth and diameter.
The execution of deep mixing method shall refer to
 TCXDVN 385: 2006 “Stabilization of Soft Soil by the Soil Cement Column
Method”
Soil cement columns shall be installed using special equipment designed and manufactured
specifically for this purpose and the operator shall have at least 3 years experience in
installing deep soil cement columns using the relevant special equipment. Details of the
equipment to be used and the personnel carrying out the work shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before the equipment or the personnel are mobilised to the site. The
equipment shall include the devices for monitoring the cement volume and mixing process.
This data will be automatically included in a printout with data at one meter interval which
the Contractor must submit at the end of every column installation to serve as a record for the
satisfactory completion of the work. The depth, minimum finished diameter, spacing and
pattern of the installed columns shall be shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer and the Contractor shall take these into consideration when preparing his proposed
equipment and construction method.
6.2 MATERIALS
6.2.1 STABILIZING MATERIAL
Stabilizing material shall be cement at the quantities given in the table below:
Stabilizing Material Quantity per cubic meter of existing soil (kg/m3)
Cement 180 to 250
Cement shall be Cement in accordance with TCVN 5439-2004. The materials shall be stored
in containers to prevent damage from moisture before application.
Water shall be in accordance with the requirements for water for concrete as specified in
section 07100 Concrete and Concrete Structures.
6.2.2 SOIL INVESTIGATION AND TRIAL MIX TESTS
The contractor shall perform soil investigations and trial mix tests to determine the soil
profile and the appropriate cement content for the soil cement column in accordance with
requirements stated in the following sections.
At a ratio of two (2) % of cement soil columns improved by deep mixing method, a set of
undisturbed soil samples shall be collected at depths of 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 m and 18m through
rotary wash boring, and the following laboratory tests shall be performed on each sample:
 Determination of natural moisture content, unit weight, Atterberg limits and sieve
analysis for all samples.
 Unconfined compression tests on all samples.
The soil investigation report shall include tables summarizing test results and boring logs in
graphical form.

6.2.3 LABORATORY TRIAL MIX AND TESTS
For the soil collected from depths of 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 and 18 m, trial mixes shall be prepared to
determine the unconfined compressive strength and modulus of the mixture of existing clay
with cement through unconfined compression tests. The test shall be performed with at least
15 samples for each mixture proportion as given in the table below. Unconfined
compression tests shall be made when the test samples are cured at 7 days, 14 days and 28
days. At least three samples shall be tested for each different curing time. If volume of
sample soil is insufficient to conduct the above trial mix, additional borehole shall be
installed nearby area.
Materials Quantities (kg / m3 of existing soil)

Cement 180 220 250
The water cement ratio (W/C) shall range between 0.8 and 1.0. The Contractor, based on the
results from the trials, shall determine a ratio that will be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
The design unconfined compressive strength from unconfined compression test at 28 days
(Qd) shall be as shown on the Drawings.
* Qd; Design Compressive Strength at 28 days = as shown on the Drawings
* Qf; Minimum Field Compressive Strength at 28 days=Qd
* Qu, lab; Minimum Laboratory Compressive Strength at 28 days (trial mix target strength
to determine a mix proportion) = 3 x Qf
However, the actual quantity of stabilizing materials to be used in the field shall not be less
than minimum values shown in the table above.
Unconfined compression test shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 2166-85. The test
sample shall have minimum diameter of 50 mm and a height of 2 times the diameter. The
casing shall be the type that can be removed without disturbing of the sample. The sample
shall be cured by covering with plastic sheet to prevent dehydration of water.
In the mixture test, the stabilizing materials shall be of the same type and characteristics as to
be used in the field as shown below:
Field Soil Cement Column Mixture Test
Wet Mixing Mix stabilizing material slurry of same water proportion to
be used in the field with existing clay.
The report shall describe the mixing method, storage and curing procedure and the test
results. The report shall also include:
 Tables summarizing unconfined compressive strength, modulus and unit weight of
mixed samples at different curing times.
 Graph showing unconfined compressive strength of mixture against quantity of
stabilizing material and graph showing unconfined compressive strength against
curing time.
6.3 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
6.3.1 GENERAL
Soil cement columns shall be made with suitable machines, tools, and equipment to create
columns as specified in the Drawings and Specifications. The construction shall have
computer printout for each column. The printout for each column shall be made immediately
upon completion of each column and shall show the depth of the column; quantity of
stabilizing material used or remained in the container and graph showing quantities of
stabilizing material used at various levels.

The Contractor shall submit the list of machines, tools, and equipment with explanation to
the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of work. Equipment used for the trial
must be the same type as for the main construction.
Upon approval, the Contractor shall construct a set of three preliminary test columns (trial
columns which are non-working piles) for verification. Two test columns shall have a
diameter of 0.7 m and a depth of 20m and one test column shall have a diameter of 0.7 m and
a depth of 10m to demonstrate ability of machines, tools and equipment. The quantities and
types of stabilizing materials shall be first approved by the Engineer, which may be
determined by mixture test. The unconfined compressive strength of each column at various
levels shall be tested at 28 days and shall not be less than Qd. The test columns shall be
checked to confirm that it has diameter of not less than 95 % of diameter specified on the
Drawings.
After the cement columns have been completed, all the disturbed and loose soil above the
cement columns from cut-off elevation shall be removed and the exposed surface of the
column shall be covered with wet cloth or other approved material to prevent drying of
column before placement of the sand stabilized cement mat.
6.3.2 WET MIXING (SLURRY TYPE)
For soil cement columns made by wet mixing, the Contractor shall provide a container for
stabilizing material, a container for water, water pump, mixture agitator, mixture machine
with steel shaft and vane at the end, and measuring device for determining the quantities of
materials, pressure of slurry being injected, and a device to measure speed of rotation and
lifting of shaft.
Mixture of material and water shall be continuously agitated to remain uniformity.
Proportion of stabilizing material and water shall be of the proportion as tested and approved
by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the right to inspect the proportion of slurry at any
time. The slurry shall be used within two hours. The expired slurry shall not be used unless
admixture is used to retard the setting of mixture with the approval from the Engineer.
Mixture machine must be able to rotate and lift the shaft during wet mixing with existing
soils at approved speed to produce uniform column. The speed for rotation and lifting of
shaft and mixing shall be determined in the actual field test. Mixing vane shall be able to
thoroughly mix soil and stabilizing material. Shaft must have the length of not less than the
depth of soil cement column. Mixing vane shall have diameter of not less than diameter of
column as specified in the Drawing.
Pump to inject slurry into soil must have adequate pressure to continuously inject slurry into
soil.
Measuring device for materials and slurry shall have accuracy of reading to 2 kg.
In addition to the above, the construction equipment shall satisfy the following
requirements.
 The equipment for mixing shall be provided with blades, storage tanks for cement,
mixing blade rotation and facility to control withdrawal speeds.
 The ejector type of mixing equipment shall be used. Cement slurry shall be
discharged to secure the desired mixing quality for small particle clay predominantly
encountered in Vietnamese ground.
 The equipment shall be durable to rotate the mixing blade at a required speed.
 The withdrawal speed during mixing shall be established in the field after the
experience gained from the construction of the trial cement column.

 The number of blade rotation, which is defined as the number of rotation of the
mixing blades in a soil-stabilizer mixture in a given 1-m-long section while the
blades are raised and lowered, shall be computed as follows.
T = M x {(Nd/Vd) + (Nu/Vu)}
Where:
T: number of blade rotation (n/m)
∑M: total number of mixing blades
Nd: rotation speed of the blades during penetration (rpm)
Vd: mixing blade penetration velocity (m/min)
Nu: rotational speed of the blades during withdrawal (rpm)
Vu: mixing blade withdrawal velocity (m/min)
 The number of blade rotation as defined shall not be less than 350. The mixing blade
shall be designed to ensure homogeneous mixture of the soil and the stabilizing
agent. Tolerance of deviation of the mixing blade diameter shall not be more than
5%.
 The control of the mixing process shall be computerized to assure the best quality of
mixture. After the placement of each of the column, one printout result shall be
generated from the computer showing the column number, time, depth of the column,
content of cement slurry used in the mixing process and the number of rotation. The
process must be recorded and submitted for all the columns to be installed for the
checking of the integrity and quality of the end products.
6.3.3 DRY MIXING
The Contractor shall not use dry mixing type for this project.
6.3.4 FIELD TESTS
The test column in the field shall be tested as follows:
 Unconfined compressive strength on cored samples from one column
 Verification of column dimensions and uniformity of column by pulling-out an
entire test column (preliminary test column of 10m length) from the ground. The
column shall be inspected for size, shape and uniformity of the stabilization along
the entire length of the column. The Contractor shall submit the pulling method to
the Engineer for approval before operation.
 Pile static load test on test column (preliminary test column of 20m length) using
kentledge, tension pile or ground anchorage system
Prior to the start of construction the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the
test procedures for determining unconfined compressive strengths and the diameter and
depth of columns. The cost of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
The unconfined compressive strengths of column at various levels including diameter and
depth of column must be determined. However, in case that the test for unconfined
compressive strength cannot be satisfactorily attained, pile load test may be required to
determine the capacity of column. The pile load test of column shall be conducted at 28 days
of curing time.
Any pile which fails the above tests shall be replaced by one or more piles by the Contractor
or as directed by the Engineer and an additional test shall be conducted for the replaced piles.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is impractical or inadvisable to install substitute piles in
place of a failed pile, the Contractor shall submit proposals to rectify the defect. The
proposal is subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
In addition, the Contractor shall at his expense carry out two more additional working load
tests. The piles for these tests shall be selected by the Engineer.
6.3.5 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
Unconfined compressive strength of column by the cored sample on site shall be made at
interval not more than 1 m with age of 28 days old having a value of no less than Qd. If the
requirements are not met, judgment shall be made by the Engineer.
6.3.6 VERIFICATION OF COLUMN DIMENSIONS
Verification of column dimensions shall be made as specified herein.
Column dimensions can be checked by exposing a top 2m portion of completed column
improved by deep mixing method. The column shall be inspected for size, shape and
uniformity of the stabilization. The Contractor shall submit the proposed method on the
exposure of column top portion for inspection to the Engineer for approval before operation.
6.3.7 PILE LOAD TEST ON COLUMN
Pile load test shall be performed in according to ASTM D1143-81 on a soil cement column
of age over 28 days applying 1.5 times of design working load shown in the drawing. The
pile top shall be properly prepared for the test. The method of testing shall be approved by
the engineer prior to execution of the work. Pile load test shall be performed with capacity of
not less than 31 ton for 0.70 m diameter cement columns when the maximum settlement at
pile head shall be less than 10% of column diameter.
6.3.8 FREQUENCY OF TESTING
The number of columns to be tested shall be as follows:
 Take wet-grab samples of the soil / binder mixture at the rate of at least one sample
for each 600m3 of soil / binder production with a minimum of one sample per day.
Each sample shall be of sufficient size to produce four (4) specimens for testing. The
specimens shall be cylindrical with a nominal diameter of 75mm and length 150mm.
Test one cylinder for unconfined compressive strength at 7 days, one at 14 days, and
one at 28 days. Reserve the fourth cylinder and test at 56 days if the 28 day result
does not meet the required strength. Determine unit weight on each cylinder as part
of the unconfined compressive strength testing process.
 Frequency of coring for determination of unconfined compressive strength shall be
performed at a ratio of two (2) % of total number of columns improved by deep
mixing method.
 Frequency of verification of column size and uniformity of column by pulling-out
test shall be conducted one preliminary test column (non-working column prior to
the commencement of working columns).
 Frequency of verification of column size at a top 2m portion shall be conducted at a
ration of one (1) % of total number of columns improved by deep mixing method. If
the Contractor changes a part of his construction method, additional test shall be
conducted.
 Frequency of pile static load test shall be conducted for one preliminary test column
(non-working column prior to the commencement of working columns) and one
(1) % of total number of working columns improved by deep mixing method. If the
Contractor changes a part of his construction method, additional preliminary test
column shall be conducted and pile load test shall follow. If there is more than one
machine carrying out column construction, one preliminary test column shall be
carried out for each machine.
 Preliminary test columns shall be constructed to the same diameter and length, and
with the same equipment as to be used for the working piles.
6.3.9 ALLOWABLE DEVIATION
The Contractor shall construct each column to the depth, spacing, vertical alignment,
location and with unconfined compressive strength as specified in the Drawing and these
Specifications. In such case that any column constructed with smaller diameter or specified
strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order construction of additional column or
reconstruct the defective column at the expense of the Contractor.
Allowable deviation shall be as follows:
 Vertical Deviation of column shall not be more than 1%.
 Position of each column and spacing between columns shall not be deviated more
than 100 mm in any direction.
 Diameter of column shall not be less than 95% of specified diameter.
 Unconfined compressive strength shall not be less than Qd kPa.
6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
Cement columns shall be measured in linear meters from the tip of the column to the cut-off
level. The length of cement columns shall be in accordance with the dimensions shown on
the Drawings and accepted by the Engineer. Cut-off lengths will not be measured for
payment.
6.4.2 PAYMENT
The work measured as provided above will be paid for at the Contract unit price per linear
meter of cement columns. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including labour, tools, equipment, all kinds of tests as specified herein
or in the Drawings and incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work.
03500-11 Soil Cement Columns (Working Pile）including Field Testing m
03500-12 Soil Cement Columns (Preliminary Test Column; Non-working
Pile) including Field Testing m
7. SAND CEMENT STABILIZED MAT

7.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of a stabilized mat composed of soil mixed with Portland cement and
water, constructed in multi-layers on a prepared and accepted subgrade in accordance with
these Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on
the Drawings and subject to approval by the Engineer.
7.2 MATERIALS
7.2.1 SOIL
Soil shall be sand or silty sand with a fines content of less than 25%. The soil shall be free
from contamination by topsoil, vegetation and other organic matter, and any deleterious
materials. Salt and gypsum content shall be less than 2%, Organic content shall be less than
2%.

7.2.2 CEMENT
Cement shall conform to the requirements for Cement in accordance with TCVN 5439-1991.
The materials shall be stored in containers to prevent damage from moisture before
application.
7.2.3 WATER
Water shall be clean and free from harmful matter, and shall conform to
TCXDVN-302-2004. Any indication of unsoundness, marked change in time of setting or a
reduction of more than 10% in strength of mortar mixtures made with the water; as
compared with mixtures made with distilled water shall be cause for rejection.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
7.3.1 MIX DESIGN
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval samples of materials to be used
in the Mat together with the Contractor’s proposed mix design. The proportions of cement
and moisture content required will be determined by means of cylinders tests but in general
the cement content shall not be less than 3% by dry weight. Cylinders tests will be carried
out in accordance with AASHTO test method T134 for cement stabilized mixes subject to
modification to use the compaction effort defined in AASHTO test method T180. The mix
will be so selected that the strength shall be at least equal to the design strength as indicated
in this specification section or as shown on the Drawings.
The design compressive strength (Qd) of the cement stabilized mat shall be an unconfined
compressive strength of not less than 0.2MPa at 28 days of curing tested in accordance with
AASHTO test method T208.
* Qd; Design Compressive Strength at 28 days = 0.2MPa
* Qf; Minimum Field Compressive Strength at 28 days=0.2MPa
* Qu, lab; Minimum Laboratory Compressive Strength at 28 days (trial mix target strength
to determine a mix proportion) =0.6MPa (3 times of Qd and Qf)
7.3.2 EQUIPMENT
Equipment shall be suitable for the work specified, consist of motor graders, water tankers,
pneumatic rollers, vibrating rollers or steel wheel rollers together with dump trucks and shall
have met with the approval of the Engineer as to type, capacity, design and manufacture
before construction is permitted. The equipment shall be capable of constructing the mat to
meet the requirements specified and to permit the measurements required.
7.3.3 INITIAL TESTING
The Contractor shall make and test trial mixes using different proportions of stabilizer and
will select mix proportions that give strengths of test cylinders made and cured in the
laboratory of not less than 105% of the required strength. This mix will be the Approved Mix
for use in the Works. However, regardless of the above requirement, the cement content for
cement stabilized mixes will be not less than 3%.
7.3.4 MIX CONTROL
The entire operation of mixing and compaction of cement stabilized mat shall be subject to
close control and frequent testing will be required as the work proceeds to ensure that the
strength and density requirements are being maintained.
To evaluate the quality of the mix the Contractor shall collect at least 6 samples at every 100
m of cement stabilized road section or 2,500m2 of stabilized area whichever lesser, placed in
the Works for conducting unconfined compression tests. The test results shall not be less
than the required design strength of 0.2MPa.

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer samples of soil for stabilizing at least 10 days in
advance of its use so that any necessary adjustments to the mix design may be made and
approved. Failure to do so will make the Contractor responsible for replacing at his own
expense any sections of work that are unsatisfactory on account of an unsuitable mix.
7.3.5 MIXING
Only mixing by a central plant mix methods shall be used. The materials shall be dry mixed
before addition of water so that cement balls are not formed when water is added. The water
content shall be within two percentage points of the optimum moisture content for the
compaction required. Placing and mixing shall be completed and compaction started within
30 minutes of the addition of water in the case of cement stabilized mixes.
The soil cement shall be placed in uncompacted layers not exceeding 25 centimetres subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer every facility for checking the actual quantities of
cement used in the construction and in the case of central plant mix shall provide equipment
such that the Engineer can check the proportions by calibration tests.
7.3.6 SPREADING AND COMPACTION

A trial section with minimum 50m length shall be constructed first to demonstrate the
correct function of the mixing plant, and the spreading and compaction equipment.
Mixed material shall be placed, levelled and compacted. Adjoining sections of previously
completed mat shall be neat, clean and treated at the interface with slurry of cement, sand
and water. Construction joints shall be trimmed to be vertical before adjoining sections are
constructed.
The layer shall be compacted throughout its depth to 95% of the maximum dry density
obtained from the test method used in mix design. Compaction shall be uniform over the
whole area and shall be done in such a way that no ruts are formed. The use of both steel tired
rollers and pneumatic tired rollers will be required. Compaction shall be completed to the
required standard within 3 hours of mixing for cement stabilized mixes.
7.3.7 PROTECTION
The mat shall be protected as necessary to maintain the surface within the tolerances
specified and to prevent failure from traffic or other causes.
7.3.8 ACCEPTANCE
After final compaction, test cores shall be taken from the mat to determine the thickness at
intervals not greater than 100 meters. Any part of the mat which fails to meet the
Specifications or which originally having met the Specifications subsequently suffers
damage or deformation shall be rebuilt to the Specifications to the full depth of the mat at the
Contractor’s expense.
Coring with unconfined compressive strength testing to ASTM D2166-06 shall be carried
out as basis for field strength check, at intervals not greater than 100m.
7.4 MEASUREMENT
Cement stabilized mat shall be measured in cubic meters of material complete in place and
approved by the Engineer. Measurement will be based on the cross section area of the mat
shown on the Drawings and accepted by the Engineer.
7.5 PAYMENT
The work measured as provided above will be paid at the Contract unit price per cubic meter
of cement stabilized mat. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials compete in place including handling, placing, mixing, compacting and for all
labour, tools, equipment, all kind of tests as specified herein or in the Drawings and
incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work.
No payment will be made for unauthorized, defective, unsound or unsatisfactory cement
stabilized mat or of any cost incurred by the Contractor for such cement stabilized mat.
03500-13 Sand Cement Stabilised Mat m3

DIVISION 4 DRAINAGE WORKS
SECTION 04100 - PIPE CULVERTS
1. DESCRIPTION
Section 04100 works shall consist of constructing new reinforced concrete pipe culverts on
bedding and bearings as shown on the drawings and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Inlet and outlet structures, headwalls, as well as associated erosion and scour protection
works are included in other specification sections.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be applied to Works covered by this
Specification.
 22TCN 159-86 Concrete steel pipe culvert construction
 TCXDVN 372-2006 Reinforced concrete drainage pipes
 TCVN 9113:2012 Drainage reinforced concrete culvert pipe
 ASTM C990 Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box
Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
2.2 BEDDING
Granular material for bedding shall be in accordance with clause 4.2, table 4 of TCVN 7570
– 2006 subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Lean concrete for bedding shall be class C10 bedding or blinding concrete in accordance
with the requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.3 CONCRETE
Concrete used for all structural work described in this Specification Section shall be of the
classes indicated on the drawings and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.4 REINFORCING STEEL FOR CONCRETE
All reinforcing steel used in the works shall conform to the requirements specified in
Specification Section 07500 “Reinforcing Steel”.
2.5 REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERT PIPES
Reinforced concrete pipes shall be of pre-cast reinforced concrete of concrete class C30 and
shall conform to specification section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”. Pipes
shall be cast with push fit or male / female joints and reinforcement in all pipes shall consist
of spiral steel cages with longitudinal bars all as indicated on the drawings unless otherwise
The Engineer shall periodically inspect the pre-cast concrete manufacturing plants to ensure
compliance with the approved method statements for manufacturing. The Contractor will
supply material samples for laboratory testing to ensure Quality compliance, and will make
the necessary arrangements to facilitate the inspections by the Engineer. Such inspections
shall include the inspection of reinforced pre-cast concrete items. All pre-cast items shall be
marked with a unique reference and no item shall be delivered to the construction site
without approval from the Engineer.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or required by the Engineer, all joints for
reinforced concrete culvert pipes shall use joint sealants and be flexible joints all in
accordance with ASTM C990.
Pipes supplied for the project shall be load tested using a 3-point loading test at a test load of
low, standard, or high appropriate to the loading level of each culvert location, using a test
method and testing frequency as stipulated in TCVN 9113:2012.
2.6 BEARINGS
Bearings to support the pipes shall be of the numbers and types indicated on the drawings,
subject to the approval of the Engineer. They shall be of pre-cast reinforced concrete of
concrete class C20 and shall conform with specification section 07100 “Concrete and
Concrete Structures”. Bearings shall be inspected and approved as in item 2.5 above.
2.7 MORTAR
Mortared joints shall only be used if required by the Engineer, or so indicated on the
Drawings. If or when required mortar for pipe joints and collars shall comply with
specification section 8100 “Cement Mortar” but with a strength of 100 kg/cm2 at 28 days.
3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULE
3.1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings and method statements showing his proposed
construction details for culverts indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Shop drawings and method statements shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval
prior to the start of the any construction work on the culverts, including the start of any
pre-casting works.
3.1.2 WORK SCHEDULING
Pre-casting and construction of the culverts shall not begin until the Engineer has approved
the Contractor’s shop drawings and method statements. The Contractor shall allow
sufficient time in his programme for the submission and approval of his shop drawings and
method statements and for any revision and re-submission of such documents that may be
required to incorporate the comments of the Engineer.
All necessary temporary drainage work or diversions of existing drainage shall be in place
and operating before construction of the culverts begins.
Sub-grade preparation or work on the pavement structure, either in the roadway or the
shoulder areas, shall not begin until the culverts, headwalls, and other minor structures
below sub-grade level are complete along that particular section of roadway.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
3.2.1 SITE PREPARATION
The Contractor shall carry out any excavation and preparation of trenches for pipe culverts
that may be required in accordance with the provisions of Specification Section 03200
“Structural Excavation”. The Contractor shall be responsible for all dewatering and
temporary support works of the trenches and all other necessary temporary works that may
be required during construction.
The Contractor shall place supports and/or bedding material in accordance with the
Drawings requirements or as may required by the Engineer all in accordance with applicable
Specification Sections.

3.2.2 PIPE LAYING
The Contractor shall excavate culvert trenches to the required line and level. Bedding shall
be placed to provide a uniform and continuous support under the entire length of the pipe
bearings.
The width of any trenches shall be considered to be the distance between the vertical planes
through the outer limit of the bedding on each side of the pipe as shown on the drawings. The
Engineer, at his discretion, may allow extra trench widths, but the Contractor shall receive
no additional payment for the wider trench excavation.
Where side slopes are used on trenches the slopes used shall be selected to suit the stability
of the soil. Any over excavation of culvert trenches shall be backfilled and compacted using
approved Embankment Materials subject to the approval of the Engineer and at the
Water shall be removed from trenches by sump pumping or other approved methods.
Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the point of installation
in sound undamaged condition. Bearings and pipes delivered to the construction site shall be
inspected by the Engineer before placing and/or lying. Any defective bearings or pipes shall
be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost. No bearing or pipe shall be laid
when the trench conditions are unsuitable for such work.
The pipe bearings and pipes shall be laid to the grades and alignment as indicated on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
All pipes shall be laid and pulled together such that the joint sealant forms a full and
effective seal around the full circumference of the pipe. Joint sealants shall be placed such
that any joints or overlaps in the sealant are at the top of the pipe.
All bearings and pipes in place shall be approved before being covered up.
The Contractor shall backfill and compact the soil around and over the bearings and pipes,
and to wing walls, using approved Embankment Material and in accordance with
Specification Section 03200 “Structural Excavation”. The backfill material shall contain no
stones that would be retained on a 25 mm sieve. Oversized material shall be removed.
The Contractor shall backfill the culvert to a minimum height of 50 cm above the top of the
pipe.
Where pipes and bearings have not been laid in a trench the fill shall extend for a minimum
distance of one and a half pipe diameters from the centre line of the pipe on each side of the
pipe.
The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the haunches for the entire pipe
length. The Contractor shall take particular care to ensure backfill in properly compacted
around and beneath the pipes.
Heavy earth moving and compacting equipment shall not operate closer than one and a half
pipe diameters from the centre line of the pipe on each side of the pipe until such time that
the cover to the top of the pipe is at least 50 cm. Notwithstanding these conditions, the
Contractor shall be responsible for and shall rectify any damage which may result from
either backfilling or compaction to the culvert or placing and compacting road construction
materials over the culvert.
3.3 CULVERT HEADWALLS, INLETS, OUTLETS
Headwalls, inlets, outlets, scour protection and connections to manholes or catch pits shall
be constructed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the Specification Section
04300 “Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets” subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3.4 JOINTS, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
Pipes shall be laid with joints complying with ASTM C990. Where pipes are built into inlets,
outlets, manholes or catch pits the connections shall comply with details on the drawings and
the requirements of the relevant specification section subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.5 TESTS
Tests for concrete items shall comply with the requirements of the relevant specification
section. Each layer of the backfill to the culverts shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of Specification Section 03200 “Structural Excavation”.
3.6 CLEANING CULVERTS
All culverts shall be cleaned of loose debris, soil, and all foreign material before they are put
into use. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval before putting any culvert into
use.
3.7 RECTIFYING AND MAINTENANCE
3.7.1 RECTIFYING UNSATISFACTORY WORK
All materials and workmanship used in the construction of culverts shall be subject to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer. Where appropriate the Engineer will issue
instructions for any remedial work found necessary as a result of unsatisfactory work by the
Contractor. The Contractor will carry out such remedial work at his own expense. The
Works will not be approved until such time as they have been completed to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
3.7.2 MAINTAINING ACCEPTED WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the routine maintenance, cleaning and care of the
culvert works until such time as they have been taken over by the Employer. No separate
measurement or payment shall be made for such work.

The reinforced concrete pipe culvert quantities shall be measured for payment by the number
of linear meters of the completed new structure. This quantity shall be measured as the actual
placed length of pipe of a specified diameter, including all excavation, backfill, bedding,
bearings and jointing.
The measurement shall include all necessary temporary works including any such work
required for the diversion of existing drainage during construction of the new culvert and
any modifications to drainage required as result of the temporary works and the construction
of the new works.
Headwalls, inlets, outlets, manholes or catch pits and scour protection and connections shall
be constructed measured and paid for in accordance with the appropriate Specification
Sections.
The cost of other work is deemed incidental to constructing the culvert or drain work. The
cost is included in the prices tendered for the culvert pipes and for the various construction
materials used.
unit of measurement for the pay items listed below that are shown in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including
furnishing and placing all the material, all necessary joint materials for concrete pipes and
for furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete
the work as shown on the Drawings and as required in accordance with these Specifications
and all necessary cleaning and routine maintenance /or as directed by the Engineer.
04100-01 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert, 0.8 m. diameter. m
04100-02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert, 1 m. diameter. m
04100-03 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert, 1.5 m. diameter. m
04100-04 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert, 2 m. diameter. m

SECTION 04200 - DITCHES
1. DESCRIPTION
This specification section describes the work required for the construction of drainage
ditches. The Contractor shall construct roadside ditches using mortared stonework,
reinforced concrete, or pre-cast concrete as shown in the Drawings, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
2.1 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details and samples of materials
he intends to use for the construction of ditches included in this specification section.
2.2 BEDDING
2.3 MORTARED STONE
Mortared stone lining shall conform to the requirements specified in Specification Section
04400 “Mortared Stonework”.
2.4 CONCRETE
Pre-cast and cast in situ concrete used for all structural work described in this Specification
Section shall be of the classes indicated on the drawings and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.6 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings, method statements and a schedule of ditches
showing his proposed construction details for the ditches indicated on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Shop drawing, method statements and schedules shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to the start of the any construction work on
the ditches. The Contractor’s schedules shall include the location and profile of each length
of ditch. The profiles shall be co-ordinated with associated drainage features including
manholes, catch pits and culverts.
2.6.2 PROGRAMMING
Construction of ditches shall not begin until the Engineer has approved the Contractor’s
shop drawings, method statements and schedules. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time
in his programme for the submission and approval of his shop drawings and method
statements and for any revision and re-submission of such documents that may be required
to incorporate the comments of the Engineer.

3.1 SETTING OUT DITCHES
The Contractor shall set out the required locations, lengths, direction of fall, and grades of all
ditches. Setting out shall include locating all associated catch pits and out falls.
3.2 ROADSIDE DITCHES CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall excavate, fill, and shape the ditches to the grades shown on the
construction drawings and to the profiles shown on the typical drawings of ditches or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
For open ditches lined with mortared stone the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all
excavation material. For cast in-situ concrete ditches excavation shall be in accordance with
the provisions of Specification Section 03200 “Structural Excavation . No material shall be
left on site such that it may be washed or otherwise deposited back into the excavation or the
completed ditches.
Construction of the cast in-situ concrete or the stone lining for ditches as specified in this
Specification Section shall not begin until after the Engineer approves the excavated
formations for the ditches.
The finish to all ditches shall be sufficiently smooth and uniform to ensure the free flow of
water without ponding during periods of low flow.
3.3 TOLERANCES, RECTIFYING AND MAINTENANCE
3.3.1 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
Grades of ditch inverts against those specified or approved: ±5 mm at any point
Ditches alignments and the shape of cross sections as specified in the Drawings: ±2 cm at
any point.
All materials and workmanship used in the construction of culverts shall be subject to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer. Where appropriate the Engineer will issue
instructions for any remedial work found necessary as a result of unsatisfactory work by the
Contractor. The Works will not be approved until such time as they have been completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Remedial work may include but not be limited to:
 Repetition of survey work defining existing or constructed surface profiles as often
as necessary to obtain an accurate record of the physical conditions;
 Additional excavation or fill, which could include backfilling new work and
re-excavating it to the specified dimensions, lines, and grades, and
 repairing or replacing defective mortared stonework or concrete work.
No additional payment shall be made for the extra work or quantities used for the
rectification.
3.3.3 MAINTENANCE OF ACCEPTED WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the routine maintenance, cleaning and care of the
ditches until such time as they have been taken over by the Employer. No separate
measurement or payment shall be made for such work.

Ditches shall be measured in linear meter of completed ditch according to the shop drawings
submitted by the Contractor.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including all
preparatory works, supplying and transportation of materials, excavation, placing and
compaction of filling material, and for furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools,
equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as
required in accordance with these Specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer.
No separate payment shall be made for excavation, backfill, bedding and lining for ditches
or ditch relocation. All these costs shall be deemed to be included in the main items
contained in Specification Section
04200-01 Ditch Type 1 (Vertical, concrete U) m
04200-02 Side Ditch SD1 (Earth, trapezoidal) m
04200-05a Side Ditch SD5 (Precast slab lined, trapezoidal) m
04200-05b Side Ditch SD6 (Earth, trapezoidal) m
04200-06 Side Ditch Type 4A (Concrete U) m
04200-07 Side Ditch Type 4B (Concrete U) m
04200-08 Side Ditch Type 4C (Concrete U) m
04200-09 Side Ditch Type 4D (Concrete U) m
04200-10 Side Ditch (Concrete U30) m
04200-11 Side Ditch (Concrete U60) m
04200-11a Side Ditch (Concrete U80) m
04200-12 Concrete Gutter beside Expressway m
04200-13 Side Ditch Type A (Earth, trapezoidal) m
04200-14 Side Ditch Type B (Earth, trapezoidal) m

SECTION 04300 - CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES, INLETS, AND OUTLETS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements for the construction of Catch Basins,
Manholes, Inlets and Outlets to culverts and ditches.
2.1 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details and samples of materials
he intends to use for the construction of Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets to
culverts and ditches included in this specification section.
2.2 BEDDING
Fine sand fill/bedding shall be black sand (river sand). The sand shall be a fine sand
complying with the requirements of Table 1 of TCVN 7570-06 with a fineness modulus of
0.7 to 2.0. Organic and other impurities shall be in accordance with table 2 of TCVN
7570-06 as follows:
 Clay and balled impurities shall be less than or equal to 0.5%
 Muds and dirt shall be less than or equal to 10%
It will not be necessary to determine the alkali reactivity or the chloride content of the sand
for this use.
Sand shall be sampled and tested in accordance with TCVN 7572:2006 (Aggregates for
concrete and mortar – Test methods)
2.3 CONCRETE
Pre-cast and cast in situ concrete used for all structural work described in this Specification
Section shall be of the classes indicated on the drawings and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.5 MORTARED STONE
Mortared stonework shall conform to the requirements specified in Specification Section
04400 “Mortared Stonework”.
2.6 STEELWORK
Steelwork items shall comply with the requirements of 22TCN288:2002 and shall be
galvanised in accordance with AASHTO M232.
2.7 BRICKWORK
Brickwork shall conform to the requirements specified in Specification Section 04600
“Brick Masonry”.

2.8 MORTAR
Mortar for joints or other works shall only be used if required by the Engineer, or so
indicated on the Drawings. If or when required mortar shall comply with specification
section 08100 “Cement Mortar”.
3.1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings and method statements showing his proposed
construction details for the Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets to culverts and
ditches indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Shop drawings and method
statements shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to the start of the any
construction work, including the start of any pre-casting works.
Construction of the Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets to culverts and ditches shall
not begin until the Engineer has approved the Contractor’s shop drawings and method
statements. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his programme for the submission
and approval of his shop drawings and method statements and for any revision and
re-submission of such documents that may be required to incorporate the comments of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out any excavation that may be required for Catch Basins,
Manholes, Inlets and Outlets in accordance with the provisions of Specification Section
03200 “Structural Excavation”. The Contractor shall be responsible for all dewatering and
temporary support works for the excavations and all other necessary temporary works that
may be required during construction.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with
minimum handling. Any damaged materials shall be rejected and replaced at the
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Culvert pipes or ditch sections shall be placed or cast and properly bedded before being cast
into or built into catch basins, manholes or inlet and outlet structures.
3.4 MANHOLE COVERS, CATCH BASINS AND FRAMES
Covers to manholes and catch basins shall be fabricated, supplied and installed complete
with steel frames and lifting points as indicated on the drawings.

Catch Basin and Manholes quantities shall be measured for payment by the number of units
of each type constructed on site complete with covers and including all excavation and
backfill, bedding and bedding materials, concrete, reinforcing steel, and all incidentals, such
as ladder rungs, steel plates, support brackets, bolts and any other supplementary work
necessary for the completed and accepted work.
Inlet and outlet structures shall be measured for payment by the number of units constructed
on site complete including all excavation and backfill, bedding and bedding materials,
mortared stone work footings, sand fill, mortared stone work in aprons, wing walls and
headwalls, and all incidentals and any other supplementary work necessary for the
completed and accepted work.
unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including all preparatory works,
supplying, transporting and placing all materials, and for furnishing all labour, materials,
tests, tools, equipment, temporary works and any incidentals to complete the work as shown
on the Drawings and as required in accordance with these Specifications and/or as directed
by the Engineer.
04300-01 Catch Basin, CB1 each
04300-04 Manhole, Type 1 each
04300-06a Manhole, Type 3a each
04300-11 Pipe Culvert Inlet or Outlet, D=0.80m. each
04300-12 Pipe Culvert Inlet or Outlet, D=1m. each
04300-13 Pipe Culvert Inlet or Outlet, D=1.5m. each
04300-14 Pipe Culvert Inlet or Outlet, D=2m. each
04300-15 Stone Riprap (30cm thick) at Box Culvert Inlet / Outlet m2
04300-16 Mortared Stonework at Box Culvert Inlet / Outlet m3

SECTION 04400 - MORTARED STONEWORK
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements for the construction of mortared
stonework. This work consists of the lining of roadside drains and construction of inlets,
outlets and headwalls to culverts.
Mortared stonework shall comply with the requirements of standard TCVN ISO 4085:1985
2.2 STONE
Stones shall consist of field stone or quarry stone. They shall be sound, tough, durable, dense,
resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended.
Mortared Stonework: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer, the stone shall meet the gradation requirements shown in Table 1.
The Quality and dimensions of the stones shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their use.
Stones shall be as nearly rectangular in shape as practicable.
Table 1 Gradation Requirement for Stones (*)
Approximate Given Size Equivalent Cubic Total Size Smaller
Weight Volume Dimension than Given Size
(kg) (cu.m.) (mm) (%)
45 0.018 250 100
27 0.011 225 80
11 0.005 165 50
2 0.0003 75 10*
* Material shall consist of spills and rock fragments graded to provide a stable compact mass.
2.3 CEMENT MORTAR
Cement Mortar shall be in accordance with the provisions of Specification Section 08100
“Cement Mortar” or as directed by the Engineer.
2.4 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval two representative 50 kg
samples for each class of stone that he intends to use for mortared stonework. The Engineer
shall retain one of these samples for reference throughout the Contract Period. The
Contractor shall use in the works only the stone classes that have been approved by the
Engineer.
3.1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall furnish shop drawings containing the construction details for mortared
stonework. The shop drawings shall be included in the appropriate submissions to the
Engineer for his approval for the work included in Specification Section 04200 Ditches”
and Specification Section 04300 “Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets”. Construction
of mortared stonework shall not begin until the Contractor’s submissions have been

The Contractor shall schedule the works based on the following main criteria:
 Mortared Stonework shall be executed in such a way as to ensure that stones are
placed only in fresh mortar at any time that this work is being performed; and
 For Mortared Stonework in roadside drain lining, the Contractor shall shape the
work to the final lines only immediately before placing the stonework.
3.2 TOLERANCES, RECTIFICATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.2.1 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
The surface of each face stone shall not vary from the average profile of the surrounding
stonework by more than 3 cm.
The average surface profile for lined ditches formed by placed stonework shall not vary from
the specified or approved channel invert profile by more than 2 cm.
The finished profiles for inlet and outlet structures shall not vary from the specified or
approved profiles by more than 2 cm.
The Contractor shall rectify, at his own expense, any mortared stonework that does not meet
the tolerances given in this Specification Section, or that was not completed as directed by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability and integrity of all finished work. Unless
otherwise determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall replace at his own expense any
mortared stonework that is damaged or displaced during the Contract Period. No separate
measurement or payment will be made for rectifying unsatisfactory work.
3.2.3 MAINTENANCE OF ACCEPTED WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for routine maintenance and the care of all completed
and accepted mortared stonework during the Contract Period. No separate measurement or
payment will be made for such routine maintenance.
3.3 WORK PREPARATION
3.3.1 PREPARING FORMATIONS OR FOUNDATIONS
The Contractor shall prepare formations for mortared stonework to the lining of open ditches
in accordance with the provisions of Specification Section 04200 “Ditches”.
The Contractor shall prepare foundations and trenches for cut-off walls or other structures
made of mortared stonework in accordance with the provisions of Specification Section
03200 “Structure Excavation”
3.3.2 PREPARING STONE
The Contractor shall clean the stones of all defects that may impair the bond with the mortar.
The Contractor shall thoroughly wet the stones long enough for the stones to absorb water to
near saturation prior to laying.
3.4 PLACING STONE LINING
Surfaces to receive mortar shall be cleaned of oil or clay or other contaminants and
thoroughly saturated before the mortar is applied. Free surface water shall be removed
before application of the mortar.
The Contractor shall place a bedding of fresh mortar at least 3 cm thick on the prepared
formation. The Contractor shall construct this mortar bedding progressively by laying the

surface stones in such a manner that the stones are always securely bedded in the mortar
before it hardens.
The Contractor shall place the stones firmly against each other to provide the required
paving thickness measured perpendicular to the slope. The Contractor shall then place
additional mortar to completely fill all spaces between the stones. The finished surface of the
mortar shall be almost flush with the surface of the lining but the mortar shall not cover the
stones.
The work shall progress from the bottom of the slopes towards the top. The Contractor shall
finish the surface immediately following the initial set of the mortar by sweeping the surface
with a stiff broom.
The Contractor shall cure the finished surfaces as specified for concrete work in
Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
The Contractor shall trim and finish adjacent slopes and shoulders to ensure a tight and
smooth interface with the mortared stonework. The interfaces shall allow unobstructed
drainage and prevent scour at the edges of the work.
3.5 CONSTRUCTING MORTARED STONEWORK STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall construct mortared stonework structures by covering the base of the
foundation with mortar to a depth of 60% of the maximum dimension of the stones. The
Contractor shall then immediately place the stones in the unset mortar. The Contractor shall
add additional mortar and repeat the process until the structure is complete. The Contractor
shall then add mortar to the top of the cut-off until he obtains a screened level top surface.
The Contractor may construct mortared stonework without forms if the stone can interlock
sufficiently and if he uses stiff mortar.
The Contractor shall finish and cure exposed surfaces of mortared stonework structures as
specified in Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
The Contractor shall backfill around the finished and cured mortared stonework in
accordance with the provisions of Specification Section 03200 “Structure Excavation”

4.1.1 MORTARED STONEWORK
Mortared Stonework, when used in ditches, shall not be measured for payment. The cost
shall be incorporated in the unit price of ditches as provided for in Specification Section
04200 “Ditches”.
When used in inlet and outlet structures for culverts, headwalls and other structures, other
than roadside ditches, mortared stonework shall not be measured for payment. The cost shall
be incorporated in the unit price of the inlet and outlet structures as provided for in
Specification Section 04300 “Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets”.
Payment shall be included in the relevant items in Specification Section 04200 “Ditches”
and Specification Section 04300 “Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and Outlets”.

SECTION 04500 - GABIONS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification section describes requirements and procedures for construction of rock
filled gabion baskets installed at locations indicated on the Drawings or as may be required
by the Engineer.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 BEDDING
2.2 GEOTEXTILES
Geotextile material shall be non-woven, continuous filament type, manufactured from
durable synthetic polymers. The fabric shall meet the requirements shown in the table
below:
Property Test Method Required VN standard
Values 22 TCN 248 - 98
Min. Weight (g/m2) ASTM D 3776 130 -
Min. Strip Tensile Strength (kN/m) ASTM D 4595 8 -
Max. Elongation at Failure (%) ASTM D 4595 50 Less than 65
The Contractor shall present relevant test results and justify that the geotextile is suitable for
the intended use. The geotextile shall be of a reputable manufacturer and shall be approved
by the Engineer. During construction, three random samples shall be selected from every
50,000 m2 of geotextile delivered to the Site for testing or at an outside laboratory, as
required by the Engineer. Geotextile shall be supplied in rolls, marked to show the length,
width, type and weight of the material. Each roll shall be packed in black plastic and shall be
protected from direct sunlight during transport and storage.
2.3 GABIONS
The wire mesh for gabion baskets shall be galvanized steel having a minimum size of
3.05-mm diameter and a tensile strength in the range of 350-500 MPa. The minimum zinc
coating of the wire shall be 0.24 kg/m2 of wire surface as determined by AASHTO T65. The
maximum linear dimension of the mesh openings shall not exceed 0.110 mm and the area of
mesh opening shall not exceed 0.041 m2.
2.4 ROCK FILL
Rock fill for gabions shall consist of hard, durable rock pieces that will not deteriorate when
submerged in water or exposed to severe weather conditions. Rock pieces shall generally be
uniformly graded in sizes ranging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have
minimum density of 1400 kg/m3. Voids shall be evenly distributed. Rocks shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M63 except that the sodium sulphate soundness loss shall not
exceed 9% after 5 cycles.

3. FABRICATION OF GABION BASKETS
The wire mesh shall be twisted to form hexagonal openings of uniform sizes. The mesh shall
be fabricated in such a manner as to be non-raveling.
Gabions shall be fabricated such that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at
the construction site into rectangular baskets of the specified sizes.
Gabions shall be of single unit construction with base, lids, ends and sides either woven into
a single unit or one edge of those members connected to the base section of the Gabon in
such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to
that of the mesh.
The Gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, of the same mesh and gauge as the body
of the Gabon, into cells the length of which does not exceed the horizontal width. Gabions
shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base in
such a manner that no additional tying at this junction will be necessary.
Perimeter edges shall be formed of selvedge using 3.76 mm galvanized wire of the same
tensile strength as the basket wire. Tie and connection wires shall be supplied in sufficient
quantities to allow secure fastening of all edges and diaphragms and to provide for four
cross-connecting wires in each cell. The wire shall meet the same specifications as for wire
used in the mesh except that it may not be more than two gauges smaller.
4. CONSTRUCTION
4.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
The Contractor shall carry out any excavation that may be required for gabion work in
accordance with the provisions of Specification Section 03200 “Structural Excavation”. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all dewatering and temporary support works for the
excavations and all other necessary temporary works that may be required during
construction.
Geotextile shall be placed and stretched out on properly levelled surfaces to obtain a
continuous filter layer, without kinks and creases. Joints shall either have an overlap of not
less than 0.50 m or shall be seamed together with an overlap of not less than 0.25 m. Any
damage to the geotextile shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. Repair or replacement shall
be done at the Contractor’s cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Bedding materials shall be placed as indicated on the drawings.
4.2 PLACING GABION BASKETS
Each Gabon unit shall be assembled by binding together all vertical edges with wire ties at
approx. spacing of 150 mm or by continuous stitching around the vertical edges with
connecting wire with an additional coil located at approximate 100 mm centers.
Empty baskets shall be set to line and grade as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer, and a standard fence stretcher or iron bar at each corner shall be used to stretch the
baskets and hold their alignment.
The baskets shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand to assure alignment and avoid
bulges with a minimum of voids.
Alternate placing of stone and connecting wires shall be performed until the Gabon basket is
filled.
After filling the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edges. The lid shall then be
secured to the sides, ends and diaphragms with wire ties or connecting wire in the manner
described for assembly.

5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantities for Gabions shall be measured for payment by cubic metres of completed and
accepted work including all excavation and backfill, bedding materials, geotextile, gabions,
rock fill and all incidentals and any other supplementary work necessary for the completed
and accepted work. The volume measured shall be based on the area within the limiting
dimensions detailed on the Drawings or required by the Engineer.
5.2 PAYMENT
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including all preparatory works,
supplying, transporting and placing all materials, and for furnishing all labour, materials,
tests, tools, equipment, temporary works and any incidentals to complete the work as shown
on the Drawings and as required in accordance with these Specifications and/or as directed
by the Engineer.
04500-01 Rock Filled Gabion Baskets m3

SECTION 04600 - BRICK MASONRY
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes materials, methods and procedures for placement and
construction of non-load bearing brick masonry.
covered by this Specification.
 TCVN ISO4085:1985 Brick and stone structure – Instruction for Construction
and acceptance
 TCVN 1451:1998 Solid Clay Bricks
 TCVN 4453-95 Concrete & integral Steel concrete structure - Code of
Construction and acceptance standard
2.2 BRICKS
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, bricks used for masonry construction shall be
locally manufactured solid clay bricks. Bricks shall be of a uniform size, shape and colour,
and shall be clean and free from flaws and cracks. They shall have sharp, right angle edges
and even surfaces.
Bricks shall conform to requirements specified TCVN 1451:1998 or comparable
international standard subject to approval by the Engineer.
2.3 MORTAR
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the mortar used for masonry construction shall
be in accordance with applicable conditions of Specification Section 08100 “Cement
Mortar”.
2.4 REINFORCING STEEL
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, reinforcing steel used in conjunction with
masonry construction shall be in accordance with Specification Section 07500 “Reinforcing
Steel”.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
Metal ties and anchors shall have the size and shape as indicated on the Drawings and in
conformity with the requirements of TCVN 4453:1995. If ties and anchors are not detailed
on the Drawings the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of work, submit to the
Engineer for his approval proposed ties and anchorage details noting sizes and locations for
all brick walls and partitions.
2.6 SUBMITTALS
2.6.1 BRICKS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval at least six samples of the brick
intended for use. Approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer for comparison with
and approval or rejection of bricks delivered to site for use in the Works.

2.6.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval shop drawings for all brick
masonry work indicating splicing, laps, shapes, dimensions, and details of joints, reinforcing
steel, and accessories. The drawings shall show details of anchors and ties.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

3.1 PREPARATION
Surfaces on which masonry is to be placed shall be smooth, clean and free of foreign
substances when mortar is applied.
3.2 PROTECTION
All exposed surfaces shall be protected from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are
tooled, excess mortar shall be removed from exposed surfaces with fibre brushes and
wooden paddles. The base of walls shall be protected from mortar splashes by covering
adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
Masonry shall be carried up, levelled and plumbed.
Story poles or gauge rods shall be furnished and used throughout the work.
Changes in coursing or bonding after the work is started will not be permitted.
Walls shall be carried up evenly with no section in advance of others.
The height of masonry at significant stages of work shall be checked to maintain the level of
the walls.
Bricks shall be handled with care to avoid chipping, cracking, and spalling of faces and
edges.
Bricks shall be cut with masonry saws for exposed work.
Structural steelwork, bolts, anchors, inserts, plugs, ties and miscellaneous metalwork
specified elsewhere shall be placed in position as the work progresses.
Chases of approved dimensions for pipes and other purposes shall be provided where
indicated and where necessary.
Tops of exposed walls and partitions not being worked on shall be covered with a waterproof
membrane secured in place and extended down at least 600 mm on both sides.
Scaffolding shall be inspected regularly to ensure that it is amply strong, well braced and
securely tied in position.
Scaffolding shall not be overloaded.
3.4 TOLERANCES
Masonry work shall be within the following limits:
Face of brick ±1mm from face of adjacent brick
Variation from true plane ±6mm in 3m and 20mm in 10m
Variation from plumb ±6 mm in each story non-cumulative
and ±13mm in two stories or more
Variation from level ±3mm in 1m, 6mm in 3m maximum
Variation in wall thickness ± 6mm

3.5 APPLICATION
Unless indicated or specified otherwise or required by the Engineer, bricks shall be laid in
running bond.
Bricks shall be thoroughly soaked with water before their use.
Joints between bricks shall be completely filled with mortar.
Bed joints shall be formed by applying a thick layer of mortar slightly furrowed or battered;
the bed mortar shall be bevelled or pyramid-shaped.
Head joints shall be formed by applying a full coat of mortar on the brick to be laid.
Closure bricks shall be laid with mortar on each bedding surface of unit to be laid and units
in place.
Bricks shall be placed carefully without disturbing previously laid bricks.
Dry joints will not be permitted.
3.6 BONDING AND ANCHORING
Masonry walls and partitions shall be structurally bonded or anchored to each other and to
concrete walls, beams and columns.
Non-load-bearing partitions and interior walls shall be securely anchored to the above
construction in a manner that provides lateral stability while permitting unrestricted
deflection of the above construction.
Anchors shall be completely embedded in mortar joints.
Intersections of non-load-bearing partitions with other walls or partitions shall be tied with
wire mesh ties at vertical intervals of not more than 600mm or with masonry bonding in
alternate courses.
At interfaces with concrete members masonry shall be anchored to concrete with dovetail or
wire-type anchors inserted in slots or inserts built into concrete. Anchors shall be spaced not
more than 300mm vertically and not more than 600mm horizontally.
3.7 CLEANING OF EXPOSED MASONRY BRICK
Exposed brick masonry shall be free of stains, efflorescence, mortar or grout splashes and
debris. Damaged, stained, and discoloured work shall be restored to original condition or
replaced with a new work.
Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water and stiff fibre brushes and
rinsed with clear water. Where stains, mortar, or other soil remain, they shall be scrubbed
with warm water and detergent. Where soil still remains on brickwork, cleaning shall be
continued as follows:
 Exposed surfaces of dark-coloured brickwork shall be thoroughly wetted with clear
water and scrubbed with stiff fibre brushes, and a solution of not more than 1 part of
muriatic acid to 9 parts of water shall be applied to areas not exceeding 1 to 2 square
meters.
 Immediately after being cleaned each area shall be rinsed thoroughly with clear
water.
The use of caustic solutions or sandblasting to clean surfaces will not be permitted.
3.8 MORTAR JOINTS
Joints shall have a uniform thickness of 10 mm unless otherwise indicated.
Flush joints shall be struck; vertical joints shall be tooled first.

Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose and excess mortar.
Horizontal joints shall be level.
Vertical joints shall be plumbed and in alignment from top to bottom of wall within a
tolerance of plus or minus 10 mm in 10 m.

4.1 MEASUREMENT
Brick masonry shall be measured for payment by cubic meter of work completed and
accepted by the Engineer.
No separate measurement for payment shall be made for brick masonry construction for
manholes. The cost of this work shall be deemed incidental to carrying out the works for
manholes as stated in Specification Section 04300 “Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets and
Outlets”.
4.2 PAYMENT
Payment for brick masonry shall be made at the price per unit of measurement of the pay
item listed below of the Bill of Quantities. The price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, shop drawings, labour, equipment and incidentals necessary to
supply, construct and install brick masonry in accordance with the Drawings and these
Specifications. The supply shall include all necessary masonry accessories such as
horizontal joint reinforcement, flashing, weep holes, control joints, anchors, wall ties and
sealant, as well as all materials, accessories necessary to maintain and clean or replace the
completed work
04600-01 Brick Masonry m3

DIVISION 5 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
SECTION 05100 - AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of supplying, processing, hauling, spreading, watering and compacting
graded aggregates conforming to the requirements of this Specification Section on prepared
and accepted surfaces, in accordance with details shown on the Drawings subject to
confirmation by the Engineer.
The most recent editions of the following standards shall apply to the materials covered in
this Section:
 TCVN 8859:2011 Graded Aggregate Base and Subbase Pavement -
Specification for Construction and Acceptance
 TCVN 8864 : 2011 Standard Test Method for Measuring Road Pavement
Surface Roughness Using a 3.0 m Straight Edge
 22TCN 332-06 Testing procedures on definition of CBR value for soil
and macadam in laboratory
 22TCN 333-06 Procedures of soil and macadam compaction in
laboratory
 22TCN 346-06 Testing procedure on definition of compaction of road
foundation and embankment by sand cone method
 AASHTO T104 Soundness of Aggregate by use of Sodium or
Magnesium Sulphate
Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and
2.2 MATERIAL SOURCES
Materials from all sources proposed by the Contractor shall be tested and submitted to the
Engineer for source approval in compliance with the requirements of this Specification
Section. The Engineer’s approval of a materials source does confer approval on all materials
delivered from that source. Sample sizes shall be at least 200kg for 37.5mm aggregate,
150kg for 25mm aggregate, and 100kg for 19mm aggregate.
2.3 STORAGE, MIXING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Aggregates for base course and sub-base shall be stored in stockpiles that ensure the
materials remain free draining and are adequately separated to prevent cross contamination.
Stockpiles shall be placed on a properly prepared surface to ensure no contamination occurs
when materials are re-handled. Materials shall be placed in stockpiles and subsequently
re-handled in a manner which avoids segregation of the various sizes.
Materials of different sizes which are to be blended to meet the required gradation for base
course and sub-base shall be kept in separate stockpiles. Blending shall be carried out on a
properly prepared surface such that no contamination occurs. Blended materials shall be
stored in a separate stockpile. Blending shall not be permitted in-situ on the roadway.

All stockpiles are to be labelled with markers indicating the material type in the stockpile.
Materials previously approved but rendered unacceptable due to inadequate storage or
handling will be rejected.
The aggregate for sub-base and base course shall consist of hard, durable particles and shall
be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or suitable natural material and filler of natural or
crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The aggregate shall be free from
vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be readily
compacted to form a firm and stable sub-base. The materials shall comply with the
requirements given in tables 1 and 2 below.
Table 1 Grading Requirement for Aggregate
Standard Mass Percent Passing
(mm) Dmax = 37.5mm Dmax = 25mm Dmax = 19mm
50 100 - -
37,5 95 - 100 100 -
25 - 79 - 90 100
19 58 - 78 67 - 83 90 - 100
9,5 39 - 59 49 - 64 58 - 73
4,75 24 - 39 34 - 54 39 - 59
2,36 15 - 30 25 - 40 30 - 45
0,425 7 - 19 12 - 24 13 - 27
0,075 2 - 12 2 - 12 2 – 12
Table 2 Aggregate Subbase and Base Properties

No. Properties Aggregate Test Method
 35  40
Base Subbase
 100
1 Los-Angeles wear of aggregate (LA), % TCVN7572-12:2006
 25  35
2 Soaked CBR at maximum dry density - 22TCN332-06
6 6
3 Liquid Limit (WL), % AASHTO T89-02 (*)
 45  60
4 Plasticity Index (Ip), % AASHTO T90-02 (*)
5 PP Index = Plasticity Index Ip x % material
 18  20
passing portion 0.075mm
6 Percent by weight of aggregate with TCVN 7572-2006
 98  98
diamond or flattened shapes, % (**)
7 Compacted Density % AASHTO T180
Note:
(*). Liquid Limit, Plasticity Index are specified by test with material passing sieve 0.425 mm.
(**). Aggregate with diamond or flattened shapes has thickness or width less than 1/3 length or
equivalent;
Test is conducted with various sieves of diameter of more than 4.75mm and accounting for more
than 5% of sample quantity.
Aggregate with diamond or flattened shapes content of taken sample is average results certified
for each sieve.
Aggregate with a Dmax = 37.5mm is appropriate for Sub-base
Aggregate with a Dmax = 25mm is appropriate Base Course
As stated in the Conditions of Contract no works may be covered up or put out of site unless
the work has been accepted by the Engineer.

3.1 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall make all submittals for approval well in advance of his programmed
start of the particular works. The Contractor’s submittals to the Engineer shall include the
following:
a) Two samples of 50 kg weight each of the proposed material, one of which shall
be retained by the Engineer for reference throughout the Contract Period;
b) Certification of the origin and composition of proposed material for together
with laboratory test data verifying that the materials comply with the properties
specified in clauses 2.4 and 3.7 of this specification and the reference standards.
c) The Contractor’s proposed method statement which shall include details of trial
sections to be carried out by the Contractor. To demonstrate that the
Contractor’s proposed methods and materials. The Contractor shall submit the
following in written form to the Engineer immediately following the completion
of each section of the work and before any approval is granted for the placing of
other materials on top of the Aggregate Subbase and Aggregate Base:
d) The results of testing as specified in Subsection 3.8 of this Specification Section.
e) The results of surface measurement tests and survey data verifying that the
surface and thickness tolerances shown on Table 3 are met.
3.2 TRIAL SECTIONS
Trial sections shall not commence until the Contractor has submitted his proposed materials
and method statement for approval and both have been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out trial sections for each of his proposed materials and for each
of his proposed construction methods. The construction methods used for the trials shall be
those methods detailed in the Contractor’s method statement for use on the permanent works.
In particular work on trial sections must use the same equipment and procedures intended for
use on the permanent works.
Trial sections shall be approximately 500 m2. Trial sections may be carried out in the area of
the permanent works. However should the trial section be unsatisfactory it shall be removed
entirely and the layer beneath the trial section shall be made good all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The trial section shall be tested to ensure that it complies with the requirements of clauses
3.7 and 3.8 of this specification.
3.3 EQUIPMENT AND LABOUR USED FOR AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE
Equipment used for the laying of sub-base and base course shall be fit for purpose and in
sound condition. All equipment shall be operated by trained and experienced operators.
The laying of sub-base and base course shall be carried out by skilled and experienced
labour.
3.4 PLACING, SPREADING AND COMPACTING AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND
BASE
Aggregate Sub-base and Aggregate Base shall not commence until the layer to be covered
has been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor’s proposed materials and method
statements have been approved by the Engineer and satisfactory trial sections have been
completed.
Materials shall not be placed, spread or compacted while rain is falling.
During spreading, compacting and levelling of sub-base and base course material the
Contractor shall ensure that no damage is caused to completed work. In particular care must
be taken where equipment makes turns or runs on and off completed work. Any such
damage to completed work resulting from the Contractor’s operations shall be made good by
the Contractor and at his expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.4.1 PLACING
The aggregate sub-base and base material shall be placed as a uniform mixture in a quantity
which will provide the required compacted thickness. The material shall be delivered to the
roadbed and spread at moisture content within the range specified in this specification. The
moisture content shall be uniform throughout the material.
When more than one layer is required, each layer shall be placed, spread and compacted as
detailed in this specification.
The Contractor shall ensure that there is sufficient area prepared and approved for a full days
work on each layer of the sub-base and base course.
Hauling equipment may be routed over completed portions of the sub-base and base course
provided that no damage results. Such routing shall be over the full width of the course to
avoid rutting or uneven compaction. Hauling equipment over completed portions shall cease
when it is seen to be causing such damage.
3.4.2 SPREADING
Where the required thickness of sub-base and base is 180mm and 150mm or less
respectively, the material may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required
thickness is greater the aggregate sub-base and base course shall be spread and compacted
into two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. The maximum compacted
thickness of any one layer shall not exceed the dimensions above. All subsequent layers shall
be spread and compacted in a similar manner.
The sub-base and base course material shall be spread and shaped by the methods in the
Contractor’s approved method statement and confirmed by the completion of satisfactory
trials. Segregation of the fine and coarse aggregate particles shall not be permitted. Any
segregated material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with a graded material.
Compaction shall begin immediately following the final spreading of each layer.
Sub-base and base course must be spread by a spreader.
3.4.3 COMPACTION
Compaction shall be carried out only when the moisture content of the material is in the
range -2% to +2% of the optimum moisture content, where the optimum moisture content is
as defined by the maximum modified dry density determined by AASHTO T180.
Each layer shall be compacted to the full width by the methods in the Contractor’s approved
method statement confirmed by satisfactory trials. Rolling operations shall begin along the
edges and progress gradually towards the center, in a longitudinal direction. On
super-elevated sections rolling shall begin at the low side and progress towards the high side.
The rolling operation shall continue until all roller marks are eliminated and the layer is
uniformly compacted and the aggregates firmly keyed. Any irregularities or depressions that
develop shall be corrected by loosening the material at these places and adding or removing
material until the surface is smooth and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walls, and at all
places not accessible to the roller, the sub-base and base material may be compacted with

tampers or compactors. At the end at each shift, the surface of the base and sub-base shall be
shaped and sloped to prevent ponding of rain water.
The Aggregate Base surfaces which are to receive a prime coat shall be compacted to
produce a stable, tightly locked surface with no open pores and suitable for priming. All
coarse aggregates shall be tightly locked in place. The locking process shall be achieved by
compaction only. Under no circumstances shall any form of fine aggregate be added to the
surface to assist the locking process. Vibration shall not be used in the final stages of the
compaction of the surface. Pneumatic rollers or static steel wheeled rollers shall be used for
the final surface compaction unless excessive breakdown or degradation of the aggregate
base occurs, in which only pneumatic rollers shall be used.
When the underlying material is soft or yielding compaction of the sub-base and base course
shall be stopped and the underlying materials rectified in a manner approved by the
Engineer.
Compaction of each layer shall continue until a satisfactory field density has been achieved.
In-situ densities shall be determined in accordance with 22TCN346-06.
Proof rolling shall be conducted after finishing by a roller of at least 25 tons weight. If the
deflection is more than 3mm. the layer shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
3.5 RECTIFICATION OF UNSATISFACTORY AGGREGATE BASE OR SUB-BASE
Areas that do not meet the tolerances given in section 3.8 or which develop irregularities in
the surface after construction shall be rectified by loosening the surface and removing or
adding material as required, followed by reshaping and re-compacting.
Material which is below the minimum moisture content shall be corrected by scarifying the
material, sprinkling with an adequate quantity of water, thoroughly mixing and
re-compacting by methods subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Material which is above the maximum moisture content shall be rectified by scarifying the
material followed by intermittent working by motor grader or other suitable equipment to
air-dry the material under dry weather conditions. If sufficient drying cannot be achieved by
re-working the loose material it shall be removed from the work and replaced with a material
at a suitably moisture content. This work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Aggregate Sub-base or Aggregate Base which becomes saturated due to rain or flooding
after it has been satisfactorily compacted according to this specification will generally
require no rectification work provided its material properties and surface uniformity meet
the requirements of this specification.
Aggregate Sub-base or Aggregate Base layers which do not meet the density or material
property requirements of this specification shall be rectified by means approved by the
Engineer. Such means may include additional compaction, loosening followed by moisture
content adjustment and re-compacting, removal and replacement of the material or the
application of an additional thickness of material.
No additional measurement or payment shall be made for the rectification measures detailed
above.
3.6 CONTROL OF TRAFFIC ON SUB-BASE AND BASE SURFACES
Subject to the approval of the Engineer construction traffic or other traffic may be routed
over completed portions of the sub-base and base course when shaping and compaction are
substantially completed and provided that no damage results. Such routing shall be over the
full width of the course to avoid rutting or uneven compaction. Hauling equipment over
completed portions shall cease when it is seen to be causing such damage.
The Contractor may at his own discretion provide running course gravel for temporary
protection of the surface of Aggregate Base exposed to traffic. Any such provision shall be

entirely at the Contractor’s expense and shall include the removal of all gravel and any
necessary remedial work to the aggregate base course.
Pending the construction of the final surfacing, completed portions of the sub-base and base
course under site traffic shall be maintained as follows:
 The completed portions shall be maintained at all times by drag brooming. The
traffic shall be controlled by temporary speed restrictions and during working hours
it shall be channelled by suitably defined traffic lanes, with frequent transverse shift
of the defined lanes to obtain an even spread of traffic over the entire surface.
 Where the completed portions are too dry, so that surface stability does not or is
unlikely to improve under the effect of traffic and/or rolling and where rain is not
imminent or has been insufficient, a uniform application of water shall be applied to
the entire surface. Up to 4 litres/square meter shall be applied in gradual increments
so as to avoid flooding or scouring the surface.
3.7 TEST FREQUENCIES
3.7.1 SOURCE APPROVAL
The supporting test data required for initial source approval of the material shall include all
the tests specified in this Section on at least three representative samples from the proposed
material source, selected to represent the range of material quality likely to be obtained from
the source.
All holes in the finished work made by density testing or otherwise during testing shall be
backfilled by the Contractor without delay. Holes shall be filled with the specified material
and compacted to the density and surface tolerance requirements of this Specification
Section.
3.7.2 CONSTRUCTION
During construction routine material quality control testing shall be carried out to monitor
the material being brought on site. The extent of the testing shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer, but shall be at least as detailed below.
For every 3000 cubic meters.
5 plasticity index tests
5 particle grading tests
1 maximum dry density determination
1 CBR Test
 Where observed changes in the material or in its source or in its method of
production occur the material shall be re-submitted for source approval. Changes
may include, but are not limited to: change of supply source, change of excavation
stratum, change of crushing or sieving line, change in observed material properties.
 For the acceptance of aggregate delivered to the site for construction: samples shall
be taken from material at the site and tests shall be conducted for every 1000 cubic
meters from each material supply source or when material quality is extraordinary.
Material shall meet all physical properties specified in Tables Nos. 1&2 and
compacting test conducted inside the Laboratory.
 Moisture, aggregate material separation (observed by eyes and checking sieve
particle). Test on moisture and sieve particles shall be conducted for every 200 m3
aggregate or every shift;

 Compacted density: tests shall be conducted on every finished aggregate layer by
sand cone according to 22TCN346-06 or equivalent process as required by the
Engineer. Density testing shall be conducted every 800m2 at random positions;
 Flatness and geometric factors shall be checked according to the requirements
specified in Table No.3. These testing data will be basis for acceptance of works.
3.7.3 FINAL CHECKING AND ACCEPTING
 Density: tests shall be conducted for every 7000 m2 at two random positions
 For geometric factors checks shall be made on 20% of completed works in
accordance with the requirements of Table No.3..
3.8 TOLERANCES FOR ACCEPTANCE
The allowable tolerances after compaction are as shown in Table 3.
The surface of all aggregate base layers shall be free of irregularities which can hold
moisture and the camber of all such surfaces shall comply with that shown on the Drawings.
When testing the regularity of aggregate base surfaces to be treated with bituminous
surfacing, all loose material shall be removed by hard brooming.
Table 3 Tolerances for Aggregate Subbase and Base
Items checking Permitted Variation from Drawings Checking
Subbase Base frequency
Layer Thickness + 10 mm + 5 mm Measurement of
cross-section shall
Surface Level -10 mm -5 mm be conducted for
Width on Top -50mm -50mm every 40-50 m for
straight section
Cross Fall or Camber + 0.5% + 0.3% and 20 – 25 m for
horizontal or
vertical cures
Surface Irregularity by 3-m < 10 mm < 5 mm One position for
straight edge every 100m
Surface irregularity by 3m straight edge shall be carried out in accordance with TCVN
8864 : 2011.

The Aggregate Subbase and Aggregate Base shall be measured in cubic meters of
compacted material required, complete in place and accepted. The volumes to be measured
shall be based on the cross sections shown on the Drawings where the required thickness is
uniform and on the cross sections approved by the Engineer where the required thickness is
not uniform. Volumes shall be based on lengths measured horizontally along the road
centerline. No allowance shall be made for materials placed outside the design limits shown
on the cross-sections. Where trial sections are carried out outside the limit of the permanent
works no additional payment shall be made.
The work of preparing and maintaining the sub-grade on which the aggregate sub-base or
base is to be placed shall not be measured or paid.
No additional measurement shall be made for repairs to layers caused by traffic or natural
conditions.
No additional measurement shall be made for extra material provided in the overlaying
course for a deficiency in the sub-base or base course.

Measurement of Rectified Work:
a) When rectification of unsatisfactory sub-base or base is directed by the Engineer, no
additional measurement or payment shall be made for the extra work or quantities
necessitated by the rectification.
b) Where adjustment of moisture content has been directed by the Engineer prior to
compaction, no additional payments shall be made for adding water or drying out the
material or for any other work required to obtain satisfactory moisture content.
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including hauling, supplying,
placing, compacting, finishing and testing the materials, backfilling of holes made during
testing, the supply and placing of any running course and maintenance of the surface under
traffic and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and any incidentals to
complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as required in accordance with these
Specifications.
05100-01 Aggregate Sub-base m3
05100-02 Aggregate Base m3

SECTION 05200 - ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE
1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of a course composed of paver-laid asphalt treated base course
constructed on a prepared and accepted aggregate base course in accordance with these
Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on the
Drawings and as required by the Engineer.
The reference standards shall be those set out in section 5100 Aggregate subbase and base
(for aggregate base material) and section 6200 Asphalt concrete binder and surface courses
(for asphaltic materials, filler, and construction requirements).
Aggregates shall conform to the requirements for aggregate base in Section 05100 except
that the grading shall be as shown in the Table below.
Aggregate Grading Combined Aggregates
Sieve Size % by weight passing
mm µm Crushed Rock
50 100
37.5 95 – 100
28 75 – 90
14 60 – 75
3.35 30 – 45
75 3–6
Asphaltic materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 06200 “Asphalt Concrete
Binder and Surface Course”. In the absence of any requirement or permission to the contrary,
asphalt cement of 60/70 penetration shall be used.
The Contractor shall prepare submittals in accordance with Section 06200 “Asphalt
Concrete Binder and Surface Course” Clause 3.7, including preparation of a Job-Mix Design.
Quantity of asphalt binder shall be 3.5-4.5% of the weight of the total mixture.
Job-Mix Design requirements shall be:
Item Criteria
Stability 7.5kN min
Flow 2.5-4.0 mm
Voids in total mix 4-6%
Voids filled with asphalt 65-75%
Filler shall comply with the requirements of Section 06200 Clause 3.4 of the Specifications.
Preparations of materials shall be carried out according to the requirements of Sections
05100 and 06200.
Construction methods and testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 06200
“Asphalt Concrete Binder and Surface Course”.
The density of the compacted material, as determined by AASHTO T166, shall be at least
98 % of the density of laboratory compacted specimens composed of the same materials in
like proportions.

The quantity measured for payment shall be the number of square metres completed to the
thickness shown on the Drawings and accepted in the completed base course.
The quantities measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per
unit of measurement as listed below that is shown in the Bill of Quantities or on the
Drawings. The prices and payments shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
05200-01 Asphalt Treated Base m2

SECTION 05300 - DRY LEAN CONCRETE BASE
1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of construction of dry lean concrete base course for cement concrete
pavement or asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The work shall include furnishing of all plant and
equipment, materials and labour and performing all operations, in connection with the work,
as approved by the Engineer.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIAL SOURCES
The Contractor shall indicate to the Engineer the source of all materials with relevant test
data to be used in the lean concrete work sufficiently in advance and the approval of the
Engineer for the same shall be obtained at least 45 days before the scheduled
commencement of the work. If the Contractor later proposes to obtain the materials from a
different source, he shall notify the Engineer for his approval at least 45 days before such
materials are to be used.
2.2 STORAGE, MIXING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Materials shall be so stored and handled as to assure the preservation of their quality and
fitness for construction. Materials, even though approved before storage or handling, may
again be inspected and tested prior to use. Stored material shall be located to facilitate
prompt inspection.
Handling and stockpiling of aggregates shall be to the approval of the Engineer and at all
times be such as to eliminate segregation of the various sizes and contamination.
Aggregate stockpiles for lean concrete shall be protected from rain to prevent saturation of
the aggregates which would result in a reduction in the quality of the placed material or
adversely affect the placement of the material
Where separate size materials are to be blended to meet the gradation, such blending shall be
as directed by the Engineer and shall be accomplished prior to delivery to the roadway.
Mixing of separate materials on the roadway by motor grader will not be permitted.
2.3 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
Materials that do not comply with the requirements of this Specification section shall be
rejected and removed immediately from the site of the Works unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer. No rejected materials, the defects of which have been corrected, shall be used
until approval has been given by the Engineer.
2.4 CEMENT
Cement shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 07100
2.5 AGGREGATE
Aggregate for lean concrete shall not be alkali reactive and shall consist of hard, durable
particles of fragments of stone or gravel crushed to the size and of the quality requirements
of Specification Section 07100. Aggregate shall be cleaned and free from vegetable matter,
lumps or balls of clay and other deleterious substances. The material shall be of such nature
that it can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable base.
The aggregate material shall conform to the grading requirements below.

Grading Requirements for Lean Concrete Aggregate
Sieve Designation Percentage Passing the Sieve by Weight
26.5mm 100
19.0mm 80 – 100
9.5mm 55 – 75
4.75mm 35 – 60
600 µm 10 – 35
75 µm 0-8
The portion of the material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than
0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 (No. 40) sieve.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting the grading
requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with the crushed
aggregate material as approved by the Engineer. Filler shall be obtained from sources
approved by the Engineer, free from hard lumps and shall not contain more than 15 percent
of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No.4) sieve according to AASHTO T 112.
2.6 WATER
Water shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 07100
2.7 MIX REQUIREMENTS
2.7.1 MIX PROPORTIONS
The mix shall be proportioned with a maximum aggregate cement ratio of 15:1. The water
content shall be adjusted to the optimum moisture content for facilitating compaction by
rolling. The strength and density requirements of concrete shall be determined by making
trial mixes.
2.7.2 MOISTURE CONTENT
The right amount of water for the lean concrete in the main work shall be decided so as to
ensure full compaction under rolling and shall be assessed at the time of rolling the trial
length. Too much water will cause the lean concrete to be heaving up before the wheels and
picked up on the wheels of the roller and too little will lead to inadequate compaction, a low
in situ strength and an open textured surface.
The optimum water content shall be determined and demonstrated by rolling during trial
length construction and the optimum moisture content and degree of compaction shall be
subject to approved from the Engineer. While laying in the main work, the lean concrete
shall have a moisture content between the optimum and optimum +2 per cent, keeping in
view the effectiveness of compaction achieved and to compensate for evaporation losses.
2.7.3 CEMENT CONTENT
The minimum cement content in the lean concrete shall not be less than 150 kg/cu.m. of
concrete. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce concrete of the
specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary without additional cost compensation to
the Contractor.
2.7.4 CONCRETE STRENGTH
The average compressive strength of each consecutive group of 5 cubes of 150 mm size shall
not be less than 10 MPa at 7 days. In addition, the minimum compressive strength of any
individual cube shall not be less than 7.5 MPa at 7 days. The design mix complying with the
above Clauses shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be demonstrated in
the trial length construction.

2.8 SUBGRADE
The subgrade shall conform to the grades and cross sections shown on the drawings and
shall be uniformly compacted to the design strength in accordance with these Specifications
and Specification Clause 03400.
The lean concrete base course shall not be laid on a subgrade softened by rain after its final
preparation; surface trenches and soft spots, if any, must be properly back filled and
compacted to avoid any weak or soft spot. As far as possible, the construction traffic shall be
avoided on the prepared subgrade.
A day before placing of the base course, the subgrade surface shall be given a fine spray of
water and rolled with one or two passes of a smooth wheeled roller after a lapse of 2 3 hours
in order to stabilize loose surface. If Engineer feels it necessary, another fine spray of water
may be applied just before placing base course.
3. CONSTRUCTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT USED FOR LEAN CONCRETE BASE
Equipment and method used shall place the Lean Concrete Base to the line, levels, grades,
dimensions and cross-section shown in the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
The Engineer has the right to stop the use of any equipment or plant which he deems to be
inferior to the quality required and to instruct the removal of such equipment and to have it
replaced by suitable equipment or to alter the method of operation at any time.
The Contractor shall immediately comply with such instructions without being entitled to
any indemnities or extensions as a result of such instructions. The Contractor shall not be
allowed to use any equipment or plant before obtaining the approval of the Engineer, and the
Contractor shall undertake to follow sound technical methods in operation and to engage
skilled and trained operators, mechanics and labour to carry out the Works. The Engineer
has the right to expel any operators, mechanics or labour and to instruct suitable replacement
thereof at any time he deems such action is necessary.
3.2 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, SPREADING AND COMPACTING LEAN
CONCRETE BASE
Lean Concrete Base shall not be placed, spread or compacted while rain is falling, and no
compaction shall be carried out when moisture content of the material falls outside the
specified range.
3.2.1 TRANSPORTING
Plant mix lean concrete shall be discharged immediately from the mixer, transported directly
to the point where it is to be laid and protected from the weather by covering the tippers/
dumpers with tarpaulin during transit. The concrete shall be transported by tipping trucks,
sufficient in number to ensure a continuous supply of material to feed the laying equipment
to work at a uniform speed and in an uninterrupted manner.
3.2.2 PLACING
Lean concrete shall be laid/placed preferably by a paver. Where the space between box
culverts is not sufficient, the laying by hand will be accepted if approved by the Engineer.
The equipment shall be capable of laying the material in one layer in an even manner without
segregation, so that after compaction the total thickness is as specified. The paving machine
shall have high amplitude tamping bars to give good initial compaction to the base course.
The laying of two lane road base course may be done either in full width or lane by lane.
Preferably the lean concrete shall be placed and compacted across the full width of the road,
by constructing it in one go or in two lanes running forwards simultaneously.

Transverse and longitudinal construction joints shall be staggered by 500-1000 mm and
200-400 mm respectively from the corresponding joints in the overlaying concrete slabs.
Hauling equipment may not be routed over completed portions of the lean concrete base
courses without the approval of the Engineer.
3.2.3 SPREADING
Where the required thickness is 150mm or less, the material may be spread and compacted in
one layer. Where the required thickness is more than 150mm, the lean concrete base shall be
spread and compacted into two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the
maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 150mm unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. All subsequent layers shall be spread and compacted in a similar
manner.
Lean Concrete Base shall be delivered to the roadbed as a uniform mix and shall be spread at
a moisture content within the range specified in this Specification section. The moisture
shall be uniformly distributed throughout the material.
Lean Concrete Base shall be spread and shaped by any approved method, which does not
cause segregation of the fine and coarse aggregate particles. Segregated material shall be
corrected or removed and replaced with graded material.
3.2.4 COMPACTION
Compaction shall be carried out immediately after the material is laid and leveled. In order to
ensure thorough compaction which is essential, rolling shall be continued on the full width
till there is no further visible movement under the roller and the surface is closed. The
minimum dry density obtained shall be 97 per cent of that achieved during the trial length
construction. The densities achieved at the edges i.e 0.5 m from the edge shall not be less
than 95 per cent of that achieved during the trial construction.
The spreading, compacting and finishing of the lean concrete shall be carried out as rapidly
as possible and the operation shall be so arranged as to ensure that the time between the
mixing of the first batch of concrete in any transverse section of the layer and the final
finishing of the same shall not exceed 90 minutes when the concrete temperature is above 25
and below 30 degree Celsius and 120 minutes if less than 25 degree Celsius. This period may
be reviewed by the Engineer in the light of the results of the trial run but in no case shall it
exceed 2 hours. Work shall not proceed when the temperature of the concrete exceeds 30
degree Celsius. If necessary, chilled water or addition of ice may be resorted to for bringing
down the temperature. It is desirable to stop concreting when the ambient temperature is
above 35°C. After compaction has been completed, roller shall not stand on the compacted
surface for the duration of the curing period except during commencement of next day's
work near the location where work was terminated the previous day.
Double drum smooth wheeled vibratory rollers of minimum 80 to 100 kN static weight are
considered to be suitable for rolling dry lean concrete. In case any other roller is proposed,
this shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer after demonstrating its performance. The
number of passes required to obtain maximum compaction depends on the thickness of the
lean concrete, the workability of the mix, and the weight and type of the roller etc., and the
same as well as the total requirement of rollers for the job shall be determined during trial
run by measuring the in situ density and the scale of the work to be undertaken.
In addition to the number of passes required for compaction there shall be a preliminary pass
without vibration to bed the lean concrete down and again a final pass without vibration to
remove roller marks and to smoothen the surface.
Special care and attention shall be exercised during compaction near joints, kerbs, channels,
side forms and around gullies and manholes. In case adequate compaction is not achieved by
the roller at these points, use of plate vibrator shall be made, if so directed by the Engineer.

The final lean concrete surface on completion of compaction and immediately before
overlaying, shall be well closed, free from movement under roller and free from ridges, low
spots, cracks, loose material, pot holes, ruts or other defects. The final surface shall be
inspected immediately on completion and all loose, segregated or defective areas shall be
corrected by using fresh lean concrete material laid and compacted as per Specification. For
repairing honeycombed surface, concrete with aggregates of size 10 mm and below shall be
spread and compacted. It is necessary to check the level of the rolled surface for compliance.
Any level thickness deficiency should be corrected after applying concrete with aggregates
of size 10 mm and below after roughening the surface. Similarly the surface regularity also
should be checked with 3m straight edge. The deficiency should be made up with concrete
with aggregates of size 10 mm and below.
Segregation of concrete in the dumpers shall be controlled by premixing each fraction of the
aggregates before loading in the bin of the batching plant, by moving the dumper back and
forth while discharging the mix on it and other means. Even paving operation shall be such
that the mix does not segregate.
3.2.5 CURING
As soon as the lean concrete surface is compacted, curing shall commence. One of the
following two methods shall be adopted:
(i) The initial curing shall be done by spraying with liquid curing compound. The
curing compound shall be white pigmented or transparent type with water retention index of
90 per cent. Curing compound shall be sprayed immediately after rolling is complete. As
soon as the curing compound has lost its tackiness, the surface shall be covered with wet
hessian for three days.
(ii) Curing shall be done by covering the surface by gunny bags/hessian, which shall be
kept continuously moist for 7 days by sprinkling water.
3.3 CONTROL OF TRAFFIC ON LEAN CONCRETE BASE
Construction or other traffic shall not be permitted to travel on any finished lean concrete
layers, prior to the construction of the final surfacing, except where directed or permitted by
the Engineer.
3.4 TESTING
The amount of supporting test data required for initial approval of the quality of the material
will be as directed by the Engineer, but will include all the tests specified in this Section on at
least three representative samples from the proposed material source, selected to represent
the range of material quality likely to be obtained from the source.
Following approval of the quality of a proposed material, the full range of material quality
tests performed will be repeated subsequently, at the discretion of the Engineer, in the event
of observed changes in the material or in its source or in its method of production.
A programme of routine material quality control testing will be carried out to control
variability of the material being brought on site. The extent of the testing shall be directed by
the Engineer, but for every 1000 cubic metres of material produced the testing shall include
no less than five (5) plasticity index tests, five (5) particle grading tests, and one (1)
maximum dry density determination using AASHTO T 180, Method D. CBR tests shall be
carried out from time to time as directed by the Engineer.
The density and moisture content of the compacted material shall be routinely determined,
using AASHTO T 191. The test shall be made to the full depth of the layer at locations as
directed by the Engineer, but not more than 200 m apart.

All holes in the finished work made by density testing or otherwise shall be backfilled with
the specified material by the Contractor without delay and compacted to the density and
surface tolerance requirements of this Specification section.
3.5 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer at least 21 days prior to the
proposed date of first using any material proposed for use as Lean Concrete Base:
(a) two samples of 10 kg weight each of the material, one of which shall be retained by
the Engineer for reference throughout the Contract Period;
(b) a statement of the origin and composition of any material proposed for use as Lean
Concrete Base, together with laboratory test data verifying that the material properties
specified in this Section are met.
The Contractor shall submit the following in written form to the Engineer immediately
following completion of each section of the work and before any approval may be granted
for the placing of other materials on top of the Lean Concrete Base:
(a) the results of testing as specified in this Specification .
(b) the results of surface measurement tests and survey data verifying that the surface
and thickness tolerances are met
3.6 TOLERANCE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Lean concrete base shall be spread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer which
when compacted will conform to the designed thickness, level, longitudinal grade and cross
fall or camber as shown on the Drawings. The allowable tolerance shall be as follows.
Tolerances for Lean Concrete Base
Characteristic Permitted Variation from Drawings
Thickness of Layer ± 10 mm
Level of Surface -10mm to +5mm
Longitudinal Grade ± 0.1 %
(Measured over 25 m length)
Cross Fall or Camber ± 0.2%

Surface Irregularity 5mm
(Measured by 3-m straight-edge)
3.7 TRIAL MIXES

The Contractor shall make trial mixes of dry lean concrete with moisture contents such as
5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5 and 7.0 per cent using cement content specified and the specified aggregate
grading but without violating the requirement of aggregate cement ratio specified in Clause
3.1. Optimum moisture and density shall be established by preparing cubes with varying
moisture contents.
Compaction of the mix shall be done in three layers with vibratory hammer fitted with a
square or rectangular foot. After establishing the optimum moisture, a set of six cubes shall
be cast at that moisture for the determination of compressive strength on the 3rd and the
seventh day.
Trial mixes shall be repeated if the strength is not satisfactory either by increasing cement
content or using higher grade of cement. After the mix design is approved, the Contractor
shall construct a trial section.
If during the construction of the trial length, the optimum moisture content determined as
above is found to be unsatisfactory, the Contractor may make suitable changes in the
moisture content to achieve a satisfactory mix. The cube specimens prepared with the
changed moisture content should satisfy the strength requirement.
Before production of the mix, natural moisture content of the aggregate should be
determined on a day to day basis so that the moisture content could be adjusted. The mix
finally designed should neither stick to the rollers nor become too dry resulting in raveling of
surface
3.8 TRIAL LENGTH
The trial length shall be constructed at least 14 days in advance of the proposed date of
commencement of work. At least 30 days prior to the construction of the trial length, the
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a "Method Statement" giving detailed
description of the proposed materials, plant, equipment, mix proportion, and procedure for
batching, mixing, laying, compaction and other construction procedures.
The Engineer shall also approve the location and length of trial construction which shall be a
minimum of 50 m length and for full width of the pavement. The trial length shall contain the
construction of at least one transverse construction joint involving hardened concrete and
freshly laid base. The construction of trial length will be repeated till the Contractor proves
his ability to satisfactorily construct the base course.
In order to determine and demonstrate the optimum moisture content, which results in the
maximum dry density of the mix compacted by the rolling equipment and the minimum
cement content that is necessary to achieve the strength stipulated in the drawing, trial mixes
shall be prepared.
After the construction of the trial length, the in situ density of the freshly laid material shall
be determined by sand replacement method with 20 cm diameter density cone. Three density
holes shall be made at locations equally spaced along a diagonal that bisects the trial length;
average of these densities shall be determined. These main density holes shall not be made in
the strip 50 cm from the edges. The average density obtained from the three samples
collected shall be the reference density and is considered as 100 per cent. The field density of
regular work will be compared with this reference density. A few cores may be cut as per the
instructions of the Engineer to check segregation or any other deficiency.
The hardened concrete shall be cut over 3 m width and reversed to inspect the bottom surface
for any segregation taking place. The trial length shall be constructed after making necessary
changes in the gradation of the mix to eliminate segregation of the mix. The lower surface
shall not have honey combing and the aggregates shall not be held loosely at the edges.
The trial length shall be outside the main works. The main work shall not start until the trial
length has been approved by the Engineer. After approval has been given, the materials, mix
proportions, moisture content, mixing, laying, compaction plant and construction
procedures shall not be changed without the approval of the Engineer.

4.1 MEASUREMENT
Lean Concrete Base shall be measured as the number of cubic meters of compacted material
required, complete in place and accepted. The volumes to be measured shall be based on the
cross sections shown on the Drawings where the required thickness is uniform and on the
cross sections approved by the Engineer where the required thickness is not uniform, and
lengths measured horizontally along the road centerline. No allowance will be given for
materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall
not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of subbase and base herein
measured.
The work of preparing and maintaining the subgrade on which the lean concrete base is to be
placed will not be measured or paid.
No additional measurement for payment will be made for repairs to layers caused by traffic
or natural conditions.
No additional measurement for payment will be made for extra material provided in the next
course for a deficiency in the Lean Concrete Base.
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RECTIFIED WORK
Where rectification of unsatisfactory lean concrete base has been directed by the Engineer,
the quantities to be measured for payment shall be those, which would have been paid if the
original work had been acceptable. No additional payment will be made for the extra work or
quantities necessitated by the rectification.
Where adjustment of moisture content has been directed by the Engineer prior to compaction,
no additional payments will be made for adding water or drying out the material or for any
other work required to obtain a satisfactory moisture content.
4.3 PAYMENT
The quantities determined, as provided above, shall be paid for in accordance with Unit
Prices as indicated on the Bid Price Schedule for each of the particular Pay Items. Payment
shall be full compensation for hauling, supplying, placing, compacting, finishing and testing
the materials and all other costs necessary or usual to the proper completion of the work
prescribed in this Specification section.
05300-01 Lean Concrete Base m3

DIVISION 6 PAVEMENT
SECTION 06100 - PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
1. DESCRIPTION
Prime coat shall consist of supplying and applying emulsified or cut back asphalt to
previously prepared absorbent surfaces such as sub-grade, granular sub-base or aggregate
base course; prior to placing subsequent bituminous layers. Prime Coat shall be applied to
the full width and in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Where indicated in this
specification the use of cover aggregate may be required.
Tack coat shall consist of furnishing and applying emulsified or cut back asphalt to a
previously placed asphaltic base or binder course and concrete bridge decks, approach slabs
and other concrete surfaces to receive asphaltic concrete wearing course.
covered by this Specification Section:
 TCVN 7494:2005 (ASTM D140-01) Bitumen. Method for sampling
 TCVN 7495:2005 (ASTM D5-97) Bitumen. Test method for penetration
 TCVN 7496:2005 (ASTM D113-99) Bitumen. Test method for ductility
 TCVN 7500:2005 (ASTM D2042-01) Bitumen. Test method for solubility in
Trichloroethylene
 TCVN 7502:2005 (ASTM D2170-01a) Bitumen. Test method for determination of
kinematic viscosity
 TCVN 8817:2011 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
 TCVN 8818:2011 Cut Back Asphalt
 TCVN 8819:2011 Specification for Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt
Concrete Pavement and Acceptance
 AASHTO M81 Cut-back Asphalt Rapid Curing Type
 AASHTO M82 Cut-back Asphalt Medium Curing Type
 AASHTO M226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
2.2 MATERIALS
Material for the Prime Coat shall be Cut-back Asphalt Medium Curing Type MC30, or
MC70 (TCVN 8818 / AASHTO M82)
Material for the Tack Coat shall be Cut-back Asphalt Rapid Curing Type RC-70 (TCVN
8818 / AASHTO M81).
Where AC-20 is to be diluted with kerosene, the proportion of kerosene shall be subject to
the prior approval of the Engineer.
As alternatives to cut-back asphalts, cationic emulsified asphalts of the types and applied at
the application rates set out in TCVN 8819:2011 may be permitted subject to demonstration
of satisfactory performance to the approval of the Engineer.
2.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the following items. These
items shall be submitted well in advance of the Contractor’s programmed start for this work.
a) A 5-litre sample of any Bitumen that the Contractor proposes to use in the works
together with a certificate from the Manufacturer. The certificate must state that
the materials comply with all the specification and grade requirements for the
prime coat and the tack coat given in this specification.
b) A satisfactory record of the calibration certificates of all instruments and gauges,
including the dipstick for the bitumen distributor, shall be submitted not less
than 30 days before construction begins.
c) A spray chart meeting the requirement of sub-section 3.2.3 of this specification.
The spray chart will also be required to enable equipment checks to be carried
out.
d) Samples of materials used in each day’s work shall be submitted in accordance
with Sub-section 3.5 of this specification. Daily records of sealing works done
and material application rates shall be submitted in accordance with this
specification, the Drawings or as required by the Engineer.
3.1 WEATHER LIMITATION
Prime Coat and Tack Coat shall be applied only on dry surfaces, and shall not be applied
during high winds, rain, mist or fog or if rain is imminent and likely to interrupt the work.
3.2 EQUIPMENT
3.2.1 GENERAL
The equipment to be used by the Contractor shall include a power broom and/or a power
blower, a pressurized bitumen distributor and equipment for heating Bitumen. The Engineer
will not permit the use of gravity distributors.
3.2.2 DISTRIBUTOR
The distributor shall have a minimum capacity of 1,000 liters.
The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that Bitumen at
even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface, at a controlled rate of
transverse and longitudinal spread within ±10 percent of the required rate of application.
The distributor equipment shall include a tachometer, pressure gauges, a calibrated tank
dipstick, a thermometer for measuring the temperature of the tank contents, and an
instrument for measuring the speed of travel at low speed. All measuring equipment on the
distributor shall have been recently calibrated and an accurate and satisfactory record of such
calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer.
3.2.3 INSTRUMENTATION/CALIBRATION
The distributor shall be equipped with a spray chart and operation manual which shall be in
good condition and carried with the sprayer at all times.
The operation manual shall include pipe flow diagrams and full instructions for all
operations of the distributor.
The spray chart shall show the relationship between speed and application rate for the
bitumen distributor being used as well as the relationship between pump speed and the
number of nozzles in use, based on a constant bitumen output per nozzle. The constant
nozzle output (liters/min) and the spraying pressure shall be noted on the spray chart.

The spray chart shall also show the height of the spray bar from the surface and the correct
horizontal angle of the spray nozzles to ensure triple overlap of the nozzle fans (i.e. the width
of road coated by each nozzle is exactly three times the spacing between nozzles).
3.2.4 UNACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT
Equipment used for the spraying of prime coat and tack coat shall be fit for purpose and in
sound condition. All equipment shall be operated by trained and experienced operators and
work shall be carried out by skilled and experienced labour.
3.3 APPLICATION METHODS
Prior to the start of work on site the layer to which the prime coat or tack is to be applied and
the Contractor’s proposed materials, method statement and equipment shall have been
approved by the Engineer and a satisfactory trial shall have been completed.
Prior to the application of the bitumen, loose dirt and other objectionable materials shall be
removed from the surface by means of power broom or blower or both. If this does not
provide a uniformly clean surface, additional sweeping shall be done by hand using stiff
brooms. Sweeping shall extend at least 20 centimeters beyond each edge of the area to be
sprayed.
Adherent patches of objectionable materials shall be removed from the surface by steel
scraper or other approved method and where the Engineer so directs, the scraped area shall
be washed down with water and hand brooms.
Application of Bitumen shall not be made until the pavement has been prepared to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer will not permit the application when there is free
water present on the surface.
The work shall be carried out to offer the least inconvenience to traffic and without damage
to the work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the consequences of traffic being admitted too
early to newly laid Prime Coat, and he shall prohibit such traffic when necessary by
providing a detour or by half-width construction.
The Contractor shall all necessary precautions to ensure that surfaces of structures or trees or
property adjacent to the areas shall be protected against marring and spattering and that
bituminous material shall not be discharged into any side ditch, drain or watercourse.
3.3.2 SPRAYING TEMPERATURES
Spraying temperatures shall comply with Table 1.
Table 1 Spraying Temperatures (Prime Coat)
Type of Material SPRAYING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Cutback, 50 pph kerosene 70 ± 10º C
(MC-70 grade cutback)
(MC-30 grade cutback)
Cutback, more than 100 pph kerosene Not heated

Table 2 Spraying Temperatures (Tack Coat)
Type of Material Spraying Temperature Range
3.3.3 EXCESSIVE HEATING
Heating in excess of the requirements or prolonged heating at high temperatures shall be
avoided. Any material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has been damaged by
overheating shall be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
3.3.4 SAFETY
At the heating site the Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire prevention and
control measures and first aid supplies and facilities.
Extreme care should be taken when heating any cut-back asphalt cement. Open flames or
sparks shall not be permitted close to these materials. Controlled heat should be applied in
heating kettles, mixers, distributors, or other equipment designed and approved for the
purpose. Open flames shall not be used to inspect or examine drums, tank cars or other
containers in which these materials are stored. All vehicles transporting these materials shall
be properly vented. Only experienced personnel shall be permitted to supervise the handling
of these materials.
3.3.5 RATE OF APPLICATION
The Contractor shall carry out field trials under the supervision of the Engineer to establish
the appropriate application rate for each type of bitumen and for each type of surface to
which bitumen is to be applied.
The rate of application of Prime Coat shall be 1kg/m2 or as otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
The rate of application of Tack Coat shall be 0.5 kg/m2 for each layer or as otherwise
The appropriate application rate for prime coat will depend on the type of aggregate base
course present, with open graded bases requiring a higher application rate, and dense graded
bases requiring a lower application rate. No more prime should be applied than can be
absorbed by the aggregate base in 24 hours.
The transverse distribution of bitumen application rates produced by the distributor shall be
tested by passing the spray bar over a test area laid with 25cm x 25cm sheets of absorbent
material with a binder-proof backing, which are weighed before and after the spray
application. The difference in weight shall be used in determining the spraying rate actually
applied to each sheet and the variation from the mean rate for any sheet across the full width
sprayed shall not exceed 15 percent.
Check the uniform level of the emulsion spread onto the road pavement by the following
method: place the box with 25x40cm bottom area on the pavement to collect emulsion when
the spreader is passing by. Then weigh the box to determine the collected amount of
emulsion, it is the volume of emulsion per 0.1m2. The difference between the actual amount
of spread emulsion and the required emulsion amount shall be less than 100g/m2.
3.3.6 MAINTENANCE OF PRIME COAT
The Contractor shall maintain the coated surface to the specified standard until it is overlaid
by the subsequent course.
Traffic shall not be permitted on the coated surface until the Bitumen has penetrated and
dried and, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not pick up under traffic.
In exceptional circumstances where it becomes necessary to permit traffic on prime coat
prior to that time, but in no case sooner than 4 hours after the application of the prime coat,

clean cover aggregate shall be applied as directed by the Engineer and traffic may be
permitted to use the lanes so treated.
Cover aggregate shall be spread from trucks in such a manner that no wheel will travel on
uncovered wet Bitumen. When applying cover aggregate to a treated lane that adjoins a lane
yet to be treated, a strip at least 20 cm wide along the adjoining edge shall be left uncovered,
or if covered shall be uncovered when the second lane is being prepared for treatment, in
order to permit an overlap of Bitumen as required above. The cover aggregate shall be used
to the minimum extent possible.
3.4 QUALITY OF WORK AND RECTIFICATION OF UNSATISFACTORY WORK
The finished coat shall completely cover the area treated and have a uniform appearance,
without missed areas or streaks or “rich” areas of accumulated bitumen.
After curing for 4 to 6 hours, the binder shall have soaked into the course where it was
applied leaving behind only sufficient binder to ensure that the surface is uniformly black or
dark grey in colour and non-porous.
Prime coats must penetrate the aggregate base course to a minimum of 5mm, and preferably
10mm, in order to stabilise and bind the surface fines and to promote bonding to the hot mix
asphalt.
Rectification of unsatisfactory Prime Coat or Tack Coat shall be conducted as directed by
the Engineer. Minor potholing shall be promptly patched.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
A bitumen sample and certificate shall be provided for each delivery of bitumen to the site of
the works.
Samples of the Prime Coat shall be taken from the distributor as directed by the Engineer.
The bitumen distributor shall be inspected and tested as follows:
 Prior to the commencement of spraying works under the Contract;
 Every 6 months or every 150,000 liters of binder sprayed by the distributor,
whichever is the more frequent;
 Following any accident or modification to the distributor that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, warrants rechecking the distributor.
The result of the wet sieve testing of any proposed cover aggregate shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to any use of the material.
A detailed written record of daily surfacing operations, including the location, binder used
on each sprayer run, application rates achieved, and area covered shall be prepared and
submitted to the Engineer.

The quantity of asphaltic material shall be measured for payment by square meter coverage
accepted.
Any cover aggregate used shall be considered incidental to the work for achieving a
satisfactory Prime Coat and shall not be measured or paid for.
The work of preparing and maintaining the formation on which the Prime or Tack Coat is to
be placed is not measured or paid for under this specification section.

Final cleaning and preparation of the surface and maintenance of the completed prime or
tack coated surface shall be considered incidental to the work for achieving a satisfactory
Prime or Tack Coat and shall not be measured or paid for separately.
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RECTIFIED WORK
No payment shall be made for the rectification and re-testing of Prime Coat or Tack Coat
rendered unsatisfactory due to unacceptable materials or workmanship provided by the
Contractor.
furnishing and placing all the material, including any cover aggregate, and for furnishing all
labour, materials, tools, tests, equipment and any incidentals to complete and maintain the
work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, subject to
confirmation by the Engineer.
06100-01 Prime Coat m2
06100-02 Tack Coat m2

SECTION 06200 - ASPHALT CONCRETE BINDER AND SURFACE
COURSES
1. DESCRIPTION
The work of asphalt Concrete Binder and Surface Courses under this specification consists
of the supply, spreading and compaction of hot asphalt mixtures produced in a central
mixing plant capable of providing dense durable binder and surface courses.
2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
 22TCN319-04 Polymer asphalt - Technical requirement and testing
method.
 22TCN345-06 Technology process for construction and approval of
the thin covering layer of high roughness asphalt
concrete.
 TCVN 7493 - 7504:2005 Bitumen – Testing methods for physico-mechanical
characteristic.
 TCVN 8819:2011 Asphalt Concrete Pavement – Specification for
Construction and Acceptance
 TCVN 8863:2011 Bituminous Surface Treatment – Specification for
Construction and Acceptance.
 TCVN 8865:2011 Method for Measuring and Assessment Roughness by
International Roughness Index (IRI)
 TCVN 8866:2011 Standard Test Method for Measuring Pavement
Macrotexture Depth Using a Volumetric Technique
 TCVN 8867:2011 Flexible Pavement Standard Test Method for
determining the Elastic Modulus of Pavement
Structure using Benkelman Beam.
 22TCN318-04 Testing process for determination of abrasion of
aggregate by Los Angeles Method.
 AASHTO M17 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 AASHTO M20 Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement
 AASHTO M226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
 AASHTO T11-05 Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing. ASTM C117-03
 AASHTO T27-99 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM
C 136-96
 AASHTO T49 Penetration of Bitumen
 AASHTO T50 Float Test for Bitumen
 AASHTO T51 Ductility of Bitumen

 AASHTO T 53-96 (2004) Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Apparatus). ASTM D36-95 (2000)
 AASHTO T96 Resistance to Degrading of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine
 AASHTO T104 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulphate or
Magnesium Sulphate
 AASHTO T164 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
 AASHTO T165 Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted
Bituminous Mixtures
 AASHTO T166 Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
 AASHTO T168 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 AASHTO T170 Recovery of Asphalt from Solution by Abson Method
 AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of
the Sand Equivalent Test
 AASHTO T179 Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin Film
Oven Test)
 AASHTO T182 Coating and Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures
 AASHTO T209 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 AASHTO T230 Method B. Standard Method of Test for Determining
Degree of Pavement Compaction of Bituminous
Aggregate Mixtures
 AASHTO T245 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
using Marshall Apparatus
 ASTM E950 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal
Profile of Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer
Established Inertial Profiling Reference
 American Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2
 The Policy for Draining A/C Surface Courses, Japan Road Association (JRA)
 Activities of Porous Asphalt on Expressways, Japan Highway Public Corporation.
3. MATERIALS FOR ASPHALT MIXTURES

3.1 AGGREGATES - GENERAL
All sources of supply of aggregate and mineral filler shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to the delivery of any materials. Samples of each material shall be submitted as directed.
Aggregates to be used in the work shall have a retained strength of not less than 75 % when
tested for loss of cohesion resulting from the action of water in accordance with AASHTO
T165 and AASHTO T245.

Stockpiling and handling of materials shall be in accordance with the requirements in clause
2.3 of specification section 05100.
Fine aggregates shall be stored under cover to provide protection from rain.
(Aggregates of each type shall be fed into the mixing plant via a separate cold feed bin.
Pre-blending of aggregates of different types or from different sources will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall take into account the bitumen absorption properties of aggregates when
selecting his proposed material sources. Variations in bitumen content resulting from
varying degrees of bitumen absorption by the aggregates will in no way be considered
grounds for renegotiating the unit price of the asphalt mixture.
3.2 COARSE AGGREGATE
The aggregate shall consist of clean, tough, durable crushed stone free from dirt or other
objectionable matter. The aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of no more than 35% at
500 revolutions when tested in accordance with 22TCN318-04.
The aggregate shall have a weight loss not greater than 12% when subjected to five cycles of
the sodium sulphate soundness test in accordance with AASHTO T104,
The aggregate shall have a coated area of not less than 95% when subjected to Coating and
Stripping Tests in accordance with AASHTO T182,
3.3 FINE AGGREGATE
The aggregate shall be free from lumps or balls of clay and other objectionable materials and
shall consist of clean, tough durable particles of natural sands or crushed stone screenings or
suitable combinations thereof. If some crushed stone screenings (“crusher dust”) are used
the dust shall be produced by crushing clean stone having no clay or silt content and shall be
stockpiled separately from any natural sand to be used in the mix. When used in combination
the crusher dust and natural sand components shall be fed into the mixing plant using
separate cold bin feeds so that the ratio of sand to crusher dust can be properly controlled.
The Contractor shall not be permitted to use in his asphalt mixes contaminated natural sands
having more than 8% fines passing the No.200 sieve or having a sand equivalent value less
than 50 as determined by AASHTO T176.
3.4 FILLER FOR ASPHALT MIXTURES
Filler for Asphalt Mixtures shall fully conform to the particular provisions of TCVN
8819:2011.
Filler shall consist of limestone dust, dolomite dust, Portland cement, fly ash, cement kiln
dust or other non-plastic mineral matter from sources approved by the Engineer. It shall be
free from foreign or other objectionable material.
Filler shall be dry and free from lumps and when tested by wet sieving shall contain not less
than 70% (preferably not less than 85%) by weight of particles passing a 75-micron sieve.
3.5 BITUMEN FOR ASPHALT MIXTURES
Normal Bitumen: Bitumen shall be asphalt cement which is approximately equivalent to
60/70 Pen and having properties meeting the requirements of Table 1. Other asphalts will be
permitted only with the prior Approval of the Engineer.
If required by the drawings and subject to the approval of the Engineer, an adhesion and
anti-stripping agent shall be added to the Bitumen. The additive shall be of a type approved
by the Engineer and the required percentage of additive shall be thoroughly mixed with the
Bitumen in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction subject to the approval of the
Engineer for such time as is necessary to produce a homogeneous mixture.

Table 1 Bitumen properties Requirement (referred Table 1 of TCVN 7493: 2005)
No. Properties Unit Grade Testing method Reference
60/70 standard
1 Penetration at 25°C 0.1mm 60 – 70 TCVN 7495:2005 ASTM D5
AASHTO T49
2 Ductility at 25°C cm Min. 100 TCVN 7496:2005 ASTM D113
AASHTO
T151
3 Softening point (ring °C 46 TCVN 7497:2005 AASHTO T53
and ball method) min
4 Flash point °C Min. 232 TCVN 7498:2005 ASTM D92
AASHTO T48
5 Loss on heating for 5 % Max. 0.5 TCVN 7499:2005 ASTM D6
hours at 163°C AASHTO T47
6 Ratio of penetration of % Min. 75 TCVN 7499:2005 ASTM D6/D5
residue after heating for
5 hours at 163°C to one
at 25°C
7 Solubility in % Min. 99 TCVN 7500:2005 ASTM D2042
Trichloroethylene AASHTO T44
C2CL4
8 Specific gravity at 25°C g/cm3 1 – 1.05 TCVN 7501:2005 ASTM D70
AASHTO
T228
9 Effect of water on grade Min. 3rd ASTM D3625
bituminous – coated grade
aggregate using boiling
water
10 Wax paraffin content % Max. 2.2 TCVN 7503:2005 DIN-52015
Polymer Modified Binder: The asphalt concrete roughness layer shall be constructed and
accepted in accordance with 22TCN345-06. The asphalt concrete mixture to be used for the
concrete roughness layer will be conducted by hot mixing and spraying method with
interrupted aggregate, and cohesive substance is polymer asphalt.
Polymer modified asphalt to be used for the asphalt concrete roughness layer shall be type
PMB-I or PMB-II in accordance with 22TCN319-04 as detailed in table 2 below (Table
No.1 of 22TCN319-04). Selection of PMB-I or II shall based on test results for the proposed
job mix and trial sections.
Table 2 Polymer Modified Binder (PMB) Requirements (table 1 of 22TCN319-04)
No. Binder Properties Unit 22TCN319-04 Testing method Reference
PMB-I PMB-II standard
1 Softening Point (Ring °C Min. 60 Min. 70 TCVN 7497:2005 ASTM
and Ball Method) D36
AASHTO
T53
2 Penetration at 25°C 0.1mm 50 - 70 40 - 70 TCVN 7495:2005 ASTM D5
AASHTO
T49
3 Flash Point °C Min. 232 TCVN 7498:2005 ASTM
D92
AASHTO
T48
4 Loss on Heating for 5 % Max. 0.6 TCVN 7499:2005 ASTM D6
hours at 163°C AASHTO
T47
5 Penetration of % Min. 65 TCVN 7499:2005 ASTM
Residue after Heating D6/D5

No. Binder Properties Unit 22TCN319-04 Testing method Reference
PMB-I PMB-II standard
for 5 hours at 163°C
to Original
6 Solubility of % Min. 99 TCVN 7500:2005 ASTM
Trichloroethylene D2042
C2 Cl4 AASHTO
T44
7 Specific Gravity at g/cm3 1.00 – 1.05 TCVN 7501:2005 ASTM
25°C D70
AASHTO
T228
8 Effect of Water on grade Min. 4th grade ASTM
Polymer Modified D3625
Bitumen – Coated
Aggregate using
Boiling Water
9 Elastic Recovery at % Min. 60 Min. 65 22TCN319-04 ASTM
25°C, 10 cm D6084
elongation
10 Storage Stability for °C Max. 3.0 22TCN319-04 ASTM
48 hours at 163°C, D5892
Difference of
Softening Point
11 Dynamic Viscosity at Pa.s Max. 3.0 22TCN319-04 ASTM
135°C (spindle 21, D4402
18.6 s-1, Brookfield
Viscometer)
An adhesion and anti-stripping agent shall be added to the bituminous material when the
Engineer so directs or approves. The additive shall be of a type approved by the Engineer
and the required percentage of additive shall be thoroughly mixed with the bituminous
material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and as directed by the Engineer
for such time as is necessary to produce a homogeneous mixture.
3.6 MATERIAL TESTING
All testing necessary to determine conformity with the requirements of this specification and
for purposes of acceptance shall be performed in accordance with clause 4.10 of this
specification.
The Contractor shall provide a one-litre sample of all bitumen that he proposes to use
together with a certificate confirming their source test data giving their properties both
before and after a Thin Film Oven Test in accordance with AASHTO T179) and including:
 Penetration at 25C
 Penetration at 35C
 Ring and Ball softening point
 Viscosity at 60C
 Viscosity at 135C
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of table 2A below
Table 2A Requirements of Aggregate
No. Properties Standards 22TCN345-06 & TCVN 8819:2011
Roughness Surface Binder Testing method
Course Course Course

No. Properties Standards 22TCN345-06 & TCVN 8819:2011
Roughness Surface Binder Testing method
I Coarse aggregate for asphalt mixtures
1 Stable Compression limit of TCVN 7572-10: 2006
rock, MPa Min.120 Min. 100 Min. 80
- Aggregate of magmatic and
metamorphic rock Min. 80 Min.60
- Aggregate of sedimentary
rock
2 Resistance to abrasion and Max. 28 Max. 28 Max. 35 TCVN 7572-12: 2006
impact of aggregate by Los AASHTO T96
Angeles machine (LA), %
3 Elongation and flakiness Max. 12 Max. 15 Max. 15 TCVN 7572-13: 2006
index, %
4 Content of soft and weathered Max. 10 Max. 15 TCVN 7572-17: 2006
particles, %
5 Content of dust, mud and clay Max. 2 Max. 2 Max. 2 TCVN 7572-08: 2006
(percent by weight), %
6 Content of clay lumps (percent Max. 0.25 Max. 0.25 Max. TCVN 7572-08: 2006
by aggregate weight), % 0.25
7 Bitumen adhesion with Min. class 3 Min. class 3 Min. TCVN 7504: 2005
aggregate class 3
II Physical properties of sand
Sand type Crushed natural sand, crushed
(selected) (selected) sand
sand
1 Fineness Modulus M = 0.01 Min. 2 Min. 2 TCVN 7572-02: 2006
(A2.5+A1.25+A0.63+A0.315+
A0.14)
2 Sand Equivalent Coefficient Min. 50 Min. 80 (natural sand) AASHTO T176
(ES), % Min. 50 crushed
(selected) sand
3 Content of dust, mud, clay Max. 3 Max. 3 (natural sand) TCVN 7572-08: 2006
(percent by weight), % Max. 7 crushed
(selected) sand
4 Content of clay lumps (percent Max. 0.5 Max. 0.5 TCVN 7572-08: 2006
by weight), %
5 Angularity (Uncompacted void Min. 43 Min. 43 Min. 40 TCVN 8860-07: 2011
content) %
III Physical properties of mineral filler
1 Sieve Designation (mass TCVN 7572-02: 2006
percent passing ), %
0.600mm 100 100
0.300mm 95 – 100 95 – 100
0.075mm 70 – 100 70 – 100
2 Moisture content % by weight Max. 1 Max. 1 TCVN 7572-07: 2006
3 Plasticity index, % Max. 4 TCVN 4197-1995
Notes: A2.5 is retained accumulation on sieve size of 2.5mm
3.7 SUBMITTALS
3.7.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the following:
a) A detailed schedule for materials submissions and testing, the preparation and
submission a Job-Mix design for each type of Asphalt Concrete layer and the

construction of trial sections. This schedule shall be submitted well before the
Contractor’s programmed start for this work and shall allow for all source
materials to be approved prior to the start of job mix design.
b) Samples of all materials approved for use. These samples will be retained by the
Engineer for reference purposes throughout the contract period.
c) A bitumen sample and an appropriate certificate for each delivery of bitumen to
the site subject to approval of the Engineer;
d) Written reports containing all the test results for each material in accordance
with the requirements of clause 3.5 “Bitumen for Asphalt Mixtures” and clause
4.5 “Manufacture and Production of Asphalt Mixtures” of this specification;
e) A written report for all Job-Mix formulae together with supporting test data in
accordance with the requirements of clause 4.5 “Manufacture and Production of
Asphalt Mixtures” and clause 4.9 “Placing and Compaction of the Mixture” of
this specification;
f) A written report for all surface test measurements in accordance with clause 4.10
“Quality Control and Testing” of this specification Section;
g) Written reports on the density of the placed mixtures, as specified in clause 4.10
“Quality Control and Testing” of this Specification Section;
h) Checking the calibration and accuracy of the weigh scales and of the laboratory
testing equipment and procedures;
i) Laboratory and field test data as specified in Sub-section 4.10 “Quality Control
and Testing” of this Specification Section, for daily control of mix batching and
mix Quality, in written report form;
j) Written records of layer thickness and pavement dimension measurements as
specified in Sub-section 4.11 “Asphalt Mixture Tolerances” of this Specification
Section;
In addition, when changing the Job-Mix Formula, or in any event from time to time as
directed by the Engineer, additional samples shall be taken to enable determination of the
bulk specific gravity of the hot bin aggregates and the maximum theoretical density of the
bituminous mixture (AASHTO T209).
3.7.2 ROUGHNESS LAYER
As an alternative to the roughness layer specified in this Section, the Contractor may propose
the use of a proprietary Novachip product for the roughness layer, providing that it complies
with the Interim Regulation on Construction Technology and Acceptance for Thin Rough
Overlay on Highway issued with Decision No.3287/QD-BGTVT dated 29/10/2008 of
MOT.
In such case, the Contractor shall submit a proposal for the approval of the Engineer. The
proposal shall, inter alia, include (1) a full specification for the roughness layer, (2) evidence
that the performance of the proposed product is equal to or superior to the roughness layer
specified in this Specification Section and (3) an undertaking that the Contractor will not
seek additional payment for the provision of the alternative roughness layer.
Notwithstanding the Contractor’s compliance with the above provisions the Contractor shall
not make any preparation for use of the alternative roughness layer until receipt of the
Engineer’s approval in writing.
4. EQUIPMENT USED FOR ASPHALT MIX WORK

Equipment and plant used for the production, placing and compacting of the asphalt binder
and surface courses and the asphalt roughness layer be fit for purpose and in sound condition.
All equipment shall be operated by trained and experienced operators and work shall be
carried out by skilled and experienced labour.
4.1 PLANT GENERAL
The mixing plant shall be of weigh-batching type and shall have a capacity sufficient to
ensure the finisher(s) can without interruption when spreading the asphalt mix at a normal
speed and the required thickness. The plant shall be capable of producing a mixture within
the job mix tolerances.
The plant shall be provided with Automatic or Computer Controlled batching systems able
to print records for each batch. The plant must comply with applicable environmental
standards of Vietnam and the requirements for the Contractor’s Environmental Management
Plan given in section 01300 of the Specification.
The Contractor shall ensure that at all times the process of mixing asphalt material is carried
out in a safe manner. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire prevention and
control measures and first aid supplies and facilities at the site of the mixing plant.
The Contractor shall provide safe and secure access to all inspection, sampling and
measuring points on the mixing plant and for the sampling and checking of materials
contained in the delivery trucks
4.1.1 PLANT SCALES
Scales for all weigh boxes or hoppers shall be of the spring-less dial type, load cell, or
equivalent subject to the approval of the Engineer, shall be of standard make, shall have an
accuracy of within 0.5%of the maximum expected load and shall be located so that they are
in plain view of the operator at all times. The value of the minimum graduation shall not be
greater than one kilogram.
Pointers on dial scales shall be set close to the face of the dial to avoid excessive parallax.
Dial scales shall be provided with adjustable pointers for marking the weight of each
material included in the batch.
Scales for weighing the Bitumen shall conform to the specifications for scales for aggregate.
The calibration of all scales shall be checked in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations or, subject to the approval of the Engineer, when it is apparent that the
scales are in error. The Contractor shall keep on site such equipment as may be necessary for
calibrating the scales.
4.1.2 EQUIPMENT FOR STORAGE OF BITUMEN
Tanks for storage of Bitumen shall be equipped with heaters with effective and positive
control capable of keeping the bitumen within the temperature range specified at all times.
The circulating system for the Bitumen shall be capable of ensuring proper and continuous
circulation during the entire operating period. Suitable means shall be provided, either by
steam jackets or other insulation, for maintaining the specified temperature of the Bitumen
in the pipe lines, meters, weight buckets, spray bars, and other containers in the flow lines.
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, Bitumen may be partially heated in the tanks and
brought to the specified temperature by means of booster heating equipment between the
tanks and the mixer.

The total storage of the tanks shall be sufficient to provide 10 hours of full operation of the
asphalt mixing plant. If more than one storage tank is used, they shall be so connected to the
circulatory system that each tank can be isolated without interference to the circulation of
bitumen to the mixer.
4.1.3 BINS
The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the mixer when it is
operating at full capacity.
a) Bins shall be divided into at least four compartments and shall be arranged to
ensure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the aggregate,
not including mineral filler.
b) Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such
size and at such location as to prevent any backing up of material into other bins.
c) Bins shall be so constructed that the gates do not leak and samples can be readily
obtained.
4.1.4 FEEDER FOR DRIER
A separate feeder shall be provided for each aggregate to be used in the mix.
The walls to the cold feed bins shall be of sufficient height and width to prevent
intermingling of materials from adjacent bins.
All feeders shall be calibrated and the gate opening and speed settings for each approved job
mix clearly indicated on the gates and on the plant control panel. Once established, the
feeder settings shall not be altered without the approval of the Engineer.
A system of “No Flow” switches shall be installed on each aggregate feeder to stop the plant
if no material is flowing from the feed bin after 30 seconds.
4.1.5 DRIER
A rotary drier of any satisfactory design for drying and heating the mineral aggregate shall
be provided.
4.1.6 SCREEN
Screens shall ensure that the aggregate deposited in any bin shall not contain more than 1.0
percent of oversized or undersized materials.
4.1.7 WEIGH BOX OR HOPPER
The equipment shall include a means to accurately weigh each aggregate size and be large
enough to hold a full batch without hand raking or running over.
There shall be sufficient clearance between hoppers and their supports to prevent
accumulations of foreign materials.
The discharge gate of the weigh box shall be so hung that the aggregate will not be
segregated when dumped into the mixer and shall close tightly when the hopper is empty so
that no material is allowed to leak into the batch being mixed during the process of weighing
aggregate for the next batch.
4.1.8 MIXER
The batch mixer shall be of a twin pug-mill type.
The mixer capacity shall be not less than a one-ton batch and shall be so constructed as to
prevent leakage of contents. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped with a dust
hood to prevent loss of dust by dispersion.
The design shall permit visual inspection of the mix.

It shall be heat-jacketed with steam, hot oil, or other means subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The mixer shall have an accurate time clock to control the operation of a complete mixing
cycle and shall be capable of locking the weigh box gate between the charging of the mixer
and the closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle.
Timing control shall be flexible and capable of being set at intervals of not more than 5
seconds throughout cycles of up to 3 minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed
as a part of the timing device.
The mixer blades clearance shall have a clearance from all fixed and moving parts not
exceeding 2 cm.
4.1.9 BITUMINOUS CONTROL UNIT
The metering device shall be designed and constructed to automatically measure the
required amount of liquid asphalt into each batch within a tolerance of 0.4%.
The meter shall have a capacity of at least 10% in excess of the volume of Bitumen used in
any batch.
If an automatic volumetric meter is used, it shall be constructed so that any dial setting may
be locked and it will automatically reset after the addition of Bitumen into each batch.
4.1.10 THERMOMETRIC EQUIPMENT
An armored thermometer reading from 100°C to 200°C shall be fixed in the bituminous feed
line at a suitable location near the discharge valve into the mixer unit.
A thermocouple or resistance bulb shall be mounted near the bottom of the fine aggregates
bin to measure the temperature of the material before it enters the mixer.
The thermocouple used for discharge and for the fine aggregate bin shall be wired to a
temperature recording apparatus. Charts showing time and temperature from the
temperature recording device shall be provided to the Engineer daily.
The plant shall be further equipped with either an approved dial scale mercury thermometer
or an electric pyrometer or other approved thermometric instrument at the discharge chute of
the drier to automatically register or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates.
The burner to the drier for aggregates shall be equipped with automatic temperature controls.
4.1.11 DUST COLLECTOR
The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector capable of storing dust to be disposed of as
waste or returning dust uniformly to the elevator.
4.1.12 CONTROL OF MIXING TIME
The plant shall be equipped with a positive means to control and consistently maintain the
mixing time unless a change to the timing has been approved by the Engineer.
4.1.13 ELECTRONIC WEIGHT SYSTEM WITH AUTOMATIC TICKET PRINT OUT
(a) General
The asphalt plant shall be equipped with electronic weight systems capable of automatically
printing a delivery ticket. The ticket shall contain the information below as a minimum,
subject to the approval of the Engineer, and a copy of each ticket shall be provided to the
Engineer.
a) Sequential load number,
b) Date and time,
c) Name or location of plant,
d) Type of mix,
e) Truck number,
f) Gross, tare, net weight or batch weight (as applicable),
g) Accumulated total of mix (for that day, the year to date or total for job subject to
the approval of the Engineer),
h) Temperature of mix at the plant and site (may be hand recorded),
i) Pavement layer,
j) Location (chainage or station) of placing mix,
k) Signatures subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) Automatic Printer System for Batch Plant
The batch plant’s automatic printer system shall print the individual weight of aggregate and
Bitumen delivered to the pug-mill and the total weight of batches contained in a truckload.
The automatic printer system shall be used only in conjunction with automatic batching and
mixing control systems which have been approved by the Engineer.
In the event of a printer or other equipment failure, the approval of the Engineer will be
required for the delivery hot mix to site. In no case shall this continue for more than 12 hours.
(c) Truck Scales Weigh House
The weigh house shall be of sufficient size, shall be completely enclosed and weatherproof
and shall be equipped with air conditioner/heater.
4.1.14 ACCESSIBILITY
Access shall be provided to all sampling, measuring and inspection points on the mixing
plant.
Access to the top of truck bodies shall be provided by means of a platform built to the length
and height of the truck’s dump body to enable the Engineer to obtain samples and mix
temperatures.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities to enable the safe collection and lifting
of samples and the safe collection of other data as necessary from all sampling, measuring
and inspection points on the mixing plant.
Ample and unobstructed space shall be maintained at all times in and around the truck
loading space and this space shall be kept free from materials spills and other waste
materials.
4.2 HAULING EQUIPMENT
Trucks for hauling bituminous mixtures to site shall have tight, clean and smooth metal beds
that have been sprayed with a minimum amount of soapy water, vegetable oil, or lime
solution to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Fuel or oil shall not be used for
this purpose.
Any truck which due to its condition causes excessive segregation of material, spills
materials or has leaks of oil or other fluids detrimental to the work not be used for the hauling
bituminous mixtures until such conditions have been corrected.
All loads shall be covered with a canvas or other suitable material sufficient to entirely cover
the mixture and protect it from the weather. The cover shall be securely fixed to the truck
body during hauling.

4.3 SPREADING & FINISHING EQUIPMENT
Paving equipment for the spreading and finishing of asphalt layers shall be approved
mechanical, self-powered pavers, capable of spreading and finishing the mixture true to the
lines, grades, levels and cross sections given on the Drawings or as subject to approval by the
Engineer.
The pavers shall be equipped with screed controls which can be adjusted for manual,
semi-automatic and fully automatic operation, to ensure that a smooth asphalt surface can be
placed within the required tolerances regardless of irregularities in the surface being paved.
The screed controls shall be capable of detecting the required grades and levels from either a
taut piano wire guideline or a sliding ski of a sufficient length subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Pavers shall be equipped with activated screeds of either the tamping or vibrating type, and
devices for heating the screeds to the temperature required for the laying of the mixture
without pulling or marring.
4.4 COMPACTING EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of compacting asphalt mixtures to the
requirements of clause 4.5 “Manufacture and Production of the Asphalt Mixture” and 4.9
“Placing and Compaction of the Mixture” of this specification. The Contractor shall provide
the following minimum equipment for each paving operation:
 One tandem steel wheel roller for breakdown rolling weighing 4.5 to 11 tons.
 One pneumatic tired roller for secondary rolling weighing 5 to 11 tons. This roller
will have at least 7 smooth tread tires of equal size and diameter.
 One tandem steel wheel roller for finish rolling weighing 7 to 11 tons.
All rollers shall be equipped with a watering system to prevent sticking of the asphalt
mixture to the pneumatic or steel wheels.
All rollers must be self propelled.
The Contractor may use less compaction equipment or other equipment types subject to their
use in satisfactory trial sections completed to the approval of the Engineer.
The method for compaction of the roughness course shall be confirmed by the results of
compaction obtained in the trial sections. Compaction shall be based on two or three passes
of tandem steel wheel rollers only with a weight of 6 to 10 tons.
4.5 MANUFACTURE AND PRODUCTION OF ASPHALT MIXTURES
4.5.1 ASPHALT MIXTURE TYPES
The type of hot asphalt mixture shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
Asphalt concrete roughness layer The top layer of pavement that comes into contact with
the traffic.
Asphalt Concrete surface course The layer lies between the roughness layer and the
(Fine aggregate) binder course laid on a tack coat sprayed on the binder
course.
Asphalt Concrete binder course The layer laid on the crushed aggregate base course
(Coarse aggregate) sprayed with a prime coat.
4.5.2 REQUIRED MIX PROPERTIES
The bituminous mixture shall conform to the requirements given in Table 3.

Table 3A Properties of bituminous mixture (Table 3 of TCVN 8819: 2011)
Properties Binder course Surface Testing
course method
1 Number of compaction blow on specimen's Min. 75x2 75x2 TCVN
surface 8860-1:2011
2 Stability at 60°C, 40 minutes, kN Min. 8.0 8.0
3 Flow, mm 2-4 2-4
4 Retained Marshall Stability Min. 75 75 TCVN
(AASHTO-T165), % 8860-12:2011
5 Air voids, % 3-6 3-6 TCVN
8860-9:2011
6 Voids in mineral aggregate (at residual air Min. 15 (9.5mm) 15 (9.5mm) TCVN
voids of 4%) - for each grade of coarse 14 (12.5mm) 14 (12.5mm) 8860-10:2011
aggregate, % 13 (19mm) 13 (19mm)
7 Rutting susceptibility, Test for Hamburg Max. 12.5 12.5 AASHTO
Wheel-Track Testing, 10,000 passes, T324
0.7MPa tyre pressure, temperature 50°C,
mm
Marshal specimen shall have flow value equal to 70% of its asphalt cement, and have a
minimum elongation of 40cm according to AASHTO-T49 and T51.
Asphalt cement shall be separated from the mixture in accordance with AASHTO T-164.
The fine fraction shall be separated by centrifuge from a condensed volume of 200ml. The
separation of fine fraction shall be considered acceptable when dust content (by burning) of
total collected asphalt cement is less than 1 % by weight. Asphalt cement shall be collected
in accordance with AASHTO-T170.
Table 3B Properties of bituminous mixture (Table 6 of 22TCN345-06)
SQ Properties Roughness Testing method
layer
1 Number of compaction blow 50x2 AASHTO T245-97 (2001)

2 Stability at 60°C, kN Min. 6
3 Flow, mm 2–4
4 Residual stability (having soaked at 60°C for 24 hour) Min. 75
comparing with initial stability, %
5 Air Voids, % 12 – 16 AASHTO T269-97
6 Aggregate Voids, % Min. 22
7 Draindown Characteristic, % Max. 0.2 AASHTO T305-97
8 Asphalt content of total mixture by weight, % 4.8 – 6.2 AASHTO T164-01
4.6 JOB-MIX FORMULA

The Contractor shall submit all proposed Job-Mix Formulae to the Engineer for his approval
well before work is programmed to start on site.
For each proposed Job-Mix the formula shall stipulate the aggregate source, a combined
grading showing the percentage of each material to be used in the mix expressed as
percentages by weight of the total mix, the temperature at which the mixture is to be emptied
from the mixer, and the temperature at which the mixture is to be delivered at the laying site,
all of which shall fall within the specified ranges of the general composition and temperature
limits.
Each proposed Job-Mix formula shall be supported by laboratory trial mix testing data. In
approving the job mix, the Engineer may request the Contractor to perform additional trial
mix tests or to investigate alternative aggregates.
Approval of proposed Job-Mix Formulae shall subsequently be confirmed by the
preparation and testing of “Trial Sections” as specified in clause 4.7 of this specification.
4.6.1 AGGREGATE COMPONENT PROPORTIONS
Aggregate for hot asphalt mixtures shall conform to Table 4 subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Table 4 Aggregate grading for asphalt (Table No. 1 of TCVN 8819:2011 and Table 5
from 22TCN345-06)
Nominal max. aggregate size, mm
9.5 9.5 12.5 19
Roughness Surface (not used) Binder
Sieve size, mm % passing % passing % passing % passing
25 - - - 100
19 - - 100 90-100
12.5 100 100 90-100 71-86
9.5 80-100 90-100 74-89 58-78
6.3 35-60 - - -
4.75 22-40 55-80 48-71 36-61
2.36 20-36 36-63 30-55 25-45
1.18 12-27 25-45 21-40 17-33
0.600 8-17 17-33 15-31 12-25
0.300 6-13 12-25 11-22 8-17
0.150 - 9-17 8-15 6-12
0.075 4-8 6-10 6-10 5-8
4.6.2 FILLER CONTENT
Filler (particles passing the sieve No.200) may be added to the nominal mix to meet the
criteria contained in this specification subject to approval by the Engineer.
On no account shall the ratio of filler to total bitumen exceed 1:1 for Asphalt Concrete
Surface Course and 1:4 for Asphalt Concrete Binder Course.
If the mix strength does not meet the specified requirements with a filler/bitumen ratio
within these ranges the strength shall be adjusted by changing the aggregates.
4.6.3 BITUMEN CONTENT OF THE MIX
The laboratory trial mixes shall be prepared according to Marshall Mix Design procedures.
For each mix variant to be tried, at least three samples shall be prepared and tested by the
Marshall testing method, and the mix properties of each trial shall be calculated on forms
subject to approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor may optimize the mix proportions for economic reasons provided the
bitumen content is within the allowable limits specified in Tables 3A and 3B of clause 4.5.2.
The percentage of bitumen actually added to the mix will depend on the percentage absorbed
by the aggregates. The estimated amount of bitumen absorbed by the combined aggregates
in the nominal mix will be assumed to be 50% of the measured water absorption. The value
of the measured water absorption will be based on test data supplied by the Contractor. The
absorbed bitumen so calculated shall be taken into consideration in establishing the total
bitumen content for the trial mixes which shall be not less than the minimum value specified
in Table 3 and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

4.6.4 APPLICATION OF JOB-MIX
(a) Formula and Allowable Tolerance:
All mixtures supplied to the site shall conform to the Job-Mix Formulae approved by the
Engineer subject to the tolerances specified below:
Asphalt binder and surface layers.
Passing aggregate mixture 12mm and over +/- 8% according to mixture weight
Passing aggregate mixture 9.5mm and 4.75mm +/- 7% according to mixture weight
Asphalt content tolerance 0.2% according to total mixture quantity
Temperature tolerance of mixture at the plant +/- 10°C
Temperature tolerance of mixture when laying +/- 10°C
Allowable tolerances for the manufacturing of asphalt concrete roughness layer (Table Nos.
7 & 8 of 22TCN345-06)
Criteria Allowable Tolerance
Aggregate
Sieve Passing (mm) 12.5 0%
9.5 ± 5%
6.3; 4.75; 2.36 ± 4%
1.18; 0.6; 0.3 ± 3%
0.075 ± 2%
Difference sieve passing of two sieve sizes 4.75mm and 2.36mm ≤ 4%
Asphalt content ± 0.2%
Mixture temperature Mixing asphalt concrete in hot bin at the plant
(°C) Discharge mixture from hot bin to the truck
(approved
Unloading mixture from the truck to paver
temperature shall be
based on data Paving mixture
provided by the Compaction
polymer asphalt Starting
manufacturer and Finishing
approved by the Specimen testing
Engineer) Mixing Marshall Mix Specimen
Compacting Marshall Mix Specimen
Marshall separation
(b) Continuous Control:
Samples shall be taken of the materials and mixture each day as outlined in Sub-section 4.10
“Quality Control and Testing” or as considered necessary by the Engineer for checking the
required uniformity of the mixture.
4.6.5 ADJUSTING MIX PROPORTIONS BY TRIAL MIXES
The Contractor shall demonstrate the suitability of all proposed Job Mix formulae by making
and testing trial mixes in the laboratory and by testing trial mixes in the mixing plant
immediately prior to lying of the mix.
Laboratory trial mix testing shall be carried out in accordance with the Marshall Mix Design
method defined by AASHTO or in the Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2.
A nominal mix recipe appropriate to the proposed theoretical job mix formulae shall be
determined. The nominal aggregate blending proportions, bitumen content and added filler
content shall be used as the basis for the mix variations investigated in the laboratory trials.
The calculation of the nominal mix-batching recipe from the design mix components shall
be recorded as directed by the Engineer.
Trial mixes shall be made under the same conditions as those applied in the mixing plant
immediately prior to batching. For weigh-batching plants, this means using aggregate
samples taken from the plant hot-bins.
Job mix formulae confirmed by laboratory trials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
Should a change in a material be encountered or should a change in a source of material be
made, a new Job-Mix Formula shall be submitted and approved before the mixture
containing the new material is produced and delivered. Job materials will be rejected if they
are found to have voids, or other characteristics, requiring greater bitumen content or less
than the specified range.
4.7 TRIAL SECTION
Following approval of the proposed Job-Mix Formula by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
carry out a trial section for each pavement layer in accordance with his proposed method
statement.
The test section shall be of a sufficient length to allow the laying of 100m after the paver has
reached a stable condition and shall be in a location subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The trial section may be included in the permanent works subject to satisfactory testing and
The trial section shall be tested in detail and in accordance with the requirements of this
specification.
If the trial section fails to conform to the specifications in any respect, necessary adjustments
shall be made and the trial repeated. Permanent paving work shall not commence until a
satisfactory trial has been made and the Engineer has approved the final Job-Mix Formula.
Where an unsatisfactory trial section has been laid in the area of the permanent works it shall
be removed entirely and the surface on which it was laid shall be reinstated to the satisfaction
of the Engineer all to the cost of the Contractor.
Testing for acceptance of trial sections for the roughness layer shall include measurements
of the International Roughness Index (IRI) along several sections in order to determine the
representative average index of the entire Trial Section.
4.8 PRODUCTION OF MIXTURE
4.8.1 MINIMUM RATE FOR MIXING PLANT CAPACITY
There shall be no batching when there is insufficient hauling, spreading, or finishing
equipment, or labour, to assure progress at a rate of not less than 60 percent of the capacity of
the mixing plant.
4.8.2 PREPARATION OF BITUMEN
The following temperatures shall be applied:
60/70 Bitumen PMB (Polymer Modified Bitumen)

Bulk Storage 120°C - 130°C Specified temperature shall be based on data
Mixing Temperature 150°C - 160°C provided by the polymer asphalt
Laying Temperature 130°C - 140°C manufacturer subject to approval by the
Engineer (Table No.8. 22TCN345-06)
Where bitumen is kept in bulk storage for periods exceeding 8 hours before use storage
temperature may be reduced to 30°C - 40°C
Local overheating shall be avoided and the bitumen shall be continuously fed to the mixer at
a uniform temperature.

There shall be at least one full day’s supply of heated bitumen ready for supply to the mixer
before any mixing operation begins. However bitumen shall not be stored for a period longer
than 30 days between manufacture and placing.
4.8.3 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATES
Mineral aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and heated. Burner flames shall be adjusted
to avoid damaging the aggregate and to avoid forming a coating of soot on the aggregate.
At the time of mixing with bitumen, the aggregate shall be dry and within the temperature
range specified for the bitumen but not more than 14°C above the temperature of the
bitumen.
Additional filler, if required to meet the grading requirements, may be added separately from
a small hopper mounted directly over the mixer.
4.8.4 PREPARATION OF MIXTURE
The combined mineral aggregate shall be thoroughly mixed before the bitumen is measured
and introduced into the mixer.
The “Dry” and “Wet” mixing times of shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and
regulated by a suitable timer.
The temperature of the mixture when emptied from the mixer shall be within the limits
indicated in Table 5. No tolerance shall be permitted.
Table 5 Specified Limits for Bitumen Asphalt Mix Temperatures
Construction Procedures Asphalt Mix Temperature (°C)
Mixes Using AC-20 Mixes Using PMB.
Bit. (Approx. equiv. to (Approx. range 40 to
60/70 Pen) 70 Pen)
Mixing Marshall Mix Specimen 150-160 160
Compacting Marshall Mix Specimen 140-145 150
Maximum Mixing Temperature < 160 < 170
Discharging mix into Truck 140-155 > 140
Delivery to Paver > 125 155 – 130
Breakdown Rolling (Steel Drum) > 120 135 – 90
Secondary Rolling (Rubber Tire) 110 - 95 135 – 90
Finishing Rolling (Steel Drum) > 80 100 – 85
4.8.5 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY TO SITE
The mixture shall be delivered to the paver at the temperature indicated in Table 5 above.
No materials shall be sent to the site such that spreading and compaction are completed
outside of the normal working hours without the written approval of the Engineer.
4.9 PLACING AND COMPACTION OF THE MIXTURE
Placing and compaction of the asphalt layers shall be carried out using the methods and
procedures used for the approved trial sections.
4.9.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE TO BE COVERED
The surface to be covered shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 06100
“Prime Coat and Tack Coat”, as applicable.
Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the surface shall be cleaned of loose or
deleterious material.
If rain commences at the paving location during the paving operation the batching and laying
of further material shall cease until the rain stops. Subject to the approval of the Engineer,
material already batched and loaded may be delivered and placed provided that there is no
freestanding water on the surface to be paved.
4.9.2 SPREADING AND FINISHING
Before the start of paving operations the screed of the paver shall be heated to the correct
working temperature.
Care should be taken to prevent the mixture from collecting and cooling at the sides of the
hopper or elsewhere in the paver.
The paver shall be operated at a speed which does not cause surface cracks, tearing, or any
other irregularities in the surface.
If any segregation, tearing or gouging of the surface occurs, the paver shall be stopped and
the cause determined and remedied before paving re-starts. Patches of rough or segregated
material may be corrected by spreading fines and gentle raking, however raking shall in
general be avoided.
General correction to the surface by the spreading or “casting” of material shall not be
permitted.
The maximum depth of a single layer of Asphalt Binder or Surface Course shall not be
greater than 8 cm subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.9.3 COMPACTION
(a) Asphalt Binder and Surface Courses
Compaction shall be in accordance with the Contractor’s approved method statement
confirmed by the completion of satisfactory trial sections and is expected to be within the
requirements given below.
Immediately after the mixture has been spread and struck off, the surface shall be checked
and any inequalities adjusted. The temperature of the loose laid mix shall be monitored and
rolling shall be carried out within the temperature limits given in Table 5 above.
It is expected that rolling of the mix shall consist of three separate operations as follows:
Time after laying
Initial or breakdown rolling 0 - 10 min
Secondary or intermediate rolling 10 - 20 min
Final or finish rolling 20 - 45 min
The initial or breakdown rolling and the final or finish rolling shall be carried out with
steel-wheeled rollers. The breakdown roller shall operate with the drive roll nearest the
paver.
The secondary or intermediate rolling shall be carried out with a pneumatic tired roller
rolling and shall follow as closely as practical behind the breakdown rolling.
The initial transverse joint shall be rolled first in a transverse direction using boards of the
required thickness at the edge of the pavement to provide for off-the-pavement movement of
the roller. Where the initial transverse joint is to be made next to a previously paved lane, the
first pass shall be made for a short distance along the longitudinal joint.
Rolling shall be carried out longitudinally and parallel with the road centerline starting at the
joint followed by the outside edge and subsequently moving towards the center of the
pavement. However on super-elevated sections rolling shall begin at the low side and
progress toward the high side. Successive passes of the roller shall overlap by at least one
half of the width of the roller and passes shall not terminate at points within one meter of the
end points of previous passes.
The speed of the rollers shall not exceed 4 kilometers per hour for steel wheeled rollers and
15 kilometers per hour for pneumatic tired rollers. There shall be no sudden changes in
direction or reversals in the line of rolling.

Rolling shall progress continuously while the mixture is in workable condition to obtain
uniform compaction and until all roller marks and other irregularities are eliminated.
The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened to prevent adhesion of the mixture.
Excess water shall not be permitted.
Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on the finished surface until it has
thoroughly cooled and set.
Pavements contaminated by spills or leaks of any petroleum products from the Contractor’s
equipment shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense, subject to the
Surfaces after compaction shall be smooth and true to the required lines levels and grades.
Any high spots, high joints and depressions shall be corrected in accordance with methods
Surfaces that are loose, broken or contaminated or which are defective in any way, shall be
removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture, which shall be compacted immediately to
conform to the surrounding area.
All edges shall be trimmed neatly to line while the surface is being compacted and finished.
Any excess material shall be cut off square after final rolling.
100-millimeter diameter core samples shall be taken from the compacted pavement
according to Method B, AASHTO T230. Core holes shall be filled with asphalt concrete and
duly compacted immediately after core extraction is completed. The cores shall be used for
routine testing to monitor specific gravity; thickness; compaction and such other tests as may
be approved by the Engineer. Compaction shall be not less than 98 percent of the density of
laboratory compacted specimens composed of the same materials
(b) Roughness layer
Material workmanship and testing for roughness layer shall comply with requirements
in22TCN319-04 “polymer asphalt”
Additional particular requirements for the roughness layer are given below.
 The optimal number of passes for compaction shall be determined from the results of
compaction of the Trial Sections. However it is expected that compaction will be by
at least two roller passes using only tandem steel wheel rollers.
 Crushing or braking of aggregate particles during compaction shall not be permitted.
 Cooling with water will not be permitted;
 Additional equipment and tools for keeping the steel wheel rollers permanently
clean shall be provided until completion of compaction work.
 After compaction has been completed, all traffic or load application on the paved
surface will not be permitted at least during 24 hours.
4.9.4 JOINTS
Both longitudinal and transverse joints in successive courses shall be staggered.
Longitudinal joints shall be arranged so that the final longitudinal joints in the top surface
shall be at the location of the line dividing the traffic lanes.
Transverse joints shall be staggered by a minimum of 25 centimeters.
Previously completed surfacing at all joints shall be cut back to a vertical face. A brush coat
of prime coat shall be applied to the cut vertical face before the adjacent surface is laid.

4.9.5 A/C SURFACE COURSE FOR BRIDGES
The asphalt concrete surface course for bridges shall be placed in one or two layers based on
the finishing conditions of the concrete slab and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.10 QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
4.10.1 MIXTURE SAMPLING AND QUALITY CONTROL
The following samples of shall be taken daily at Mixing Plant subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Records of all daily sampling and testing shall be kept and submitted to the
Engineer on the following day.
Samples from Frequency

Each cold bin
Hot bin aggregates 2 times a day
Grading by wash method
Combined aggregate
Temperature once per hour
Extraction of bitumen
Loose bituminous mixture
(AASHTO T164)
Grading every 200 tons
Compacted sample Marshall Stability
At Plant lab. Density
Mixture from Mixer Temperature once per hour / truck
Bitumen content and the marshal stability test shall be determined from samples taken at the
mixing plant and before compaction. Core samples shall not be used.
4.10.2 TESTING FREQUENCIES
Testing frequencies shall be accordance with Vietnamese Standard: TCVN 8819:2011
Item Test Frequency

1 Aggregate particle size distribution, 1 test/ 2 days or 1 test / 200 m3 (whichever is
elongation and flakiness, content of dust lower)
mud and clay
2 Sand particle size distribution, Sand 1 test/ 2 days or 1 test / 200 m3 (whichever is
equivalent coefficient (ES) lower)
3 Mineral filler particle size distribution, 1 test/ 2 days or 1 test / 50 tons (whichever is
plasticity index lower)
4 Asphalt penetration, softening point 1 test / day
5 Hot bin particle size distribution 1 test / day
6 Batched mix in truck or at discharge 1 test / day
from paver: Particle size distribution,
asphalt content, Marshall stability, Air
voids, Bulk specific gravity
7 Batched mix in truck or at discharge 1 test / 2 days
from paver: Maximum specific gravity
of asphalt concrete
8 Material weighing system calibration 1 test / day
9 Thermometer system calibration 1 test / day
10 Asphalt temperature in asphalt heater 1 test / hour
11 Hot bin aggregate temperature 1 test / hour
12 Asphalt concrete temperature at mixing 1 test / batch
13 Asphalt concrete temperature at exit 1 test / batch
from batcher
14 Asphalt concrete temperature at delivery 1 test / truck
15 Asphalt concrete temperature at 1 test / 50m
spreading
16 Asphalt concrete temperature at 1 test / 50m

compaction
17 Pavement layer thickness 1 test / 50m
18 Core sample specific gravity, thickness; Regularly
compaction
19 Pavement flatness 1 test / 25m
In addition, the Contractor shall conduct the following tests. No separate payment will be
made for this testing.
- resilient modulus Eyc, to confirm the design assumption of EYc ≥ 212 MPa (frequency of
one test per 50m of carriageway, test method TCVN 8867:2011)
- roughness IRI to confirm IRI ≤ 2,0m/km (full route, each lane, test method TCVN
8865-2011)
- Test on depth of wheel tracking HWTD-Hamburg Wheel Tracking Device) (frequency of
testing: one test in the laboratory for surface course, one test in the laboratory for binder
course, 10,000 cycles, tyre pressure 0.70MPa, temperature 50°C: rut depth ≤12.5mm, test
method AASHTO T324-04). Testing is to be carried out on samples from the trial section,
and approved prior to construction of remaining pavement.
4.10.3 SURFACE TEST OF THE PAVEMENT
During and after final rolling, the smoothness of the course shall be checked and any
irregularity of the surface exceeding the limits and any area defective in texture, compaction
or composition shall be corrected.
4.10.4 CORE SAMPLING OF THE PAVEMENT AT SITE
The Contractor shall take core samples at Site after the compaction of Asphalt Concrete. The
spacing and location of the cores in any section shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer and in accordance with requirements of this specification. The method of sampling
shall be in accordance with AASHTO T168.
4.11 ASPHALT CONCRETE TOLERANCES FOR ACCEPTANCE
Acceptance of surface course and binder course shall be based on the total evaluation results
of the items shown in Table 6, which shall be certified through quality control and
acceptance test process.
Lot size shall be proposed by the Contractor’s QC Plan.
Table 6 Tolerances
Binder Surface Roughness
 10 mm  5 mm
Course Course surface
 5 mm  5 mm
Center-side Location
Surface levels
 20 mm  10 mm
 8mm  5mm  5mm
Width
Thickness by Site Core Sample
Density by Plant Samples** 100%4% 100%3% 100%5%
 0.3%  0.3%  0.3%

Marshal stability by Plant Sample** 100% 8%
 5 mm  3 mm
Bitumen Contents by Plant Sample **
Surface Irregularity by 3m straight edge
IRI values ( m /km) Max. 2.00
Permeability (cm/sec) Min. 0.01
** means the basic value shall be taken as that confirmed by the Contractor in trials subject to the

4.11.1 RECTIFICATION OF UNSATISFACTORY ASPHALT MIXTURES
Areas of unsatisfactory binder or surfacing course will not be paid for until rectified by the
Contractor. Rectification may include removal and replacement of the layer, adding of a
supplementary layer or any other measure which may be necessary subject to the approval of
the Engineer. No payment will be made for any additional work necessary to correct the
unsatisfactory work.
All holes made as a result of taking cores or other test procedures shall be filled with asphalt
concrete without delay and compacted to the density and surface tolerance requirements of
this specification all at the Contractor’s own cost.

Areas for asphalt concrete courses shall be measured for payment in square meters in
accordance with the lines, levels and grades given on the Drawings and confirmed by the
Contractor’s shop drawings for all work in place, completed and accepted.
The width of asphalt courses to be used for quantity checking shall be taken every 20 meters
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken at right angles to the
road centerline and the length shall be measured along road centerline. Measured width shall
be the plan area with no allowance for super elevation or cross fall, and shall be the width of
the top of the asphalt layer. Where the average road width actually placed is less than that
defined with allowance being made for the tolerance, this average may be applied to the
calculation of the area to be paid subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where the average
width actually placed exceeds that defined no additional payment will be made.
unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below, for each
pavement lot accepted for inclusion in the Works.
furnishing, producing, mixing and placing all materials, testing and trial sections, and for
furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the
work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed
by the Engineer.
Payment for the asphalt concrete surface course for bridges shall be deemed to include all the
necessary requirements to keep the waterproof membrane (measured separately) applied to
the concrete surface of the deck free from damage during all surfacing work.
06200-01 Asphalt Concrete Roughness Layer (3cm thick) m2
06200-02 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course (5cm thick) m2
06200-03 Asphalt Concrete Binder Course (7cm thick) m2
06200-04 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course (3cm thick) m2

SECTION 06300 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (PCCP)
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements and procedures for the placement of
pavement composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed on a prepared base surface in
conformance with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the
Drawings.
 Decision 1951/QD-BGTVT of 17/08/2012 Interim Provisions on the
Construction and Acceptance of Cement Concrete
Pavement
 AASHTO M254 Corrosion Resistant Coated Dowel Bars
 TCVN 8865:2011 Method for Measuring and Assessment Roughness by
International Roughness Index (IRI)
 TC01:2010 Oil paper
 ASTM E950 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal
Profile of Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer
Established Inertial Profiling Reference
 ASTM C31 (/C31M-03a) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field
 ASTM C78 Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam
with Third-Point Loading)
 ASTM C94 (/C94M-05) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
 ASTM C143 (/C143M-05a) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete
 ASTM C172-04 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete;
 ASTM C174 (/C174M-06) Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness of
Concrete Elements Using Drilled Concrete Cores
 ASTM C494 (/C494M-05a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete
 ASTM C881 (/C881M-02) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding
Systems for Concrete
 ASTM C1077-06 Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete
and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and
Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
 ASTM D994-98 (2003) Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)

 ASTM D3665-06 Standard Practice for Random Sampling of
Construction Materials
 ASTM D6690-06 Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete
and Asphalt Pavements
2.2 WATER
Water shall be in accordance with requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete
and concrete structures”.
2.3 AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall be in accordance with requirements for type P Class concrete under
Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and concrete structures”.
2.4 CEMENT
Cement shall be in accordance with requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete
and concrete structures”.
2.5 OIL PAPER
Oil paper shall be used as a separator between the aggregate subbase course and the concrete
layer where shown on the Drawings. Oil paper shall meet the requirements of Standard
TC01-2010.
2.6 PRE-MOLDED JOINT FILLER
Pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
D994, with a nominal thickness of 13 mm. Joint filler must be compatible with joint sealant
and shall be punched to admit dowels.
The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width
required for the joint. When the use of more than one piece is required for a joint, the
abutting ends shall be fastened securely and held accurately to shape by stapling or other
positive fastening means.
2.7 JOINT SEALER
Joint sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM D6690-06 Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot
Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.
Each lot or batch of sealing compound shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's
original sealed container. Each container shall be marked with the manufacturer's name,
batch or lot number, and the safe heating temperature, and shall be accompanied by the
manufacturer's certification stating that the compound meets the requirements of this
specification.
2.8 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with
2.9 WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC
Welded steel wire fabric shall be as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with
Specification Section 07500 “Reinforcing Steel”. Welded wire fabric for concrete pavement
works shall be furnished in flat sheets only.
2.10 DOWELS
Dowels shall be as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Specification Section
07400 “Reinforcing Steel”. Dowel bars shall be plain and shall be free from burring or other
deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the construction site each
dowel bar shall be painted on all surfaces with one coat of rust preventive paint approved by
the Engineer. If plastic or epoxy coated steel dowels are used no paint coating is required,
except when specified for a particular situation on the Drawings. Coated dowels shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO-M254.
Where called for on the Drawings, painted or coated dowels shall be lubricated with MC-70.
The sleeves (expansion cap) for dowel bars used in expansion joints shall be metal or other
type of an approved design to cover 50 mm to 75 mm of the dowel, with a closed end and
with a suitable stop to hold the end of the bar at least 25 mm from the closed end of the sleeve.
Sleeves shall be of such design that they will not collapse during construction.
2.11 CURING
Materials used for Curing shall conform to requirements for materials of Specification
Section 07100 “Concrete and concrete structures”.
2.12 ADMIXTURES
Admixtures shall conform to requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and
concrete structures”.
2.13 EPOXY RESIN
Epoxy resin used to anchor dowels and tie bars in pavements shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3, Class C.
2.14 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
Prior to the use of any materials in the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
his approval certified test reports for those materials proposed for use in the Works. The
reports shall certify that each material has complied with the appropriate test requirements in
accordance with the applicable standards. The Engineer may request samples for testing,
prior to and during production, to verify the Quality of the materials and to ensure
conformity with specifications.
2.15 CONCRETE MIXES
Concrete shall be of Class-P in accordance with requirements of Specification Section
07100 “Concrete and concrete structures”. The mix shall be designed using the procedures
contained in Chapter 7 "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures" of the Portland Cement
Association's manual. As an alternative, the Contractor may choose to use concrete class
C40 but with slump appropriate for the working method.
Prior to the start of paving operations and after approval of all materials to be used in the
concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a mix design and test
results showing the mix proportions and flexural strength of concrete tested at 7 and 28 days.
The Mix Design shall include copies of test reports indicating test dates, and a complete list
of materials including type, brand, source, and amount of cement, coarse aggregate, fine
aggregate, water, and admixtures. The fineness modules of the fine aggregate shall also be
shown. The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to the start of
operations.
Production shall not begin until the Engineer approves the Mix Design in writing.
Should a change in material sources be made, or admixtures added or deleted from the mix,
copies of a new mix design must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Flexural strength test specimens shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM-C31 and tested
in accordance with ASTM-C78. The mix shall be a workable concrete having a slump for
side form concrete between 25 mm and 50 mm as determined by ASTM C143. For vibrated
slip form concrete, the slump shall be between 15 mm and 40 mm.
Admixtures: Water reducing, set controlling, and other approved admixtures can be added to
the mix in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in the amount necessary to
comply with the specification requirements. Tests shall be conducted on trial mixes, with the
materials to be used in the work, in accordance with ASTM C494.
3.1 EQUIPMENT
The batching plant and equipment shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94. If
slip-form-paving methods are used, a central plant mixer shall be used.
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and
performing all parts of the work.
Mixers and Transportation Equipment
(a) General
Concrete may be mixed at a central plant, or wholly or in part in truck mixers. Each mixer
shall have attached in a prominent place a manufacturer's nameplate showing the capacity of
the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum
or blades.
(b) Central Plant Mixer
Central plant mixers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94. The mixer shall be
examined daily for changes in condition due to accumulation of hard concrete or mortar or
wear of blades. The pickup and throw over blades shall be replaced when they have worn
down 19 mm or more. The Contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturer's design on site
showing dimensions and arrangement of the blades.
(c) Truck Mixers and Truck Agitators
Truck mixers used for mixing and hauling concrete and truck agitators used for hauling
central mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94.
(d) Non-agitating Trucks
Non-agitating hauling equipment shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94.
3.1.2 FINISHING EQUIPMENT
The finishing equipment shall be of sufficient weight and power for proper finishing of the
concrete. The finishing machine shall be designed and operated to strike off, screed and
consolidate the concrete such that laitance on the surface is less than 3 mm thick.
3.1.3 VIBRATORS
Vibrators shall be of either internal type with immersed tube or multiple spuds, or surface
type vibrating pan or screed. For pavements 20 cm or more thick internal vibrators shall be
used. They may be attached to the spreader or the finishing machine, or they may be
mounted on a separate carriage. Operating frequency for internal vibrators shall be between
8,000 and 12,000 vibrations per minute. Average amplitude for internal vibrators shall be
0.06 to 0.13 cm.
For pavements less than 20 cm thick, vibrating surface pans or screeds will be allowed.
Operating frequencies for surface vibrators shall be between 3,000 and 6,000 vibrations per
minute. The number, spacing, and frequency shall be as necessary to provide a dense and
homogeneous pavement. Adequate power to operate all vibrators shall be available on the
paver. The vibrators shall be automatically controlled so that they shall be stopped as
forward motion ceases. Hand held vibrators may be used in irregular areas.
3.1.4 CONCRETE SAWS
The Contractor shall provide enough saws of sufficient power to complete the sawing to the
required dimensions.
The Contractor shall provide at least one standby saw in good working order and a supply of
saw blades at the site of the work at all times during sawing operations.
3.1.5 SIDE FORMS
Straight side forms shall be made of steel and shall be furnished in sections not less than 3 m
in length. Forms shall have a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the edge. Flexible or
curved forms of proper radius shall be used for curves of 31 meters radius or less. Forms
shall be provided with adequate fixings so that when in place they will withstand, without
visible movement or settlement, any impact or vibration from the finishing or compaction
equipment.
Forms with battered top surfaces or forms that are bent, twisted or broken forms shall not be
used. Built up forms shall not be used. The top edge of the form shall not vary from a true
plane by more than 3 mm in 3 meters, and the vertical face shall not vary more than 6 mm.
The forms shall contain provisions for locking the ends of abutting sections together tightly
for secure fixing.
Wood forms shall not be used.
3.1.6 PAVERS
Pavers shall be fully energized, self propelled, and designed for the specific purpose of
placing, consolidating, and finishing the concrete pavement, true to grade, tolerances, and
cross section. They shall be of sufficient weight and power to construct the maximum
specified concrete paving lane width as shown on the Drawings, at adequate forward speed,
without transverse, longitudinal or vertical instability or without displacement. Pavers shall
be equipped with electronic or hydraulic horizontal and vertical control devices.
3.2 PREPARATION OF AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
The Base Course shall comply with the requirements of specification section 05100
“Aggregate Sub-Base and Base”. After the base surface has been placed and compacted to
the required density, the areas shall be trimmed or graded to the plan grade elevation and
profile by means of a properly designed machine. The grade of the base surface shall be
controlled by a positive grade control system using lasers, string lines, or guide wires.
If the density of the base surface is disturbed by the trimming operations, it shall be corrected
by additional compaction and retested at the option of the Engineer before the concrete is
placed. If traffic is allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and
corrected immediately before the placement of concrete.
The prepared grade shall be moistened with water, without saturating, immediately ahead of
concrete placement to prevent rapid loss of moisture from concrete.
Damage caused by hauling or usage of other equipment shall be corrected and retested. If
damage occurs to the base and or subbase, the Contractor shall correct it to the full depth.
A template shall be provided and operated on the forms immediately in advance of the
placing of all concrete. The template shall be hand operated and not attached to a tractor or
other power unit. All excess material shall be removed. Low areas shall be filled and
compacted to a condition similar to that of the surrounding grade.
The accuracy of the template shall be maintained at all times and shall be checked daily.
3.3 FORM SETTING
Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the concrete placement to ensure continuous
paving operation. Before setting forms, the base surface shall be thoroughly tamped, either
mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside of the forms. After the forms have
been set to correct grade, forms shall be staked into place sufficiently to maintain the form in
position for the method of placement. Form sections shall be tightly locked and shall be free
from play or movement in any direction.
The forms shall not deviate from true line by more than 3-mm at any joint. Forms shall be so
set that they will withstand without visible movement or settlement any impact or vibration
from the finishing or compaction equipment. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled prior to the
placing of concrete. The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be checked and
corrections made by the Contractor immediately before placing the concrete.
3.4 HANDLING, MEASURING, AND BATCHING MATERIAL
The batch plant site, layout, equipment, and provisions for transporting material shall assure
a continuous supply of material to the work. Stockpiles shall be constructed in such a manner
that prevents segregation and intermixing of deleterious materials.
Aggregates that have become segregated or mixed with soil or foreign material shall not be
used. All aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods, and washed aggregates,
shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least 12 hours before being batched. Rail
shipments requiring more than 12 hours will be accepted as adequate binning only if the car
bodies permit free drainage.
Batching plants shall be equipped to proportion aggregates and bulk cement, by weight,
automatically using interlocked proportioning devices of an approved type. When bulk
cement is used, the Contractor shall use a suitable method of handling the cement from
weighing hopper to transporting container or into the batch itself for transportation to the
mixer, such as a chute, boot, or other device, to prevent loss of cement. The device shall be
arranged to provide positive assurance that the cement content specified is present in each
batch.
3.5 MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete may be mixed at the work site, in a central mix plant or in truck mixers. The mixer
shall be of an acceptable type and capacity. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all
materials, except water, are emptied into the drum. All concrete shall be mixed and delivered
to the site in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94.
(Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck mixers, truck
agitators, or non-agitating trucks.
3.6 LIMITATIONS ON MIXING AND PLACING
The elapsed time from the addition of cement material to the mix until the concrete is
deposited in place at the work site shall not exceed 60 minutes when the concrete is hauled in
non-agitating trucks, or 90 minutes when the concrete is hauled in truck mixers or truck
agitators.
Re-tempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not be permitted, except
when concrete is delivered in transit mixers. With transit mixers, additional water may be
added to the batch materials and additional mixing performed to increase the slump to meet
the specified requirements provided that the addition of water is performed within 45
minutes after the initial mixing operations and provided that the water/cement ratio specified
in the mix design is not exceeded.
3.6.1 VISIBILITY
Concrete shall not be mixed, placed, or finished when the natural light is insufficient, unless
an adequate artificial lighting system approved by the Engineer is used.
3.6.2 HOT WEATHER
During periods of hot weather when the maximum daily air temperature exceeds 30°C, the
following precautions shall be taken.
The forms and/or the base surface shall be sprinkled with water immediately before placing
the concrete. The concrete shall be placed at the coolest temperature practicable, and in no
case shall the temperature of the concrete when placed exceed 35°C.
The aggregates and/or mixing water shall be cooled as necessary to maintain the concrete
temperature at or not more than the specified maximum. Methods used may be as follows:
 covering with wet burlap or cotton mats,
 fog spraying or sprinkling with water,
 shading the material storage areas or production equipment,
 cooling the aggregate and water by refrigeration,
 replacing a portion or all of the mix water with flaked or crushed ice to the extent that
the ice completely melts during mixing of the concrete,
 or by other approved methods.
The finished surfaces of the newly laid pavement shall be kept damp by applying a water fog
or mist with approved spraying equipment until the pavement is covered by the curing
medium. If necessary, wind screens shall be provided to protect the concrete from an
evaporation rate in excess of 0.2 psf per hour as determined in accordance with Figure 2.1.5
in ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting, which takes into consideration relative humidity,
wind velocity, and air temperature.
When conditions are such that problems with plastic cracking can be expected, and
particularly if any plastic cracking begins to occur, the Contractor shall immediately take
such additional measures as necessary to protect the concrete surface. Such measures shall
consist of windscreens, more effective fog sprays, and similar measures commencing
immediately behind the paver. If these measures are not effective in preventing plastic
cracking, paving operations shall be immediately stopped.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
The prepared base surface shall be moistened with water, without saturating, immediately
ahead of concrete placement to prevent rapid loss of moisture from the concrete.
The Contractor has the option of placing the concrete with either side (fixed) forms or slip
forms. At any point in concrete conveyance, the free vertical drop of the concrete from one
point to another or to the base surface shall not exceed 1 meter.
Hauling equipment or other mechanical equipment can be permitted on adjoining previously
constructed pavement when the concrete strength reaches a flexural strength of 3,800 kPa.
Also, subgrade and subbase planers, concrete pavers, and concrete finishing equipment may
be permitted to ride upon the edges of previously constructed pavement when the concrete
has attained a minimum flexural strength of 2,750 kPa.
3.7.1 SIDE FORM METHOD
For the side form method, the concrete shall be deposited on the moistened grade to require
as little re-handling as possible. Unless truck mixers, truck agitators, or non-agitating
hauling equipment are equipped with means for discharge of concrete without segregation of
the materials, the concrete shall be placed and spread using an approved mechanical
spreading device that prevents segregation of the materials. Moving concrete by the use of
vibrators shall not be permitted. Placing shall be continuous between transverse joints
without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreading shall be done with
shovels not rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with
boots or shoes coated with earth or foreign substances.
Concrete shall be deposited as near to expansion and contraction joints as possible without
disturbing them but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket or hopper onto a joint
assembly unless the hopper is centered above the joint assembly.

Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all forms and
previously placed concrete and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies
by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in
contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall the vibrator be
operated longer than 20 seconds in any one location.
3.7.2 SLIP FORM METHOD
For the slip form method, the concrete shall be placed with an approved crawler mounted,
slip form paver designed to spread, consolidate and shape the freshly placed concrete in one
complete pass of the machine so that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary to
provide a dense and homogeneous pavement in conformity with requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications. The concrete shall be placed directly on top of the joint
assemblies to prevent them from moving when the paver moves over them. Side forms and
finishing screeds shall be adjustable to the extent required to produce the specified pavement
edge and surface tolerance. The side forms shall be of dimensions, shape, and strength to
support the concrete laterally for a sufficient length of time so that no edge slumping exceeds
the allowable tolerances. Final finishing shall be accomplished while the concrete is still in
the plastic state.
In the event that slumping or sloughing occurs behind the paver, or if there are any other
structural or surface defects which cannot be corrected within permissible tolerances, paving
operations shall be immediately stopped until proper adjustment of the equipment or
procedures have been made. In the event that satisfactory procedures and pavement are not
achieved after 600 linear meters of single lane paving, the Contractor shall complete the
balance of the work with the use of standard metal forms and the formed method of placing
and curing. Any concrete not corrected to permissible tolerances shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
3.8 STRIKE OFF OF CONCRETE AND PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT
After being placed, the concrete shall be struck off to conform to the cross section shown on
the Drawings and to an elevation such that when the concrete is properly consolidated and
finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at the elevation shown on the Drawings.
When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two layers, the bottom layer shall be struck
off to such length and depth that the sheet of reinforcing steel fabric or bar mat may be laid in
full length on the concrete in its final position without further manipulation. The
reinforcement shall then be placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the
concrete shall be placed, struck off, and screened.
If any portion of the bottom layer of concrete has been placed more than 30 minutes without
being covered with the top layer or if initial set has taken place, it shall be removed and
replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the Contractor's expense. When reinforced concrete
is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be positioned in advance of concrete placement
or it may be placed in plastic concrete by mechanical or vibratory means after spreading.
Reinforcing steel, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil, or other organic
matter that may adversely affect or reduce bond. Loose rust or mill scale shall be removed.
3.9 JOINTS
Joints shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these
requirements. All joints shall be constructed with their faces perpendicular to the surface of
the pavement and finished or edged as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall not vary more
than 13 mm from their designated position and shall be true to line with not more than 6-mm
variation in 3 meters.
The surface across the joints shall be tested with a 3-meter straightedge and any irregularities
in excess of 6 mm shall be corrected before the concrete has hardened. All joints shall be so

prepared, finished, or cut to provide a groove of uniform width and depth as shown on the
Drawings.
3.9.1 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Longitudinal construction joints shall be slip formed or formed against side forms with or
without keys, as shown on the Drawings.
Transverse construction joints shall be installed at the end of each day's placing operations
and at any other points within a paving lane when concrete placement is interrupted for more
than 30 minutes, or it appears that the concrete will obtain its initial set before fresh concrete
arrives. The installation of the joint shall be located at a planned contraction or expansion
joint. If placing of concrete is stopped, the Contractor shall remove the excess concrete back
to the previous planned joint.
3.9.2 CONTRACTION JOINTS
Contraction joints shall be installed at the locations and spacing as shown on the Drawings.
Contraction joints shall be installed to the dimensions required by forming a groove or cleft
in the top of the slab while the concrete is still plastic or by sawing a groove into the concrete
surface as soon as possible after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to withstand damage
to the edges of the joint.
When the groove is formed in plastic concrete the sides of the grooves shall be finished even
and smooth with an edging tool. If an insert material is used, the installation and edge finish
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The groove shall be finished or
cut clean so that spalling will be avoided at intersections with other joints. Grooving or
sawing shall produce a slot at least 3-mm wide and to the depth shown on the Drawings.
3.9.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The premolded filler of the
thickness, as shown on the Drawings, shall extend for the full depth and width of the slab at
the joint, except for the space for sealant at the top of the slab. The filler shall be securely
staked or fastened into position perpendicular to the proposed finished surface.
A cap shall be provided to protect the top edge of the filler and to permit the concrete to be
placed and finished. After the concrete has been placed and struck off, the cap shall be
carefully withdrawn leaving the space over the premolded filler. The edges of the joint shall
be finished and tooled while the concrete is still plastic. Any concrete bridging the joint
space shall be removed for the full width and depth of the joint.
3.9.4 KEY FOR JOINT
Key shall be formed in the plastic concrete by means of side forms or the use of key liners,
which are inserted during the slip form operations. The key shall be formed to a tolerance of
6 mm in any dimension and shall be of sufficient stiffness to support the upper key flange
without distortion or slumping of the top of the flange.
The dimensions of the key forms shall not vary more than plus or minus 6 mm from the mid
depth of the pavement. Liners that remain in place permanently and become part of the
keyed joint shall be made of galvanized, copper clad, or of similar rust resistant material
compatible with plastic and hardened concrete and shall not interfere with joint reservoir
sawing and sealing.
3.9.5 TIE BARS
Tie bars shall consist of deformed bars installed in joints as shown on the Drawings. Tie bars
shall be placed at right angles to the centerline of the concrete slab and shall be spaced at
intervals shown on the Drawings. They shall be held in position parallel to the pavement
surface and in the middle of the slab depth.

When tie bars extend into an unpaved lane, they may be bent against the form at longitudinal
construction joints, unless threaded bolt or other assembled tie bars are specified. These bars
shall not be painted, greased, or enclosed in sleeves.
When slip form operations call for tie bars, two piece hook bolts can be installed in the
female side of the keyed joint provided that the installation is made without distorting the
keyed dimensions or causing edge slump. If a bent tie bar installation is used, the tie bars
shall be inserted through the key liner only on the female side of the joint. In no case shall a
bent tie bar installation for male keys be permitted.
3.9.6 DOWEL BARS
Dowel bars or other load transfer units of a specified type shall be placed across joints in the
manner as shown on the Drawings. They shall be of the dimensions and spacing as shown
and held rigidly in the middle of the slab depth in the proper horizontal and vertical
alignments by an approved assembly device to be left permanently in place.
The dowel or load transfer and joint devices shall be rigid enough to permit complete
assembly as a unit ready to be lifted and placed into position. A metal dowel expansion cap
or sleeve shall be furnished for each dowel bar used with expansion joints.
These caps shall be substantial enough to prevent collapse and shall be placed on the ends of
the dowels as shown on the Drawings. The caps or sleeves shall fit the dowel bar tightly and
the closed end shall be watertight.
Dowel bars shall be painted with rust preventative paint. The expansion caps at half of the
bar shall be thoroughly coated with asphalt MC 70 to prevent the concrete from bonding to
that portion of the dowel.
3.9.7 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS
All devices used for the installation of expansion joints shall be as specified.
a) The top of an assembled joint device shall be set at the proper distance below the
pavement surface and the elevation shall be checked. Such devices shall be set to
the required position and line and shall be securely held in place by stakes or
other means to the maximum permissible tolerances during the pouring and
finishing of the concrete. The pre-molded joint material shall be placed and held
in a vertical position; if constructed in sections, there shall be no offsets between
adjacent units.
b) Dowel bars and assemblies shall be checked for position and alignment. During
the concrete placement operation, it is advisable to place plastic concrete
directly on dowel assemblies immediately prior to the passage of the paver to
help maintain dowel position and alignment within maximum permissible
tolerances.
c) When concrete is placed using slip form pavers, dowels and tie bars shall be
placed in longitudinal construction joints by bonding the dowels or tie bars into
holes drilled into the hardened concrete. Holes approximately 3 to 6 mm greater
in diameter than the dowel or tie bar shall be drilled with rotary type core drills
that must be held securely in place to drill perpendicularly into the vertical face
of the pavement slab. Rotary type percussion drills may be used provided that
spalling of concrete does not occur. The Contractor shall repair any damage of
the concrete. Dowels or tie bars shall be bonded in the drilled holes using an
epoxy resin material to be approved by the Engineer. Installation procedures
shall be adequate to insure that the area around dowels is completely filled with
epoxy grout. Epoxy shall be injected into the back of the hole and displaced by
the insertion of the dowel bar. Bars shall be completely inserted into the hole and
shall not be withdrawn and reinserted creating air pockets in the epoxy around
the bar.
d) The Contractor shall furnish a template for checking the position and alignment
of the dowels. Dowel bars shall not be less than 10 inches (25 cm) from a
transverse joint and shall not interfere with dowels in the transverse direction.
3.9.8 SAWING OF JOINTS
Joints shall be cut as shown on the Drawings. Equipment shall be as described in Sub-section
3.1. The circular cutter shall be capable of cutting a groove in a straight line and shall
produce a slot at least 3 mm wide and to the depth shown on the Drawings.
The top portion of the slot shall be widened by sawing to provide adequate space for joint
sealers as shown on the Drawings. Sawing shall commence as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling, or tearing and before
uncontrolled shrinkage cracking of the pavement occurs. Sawing shall be carried out both
during the day and night as required.
(The joints shall be sawed at the required spacing, consecutively in sequence of the concrete
placement.
3.10 FINAL STRIKE OFF, CONSOLIDATION, AND FINISHING
3.10.1 SEQUENCE
The sequence of operations shall be the strike off, floating and removal of latency, straight
edging, and final surface finish. The addition of superficial water to the surface of the
concrete to assist in finishing operations will not be permitted.
3.10.2 FINISHING AT JOINTS
The concrete adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated to ensure full compaction
against the joint material. Concrete shall be so compacted to ensure there are no voids or
segregation under and around all load transfer devices, joint assembly units, and other
features designed to extend into the pavement.
After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints, the finishing machine
shall be operated in a manner to avoid damage or misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted
operations of the finishing machine to, over, and beyond the joints, cause segregation of
concrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall be stopped
when the screed is approximately 20-cm from the joint. Segregated concrete shall be
removed from the front of and off the joint; and the forward motion of the finishing machine
shall be resumed. Thereafter, the finishing machine may be run over the joint without lifting
the screed, provided that there is no segregated concrete immediately between the joint and
the screed or on top of the joint.
3.10.3 MACHINE FINISHING
The concrete shall be spread as soon as it is placed, and it shall be struck off and screeded by
a finishing machine. The machine shall go over each area as many times and at such
intervals as necessary to give proper consolidation and to leave a surface of uniform texture.
Excessive operation over a given area shall be avoided. When side forms are used, the tops
of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine, and the travel
of the machine on the forms shall be maintained true without lift, wobbling, or other
variation tending to affect the precision finish.
During the first pass of the finishing machine, a uniform ridge of concrete shall be
maintained ahead of the front screed for its entire length. When in operation, the screed shall
be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse shearing motion, always
moving in the direction in which the work is progressing, and so manipulated that neither
end is raised from the side forms during the striking off process. If necessary, this shall be
repeated until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and free from
porous areas.

3.10.4 HAND FINISHING
Hand finishing methods will not be permitted, except under the following conditions:
a) in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand methods may be
used to finish the concrete already deposited on the grade;
b) in areas of narrow widths or of irregular dimensions where operation of the
mechanical equipment is impractical.
c) Concrete, as soon as placed shall be struck off and screeded. An approved
portable screed shall be used. A second screed shall be provided for striking off
the bottom layer of concrete when reinforcement is used. The screed for the
surface shall be a least 0.6 meters longer than the maximum width of the slab to
be struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its shape,
and shall be constructed either of metal or of other suitable material covered
with metal. Consolidation shall be attained by the use of suitable vibrators.
3.10.5 FLOATING
After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed and
trued by means of a longitudinal float using one of the following methods:
(a) Hand Method
Long handled floats shall not be less than 3.6 meters in length and 15 cm in width, stiffened
to prevent flexing and warping. The float shall be operated from footbridges spanning but
not touching the concrete or from the edge of the pavement. Floating shall pass gradually
from one side of the pavement to the other. Forward movement along the centerline of the
pavement shall be in successive advances of not more than one half the length of the float.
Any excess water or latency in excess of 3 mm thick shall be removed.
(b) Mechanical Method
The Contractor may use a machine composed of a cutting and smoothing float(s), suspended
from and guided by a rigid frame and constantly in contact with the side forms or base
surface. If necessary, long handled floats having blades not less than 1.5 meters in length and
15 cm in width may be used to smooth and fill in open textured areas in the pavement. When
the crown of the pavement does not permit the use of the mechanical float, the surface shall
be floated transversely by means of a long handled float. Care shall be taken not to work the
crown out of the pavement during the operation. After floating, any excess water and latency
in excess of 3 mm thick shall be removed and wasted. Successive drags shall be lapped one
half the length of the blade.
3.10.6 STRAIGHT EDGE TESTING AND SURFACE CORRECTION
After the pavement has been struck off and while the concrete is still plastic, it shall be tested
for trueness with a 3-meter straightedge.
The straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface in successive positions parallel to
the centerline and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other, as
necessary.
Any depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off,
consolidated, and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Special attention
shall be given to assure that the surface across joints meets the required tolerances.
Straightedge testing and surface corrections shall continue until the entire surface is found to
be free from observable departures from the straightedge and until the slab conforms to the
required grade and cross section.
Where the departure from correct cross section exceeds 13 mm, the pavement shall be
removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor when so directed by the Engineer.
3.11 SURFACE TEXTURE
The surface of the pavement shall be finished with either a brush or broom finish applied
when the water sheen has practically disappeared. The bristles shall typically be 6mm thick
and 3mm wide. The bristle length shall typically be 200mm, with random spacing of bristles
of 10mm to 21mm, and average distance between bristles of 13-14mm.
The equipment shall operate transversely across the pavement surface, providing
corrugations that are uniform in appearance and approximately 2-4 mm in depth, with
corrugation spacing of 15-25mm. The target mean texture depth shall be 0.8-1.2mm when
tested by the Sand Patch method (ASTM E 965 / TCVN 8866:2011).
The texturing equipment shall not tear or unduly roughen the pavement surface during the
operation. Any imperfections resulting from the texturing operation shall be corrected.
3.12 CURING
The construction requirements for curing shall conform to requirements of Specification
Section 07100 “Concrete & Concrete Structures” and this Sub-section. Curing shall
continue until tensile strength reaches 80% of the design tensile strength, and normally shall
continue for 14 to 21 days. In hot weather curing shall be for a minimum of 14 days, and in
cold weather the time shall be a minimum of 21 days. If the concrete uses fly ash as a cement
replacement, the curing time shall be a minimum of 28 days.
Within one hour of completion of finishing operations, the entire area of the newly placed
concrete shall be cured. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the
Contractor may elect to use, or lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other
requirements, shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. The
concrete shall not be left exposed for more than an hour during the curing period.
The Contractor shall utilize one of the following types of curing methods:
3.12.1 IMPERVIOUS MEMBRANE METHOD
The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with white pigmented curing
compound immediately after the finishing of the surface and before the concrete has set.
The curing compound shall not be applied during rainfall. Curing compound shall be applied
by mechanical sprayers under pressure at the rate of 4 liters to not more than 14 square
meters. The spraying equipment shall be of the fully atomizing type equipped with a tank
agitator. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the
pigment uniformly dispersed throughout.
The compound shall be continuously agitated by mechanical means during application.
Hand spraying of odd widths or shapes and concrete surfaces exposed by the removal of
forms will be permitted.
The curing compound shall be of such character that the film will harden within 30 minutes
after application. Should the film become damaged from any cause, including sawing
operations, within the required curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired
immediately with additional compound or by other approved means.
Upon removal of side forms, the sides of the exposed slabs shall be protected immediately to
provide a curing treatment equal to that provided for the surface.
3.12.2 WATER METHOD
The concrete surface shall be kept continuously wet by ponding, spraying, or covering.
Covering material shall be kept saturated and may consist of cotton mats, multiple layers of
burlap, or other material that does not discolor or otherwise damage the concrete. Such
covering shall extend over the entire surface of the pavement and the edges of the slab and
shall extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab.
Covering shall be in complete contact with the surface.
3.12.3 WATERPROOF COVER METHOD
Thoroughly wet the surface using a fog mist applicator. Entirely cover the surface with a
waterproof cover. Laps in the cover shall be at least 500 mm. The cover shall extend beyond
the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the pavement and shall be in complete
contact with the surface.
3.13 SEALING JOINTS
3.13.1 TIME OF APPLICATION
Joints shall be sealed as soon after completion of the curing period as feasible and before the
pavement is opened to construction equipment or traffic.
3.13.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS
Immediately before sealing, the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all latency, curing
compound, and other foreign material by sandblasting and/or wire brushing. Upon
completion of cleaning, the joints shall be blown out with compressed air. The joint faces
shall be surface dry when the seal is applied. Prior to resealing joints, any existing joint
material shall be removed.
3.13.3 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT
Joints shall be inspected and approved for proper width, depth, alignment, and preparation
by the Engineer before sealing is allowed. Sealant shall be installed in accordance with the
following requirements:
 Hot Poured Sealant shall be applied uniformly for the full depth of the joint without
entrapped air or formation of voids.
 The heating kettle shall be of an indirect heating type, constructed as a double boiler.
A positive temperature control and mechanical agitation shall be provided.
 The sealant shall be heated to the temperatures given in the manufacturer’s
information.
 Overheating of the sealant shall not be permitted.
 A direct connecting pressure-type extruding device with nozzles shaped for insertion
into the joint shall be provided.
 Any sealant spilled on the surface of the pavement shall be removed immediately.
3.14 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT
The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public traffic
and traffic caused by the Contractor's employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to
direct traffic and the erection and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges,
crossovers, and protection of unsealed joints from intrusion of foreign material, etc.
Any damage to the pavement occurring prior to final acceptance shall be repaired or the
pavement replaced at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall have available at all times suitable support frames and sheeting for the
covering and protection of the surfaces and edges of unhardened concrete.
Paving shall not be carried during rain. When rain appears imminent, all paving shall stop
and unhardened concrete shall be covered without delay.
3.15 OPENING TO TRAFFIC
The pavement shall not be opened to traffic until test specimens molded and cured in
accordance with ASTM C31 have attained a flexural strength of 3,790 kPa when tested in
accordance with ASTM C78. If such tests are not conducted, the pavement shall not be
opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed. Prior to opening to traffic, the
pavement shall be cleaned.
3.16 REJECTION OF CONCRETE BATCHES
The Engineer may at any time, not withstanding previous acceptance at the batching plant,
reject and require the Contractor to dispose of any batch of concrete mixture which is
rendered unfit for use due to contamination, segregation, improper slump or where mixing
and delivery times have exceeded the requirements of this specification.
3.17 ACCEPTANCE OF THE PAVEMENT
3.17.1 ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING
The Contractor’s testing Laboratory shall perform all acceptance sampling and testing
necessary to determine conformity with the requirements of this Specification Section and
the referenced Standards and Decisions. Specifically the requirements for acceptance in
Decision 1951/QD-BGTVT dated 18 August 2012 Interim Provisions on the Construction
and Acceptance of Cement Concrete Pavement shall be applied. The Engineer will have the
authority to direct locations for sampling and testing and will at all times have access to the
Contractor’s Laboratory and testing equipment for observing and checking results.
Acceptance sampling and testing shall be conducted for each lot. A lot size shall be proposed
by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer before the commencement of the Work.
However the lot size shall not exceed 1500 m2 of pavement for carriageway construction,
500m2 for toll plaza construction, or one day’s placement (whichever is less). Concrete
sampling and slump testing shall be in accordance with Section 07100 of this Specification.
The Contractor’s laboratory or other testing organizations used by the Contractor shall be
licensed according to the applicable regulations in Vietnam.
3.17.2 FLEXURAL STRENGTH
Samples shall be taken at the batching plant a minimum of two times a day. The concrete
shall be sampled in accordance with ASTM C172.
Specimens shall be made in accordance with ASTM-C31 and the flexural strength shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM-C78.
3.17.3 PAVEMENT THICKNESS
Each lot shall be divided into four equal sub-lots and the Contractor shall take one core from
each sub-lot. Sampling locations shall be in accordance with random sampling procedures
contained in ASTM D3665. The Contractor shall fill core holes with a non-shrink grout
approved by the Engineer within one day after sampling. The Contractor shall furnish all
tools, labour, and materials for cutting samples and filling the cored hole.
The thickness of the cores shall be determined by the average caliper measurement in
accordance with ASTM C174.
3.17.4 PAVEMENT ROUGHNESS
At least 21 days before use, the roughness of the pavement surface shall be measured. For
this purpose the Contractor shall provide a complete roughometer similar or equivalent to a
Multi-purpose Profiling System (including all the necessary devices, hardware and
software) for calculation of the International Roughness Index (IRI) (AASHTO PP37 or
ASTM E950).
3.17.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Acceptance will be based on the following characteristics of the completed pavement:
Table 1 Tolerances
Tolerance Test

 5 mm
frequency
Surface levels 1 per 100m2
Thickness by Site Core Sample  8mm Clause 3.17.3
Flexural Strength (Class P ,in Specification Min. 98% Clause 3.17.2
 5 mm
Section 07100)
 2.50
Surface Irregularity by 3m straight edge 2 per 100m2
IRI values (m /km) Each lane
Crossfall and surface levels shall be such that there are no areas of ponding on the pavement.

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement will be measured for payment by square meter (m2)
completed to the lines, levels and grades shown on the Drawings and accepted by the
Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract price
per unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below.
The measurement and payment for sub-base and/or base course shall be made separately
under specification section 05100 “Aggregate Sub-base and Base”. No measurement or
payment shall be made under this specification section.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work described in this Specification Section
including all joints, joint sealant and filler materials, all labour, materials, tools, equipment
and appurtenances to complete the concrete pavement, concrete placing and finishing,
dowels and all associated work, epoxy grouting of dowels, dowel supports, expansion cups,
reinforcing steel, formwork, joint sawing, pavement curing, surveying, testing and
sampling.
06300-01 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (26cm thick) m2
06300-02 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (31cm thick) m2

SECTION 06400 - DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT (DBST)
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section provides requirements and procedures for furnishing Double
Bituminous Surface Treatment (DBST) of road surface in the locations shown on the
Drawings or as required by the Engineer. The DBST road surface shall consist of the
application of a bituminous prime coat followed by layers of bituminous seal coat with cover
aggregate constructed on a prepared base in accordance with Specification requirements and
in conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Drawings.
 TCVN 8863:2011 Bituminous Surface Treatment – Specification for
Construction and Acceptance
 TCVN 7493 - 7405:2005 Bitumen – Testing methods for physico-mechanical
characteristics
 22TCN250-98 Technical specifications for construction and approval
of acid emulsified asphalt macadam pavement
 22TCN354-06 Standard of acid emulsified asphalt – Technical
requirement and testing method.
 AASHTO T11 Materials Finer than 75-µm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
 AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
 AASHTO T84 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
 AASHTO T85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
 AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of
the Sand Equivalent Test
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 PRIME COAT
The bituminous Prime Coat material shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Specification Section 06100 “Prime Coat & Tack Coat”.
2.2.2 BITUMEN
The Bitumen shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 06100
“Prime Coat & Tack Coat”.
2.2.3 AGGREGATE
Table 1 Properties of Aggregate Surface Course
Property Required limit Test Method
1. Aggregate crushing value ≤8 TCVN 7572-11: 2006
(ACV), %
2. Los Angeles Abrasion Test TCVN 7572-12: 2006
(LA), %
a) For magmatic and
metamorphic rock ≤ 25 (30)
b) For sedimentary rock ≤ 35 (40)
3. Crushed aggregated content (at ≥ 85 TCVN 7572-18: 2006
least 2 fracture faces) of total
particles retained on 4.75mm
sieve, %
4. Elongation and flakiness index ≤ 15 TCVN 7572-13: 2005
(particles larger than 4,75mm), %
5. Content of soft and weathered ≤5 TCVN 7572-17: 2006
particles, %
6. Content of dust, mud, clay ≤1 TCVN 7572-8: 2006
(percent by weight), %
7. Content of clay lumps (percent ≤ 0,25 TCVN 7572-8: 2006
by weight), %
8. Bitumen adhesion with Pass TCVN 7504: 2005
aggregate
Numbers in brackets for roads with speed less than 60km/h
Table 1A Size of Aggregate for Bonded Surface Treatment - BST
Aggregate side (d/D)mm Minimum Maximum
nominal nominal
dmin Dmax
12.5 - 19 12.5 19
9.5 – 12.5 9.5 12.5
dmin: nominal minimum side of crushed aggregate
Dmax: nominal maximum side of crushed aggregate;
Particles which are bigger than (D) shall not exceed 15% by weight;
Particles which are smaller than (d) shall not exceed 10% by weight;
3.1 QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS
The materials used for DBST shall conform to the approximate rates shown in Table 2,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Table 2 Required Aggregate and Bituminous Content
Type of Thickness Bituminous Fine aggregate
BST (cm) Spaying Volume placing aggregate Volume
sequence (kg/m2) sequence side (lit/m2)
(mm)
Two 2.0 – 2.5 The first 1.5 (1.8) The first 9.5 / 12.5 14 – 16
layer time time
The second 1.2 The second 4.75 / 9.5 10 – 12
time time
The figure in bracket (x) shall be applied for just-finished aggregate base course.
Prime coat is excluded in the above table. Typical application rate shall be 1kg/ m2.
3.2 SEQUENCE OF PLACEMENT AND OPERATIONS
The DBST road surface shall be constructed by initially applying the Prime Coat material on
a prepared approved base, in accordance with the requirements for construction of
Specification Section 06100 “Prime Coat & Tack Coat”.
Following a minimum period of 24 hours after the Prime Coat application, or longer if
necessary for the Prime Coat material to be completely absorbed, the bitumen for the 1st
application shall be placed.
Immediately after the above-mentioned placement of bitumen is completed, the aggregate
for the above 1st application of DBST shall be placed and uniformly spread and rolled.
No waiting time is required between the applications of surface treatment when using
asphalt binder; while a waiting time of at least 24 hours between applications is required
when using emulsified asphalt.
The 2nd application of bitumen and aggregate materials for DBST shall be performed
following the same procedure as for the 1st application.
3.3 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Application of DBST shall be made only when the aggregate is in appropriate conditions
(dry when binder asphalt is used, and without excess of moisture when emulsified asphalt is
used), and the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 15°C or above and when the weather
is not foggy or rainy.
3.4 RATES AND TEMPERATURE OF APPLICATION
Prime Coat: Bituminous Prime Coat shall be applied at the rates and at temperatures
specified in Specification Section 06100 “Prime Coat & Tack Coat”.
Bitumen: Bitumen shall be applied at the rates described in Sub-section 3.1 (Table 2) of this
Specification Section, and at temperatures specified in Specification Section 06100 “Prime
Coat & Tack Coat”.
Aggregate: The DBST aggregate shall be uniformly spread over the applied surface at the
rates described in Sub-section 3.1 (Table 2) of this Specification Section. The exact rate of
application necessary to provide a sound uniform surface shall be established in the field and
be approved by the Engineer.
3.5 EQUIPMENT
The equipment to be used shall include hand or power-operated brooms, shovels, rakes,
self-powered Bitumen distributors or hand or power-operated spray pumps, broom dragging
equipment, and self-powered rollers. A sufficient number of stiff-fibers or steel-bristles push
brooms shall be included.
Application of the Bitumen by any means other than a pressure spray will not be permitted
and the equipment used shall be of such nature that the temperature of application of the
Bitumen can be accurately controlled within the limits specified and such that the rates of
application can be accurately controlled.
The rollers shall be of self-propelled steel wheel, vibratory or pneumatic type. The number
and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the DBST surface to an approved
condition.
3.6 CONDITIONING OF SURFACES
Before placing the Prime Coat, the base shall be cleaned of all loose foreign materials. The
existing base shall be swept until the embedded large aggregate is exposed.
Before placing the bitumen and aggregate for DBST, the primed surface shall be cleaned
until the surface is free of mud or other covering.
3.7 SPREADING AND COMPACTION OF MATERIALS
3.7.1 APPLYING PRIME COAT AND BITUMEN
Application of asphalt shall be done at the rates of application described in Sub-section 3.1
(Table 2) of this Specification Section by means of a pressure distributor, in a uniform,
continuous spread within the specified temperature range.

Each spreading operation shall begin with a strip of building paper, minimum 1 m wide and
300 mm longer than the spray bar length. If the distributor does not have a positive cutoff,
spreading operation shall end on the building paper.
Monitoring shall be done to ensure that the distributor is moving forward at the proper
application speed when the spray bar is opened.
All deficient areas shall be corrected.
Construction of smooth riding surface at the junctions of spreads shall be ensured.
Placement operations shall be done only for the amount of asphalt that can be covered
immediately.
Asphalt over-spray shall be confined to a maximum of 150 mm.
The operations shall be suspended if the asphalt fails to adhere to the road surface or the
cover coat material.
Asphalt dripping on the roadway shall be prevented.
3.7.2 APPLICATION OF DBST AGGREGATE
At the time of placement, the aggregate shall be dry when using asphalt binder, or free of any
excess moisture when using emulsified asphalt.
Dust-free material shall be spread immediately after applying the bitumen for DBST.
Spreading of the aggregate shall be done in a way that truck and aggregate spreader tires do
not contact newly completed road surfaces.
The following minimum rolling shall be provided:
 an initial pass with a self-propelled steel-wheel roller; and
 three subsequent passes with a pneumatic-tired roller.
Rolling operation shall be done immediately after applying the cover coat material to ensure
aggregate embedment without degradation. All rolling shall be completed in the same day.
Excess of the cover coat material shall be removed with a rotary broom or power blower
without displacing the embedded material.
The surface shall be maintained for a minimum of 3 days before acceptance and opening to
traffic.
3.7.3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR DBST PAVEMENT
Acceptance will be based on the following characteristics of the completed pavement:
Acceptance Criteria
Item Checking method Standard
1. Asphalt evenly distributed. Fine Visual observation Small aggregate covers no
aggregate covers the surface less than 98% of the surface
2. Bonding of fine aggregate Visual observation 15 days after completion of
construction, vehicles at
20km/h do not lift aggregate
3. Fine aggregate particles not broken Visual observation
4. No high spots or low spots due to Visual observation
excess or insufficient aggregate or
asphalt
5. Flatness of pavement (5 locations per 3m ruler placed parallel Gap does not exceed 7mm
lane / km) to alignment.
6. Pavement width (10 cross sections / Tape measure Deviation does not exceed
km) -10cm
7. Cross fall (10 cross sections / km) Spirit level Deviation does not exceed ±
0.5%

The quantity of DBST shall be measured for payment by the actual square meters placed and
accepted.
The work of preparing and maintaining the formation on which DBST is to be placed shall
not be measured or paid under this Specification Section.
Final cleaning and preparation of the surface and maintenance of the completed surface shall
be considered incidental to the work of achieving a satisfactory road surface and shall not be
measured or paid separately.
Measurement of Rectified Work:
Where rectification of unsatisfactory placement of any aspect of a DBST surface is directed
by the Engineer, the quantities to be measured for payment shall be those which would have
been paid if the original work had met the requirement. No additional payment shall be made
for the extra work or quantities or testing necessitated by the rectification.
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including furnishing, producing
and placing all materials, and for furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and
any incidentals to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these
Specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer.
06400-01 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment m2

SECTION 06500 - ASPHALT CONCRETE LEVELING COURSE
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this Specification section consist of providing a dense durable asphaltic
leveling mixture to level sags and depressions in old pavement and concrete bridge surfaces
prior to asphalt surfacing.
Asphalt leveling on bridge decks shall be placed after the installation of bridge
waterproofing, and just prior to asphaltic pavement placement.
Asphalt concrete leveling course shall be prepared, constructed and tested in accordance
with Section 06200 of this Specification.
3. PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC LEVELING

Asphalt levelling course shall be placed in locations as indicated on the drawings or as
required by the Engineer.
Asphalt leveling shall be placed in courses up to the under level of the asphalt pavement to
be placed over it.
Asphalt leveling courses shall be placed in compacted layers of not more than 75 mm thick.
In placing multiple layers, the shortest layer shall be placed first with the successive layer or
layers extending over and covering the short ones.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, prime or tack coat in accordance with
Specification Section 06100 “Prime Coat” or Specification Section 06100 “Tack Coat” shall
be placed prior to the initial application, in the areas to receive Asphalt Leveling.

4.1 MEASUREMENT OF THE WORK
The quantity of asphaltic mixture to be measured for payment shall be as determined by the
weight (in tons) of material placed and accepted by the Engineer.
Accepted weights of material shall be based on asphalt batch plant tickets signed and
approved by the Engineer at the plant. Approved tickets shall note the times a load of
Asphalt Leveling Course leaves the plant, the truck weights (as approved by the Engineer) a
truck identification number, as well as the total load and asphalt weights. The Engineer may
at any time require verification and/or re-verification of any truck weight.
The accepted quantities of Asphalt Leveling Course, measured as provided for above, shall
be paid for in accordance with the applicable Unit Price indicated on the Bid Price Schedule.
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, producing, mixing and placing all
materials, including all labour, equipment, tests, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Specification section.
06500-01 Asphalt Leveling Course ton

DIVISION 7 STRUCTURAL WORKS
SECTION 07100 - CONCRETE AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1. DESCRIPTION
This specification consists of the supply, transport and placing of concrete mixes of different
classes and concrete construction work in accordance with the lines, grades, sections and
other detail shown on the drawings or subject to approval by the Engineer.
The figure below shows the applicable referencing of structural members:
Figure for Payment Item (for Reference only)

Steel Hand Rail
Concrete Barrier
Expansion Joint RC Slab

Cross Beam
Pre-stressed Beam or Box Approach Slab

girder
Bearing
Pier ; Reinforcing Box Culvert
Steel
Cross Head Footing or
Pile Cap ;
Wing Wall
Pile
Apron
 TCVN 5438-04 Cements - Standard Specification for Terminology and
definitions
 TCVN 5439-04 Cements - Standard Specification for Classification
 TCVN 2682-09 Standard Specification for Portland cement
 TCVN 4029-85 Cements - Technical requirement procedure for
physical contents testing
 TCVN 4030-03 Cement. Test method for determination of fineness
 TCVN 4031-85 Cements - Method for determination of standard
workability setting time and volume stability
 TCVN 4032-85 Cements - Methods for determination of bending and
compressive strength
 TCVN 6016-01 Cements - Test methods - Determination of Durability

 TCVN 6017-95 Cements - Test methods - Determination of setting
time and soundness
 TCVN 6260-2009 Portland Blended Cements – Technical requirements
 AASHTO M6 Fine Aggregate for Portland cement Concrete;
 AASHTO M33 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)
 AASHTO M80 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete;
 AASHTO M85 Portland Cement;
 AASHTO M115 Asphalt for Damp-proofing and Waterproofing;
 AASHTO M116 Primer for Use with Asphalt in Damp-proofing and
Waterproofing;
 AASHTO M118 Coal-Tar Pitch for Roofing, Damp-proofing, and
Waterproofing;
 AASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete;
 AASHTO M153 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction;
 AASHTO M182 Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf;
 AASHTO T22 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens;
 AASHTO T23 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field;
 AASHTO T96 Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse
Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine;
 AASHTO T119 Slump of Portland cement Concrete;
 AASHTO T121 Mass per Cubic Meter, Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete;
 AASHTO T134 Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures;
 AASHTO T141 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete;
 AASHTO T224 Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction
Test;
 ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field;
 ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates;
 ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens;
 ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete;

 ASTM C87 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on
Strength of Mortar;
 ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulphate or
Magnesium Sulphate
 ASTM C91 Masonry Cement;
 ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete;
 ASTM C109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens);
 ASTM C123 Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate;
 ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates;
 ASTM C138 Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of
Concrete;
 ASTM C143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete;
 ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar;
 ASTM C150 Portland Cement;
 ASTM C227 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method);
 ASTM C287 Chemical-Resistant Sulphur Mortar;
 ASTM C294 Constituents of Natural Mineral Aggregates;
 ASTM C295 Petrography Examination of Aggregate for Concrete;
 ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete;
 ASTM C827 Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical
Specimens of Cementations Mixtures;
 ASTM C1017 Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete;
 ASTM C1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation.
Application of the following standards as alternatives is also permitted:
TCVN 3105:2004, TCVN 3105-3120:1993, TCVN 5440:1991, TCVN 6025:1995
3.1 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
3.1.1 GENERAL
In principle ready mixed concrete from established suppliers shall be used for the project.
The Contractor shall submit a procurement plan and samples of all materials to be used in
concrete mixes together with test results confirming their compliance with this specification
for the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use approved materials to prepare mix designs and for trial mixes to be
No materials shall be delivered to the Site until materials, mix designs and trial mixes have
been approved by the Engineer. Material failing to meet the requirements must be moved
immediately out of the site.
3.1.2 PORTLAND CEMENT
Cement shall be Portland cement type I complying in all respects with ASTM C150
(AASHTO M85) or TCVN2682-2009, or Portland cement blend complying in all respects
with ASTM C1157-GU, or TCVN 6260 type PCB40. However the Contractor may submit
to the Engineer for his approval fully supported proposals for the use of other types of
cement. All cement shall be manufacturer’s standard cement unless otherwise specified on
the drawings. Only one brand of cement shall be used for all concrete works throughout the
Project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
Cement shall be delivered to the Site in sealed bags or in bulk. The Contractor proposed
source of supply of cement shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. All deliveries
of cement to site shall include appropriate test certificates, certified by an independent
agency in the country of origin, confirming that the material delivered complies with the
specification.
Bagged cement shall bear the manufacturer’s name, cement type and the date of
manufacture and shall be stored in waterproof sheds or other such temporary buildings used
exclusively for the storage of cement. Cement shall be stored in dry conditions on areas
raised above ground level. Storage capacity shall be sufficient to hold enough cement for the
largest units to be cast. Bags shall not be stored more than 8 high and a free passage of at
least one meter shall be left between the cement and the side walls of the sheds.
Cement delivered by bulk carriers shall be stored in silos made for cement storage. All
handling shall be by methods that prevent contamination of the cement. The silos shall be
provided with interior moisture control devices that keep the cement dry and prevent
premature hydration. The silos shall be provided with access ladders and access points to
enable samples to be taken from various levels of each silo for testing purposes.
Access ways shall be provided between storage containers such that every container can be
visually inspected. Each delivery shall be stored separately from previous deliveries.
Deliveries shall be used in the order in which they were delivered. Any delivery which has
become caked or otherwise adversely affected shall be removed from the Site at the
The Contractor shall provide weighing machines which shall be kept permanently in each
shed for checking the weight of the bags.
3.1.3 WATER FOR CONCRETE MIXING AND CURING
The Contractor’s proposed water source shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval
together with test results confirming that water from the source complies with
TCXDVN-302-2004. Periodic testing of the water source shall be made at least monthly.
Water for concrete mixes, curing concrete and other products containing cement shall be
clean water free from oil, salt, acid, sugar, vegetable or any other substance injurious to the
concrete unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
3.1.4 AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall be free of substances that react deleteriously with alkali in the cement
sufficiently to cause unacceptable expansion of the concrete. The Engineer’s approval of
aggregate sources will be based on satisfactory evidence furnished by the Contractor that the
aggregate is free from such materials. This evidence shall include certified records of tests
by a testing laboratory that the aggregates meet the requirements of ASTM-C227 and may
include service records of concrete of comparable properties placed under similar conditions

of exposure. Tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM-C287 and ASTM-C295 ASTM
C1077, or equivalent test standards in TCVN 7570-2006.
All aggregates shall consist of tough, hard, durable uncoated particles. The Contractor shall
be responsible for processing aggregates to meet the requirements of this specification. The
Contractor’s proposed sources of aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval. Samples shall be taken in the presence of a representative of the Engineer and the
Contractor for testing and approval before materials are brought to the Site.
ASTM C39 Compressive Strength
ASTM C40 Organic Impurities
ASTM C87 Mortar Strength
ASTM C88 Soundness
ASTM C123 Coal and Lignite
ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis
Application of the equivalent Vietnamese standards as alternatives for the above testing is
also permitted.
Storage yard for aggregates shall be separated with partition for each material and rain
shelter.
(a) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand with hard, strong, durable particles or other inert
materials with similar characteristics. Fine aggregate shall be clean and free from extraneous
materials, clay balls, organic matter or other detrimental material in accordance with
AASHTO M6. The maximum combined quantity of soluble chloride and sulphate in fine
aggregate shall not exceed 1,000 ppm.
Fine aggregate shall be reasonably graded and shall meet the grading requirements
mentioned in Table 1.
Fine aggregate shall be of such uniformity that the fineness modulus as defined in AASHTO
M6 shall not vary more than 0.20 in either way from the fineness modulus of the
representative samples used in the mix designs.
Table 1 Grading Requirements of Fine Aggregate
Sieve Size (mm) Percentage Passing by Weight (%)
9.5 100
4.75 95 – 100
2.36 80 – 100
1.18 50 – 85
0.600 25 – 60
0.300 5 – 30
0.150 2 – 10
(b) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed aggregate and shall be homogeneous, clean, and free from
extraneous materials, clay lumps, organic matter, and other detrimental materials. Coarse
aggregate shall meet the requirements of AASHTO-M80 and ASTM C33.
Coarse aggregate shall be reasonably graded and shall meet the grading requirements in
Table-2-1 in subsection 3.2 Concrete Classes.
The percentage wear of the aggregate shall not be greater than 50 as determined by
AASHTO-T96. Coarse aggregate shall withstand at least five cycles of immersion and
drying in both sodium sulphate and magnesium sulphate solutions, as prescribed in the
soundness test, and shall show an average weight loss of not more than 15 percent.
3.1.5 ADMIXTURES
In principle, water-reducing admixtures to ASTM C494 / C494M shall be used for all
concrete on the project. Admixtures complying with TCVN 8826:2011 are also permitted.
The use of any admixtures will require the approval of the Engineer. Each type and each
location or purpose shall be approved individually. Approval will be dependent upon the
submission of mix designs and satisfactory trial mixes to demonstrate the function of the
admixture. Admixtures are used by the Contractor at his choice to reduce cost or improve
constructability, and are not paid separately.
3.1.6 WATERSTOPS.
Waterstops shall be heat-weldable ribbed PVC with center bulb. Unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings, waterstops shall have minimum weight 1.0 kg / meter, elongation at break at
least 250%, and tensile strength at least 12 MPa.
3.2 CONCRETE CLASSES
Concrete shall be of one of the classes shown in Table-2-1. All concrete classes shall be
tested using cylinders in accordance with AASHTO T22 and T23 (ASTM-C39 and C31
respectively).
The strength requirements for each class of concrete as determined by testing cylinders at 7
and 28 days in accordance with the requirements of this specification are given in table 2.1
below. The table also includes other information which is provided as guidance for the
Contractor in determining the contents and properties of his proposed concrete mixes.
The class of concrete to be used in each part of the Works shall be as detailed on the
drawings subject to confirmation by the Engineer. However, a guide is given in Table 2.2
below.
The minimum cement contents shown in Table 2.2 may be modified subject to the approval
of the Engineer based on the production of satisfactory trial mixes.

Table 2.1 Concrete Classes
C50 C45 C40 C35 C30 C35 C25 C20 C10 P
(Tremie
Mix)
Minimum Compressive 50 45 40 35 30 35 25 20 10 5
Strength at 28days (Min.
(150x300mm Cylinder) Flexu
(MPa) ral
Stren
gth)
Maximum Size of 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 40
Course Aggregate 25
(mm)
Minimum Cement 450 450 420 360 330 350 330 280 175 350
Content (kg/m3)
Maximum Cement 500 470 450 400 370 - - - - -
Content (kg/m3)
Maximum W/C Ratio 30 35 37.5 39.5 45 49.4 50 55 76 40
(%)
Slump (mm) 50-100 160-200 50-100 25-7 0-50
5
Coarse Aggregate Percentage Passing by Weight (%)
Sieve Size
37.5mm --- 100
25.0mm 100 90-100 95-10
0
19.0mm 90-100 --- ---
12.5mm 30-70 25-60 25-60
4.75mm (No.4) 0-10 0-10 0-10
The 7-day test result is not an acceptance test, but is used to monitor early strength gain and
is expected to about 75% of the 28-day strength.
Table 2.2 Concrete class - location
Concrete Class Location
Class C50 Precast Girder (Super T)
Class C45 Precast Girder (I)
Class C40 Box Girder
Class C35 CIP Deck Slab (incl. Link Slab), Crossbeam of Super T
Class C30 Abutment, Pier, Precast Concrete Plank for Super T, Parapet,
Pedestal of Lamp Post, Approach Slab, Box culvert body, Pipe
culvert
Class C35 (Tremie Mix) Bored Pile
Class C25 Upper Sealing Concrete, Bridge Curbs
Class C20 Lower Sealing Concrete, Manhole, Catch basin, Ditch, Fence
column foundation
Class C15 Supporting block, Sign support foundation, Post, Traffic signage,
km post, Curb, Vehicular guardrail foundation, Slope protection
Class C10 Blinding Concrete
Class P Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (PCCP)
Acceptable ranges for concrete slump shall be determined by appropriate mix design and
subsequent trial mix testing. Slumps shall be measured in accordance with AASHTO T119.
3.2.1 APPROVED MIX DESIGN
The Contractor shall submit his proposed mix designs to the Engineer for his approval and
prepare samples in order to Engineer checked and approved samples before carrying out
mixing concrete on a large scale. The mix design shall include the target mean strength for
the mix and shall be submitted with the results of satisfactory tests from trial mixes. The mix
design and the trial mixes shall use only those materials that have previously been given
source approval by the Engineer.
In principle the concrete shall be proportioned in order to reliably meet the criteria for
acceptance through use of a target mean strength as follows.
Where the standard deviation is not more than 3.5MPa:
Target strength = specified strength + (1.4 standard deviation)
Where the standard deviation is more than 3.5MPa
Target strength = specified strength + (2.4 x standard deviation – 3.5)
No concrete work will be allowed to commence until the Engineer approves the Contractor’s
proposed mix design(s).
A new mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval if there are any
changes in characteristics or source of supply of any of the component parts of the mix. Any
delay due to such changes shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor.
During the execution of the Works, the Engineer may require additional tests to be made on
the work mix to check compliance with the approved Mix Design.
3.2.2 WATER - CEMENT RATIO
The Contractor’s proposed water content and water cement ratio shall be included in the mix
designs, supported by trial mixes, submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The water
content shall be the least amount that shall produce a workable homogeneous plastic mixture.
Excess water shall not be permitted and any batch containing such excess shall be rejected.
The total water content for any batch of concrete shall include an allowance for water
contained in the aggregates. The Contractor shall determine the water content of the
aggregates before concrete batching begins and admixture (if any). The water added to the
mix shall be adjusted for the water contained in the aggregates.
Frequent slump tests shall be carried out to ensure that the workability of the concrete
remains consistent.
3.2.3 ADJUSTMENTS DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
After a mix design has been approved, the mix shall not be changed during the progress of
the work except as follows:
If it is found impossible to obtain concrete of the desired workability with the mix
proportions originally determined, changes in aggregate weights may be made subject to the
If it is found impossible to produce concrete of the minimum compressive strength specified,
the cement content may be increased subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.2.4 CONTENTS OF CHLORIDE AND SULPHATE
The amount of chloride in the concrete mass shall not exceed 1,000 ppm of the total concrete
mass, or 6,000 ppm of the amount of cement in the mix.
The amount of sulphate in the concrete shall not exceed 3,500 ppm of the total concrete mass
to TCVN141:1998..
The amounts of chloride and sulphate shall be determined by recognized methods of
laboratory analyses of the cement, aggregates, water and admixtures.

3.2.5 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor’s submissions shall be made well before the start of any concrete work on
site. The Contractor shall bear in mind the time required for submitting and gaining the
approval of all constituents of the mix and the time required preparing mix designs and
proving them by trial mixes and subsequent cylinder tests. The Contractor shall also allow
sufficient time for the Engineer to review the submissions and to conduct any additional trial
mixes and tests that might be necessary.
Each mix design submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Project identification;
b) Name and address of the Contractor and concrete producer;
c) Mix design designation;
d) Class of concrete and intended use;
e) Material proportions;
f) Name and location of material sources for aggregate, cement, admixtures, and
water;
g) Type of cement and type of cement replacement if used; Fly ash, ground iron
blast-furnace slag, or silica fume may partially replace cement if complying with
pertinent specifications subject to approval by the Engineer.
h) Cement content in kilogram per cubic meter of concrete;
i) The saturated surface dry batch mass of the coarse and fine aggregates in
kilogram per cubic meter of concrete;
j) Water content (including free moisture in the aggregate plus water in the drum,
exclusive of absorbed moisture in the aggregate) in kilogram per cubic meter of
concrete;
k) Target water/cement ratio;
l) The water/cement ratio for modified concrete is the ratio of the mass of water to
the combined mass of Portland cement and cement substitute;
m) Dosage of admixtures;
n) Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates;
o) Absorption of fine and coarse aggregates;
p) Bulk specific gravity (dry and saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse
aggregates;
q) Dry rodded unit mass of coarse aggregate in kilogram per cubic meter;
r) Fineness modulus (FM) of fine aggregate;
s) Material certifications for cement, admixtures, and aggregate (if applicable);
t) Target values for concrete slump with and without high-range water reducers;
u) Target values for concrete air content (if required);
v) Concrete unit mass;
w) Compressive strengths of 7 and 28-day concrete.

3.3 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK
3.3.1 DESIGN
The Contractor shall submit design calculations, shop drawings, working drawings, and
details of all materials and manufactured goods included in the formwork and falsework to
the Engineer for his approval at least two months before the start of construction work on site.
Work shall not start until approval has been given.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design of the formwork and its supporting
falsework, and shall be held responsible for any incidents or remedying any defects arising
from inappropriate formwork and falsework. The design shall include all necessary strutting,
bracing and temporary foundations to ensure the support of all temporary works items,
equipment, the weight of the plastic concrete or any other loading resulting from methods
adopted for the placing and compaction of the concrete or any incidental loading. There shall
be no harmful deformation of the forms during the concreting operation. No accessory for
supporting the formwork or staging shall be built into the permanent structure except with
the Engineer’s approval.
The design shall be appropriate for such temporary works and shall take into full
consideration all temporary loading cases arising from the procedures and work sequences,
the prevailing conditions at the site, in particular likely wind loading, and the nature of the
existing ground. The Contractor shall carry out all additional soils investigation necessary to
confirm his assumptions concerning the nature of the existing ground. Falsework and forms
shall provide for the full camber and roadway crown specified in the contract documents.
For cast-in-place concrete structures, the calculated deflection of falsework flexural
members shall not exceed 1/240 of their span irrespective of the fact that the deflection may
be compensated by camber strips.
Formwork and falsework shall be designed for vertical load and lateral pressures in
accordance with ACI 347 and, where appropriate, any increased or re-adjusted loading that
may result from pre-stressing forces. If retarding admixtures are used, their effect shall be
duly considered during the calculation of the lateral pressures of the fresh concrete. The
formwork and falsework shall be designed and constructed to ensure completed concrete
surfaces comply with the tolerances specified in ACI 347 or elsewhere in this specification.
The shop drawings and working drawings shall show the proposed details of construction of
members, spacing of bents, posts, studs, wailings, stringers, collars, bolts, wedges, bracing,
rate of pour, and the manufacturer’s recommended safe working capacity of all form ties and
column clasps. All assumptions, dimensions, material properties and other data used in the
structural analysis shall be noted on the shop drawings. The Contractor shall furnish copies
of the design calculations to the Engineer for his consideration when approving the
Contractor’s proposals.
The design calculations and drawings shall be certified and stamped by a qualified structural
engineer experienced in the preparation of such designs.
Falsework which cannot be founded on a satisfactory footing shall be supported on piles
which shall be spaced, installed, and removed in an appropriate manner.
Where required by Vietnamese standards, load testing of falsework / scaffolding shall be
carried out to a minimum of 125% of design load.
When manufactured formwork, shoring or scaffolding units are used, the manufacturer’s
recommendations for allowable loads shall be followed. In such cases the Contractor shall
provide certificates and test reports or records of successful experience. Reduced allowable
load values may be required for materials which have or will experience substantial reuse.
Where falsework openings are required for maintaining traffic flows or for pedestrian access
the Contractor shall provide all necessary additional features to protect the public and to

ensure that the falsework will remain stable, particularly if subject to impact by a vehicle.
Where openings are provide the design shall include but not be limited to
 the anchoring of stringers to caps or frames in adjacent spans.
 adequate bracing during construction or removal, and
 at least a 300mm gap between the falsework and protective railing.
3.3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK
The formwork shall be constructed accurately to represent the shape of the structure as
detailed on the drawings. It shall be of suitable design and appropriate construction and shall
have been approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments
to allow for shrinkage, settlement or deflection which may occur during construction so that
the finished concrete sections conform accurately to the specified dimensions true to line,
level, location and camber.
Wooden boards shall be cut accurately to shape and fixed such that there are no openings
after the wetting of the formwork prior to placing concrete.
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer concrete class C10 shall be placed to a minimum
depth of 10 cm in the footing of foundations to structures to provide a working platform and
to ensure stability of the foundation soils. The concrete area shall be sufficient to provide
support for the Contractor’s proposed formwork.
All formwork surfaces shall be fabricated to comply with the requirements of clause 3.6 of
this specification unless otherwise required by the drawings or other Specification Sections.
Surfaces which are completely enclosed or hidden below the permanent surfaces of the
ground or surfaces with no specified finish may be formed of sawn boards or similar
material. Any lumber or material which is damaged or warped prior to placing of the
concrete shall be rejected. All exposed surfaces shall be formed using plywood or metal
formwork. The surfaces of plywood or metal formwork shall be kept clean and in good
condition at all times to ensure that all concrete surfaces have a consistent appearance that
complies with this specification. The Engineer will reject formwork that does not comply
with this specification and rejected formwork shall be removed from site.
All exposed sharp edges and corners shall be chamfered using triangular fillets not less than
2 cm by 2 cm in size, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The triangular fillets or
chamfer strips shall be milled from clear, straight grain lumber and shall have a finished
surfaced on all sides. Curved surfaces shall be formed of plywood, metal, or other suitable
material.
All formwork and falsework shall be constructed using stiff wailings (separators) fixed at
right angles to studs. Wailings shall be paired and tied together by ties or clamps which pass
through the formwork. Bolts, ties and form clamps to hold formwork together shall be
positive in action and shall have sufficient strength and be sufficient in number to prevent
spreading of the forms. Lifting anchors may be installed in pre-cast members. Bolts, ties,
form clamps and lifting anchors shall be entirely removed or cut back, leaving no metal
within 3 cm from the concrete surface.
Forms shall be sufficiently rigid that undulation of the concrete surface shall not exceed
3mm when checked with a 1500mm straight edge or template.
Drainage holes and weep holes shall be constructed as detailed on the drawings. Forms for
weep holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all required inserts, anchors, expansion joint and bearing
elements, sleeves, and other items in this specification are installed in the formwork. The
Contractor shall coordinate the installation with other trades to ensure proper location of

such items. Ends of piping and sleeves embedded in concrete shall be closed with caps or
plugs.
No concrete shall be placed in the formwork until construction of the formwork and
falsework, the provision and fixing of reinforcement, the provision of ducts, anchorages, and
pre-stressing steel and the provision and fixing of all inserts, anchors and expansion joint and
bearing elements has been completed for the unit and the unit has been cleaned and sealed to
prevent grout leaks all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
With the exception of permanent formwork, all formwork surfaces which shall have
concrete against them shall be treated with a release agent who shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and shall not come into contact with the reinforcement or
prestressing tendons and anchorages. Different release agents shall not be used in formwork
for concrete that will be visible in the finished Works. Forms shall be saturated with water
before concrete is placed. The surfaces of formwork shall be free from any material that shall
adhere to or discolour the concrete and all materials applied to the surfaces shall be
non-staining.
The general tolerances in Tables-3 below shall apply to dimensions shown on the drawings.
Table 3 General Tolerances
Item Tolerances
Spacing of reinforcement Within ±10mm
Concrete cover for Superstructure 10% of defined cover
Concrete cover for other structure 10% of defined cover
If during the placing of concrete movement of the formwork or falsework occurs that
exceeds allowances in the Contractor’s design or will result in completed work unacceptably
out of tolerance, then placing of concrete shall stop. Placing of concrete shall not re-start
until such time as corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer have been taken by the
Contractor. If such measures are not taken before the initial set of the concrete placing of
concrete shall not be permitted to re-start. In such case a joint shall be formed and all
unacceptable concrete removed all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.3.3 REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
Concrete shall have reached the strengths indicated in Table 4 below before the removal of
formwork and false-work. No formwork or falsework shall be removed without the approval
of the Engineer.
Table 4 Removable Time of Form/False work
Formwork/Falsework Time / % of Design Strength of Concrete
Pre-tensioned super T beams - / 85%
Box girders -/ 100%
Support members/Pier head (30 - / 100%
MPa)
Centring under girders, beams, 14 days / 80%
frames or arches.
Floor slabs 14 days / 70%
Columns 2 days / 70%
Walls, sides of beams and all other 1 day / 70%
vertical surfaces
To enable finishing, forms used for parapets, barriers, and exposed vertical surfaces shall be
removed between 24 hours and 48 hours after casting, depending on weather conditions.
In continuous structures, falsework for a particular span shall not be released until adjoining
spans which will be subject to loading as a result of such release have reached their specified
strengths. Falsework or formwork for all spans which affect the loading of a particular span
shall be released before concrete is placed in railings, parapets or other elements for the

particular span. Release of falsework and formwork for continuous spans or cantilevers shall
be carried out to ensure a gradual application of working stresses.
Where appropriate formwork to columns shall be removed before the removal of formwork
and falsework to beams and girders to ensure the columns are satisfactory.
At the discretion of the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Engineer, formwork
and falsework may be left in place for footings within coffer dams or crib work should the
removal endanger the safety of the coffer dams or cribs, provided that such forms are not
visible in the finished structure. All other formwork or falsework both above and below
water level shall be removed.
3.4 CONCRETING
3.4.1 GENERAL
No concrete shall be placed until the formwork and falsework has been completed in
accordance with clause 3.3.3 above and approved by the Engineer. No concrete shall be
placed without the approval of the Engineer.
Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point, by a combination of
central point and truck mixing or by a combination of central point mixing and truck
agitating.
All concrete shall be batched by weight unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The
weight-batching machines shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and shall be kept
calibrated, accurate and in good condition. Checks shall be made as required by the Engineer
to determine that the weighing devices are registering correctly. Each mixer shall be fitted
with a water measuring device having accuracy within one percent of the quantity of water
required for the batch. The measuring device shall be such that its accuracy is not affected by
variations in the water supply pressure.
Where aggregate batching by volume is permitted, each size of aggregate shall be measured
in a metallic container, the depth of which shall be at least equal to its greatest width. The
containers shall be of such shape that their volume can be easily checked by measurement.
Cement shall be batched by weight and water by weight or volume.
The batching of concrete shall not begin until such time as all the equipment and labour
required for batching, transporting, placing, compacting, finishing and curing the concrete is
in place in accordance with the Contractor’s approved method statement.
3.4.2 BATCHING
Measurement and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant and all concrete
shall be machine mixed.
The Contractor shall submit his method statement for the batching and mixing of concrete to
the Engineer for his approval. The statement shall include the location of the batching and
mixing plant, the type or types of mixers and machines to be used, arrangements for the
storage of aggregates and the batching and mixing of concrete and transporting concrete
from the batching plant to the site. Storage yard shall be separated with partition for each
material and rain shelter and shall be equipped with belt conveyor and storage area.
The type of mixer shall be a drum mixer. Mixers of less than 0.5 cubic meter capacity shall
not be used to batch structural concrete. The use of continuous mixers will not be permitted.
The batching plant shall include separate bins for the bulk cement, fine aggregate and for
each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing hopper, and scales capable of determining
accurately the weight of each component of the batch. Scales shall be accurate to one percent
throughout the range of use and it shall be calibrated every three months and when so
requested by the Engineer.

If there is no prior experience with the approved mix design or if special handling
procedures, such as pumping, change of one or more of the characteristics between
discharge of the load and placing in the forms, the Contractor shall correlate the discharge
tests with the placement tests to define these changes.
The Contractor shall also provide documentation, repeat the correlations as often as
necessary or as directed by The Engineer.
(a) Portland Cement
Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack of cement shall be used in a
batch of concrete.
All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing device. The bulk cement
weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to prevent the escape of cement dust.
The discharge chute shall not be suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so
arranged that cement will not lodge in it nor leak from it.
Accuracy of batching shall be within 1 percent of the required weight.
(b) Water
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of water measurement
shall be within one percent of the required weight or volume.
About 10 percent of the water required for the batch shall be poured into the drum before the
cement and aggregates, and the remainder of the water shall be added uniformly while the
drum is in action and all the water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the
mixing time.
(c) Aggregates
All aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods or that have been washed shall be
stockpiled or binned for draining at least 12 hours before being batched. Where the moisture
content of aggregates is high or non-uniform, they shall be stored or stockpiled for a period
in excess of 12 hours subject to approval by the Engineer.
The accuracy of measurement of aggregates shall be within two percent of the required
weights.
3.4.3 MIXING AND DELIVERY
When mixed batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall be transported either in
waterproof compartments or between the fine and coarse aggregates. Where cement is
placed in contact with moist aggregates, batches will be rejected unless mixed within 1.5
hours of such contact. Bagged cement may be transported on top of the aggregates.
The concrete shall be mixed until a uniform colour and consistency is obtained.
Mixing and delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94
except where modified in this specification for truck mixing or a combination of central
point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be so regulated that
placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the placing operations. The intervals
between deliveries of batches shall not be so great as to allow the concrete in place to harden
partially, and in no case shall such an interval exceed 45 minutes.
Any arrangements for the cooling of the mixing water as and the handling of admixtures
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Additional mixing water and/or admixture may not be added on the Work Site unless
specifically authorized by the Engineer and if the water/cement ratio in the approved job mix
is not exceeded and the truck mixer is loaded to no more than 70 percent of its rated capacity.

The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity as
shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer. Water shall be added as
required by clause 3.4.2 (2) b above.
Mixing shall continue for the minimum times shown below after all the water has been
added.
mixers having a capacity of 1.5 m3 or less minimum 60 seconds
mixers having a capacity greater than 1.5 m3 minimum 90 seconds
mixer with a capacity of 750 litre or less minimum 1.5 minutes
each additional 500 litre capacity or fraction be increased by 15 seconds
double-drum high performance mixer minimum 70 seconds
Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum.
The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or other suitable
warning device to give a clearly audible signal each time the lock is released. If the timing
device fails, the Contractor may continue operations for up to 24 hours while it is being
repaired, provided he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second
hands. After 24 hours the mixer shall not be used until repairs are made.
On cessation of work, including all stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixers and all
handling plant shall be washed with clean water. Any deposits of old concrete in the drum
shall be cleaned out by rotating clean aggregate and water in the drum before any fresh
concrete is mixed.
Concrete that is not in place within one hour of the time when ingredients were charged into
the mixing drum, or concrete that has developed an initial set, shall be rejected.
3.4.4 CONCRETE CONSISTENCY
The concrete slump shall be determined by the Contractor’s trial mixes and shall be
measured in accordance with AASHTO T119.
3.4.5 PUMPING
Placing of concrete by pump subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pump, the equipment shall be fit for purpose and
of sufficient capacity for the work.
The operation of the pump shall produce a continuous stream of concrete without air
pockets.
When pumping is completed, if the concrete remaining in the pipeline after completion of
placing is to be used, it shall be ejected in such a manner that there shall be no contamination
of the concrete or separation of the ingredients.
3.4.6 PLACING AND COMPACTING
The Contractor shall include the method and sequence of placing concrete in his method
statement to be approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall not be placed until formwork and
reinforcement have been approved by the Engineer has.
Concrete shall be placed gently in position and shall not have a free fall of more than 1.5m to
avoid segregation of the materials and displacement of the reinforcement.
The use of pipes or chutes for transporting concrete shall not be permitted without the
Where the use of pipes or chutes is permitted they shall be rubber or metal. Where steep
slopes are required chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that

reverse the direction of movement. The use of aluminium chutes, tremie pipes, troughs, and
pipes will not be permitted.
Pipes or chutes may be allowed for small sections and bottom dump buckets or other suitable
vessels may be allowed for large sections to convey the concrete as near as possible to its
final position.
Concrete shall be placed so as to prevent water from collecting at the ends, corners or along
the faces of the forms, and water shall not be placed in large quantities at a given point and
allowed to run or be worked over a long distance in the form.
All concrete shall be placed and compacted in even layers with each batch and each layer
merged with the previous one.
The thickness of concrete layers shall be between 15-cm and 30-cm for reinforced concrete
and up to 45 cm for none reinforced concrete.
Concrete shall be compacted by mechanical or electromechanical poker vibrators. Each
immersion shall continue until shortly after air bubbles cease to appear on the surface of the
concrete, but shall not last more than 30 seconds. Vibrators shall be withdrawn gradually and
vertically to ensure that no air pockets are formed. Over-vibration of concrete will not be
permitted. Vibrators shall not be in contact with reinforcement in any circumstances.
Vibrators shall not be used to distribute concrete in the formwork.
When required, vibrating shall be supplemented by hand spading with suitable tools to
assure proper and adequate compaction
The Contractor shall provide stand-by vibrators during all concrete pours. At least two
vibrators shall be available at the site when more than 25 m3 of concrete are to be placed.
All vibration, compaction and finishing operations shall be completed immediately after the
placing of concrete in its final position.
Concreting in any one part or section of the work shall be carried out in one continuous
operation and no interruption of work will be allowed.
Where beams and slabs together form an integral part of the structure, they shall be poured in
one operation, unless otherwise specified or an approved provision is made to form a
construction joint.
After a beam, wall or column has been cast, an interval of one hour shall be allowed before
casting the continuous slab. The same applies for all abrupt changes in sections.
During placing exposed concrete surfaces shall be worked by means of tools of an approved
type to force all coarse aggregate from the surface, to bring mortar against the forms to
produce a smooth finish, substantially free from water and air pockets, or honeycombing.
Excessive working which produces layers of laitance on the surface will not be permitted.
Freshly placed concrete shall be adequately protected from rain, dust storms, chemical
attack and the harmful effects of sun, heat, wind, flowing water, vibrations and shocks. It
shall also be fenced off or otherwise protected to prevent persons from walking thereon or
articles being placed or thrown thereon. This protection shall continue until the concrete is
sufficiently set such that it can no longer be damaged by these factors. The protection shall
not be less than 24 hours after the time of placing subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent differential temperatures
across any concrete element from exceeding 20°C during concrete placing and curing.
3.4.7 PLACING OF CONCRETE IN OR UNDER WATER
The Contractor shall submit his proposed methods for placing concrete in or under water to
the Engineer for his approval before proceeding with the work.

The method of placing concrete in or under water shall be such as to keep as much as
possible the concrete being placed out of direct contact with the water to avoid any rapid
movement or agitation of the exposed concrete surface.
Tremie pipes shall be smooth bored, watertight, fitted with quick release joints and have an
adequate cross-section for the size of aggregate to be used. Aluminium pipes shall not be
used.
Bottom opening skips shall be straight sided, smooth and fitted with externally operated
bottom opening double doors and overlapping canvas flaps.
Where concrete is to be placed in or under water, the actual mix proportions and selection of
aggregates shall be such as to ensure a resulting concrete with good flow and cohesion
characteristics.
The cement content shall be 25 percent greater than for a comparable mix for use in dry
conditions. The minimum cylinder strength for all concrete shall be approved by the
Engineer for the comparable mixes for use in dry conditions.
3.4.8 TEMPERATURES FOR CONCRETING
During hot weather steps shall be taken to reduce the concrete temperature. Precautions shall
be taken during all concrete operations so that the temperature of the concrete when placed
does not exceed 30°C. When air temperature in the shade is above 35°C concrete placing
shall be stopped unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the Engineer’s satisfaction that
adequate precautions have been taken to control concrete temperature.
The concrete mixing plant shall be screened and covered to protect it from the sun (and wind
and rain). Similar precautions shall be taken throughout the transit, placing and curing of the
concrete whenever conditions require them.
Aggregates shall be shaded and mixing water shall be cooled and other steps taken to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Freshly placed concrete exposed to air temperatures of 35°C or higher shall be shaded from
the direct rays of the sun to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.4.9 CONTINUITY OF CONCRETE WORK
The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner that the placing of concrete in any
particular section of the structure shall be executed without any interruption whatsoever
from the beginning to the end of the operation. If interruptions occur, no fresh concrete shall
be deposited on or against the concrete placed before the interruption such time as the
concrete is sufficiently set to permit the formation of a construction joint.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that partially set concrete shall not be damaged by
shock or any other cause whatsoever.
To ensure continuity casting of concrete shall not commence until sufficient approved
material is at hand to ensure completion of the operation and there is sufficient equipment in
reserve for use in the case of breakdown.
3.5 JOINTS
3.5.1 GENERAL
Joints shall be limited to the positions indicated on the drawings and shall be of the type
specified.
Expansion joints shall incorporate in their construction adequate protection against the entry
of debris or other material that may interfere with the closing of the joints.
Construction joints are detailed on the drawings which shall as a rule be formed at right
angles to the axis of the members.

3.5.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints shall be made only at locations indicated on the drawings or as specified
herein, except in cases of breakdowns or other unforeseen and unavoidable delays, in which
case the a joint shall be formed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Construction joints in abutment walls, wing-walls, and barrels of box culverts shall not be
placed at intervals exceeding 10 meters except as otherwise indicated on the drawings or as
may be approved by the Engineer.
All joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully finished true to line and elevation.
After the header board has been removed, laitance shall be removed from the surface by
washing with water under pressure or by sandblasting to expose clean, well bonded
aggregate. After the surface has been prepared, the concrete shall be left saturated with water
until the new concrete is placed, or it shall be saturated for a period of 4 hours before placing
the new concrete. Shear keys or steel dowels shall be used where required. Shear keys
formed into the concrete shall be formed by the insertion and subsequent removal of
bevelled wood strips which shall be thoroughly saturated with water prior to insertion. The
size and spacing of the keys and dowels shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Care shall be exercised not to injure the concrete or break the concrete-steel bond at any time.
On bridge slabs workmen shall not be permitted to stand or walk on the reinforcement until
the concrete has hardened. Suitable boards or platforms supported on the slab formwork
shall be provided for access during casting.
3.5.3 BONDED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Except where otherwise specified, bonded construction joints shall be made using any of the
following procedures, as appropriate.
After the header board has been removed, laitance shall be removed from the surface by
washing with water under pressure or by sandblasting to expose clean, well bonded
aggregate. When the concrete has been cured for the normal period, the second pour shall be
bonded to the first pour by the application of a two-component liquid polysulphide polymer
epoxy resin concrete adhesive to the concrete joint surface. The epoxy concrete adhesive
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The surface on which the adhesive is to be applied shall be free of oil, dirt, and loose
concrete. All unsound concrete shall be removed until a base of strong, undamaged concrete
on which to apply the adhesive is exposed. Heavy deposits of dirt or oil products shall be
removed by wire brushing or sandblasting. The surface shall be free of moisture and dry
before application of the adhesive.
Immediately before application, the two adhesive components shall be combined in the
proportions and to the methods specified by the manufacturer. All components shall be fully
blended. The amount of adhesive mixed at one time shall be limited to that quantity which
can be conveniently applied within the pot life indicated by the manufacturer.
The resulting adhesive shall be applied to the concrete in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Concrete shall not be placed against the joint until the
adhesive has become tacky or otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Areas that have
been allowed to dry shall be recoated before concrete is placed.
Adhesives may be toxic or otherwise injurious to health or otherwise be classified as
hazardous materials. The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturers of the materials
complete instructions as to the health and safety precautions that must be exercised with
respect to the materials to be used, and as to the procedure that shall be followed in the event
that workmen come in contact with such materials. Before they are permitted to proceed
with the work, workmen shall be instructed on the hazards to which they will be exposed, the
necessary safety precautions and the procedure to be followed in the event of accidental
contact with the materials.
3.5.4 DE-BONDED JOINTS
Debonded movement joints shall be provided at viaduct sections with continuous deck slab
as shown on the drawings. A debonding layer with nominal thickness 20mm shall be
provided with dimensions shown on the drawings. The material shall be tar paper, 14kg / m2
unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
The joint between the deck slab and the coping shall be de-bonded using an approved elastic
material which shall allow movement between the slab and the coping. The Contractor shall
submit his proposal for the provision and placing of the de-bonding layer to the Engineer for
his approval.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
3.6.1 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES
All concrete surfaces shall be finished as indicated on the drawings or as otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
Permanently exposed concrete surfaces to Class F4, F3 and F2 finish shall be protected from
rust marks and stains of all kinds.
Unless otherwise described in the Specifications, all formwork joints for exposed surfaces of
concrete to Class F2, F3 and F4 finish shall form a regular pattern with horizontal and
vertical lines continuous throughout each structure and all construction joints shall coincide
with these horizontal or vertical lines.
The types of surface finishes and necessary form works are as follows:
Table 5 Type of Concrete Finishes
Finishing Description Formworks
Formed Class F1 No particular requirements for Sawn Formwork for
Finish finishing unexposed concrete surfaces
Class F2 With specified regularities on the Wrought Formwork of steel
finish or plywood or timber.
Class F3 With accurate finishing to provide Lined Formwork using
a smooth finish of uniform material approved by the
texture and appearance Engineer to be of the same
Class F4 With accurate finishing on the use type and obtained from one
of internal ties and embedded source throughout for any
metal parts one structure.
Unformed Class U1 Levelled by wooden float etc. -
Finish Class U2 Steel float finishing
Class U3 Finishing by steel-trowel
3.6.2 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FINISHED SURFACES
Any remedial treatment to finished surfaces shall be agreed with the Engineer following
inspection immediately after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay.
Any concrete the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the Engineer
will be liable to rejection.
3.6.3 FIXING OF IRONWORK
All brackets, lag-bolts and other ironwork for which holes have been boxed out or left in the
concrete of a structure shall be carefully grouted into their correct positions.
Couplers for reinforcing bar for future widening shall be installed as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.6.4 RECONSTRUCTION OF FAULTY WORK
In the event any members or portion of the work proves, after removal of the formwork, to
be of inferior workmanship or to be in any way whatsoever defective, or should crushing
tests on samples taken from the work show that the concrete used therein is of inferior
Quality, such work shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut out and replaced.
3.7 CURING
All newly placed concrete shall be cured. Curing shall begin immediately after finishing and
continue for at least 7 days. Curing is required to prevent drying out of the concrete and shall
be considered an integral part of the concreting operations.
Improperly cured concrete will be considered defective. Concrete work will not be permitted
to continue until proper procedures are put into effect by the Contractor.
Curing of concrete shall be included in the Contractor’s method statement and shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. The methods detailed below may be used.
Timber formwork covering the concrete shall be moistened with water at frequent intervals
to keep it from drying during the curing period. Metal formwork exposed to the sun must be
shaded from its direct rays, painted white or otherwise protected during the curing period.
When forms are removed before the end of the 7-day curing period, specified curing
procedures shall be applied by the Contractor and continued until the end of the 7-day period
as specified.
3.7.1 METHODS USING WATER
Surfaces may be kept moist by ponding, sprinkling, or fogging. Coverings such as burlap
shall be used to retain water so supplied. The use of sawdust will not be allowed and
coverings that cause unsightly discoloration of concrete shall not be used. Any method that
results in the concrete being alternately wet and dry will be considered an improper curing
procedure. Coverings shall be placed as soon as possible after finishing operations have been
completed and there is no danger of surface damage. The coverings shall be kept
continuously moist.
3.7.2 PREVENTING MOISTURE LOSS
Moisture loss may be prevented by the use of approved waterproof paper, plastic sheets, or
liquid membrane curing compound except where other requirements prohibit the use of
these compounds. If a formed surface is to be rubbed, the concrete shall be kept moist before
and during the rubbing, and the curing shall be initiated immediately following the first rub
while the concrete surface is still moist.
3.7.3 WATERPROOF PAPER
The paper shall have the widest practicable width and adjacent sheets shall overlap a
minimum of 15 cm and shall be tightly sealed with a pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue or
other approved methods to form a complete waterproof cover of the entire concrete surface.
The paper shall be secured so as not to be displaced by wind. If any portion of the sheets is
broken or damaged before expiration of the curing period, the broken or damaged portion
shall be immediately repaired. Sections that have lost their waterproof qualities shall not be
used.
3.7.4 PLASTIC SHEETS
The sheets shall be used in the same manner as required above for waterproof paper.
3.7.5 CURING COMPOUNDS
Curing compounds shall not be used on areas receiving a rubbed finish. Only Type 2 liquid
membrane curing compound complying with AASHTO M148 (or equivalent to TCVN
5592-92) may be used subject to approval by the Engineer. Curing compounds shall be
applied to unformed areas as soon as the water sheen has practically disappeared from the
concrete, or as soon as the forms have been removed from surfaces. If there is any expected

delay in applying curing compound, the surface shall receive moist curing until the
compound can be applied.
All curing compounds shall be thoroughly agitated just prior to use and shall be applied with
equipment that will produce a fine spray. The compound shall be applied in two coats
sprayed at right angles to each other. The rate of each application shall be not less than 1
litter for each 3.6 square meters of surface or as detailed in the manufacturer’s information.
Care shall be taken to prevent application to surfaces where a concrete bond is required, and
to joints where joint sealer is to be placed. If the membrane film is broken or damaged at any
time during the curing period, the broken or damaged area(s) shall be re-coated according to
the original requirements.
3.8 PRECAST CONCRETE
Pre-cast concrete elements shall be provided as detailed in the drawings.
The Contractor shall provide and install all pre-cast elements complete, furnishing all
materials, labour and equipment and performing all required work as required by drawings,
as specified herein, other applicable Specification Sections and as may be required by the
Engineer.
The pre-cast constituents and component work shall include, but not be limited to, the supply
and installation of the pre-cast elements, necessary grout and grouting and all appurtenances
required for their proper installation.
3.8.1 MATERIALS
Concrete materials incorporated in the fabrication of pre-cast elements shall comply with the
applicable requirements of this section of the specification as well as other applicable
Specification Sections and shall be of the class of concrete as noted on the drawings or as
may be required by the Engineer.
Grout shall be an approved, free flowing, non-shrink, and non-metallic grout containing
sulphate resistant cement. The grout shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of
20 MPa when tested in accordance with appropriate sections of ASTM C109. The grout shall
show no expansion after the final set takes place when tested in accordance with ASTM
C827 or an equivalent test method that may be approved by the Engineer. The grout shall
have an initial setting time of not less than 45 minutes.
3.8.2 FABRICATION
T girders shall be cast horizontally.
The dimensional length of beams shown on the drawings is the required length including
allowances for elastic shortening creep or shrinkage.
To ensure proper bond to the deck slab, the top surface of girders in contact with deck slabs
shall be given a rough exposed aggregate finish. At approximately the time of initial set, all
laitance shall be removed with a coarse wire to expose the concrete aggregate.
Pre-cast elements that are manufactured off-site shall not be transported from the fabrication
area until the concrete has achieved its 28 day strength.
All pre-cast members shall be lifted and supported only at the points indicated on the
drawings or as may be otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Pre-cast items shall be lifted and handled to in such a way that no damage occurs. Any
damage to pre-cast items that occurs during transportation or placement shall be inspected
by the Engineer. The Engineer may reject damaged pre-cast items if, in his opinion, such
damage will adversely affect the strength or the appearance of pre-cast items.

3.9 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE
3.9.1 GENERAL
The quality control of concrete shall be included in the Contractor’s Quality Assurance
scheme for the entire Project. The Contractor shall make particular reference to the target
mean strength of the concrete in his quality scheme and shall describe clearly all factors
relevant to its determination.
All Quality control tests must be carried out in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and shall
be conducted by an Independent Laboratory or the Contractor’s laboratory on Site.
3.9.2 TECHNICIANS AT MIXING PLANT
The Contractor shall designate a competent and experienced concrete technician to be in
charge of the mixing plant and to be responsible for quality control including, but not limited
to, the following:
a) The proper storage and handling of all components of the mix.
b) The proper maintenance and cleanliness of plant, trucks, and other equipment.
c) The gradation testing of fine and coarse aggregates.
d) The determination of the fineness modulus of fine aggregate.
e) The measurement of moisture content of the aggregates and adjustment of the
mix proportions as required before each day's production or more often if
necessary to maintain the required water/cement ratio.
f) The computation of the batch masses for each day's production and the checking
of the plant's calibration as necessary.
The technican shall be assisted by at least one competent and experienced concrete
technician at the project site responsible for concrete sampling and testing during placing of
concrete.
He shall ensure furnishing on behalf of the Contractor of all equipment and the performance
of temperature, unit mass, slump, and other tests to verify compliance with the specification
before and during each placement operation.
He shall verify that adjustments to the mix before discharge comply with the specifications.
He shall ensure completion of the batch ticket, which shall include the detail below, the
recording of the apparent water/cement ratio, and the time discharge are completed;
furnishing a copy of each batch ticket at the time of placement.
a) Concrete supplier
b) Ticket serial number
c) Date and truck number
d) Contractor
e) Structure or location of placement
f) Mix-design and concrete class
g) Component quantities and concrete total volume
h) Moisture corrections for aggregate moisture
i) Total water in mix at plant
j) Time of batching
k) Time at which discharge must be completed

Ensure testing to determine the unit mass, slump, and temperature according to this
specification.
The provision of copies of work sheets and test results as they are completed.
3.9.3 SAMPLING OF MIXED CONCRETE
The frequency of sampling and testing shall be included in the quality control plan for
concrete and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Samples shall be taken from each work item or batch as in the Contractor‘s approved quality
control plan and in accordance with AASHTO-T141. Samples to be used for strength tests
shall be a minimum of 25 liters. Smaller samples are permitted for routine air content and
slump tests. The temperature and slump of the concrete shall be tested for each load at
discharge or at such frequency as may be approved by the Engineer. Test will not be deemed
to have been carried out unless witnessed by the Engineer or his representative. The method
of making the slump test shall conform to ASTM C143.
Sampling at discharge shall be after at least 0.2 cubic meters are discharged and before
placing any of the batches in the forms.
The initial testing frequency shall be resumed if a test shows a failing temperature or slump
or when required by the Engineer. Concrete tested at discharge and failing to meet test
requirements for a particular concrete class shall not be permitted to used in that element of
the Works.
The Contractor shall bear all expenses for obtaining, cutting out or sampling all specimens
and/or component parts for testing.
3.9.4 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTING
Testing to determine the compressive strength of concrete shall be used for the following
purposes:
* To allow early stripping of forms.
* permit the application of post tensioning force.
* permit the launching of the traveller.
* acceptance of the completed work
The procedure for strength testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C1077 or an
equivalent procedure approved by the Engineer. TCVN239-2006 may also be applied.
The Contractor’s quality control plan shall include details of his proposed procedure for the
determination of early concrete strengths. This procedure shall use conventional test
cylinder results to substantiate strength predictions for each class and location of concrete
pours. The figure below is an example of an acceptable the procedures.

Example of Concrete Strength Quality Control Flow Chart
9 Specimens by Cylinder from each 100 cubic meters of concrete

when the same grade is used continuously, or as directed by the Engineer
Cylinder numbers 1, 5 and 9 3 Samples from Cylinder

numbers 2&8, 3&7, 4&6
7 days compressive strength test OK
if less than X%* from required 28 28 days compressive strength test

days compressive strength
if No OK
Alternative 2
stop placing concrete
and rectify any defect Countermeasures to Acceptance of
Alternative 1 be taken the Lot
Remove and replace the defective concrete
without waiting the results of 28-day test by
the responsibility of the Contractor
*Note: This percentage or strength shall be decided in accordance with the test results of
trial mixing as mentioned in sub-section 3.1 Concrete Mix Design and with the proposal
by the Contractor.
3.10 TESTING FREQUENCIES

Testing frequencies shall be accordance with Vietnamese Standard: TCVN 4453-95; TCVN
9395-2012 or other international standard subject equivalence being demonstrated by the
Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
Item Test Description Test Frequency Remarks
1 TCVN 4453-95: Monolithic Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures – Codes for
Construction, Check and Acceptance.
a Material testing & preparation work before
construction: (for material & quarries approval)
+ General requirement Article 5.1
+ Cement Article 5.2
+ Sand Article 5.3
+ Quality of aggregate for concrete Article 5.4
+ Water for concrete : Article 5.5
+ Others requirement index for concrete ; additive Article 5.6; 5.7
cement …
+ Formworks and falsework Article 3
+ Reinforcement for concrete Article 4
b During construction period: Article 6
( Note: Article 6.8 has been superseded by TCVN 9395-2012)
c After construction period: (For acceptance of Article 7 : Table
construction works) 19
2 TCVN 9395-2012: Bored Piles- Construction, check and acceptance
a Material testing & preparation work before Article 6.9.1
+ Cement : Article 6.2.1
+ Quality of aggregate for concrete (include sand): Article 6.2.2

+ Water for concrete : Article 6.2.3
+ Others requirement index for concrete chloride ion, Article 6.2.4
additive cement :
b During construction period: Article 6.4 ;
Article 6.9.2
c After construction period: (For acceptance of Article 6.9.3 ;
construction works) Article 7
3.11 ACCEPTANCES TEST AND TOLERANCES
3.11.1 STRENGTHS
Final acceptance of concrete work will be based on 28 day tests for compressive strength
testing and the dimension of the completed works.
The work is considered in compliance if for lab cured specimens if:
 the average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests for that class at one age
equals or exceeds the minimum specified strength for the class of concrete being
placed, and
 no individual strength test is less than 85% of the specified strength.
If the results of the 28-day tests do not satisfy the minimum technical requirements the
Contractor shall conduct such additional test as may be required by the Engineer.
If the concrete does not comply with the specifications, the Engineer may order the
Contractor to remove the defective concrete and replace it with concrete of the specified
Quality. All additional testing and remedial work shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
At the discretion of the Employer and subject to there be no risk to the completed structure
the Employer may accept a reduced payment for work which is not in compliance with the
specification. Any such reduced payment will be determined by the Engineer in co-operation
with the Employer.
3.11.2 DIMENSIONS
The finished dimensions of concrete structures shall be as shown on Table 6.
Table 6 Dimension Tolerances
Footing Pier Bearing Wing Apron Approach Concrete
Pile cap column Pedestal wall Slab Railing
Top Level ±10 mm ±5 mm ±2.5 mm ±5 ±5 mm ±5 mm -
mm
Center ±5 mm ±5 mm ±5 mm - - ±5 mm ±5 mm
Position
Dimension -10 to +50 mm* -
Verticality - ±1/300 - ±1/ - - ±1/500
300
Top Grade - - 1 in 200 - ±2.5 ±5 mm ±3 mm in
Irregulariti mm in in 3 m 3m
es 3m (1/1000)
Wall - - - ±5 - - -
Flatness mm

Each class of concrete shall be measured separately in cubic metres and measurement shall
be made to the lines of the structures as indicated on the drawings and as described in the Bill

of Quantities. No deduction shall be made for the volume of chamfers, the volume of
reinforcement, the volume of boxouts or the volume of items cast in concrete.
Acceptance of concrete structure shall be based on compliance with particular sections of the
specification that might apply to the structure.
unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below. However
payment may be adjusted as stated in clause 3.11 above.
At the discretion of the Engineer a payment of 70% of the bill item may be included in a
certificate for concrete which has met the 7 days compressive strength requirement and
which has been completed in an otherwise satisfactory manner but for which the final curing
is not complete or the test for the 28 days compressive strength could not be completed.
Waterstops shall not be measured separately for payment.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for the Formwork and falsework. They
shall include but not be limited by the items listed below and shall be deemed included in the
applicable items of the Bill of Quantities.
* all expenses involved in providing, pumps, cofferdams, braced sheet piling or any other
methods approved by the Engineer;
* all expenses resulting from the Contractor’s observance of all rules and regulations of
competent authorities regarding the interference or maintenance of flow in the relevant
canals, water courses, channels or pipes;
* provisions for placement and removal of temporary Jetty/Guide frames;
* provisions for travellers and traveller testing
* provisions for underwater works;
* provisions for underwater concrete;
* provisions for pumps and de-watering by submersible pumps;
* provisions for all necessary barges; and
* provisions for all necessary tugboats and auxiliary river craft.
* furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the
work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed
by the Engineer
07100-01 Concrete Class C50 (50MPa) m3
07100-05 Concrete Class C35 (35MPa) (Tremie Mix for Bored piles) m3

SECTION 07200 - PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
1. DESCRIPTION
This Section specifies the materials and workmanship for fabrication, installation and testing
of pre-cast reinforced concrete piles.
The types of piles to be used shall be as indicated on the drawings. If the Contractor proposes
to use an alternative type of pile he shall provide the Engineer with information on the design
data, piling experience, records, and calculations supporting the pile design. All such
proposals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
ASTM D1143 Test Method for Piles Under Static Axial Compressive Load
In addition all materials and procedures shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
of ASTM standard in its latest edition, or other national standard specifications which may
be approved by the Engineer. Standard TCVN 9393:2012 may also be applied.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR PILING
2.2.1 SUPPLY OF MATERIAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, samples of the material to be
provided and the names of the manufacturers and suppliers who will supply the materials
required for pile construction. The Quality of the material provided shall be certified by the
supplier, and samples shall be tested under the supervision of the Engineer, at the
Contractor’s expenses.
2.2.2 CONCRETE
The concrete class to be used for pre-cast piles shall be as indicated on the drawings and
shall comply with the requirements of Specification - Concrete and Concrete Structures.
2.2.3 REINFORCING STEEL
The reinforcement steel to be used for pre-cast piles shall be as indicated on the drawings
and shall comply with the requirements of Specification - Reinforcing Steel.
3.1 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor’s proposed method statement for pre-cast concrete piles shall be submitted
to the Engineer for his approval well before the start of pile driving. The method statement
shall include but not necessarily limited to the following:
 The location and extent of necessary temporary works such as roads and bridges to
be used to transport materials and equipment to the pile driving sites.
 Initial driving criteria to reach the bearing strata and design pile capacity.
 The methods to be used for the precise location of the piles (geodetic positioning
method and equipment) in accordance with the Drawings.
 Method of controlling groundwater.

 Anticipated ground vibration, ground movement and groundwater drawdown and
method of instrumentation and monitoring.
 Details of construction plant.
 Full details on all driving equipment and methods, including kind of hammer,
(gravity hammers, single and double acting steam or pneumatic hammers, or diesel
hammers)
 Method of pile Fabrication and transportation.
 Method and sequence of excavation.
 Method and sequence of pile installation, including methods of avoiding damage to
adjacent piles, utilities and structures.
 Calculations of driving stresses (both tension and compression) within acceptable
limits for each proposed pile driving method
 Method of jointing and lengthening piles
 Details of advance any test piles and arrangements for pile testing
 Calculations of the required final set
 Drop height for the proposed piling hammer, to support the ultimate load of test piles
in accordance with the specified settlement criteria.
3.2 REQUIREMENT OF PILE WORKS
Where required as stated on the drawings pile length and allowable bearing capacity shall be
verified by the Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer based on the
results of any pile tests required and the available subsoil information. A factor of safety of
(FS) equal to 2.5 shall be used or such FS which may be approved by the Engineer.
Where required by the Engineer and subject to agreement by the Engineer, an allowance for
soil settlement shall be added to the design load before determination of the pile length and
bearing capacity.
3.3 CASTING, CURING AND FINISHING
Formwork for pre-cast piles shall conform to the general requirements for concrete
formwork in the Specification for Concrete and Concrete Structures
The piles shall be cast in a horizontal position.
Care shall be taken to place the concrete to produce a pile free from any air pockets,
honeycombing or other defects.
Concrete shall be placed continuously and shall be compacted by vibration or by other
means satisfactory to the Engineer.
Forms shall be watertight and shall not be removed until at least twenty four hours after the
concrete has been placed.
Curing of concrete piles shall be in accordance with Specification - Concrete and Concrete
Structures.
Concrete strength of shall be confirmed by the quality control procedures in Specification -
Concrete and Concrete Structures.
Each face of the pile shall not deviate by more than 6 mm over a length 3 m determined by
using straight edge placed on each face.
Straightness shall be within 1/500.
Piles shall not be driven less than 28 days after casting or such reduced time as may be
3.4 HANDLING
Only accepted piles with satisfactory concrete strength and dimensions shall be allowed to
be driven.
Concrete piles shall only be lifted by slinging from the lifting holes or in positions which
have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
When lifting or transporting pre-cast concrete piles the Contractor shall provide slings and
all other equipment necessary to prevent any appreciable bending of the piles and
subsequent damage to the concrete. Piles shall be so handled at all times to prevent breaking
or chipping of the edges.
Piles damaged during handling or driving shall be replaced.
3.5 TEST PILES
The Engineer will order the execution of test piles as he considers necessary to ascertain the
type of the foundation for the project. The Contractor shall furnish and execute test piling
selected from working piles at the locations designated by the Engineer.
The lengths of the piles shown on the Drawings are based on information obtained from
previous site investigations. However, piles of different lengths may be required as directed
by the Engineer. Before final pile lengths are settled, the Contractor shall construct to the
lengths shown on the Drawings such pilot piles as may be found necessary. These piles shall
be driven in the positions specified by the Engineer and the Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer daily with a detailed record of the driving of pilot piles throughout the full depth of
driving.
After attaining the approved set, driving shall be continued until the Engineer directs that it
shall cease. Driving of test piles beyond the point at which the approved set is obtained will
be called for to demonstrate that driving resistance continues to increase. The Contractor
shall then furnish the remainder of the piles in the structure. In determining the lengths of
piles the Contractor shall base his list on the lengths assumed to remain in the completed
structure.
 Static load test in sub-clause 3.5 or dynamic test in Section 07350 shall be applied to
test piles in order to confirm the appropriateness of design, material, manufacture
and construction.
 The Contractor shall keep a complete driving record of each test pile in a form
acceptable to the Engineer and complete with all data on the piles including, but not
limited to, hammer speed, operating stroke, blows per 30 cm and final resistance.
 The Contractors shall submit within 48 hours of the completion of the load test to the
Engineer for each pile tested a detailed record of testing.
3.6 DRIVING AND PILE CONSTRUCTION
No work shall commence without the Engineer’s approval of the results of test piles.
All piles shall be driven in the presence of the Engineer or his representative.
If during pile driving, conditions indicate that a pile is hitting an obstruction before reaching
proper bearing stratum, the Contractor shall drive through the obstruction or shall use
whatever means to remove or circumvent the obstruction, without additional cost to the
Employer.

All excavation for piled foundations shall be complete before the piles are driven. The
excavation shall be to such an elevation as to compensate for possible uplift or subsidence of
the surrounding earth.
The Engineer shall inspect all temporary structures, equipment and facilities before their use.
The Contractor shall at all times provide required maintenance and repairs to keep these
items in a safe and serviceable condition.
The methods used for driving piles shall not subject them to excessive and undue abuse that
produces crushing and spalling of the concrete. Manipulation of piles to force them into
proper position, if considered by the Engineer too excessive, will not be permitted.
Driving of piles with followers shall be avoided if practicable and shall be done only with the
The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or cushions in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer of the pile hammer and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The driving head shall keep the pile and the hammer on the same axis to provide a driving
surface normal to the top of the pile. The helmet, dolly and any packing shall be in sound
condition.
The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis and the impact surface shall be flat and at
a right angle to the pile and hammer axis.
The hammer shall be in good condition and operate correctly to deliver adequate energy per
blow.
The top of foundation piles shall be embedded in the concrete footing as shown on the
drawings. Piles shall be cut off such that 150 mm of pile is embedded in the footing or
foundation. The longitudinal reinforcement of piles shall be embedded in the footing or
foundation to the length shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall temporarily suspend pile driving operations and report to the Engineer
whenever the following conditions occur:
* There is a sudden change in the penetration rate of the pile.
* The pile has been suddenly deflected or otherwise moved.
* The top of the pile has been seriously damaged.
All piles pushed up by the driving of adjacent piles or any other cause shall be re-driven.
Each pile shall, after being driven, be within a tolerance of 75 mm in any direction from the
locations shown on the drawings subject to approval by the Engineer.
When water jets are approved for use, the number of jets and the nozzle volume and pressure
shall be sufficient to freely erode the material adjacent to the pile. The plant shall have
sufficient capacity to deliver at all times a pressure equivalent to at least 690 kPa at two
19mm (3/4 inch) jet nozzles. The jets shall be shut off before the required penetration is
reached and the piles shall be driven solely by hammers to final penetration as required by
the Engineer. Water jets shall not be used during penetration of the bearing stratum.
The ultimate resistance of the piles will be assessed by the program of dynamic testing and
determinations of final driving resistance using an agreed piling formula.
At least 14 days prior to the commencement of pile driving, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval initial driving criteria, being set per blow or set and temporary
compression of the piles required to achieve the specified minimum ultimate resistance. This
initial driving criterion will be modified as necessary as the dynamic test results become
known.

If the Contractor proposes to change the driving system at any time during the Contract, he
shall provide full details of such changes to the Engineer at the earliest possible time. Piling
work shall not be carried out with the changed driving system until the proposal has been
approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may require additional testing and a change to the
pile driving criteria.
Any pile, which is dynamically tested and found not to meet the ultimate resistance
requirement or found to be damaged shall be rejected by the Engineer.
If the Engineer considers that a rejected pile is representative of other untested piles the latter
piles may be rejected and required to be redriven. The Engineer will consider that a pile is
representative of other untested piles if these piles have similar driving records, recorded
sets, temporary compressions and driving energy at the end of driving. The cost of
redriving/replacing or conducting any other remedial works on any rejected pile shall be
borne by the Contractor.
The static load test with vertical load equivalent to 1.5 times of design working load shall be
applied to one (1) percent of total number of working piles and more than two (2) piles per
contract package for checking the compliance with the Specification requirements. The
details of load test shall refer to clause 3.6.6 “Static Load Test on Working Piles” in Section
07300 “Bored Piles”.
The dynamic test shall be applied to one (1) percent of total number of working piles and
more than five (5) piles per contract package for checking the compliance with the
Specification requirements. The details of load test shall refer to Section 7350 “Pile
Dynamic Test”.
If the pile driving is not permitted due to environmental restrictions, the contractor shall
consider other alternative construction method, to be approved by the Engineer. One of the
methods can be pile pressing as follows:
3.7 PILE INSTALLATION BY STATIC PRESSING METHOD (TCVN 286-2003
SECTION 6)
The selection of pile pressing equipment must meet the following requirements:
 power of the equipment shall not be less than 1.4 times the maximum pressing force
in the design;
 pressing force of the equipment must be applied on the central axis of the pile when
pressing from the pile top and act uniformly on the sides of the pile when pressing to
the side, the pressing force shall not create lateral force on the pile;
 the equipment must have valid testing certificates for the pressure meter and the oil
valve and a jack adjustment table issued by the relevant Authority.;
 pile pressing equipment must ensure the operation condition and labour safety
during the construction.
The selection of the counter-weight system for the pile pressing should be based on the site
conditions, construction characteristics, geotechnical conditions and the capacity of the
pressing equipment. Counter weight can be provided by ground anchors, kentledge or by the
use of appropriate anchors placed in the foundations of the structure. In all cases, the total
weight of the counter weight system shall not be less than 1.1 times the maximum pressing
force in the design.
When using the structure for counter weight the commencement of pressing must be
determined based on the condition of the structure: acceptance of the structure and anchors
in accordance with acceptance procedures for reinforced concrete and the total loading of the
anchor system.

The positioning and balancing of the pile pressing equipment must be checked as follows:
 the axis of the force generating equipment must be coincident with the central axis of
the pile,
 the working plane of the floor of the pressing equipment must be horizontal and shall
be checked by a spirit level or other means,
 pressing plane of the force generating equipment must be vertical and perpendicular
to the working floor;
 the equipment must be tested to check the stability of the entire system by applying
loading equal to the pile design loading plus an additional 10 - 15%.
The pile tip location shall be checked in two planes perpendicular to each other and the
centre shall not deviate from the design position by more than 10 cm. in either direction. The
force exerted on pile shall be increased gradually so that the penetration speed does not
exceed 1cm/s. If the pile becomes inclined, pressing shall stop and appropriate adjustments
shall be made.
Press any subsequent pile extensions as follows:
 The surface of the ends of the two pile sections must be made flat and the connection
details must be checked. Install the pile extension into the pressing location so that
the axis of the centreline of the extension coincides with the pile tip axis and the
inclination with the vertical axis does not exceed 1%;
 The connection must be as required in the design. Surcharge the pile extension with
the pile design loading plus an additional 10 – 15% during the connection process to
create the bond between two concrete faces;.
 Gradually increase the pressing force so that the penetration of the piles into the soil
reaches a maximum of 2cm/s;
 Pressing of the pile into stiff plastic clay should not stop for too long (due to
connecting extensions or changing shifts…).
A sudden increase in the pressing force may be due to the following:
 penetration of the pile tip into a stiffer soil layer;
 the pile tip hitting an unforeseen object;
 the pile has inclined sufficiently to hit an adjacent pile.
In such cases suitable action must be taken which might be as follows:
 if the pile is broken or inclined out of tolerance, it must be removed and re-pressed or
an additional pile must be driven subject to instruction from the designer:
 if an unforeseen object, dense sand or stiff clay are encountered, a guiding bore or
high pressure water technique may be used.
Pile pressing shall be considered completed when both of the following conditions are
satisfied:
 the pile length pressed into the ground is within the range of Lmin  Lc  Lmax,
where: Lmin and Lmax are the minimum and maximum length of the designed pile
based on the forecast of ground movement in the area and Lc is the pile length
actually pressed into the ground;
 pressing force prior to termination is within the range of (Pep) min  (Pep)KT 
(Pep)max
where : (Pep) min is the minimum pressing force in the design;
(Pep)max is the maximum pressing force in the design;
(Pep)KT is the pressing force at time pressing stopped; this pressing force must be
maintained with the penetration speed not exceeding 1cm/s for a depth not less than 3 times
the pile diameter or pile width as appropriate.
If the two above conditions are not met, the Contractor shall report to the Designer for the
treatment method.
The pile log shall record the pressing force for every metre of pile length until (Pep)min is
reached; thereafter the pressing force shall be recorded for every 20 cm until termination or
as directed by the Engineer or Designer.
3.8 PILE SPLICING
Full-length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles when permitted shall be in
accordance with the provision described in this specification. All piles shall be continuously
driven unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
The Engineer may approve any proposed splice joint if technical requirements are properly
satisfied.
Any proposed splice joint shall be of a proven design with ultimate compression, tension and
bending capabilities at least equal to the adjacent concrete section.
The splice joint shall not be closer than eight (8) meters to the underside of the pile cap.
Before the Engineer approves any splice joint, lateral-bending tests of the proposed joint
shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Curing and finishing of extensions shall be the same as for the original pile.
3.9 DEFECTIVE PILES
Any pile delivered with defects, or damage during driving due to internal defects or by
improper driving, driven out of its proper location or unsatisfactory load test result shall be
corrected at the Contractor’s expense by one of the following methods subject to the
* The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new and longer pile where necessary.
* A second pile shall be driven or cast adjacent to the defective pile.
* The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided in this specification or the
underside of the footing lowered to properly embed the pile.
A concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a visible crack on all four sides of the
pile, or any defect which, in the opinion of the Engineer, affects the strength of the pile.
When a new pile is driven or cast to replace a rejected one, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, enlarge the footing as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
3.10 PILE RECORDS
The Contractor shall keep records of all piles driven or installed in a form approved by the
Engineer. A copy of the records shall be given to the Engineer within two days after each
pile is driven.
The pile records shall give full information on the following:
 Pile type and dimensions.
 Date of casting and concrete Quality
 Date of driving
 Driving equipment: type, weight and efficiency of hammer, type and condition of
driving head, cap, cushion, etc.
 Depth driven, ground elevation and tip elevation
 Level of pile top immediately after driving and the level when all piles in the group
are driven.
 Pile cut-off elevation.
 Penetration along the whole depth driven for every 10 piles, and when the Engineer
so requires.
 The height of drop: for gravity and single-acting hammers
 The frequency of blows: for double acting-hammers
 Details of any interruption in driving.
 Details of re-driving.

The quantity of pre-cast concrete piles to be paid for shall be measured by linear meters of
the accepted and driven piles in place in the completed and accepted work. Payment shall not
be made for unaccepted piles even if the pile was driven.
Measurements shall be made from the bottom of the pile (i.e. not including the steel shoe
plate) to the cut-off line indicated on the drawings or as may be approved by the Engineer. In
cases where based on trial pile results the Engineer approves the order of piles with an
allowance for breaking down of pile heads, the full length of the piles so ordered shall be
measured for payment. Portions of piles cast deeper than required through over-driving
procedures shall not be measured for payment.
All the tests except ultimate load test and proof load test which may be required by the
Engineer for approval of the works, or the equipment, shall not be measured for separate
payment, and shall be considered as incidental work and shall be deemed included in the
rates and unit price of the piles.
Ultimate load test for preliminary test pile and proof load test for permanent working pile
shall be measured by number of actual test piles.
Payment for driven Pre-cast Concrete Piles for permanent working pile and preliminary test
pile, approved by the Engineer, shall be made in accordance with the applicable Unit Prices
of the Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labour, materials and equipment and performing all work to complete the driven concrete
pile foundations including but not limited to, furnishing of reinforcement, excavation,
hardware, formwork, pile splicing, concrete, equipment, removal of remaining material,
disposal of rejected piles or materials, any kind of incidental work, and all necessary
appurtenances to complete the work.
Payment for ultimate load test on preliminary test piles and proof load test on permanent
working pile shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials and equipment
and performing all work to complete the test in accordance with Specification and approved
test procedures, any kind of incidental work, and all necessary appurtenances to complete
the work.

07200-01 Driven Precast Piles (300 mm x300 mm) m
07200-02 Driven Precast Piles (350 mm x350 mm) m
07200-03 Static Load Test on Driven Precast pile selected from working piles each

SECTION 07250 - SOIL INVESTIGATION BORINGS
1. DESCRIPTION
This specification describes the requirements and procedures for Soil Investigation in
locations as may be required by the Engineer or required by the Contractor for information
to confirm pile driving conditions or foundation bearing capacity.
covered by this specification.
22TCN-259-2000 Specification for Geological Exploratory Drilling7250
ASTM D422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D854-06 Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by Water Pycnometer
ASTM D1586 Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils
ASTM D1587 Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Geotechnical Sampling
of Soils
ASTM D2113-06 Standard Practice for Rock Core Drilling and Sampling of Rock
for Site Investigation
ASTM D2166 Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil
ASTM D2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil
and Rock by Mass
ASTM D2487-06 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
ASTM D2435 Standard Test Methods for One-Dimensional Consolidation
Properties of Soils Using Incremental Loading
ASTM D2974 Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic
Soils
ASTM D4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D4186 Standard Test Method for One-Dimensional Consolidation
Properties of Saturated Cohesive Soils Using Controlled-Strain
Loading
3. SOIL INVESTIGATION BORINGS

3.1 GENERAL
As may be required by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer, or as may be
required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out drilling and sampling for soil
investigations at the selected locations to obtain necessary subsurface data, information
and/or samples for testing.
The methods and procedures for soil investigation shall be in accordance with the
Vietnamese, AASHTO or ASTM standards listed above as may be appropriate.
In principle borehole drilling has already been carried out during detailed design stage at the
location of each pier for structures, and at soft ground locations, and no further drilling is
required at these locations. However, in case conditions are observed during foundation
construction that are substantially different to those assumed in design, the Engineer may
request additional boring and testing. In particular, at least one addtional borehole shall be
drilled at each pier of main towers of the cable stayed bridge, and the boreholes shall be
carried out prior to ordering of steel pipe piles for the foundation.
Whilst drilling of boreholes to examine conditions relating to the permanent works will be
measured for payment, drilling of boreholes required by the Contractor for his temporary
works design shall not be measured for payment.
3.2 DEPTH OF BORES
Soil test drilling shall be taken to the depth as required by the Engineer or as necessary to
establish the required foundation information. In the case of structural foundations the test
drilling shall generally be sufficient to prove continuity of the bearing stratum.
The Engineer will request the Contractor to conduct SPT (Standard Penetration Test) at pile
tip level in a bored pile hole to confirm the bearing capacity of the bored pile on site.
3.3 METHOD OF BORING
The Contractor shall use rotary drilling as required in the standards referred to above unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Rock cores if required shall be continuously core drilled.
3.4 SAMPLING, TESTING AND BORING LOGS
3.4.1 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Sampling shall generally be performed in accordance with the requirements of
22TCN-259-2000.
Standard penetration tests shall be taken at two (2)-meter intervals or at each change of strata
whichever is lesser for all borings unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The static ground water level shall be recorded for each hole.
Rock cores shall be taken when and where required by the Engineer. The full core shall be
recovered and stored in core boxes for inspection by the Engineer.
Split-spoon (undisturbed samples) shall be taken when and where required by the Engineer.
These sample cylinders shall be sealed for transport of the sample from site to the testing
laboratory.
Where required by the Engineer, boreholes shall be drilled to obtain undisturbed samples for
consolidation testing in the strata below bridge piled foundations. The boreholes shall be of
adequate diameter to obtain undisturbed samples with diameter of at least 100mm.
Sampling method in firm to stiff clays shall be thin walled open tube sampler advanced
using the hydraulic drive mechanism on the drill rig (ASTM D 1587), or by a piston sampler.
If the material is too hard to penetrate with the thin walled push-tube sampler, a triple-tube
core barrel sample shall be used. Sampling method in other materials shall be as proposed by
the Contractor to the Engineer’s approval.
Consolidation testing of firm to stiff clays to determine its pre-consolidation pressure shall
be carried out in accordance with ASTM D4186 Standard Test Method for
One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Saturated Cohesive Soils Using
Controlled-Strain Loading. Each consolidation test shall be accompanied by classification
testing on the soil.
3.4.2 BORING LOGS
The Contractor shall supply drilling logs to the Engineer on the working day following
completion of each boring.
The drilling logs shall be compiled by an experienced soils technician or engineer.
All boring logs shall contain, but not be limited to, the following information and data:

 Structure name
 Bore position and code number
 Reduced level of top of the bore
 Date and time of boring
 Diameter of bore
 Type of plant used
 Depth to which bore was cased
 Depth to base of each stratum from the surface
 Description of strata
 Depth and results of standard penetration testing tests (if required)
 Depth of any split-spoon sampling (if required)
 Static water level
 Remarks
All descriptions and classifications of soils shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487
Classification of Soils for Engineering Purpose (Unified Soil Classification System)
The Engineer may require additional testing to that described above for any location should
he find that the information obtained by the Contractor is not adequate to confirm the soil
parameters used in the design.

Soil investigation borings (general) shall be measured for payment by the drilled depth of
bore holes in metres regardless of the nature of encountered materials. Quantities of
sampling and testing shall not be measured separately for payment.
Soil investigation boring to investigate consolidation characteristics of firm to stiff clays in
the strata below bridge piled foundations shall be measured and paid by the drilled depth of
bore holes in meters regardless of the nature of encountered materials.
Whilst drilling of boreholes to examine conditions relating to the permanent works will be
measured for payment, drilling of boreholes required by the Contractor for his temporary
works design shall not be measured for payment.
Payment shall be made in accordance with the applicable unit prices of the pay items of the
Bill of Quantities listed below.
Payment for Soil investigation borings (general) shall be full compensation for all
mobilization and demobilization of drilling personal and equipment, drilling, casing (if
necessary), sampling, sample preparation, particle size distribution testing, Atterberg Limits,
standard penetration tests, other tests as required by the Engineer, recording and presenting
the results and storage of samples until their disposal is approved by the Engineer.
Payment for Soil Investigation Boring with undisturbed sampling at least 100mm diameter
samples, and constant rate of strain consolidation testing shall be full compensation for all
mobilization and demobilization of drilling personal and equipment, drilling, casing (if
necessary), undisturbed sampling, sample preparation, CRS consolidation testing,
classification testing, other tests as required by the Engineer, recording and presenting the
results and storage of samples until their disposal is approved by the Engineer.
07250-01 Soil Investigation Borings (general) m
07250-02 Standard Penetration Test (SPT) at pile tip level in a bored pile hole
each
07250-03 Soil Investigation Boring with undisturbed sampling at least 100mm
diameter samples, and constant rate of strain consolidation testing m

SECTION 07300 - BORED PILE
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this Specification Section consists of the construction of Bored piles using
the reverse circulation drilling method, crab type hammers, and steel casing or any other
earth drill method approved by the Engineer, in accordance with this specification and in
conformity with the drawings or as may be required by the Engineer.
The work to be performed as specified in this Specification Section shall be carried out after
any required sub-soil investigations have been completed by the Contractor in accordance
with this specification, the drawings, or as may be required by the Engineer.
 ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel
 OCMA DFCP4 Drilling Fluid Materials Bentonite Oil Companies
Materials Association (OCMA)
 API S13A Specification for Oil Well Drilling Fluid Materials
(APIS: American Petroleum Institute Standard)
 22TCN272-05 Specification for Bridge Design
 TCVN 9393:2012 Piles - standard test method in situ for piles under axial
compressive load
 TCVN 9395:2012 Construction and Measurement of Bored Piles
 TCVN 9396-2012 Bored piles – Determination of identity of concrete –
Pulsed ultrasonic method;
 TCVN 9397-2012 Bored piles – Method of detection of defects by low
strain dynamic test.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR PILING
2.2.1 CONCRETE
Bored piles shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings using
the class of concrete noted on the drawings and in accordance with Specification - Concrete
and Concrete Structures
Concrete shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the applicable provisions of
Specification - Concrete and Concrete Structures
Reinforcement shall comply with the provisions of Specification - Reinforcing Steel
2.2.3 TEMPORARY CASINGS
Bored piles shall be excavated with a temporary steel casing through water and upper soil
layers which might otherwise collapse.
Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall have a uniform
cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be free from

internal projections and encrusted concrete which might prevent the proper formation of
piles.
2.2.4 PERMANENT CASINGS
Permanent casings shall be used as indicated on the drawings or where required by the
Engineer and shall conform to ASTM A36 or equivalent.
If the permanent casing is used in the boring operation or if the handling and transportation
require a greater thickness to avoid deformation or buckling, the thickness shall be increased
by the Contractor at his own expense.
Steel casings shall be furnished in appropriate lengths approved by the Engineer.
The casings shall be handled and stored in a manner that prevents buckling and other
deformation and the accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When placed in the work they shall
be free from dirt, oil, grease, paint, millscale and loose or thick rust.
2.2.5 BENTONITE AND BENTONITE SLURRY (DRILLING FLUID)
(a) Supply
Immediately prior to mixing Bentonite shall be in accordance with Specification DFCP4 of
the Oil Companies Materials Association (Drilling Fluid Materials Bentonite), or the
American Petroleum Institute Standard 13A.
(b) Mixing
Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension which will
maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and
complete construction.
Where chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions shall be taken to
modify the bentonite in all respects for the construction of piles.
2.2.6 PIPES FOR INTEGRITY TESTING
Pipes cast into the piles for the purpose of testing the pile integrity by Sonic Test and core
drilling at pile tip, shall be steel pipes with diameters, thicknesses, and steel grades as
detailed on the Drawings.
2.2.7 SUBMITTALS
Prior to commencement of the Works and to complement the investigation performed in
accordance with Specification - Boring for Pile Bearing Capacity, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer for his approval, a complete schedule for investigation of the site and
underground conditions in order to confirm the presence or absence of obstructions (e.g.
existing piles, sheet piles, remaining structures or structural elements, cables, etc.).
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, a method statement detailing
the proposed materials and methods of construction of bored piles using bentonite slurry or
other suitable materials. The method statement shall include but not be limited to the details.
* Details of construction plant to be used, including cranes, drills, augers, bailing buckets,
final cleaning equipment, desanding equipment, slurry pumps, sampling equipment, tremies
or concrete pumps, casings, etc.”.
* Method and sequence of pile installation, including methods of avoiding damage to
adjacent piles, utilities and structures, and method to clear the base of bored piles.
* Methods of controlling groundwater.
* Anticipated ground vibration, ground movement and groundwater drawdown and methods
of instrumentation and monitoring.

* Methods of Quality control, sampling, testing, mixing, storing, recalculation, removal of
silt and sand, prevention of spillage and disposal from the site.
* Proposals for the location and number of preliminary test piles (Pilot Piles) and proof load
test for permanent working piles.
*Arrangements for pile testing including vertical loading and pile integrity testing program
and method.
* Methods of concreting with methods of placing concrete by tremie.
* Particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction using bentonite slurry or
other agent.
* A certificate from the manufacturer of the bentonite powder showing the type, the
manufacturer’s name, the date and place of manufacture and including details of the
apparent viscosity range in centipoises and get strength range in N/mm2 for solids in water.
* Characteristics of the bentonite slurry in a freshly mixed condition and in the excavation
immediately before concreting.
* Head of bentonite slurry, including calculations.
* The number and location of piles to be Load Tested shall be reviewed by and subject to the
approval of the Engineer based on the Boring survey results by the Contractor.
2.2.8 PRELIMINARY TEST PILE (NON-WORKING PILE)
“Preliminary Test Pile” (non-working pile) will be installed and tested prior to the
commencement of permanent working pile as specified on the Drawings in order to confirm
the appropriateness of design, material, manufacture and construction.
a) Preliminary test piles for bored pile shall be bored prior to the permanent
working piles and in numbers and locations subject to approval by the Engineer
and based on conditions on site.
b) Each preliminary test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be
used for the construction of the working piles, and by the use of similar
equipment and materials.
c) The head of static test piles must be higher than the surrounding surface by 20 -
30cm, and provided with a steel casing thickness 5- 6mm, length 1m to prevent
damage during the test. During load testing if damage to the pile or failure is
caused by the Contractor’s construction errors, the Contractor will bear all
related remedial costs.
d) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for acceptance, a full method
statement of ultimate load test by static method using kentledge, tension pile,
Osterberg cell or equivalent, or ground anchor system describing the testing
equipment and procedure at least 28 days prior to the commencement of
construction of any preliminary test pile.
e) Maximum test load for ultimate load test shall be the lesser of three (3) times the
design working load shown in the Drawing and failure load (defined as a
settlement of 10% of the pile diameter).
f) To permit correlation with the results of static and dynamic test results,
following completion of a static load test, a dynamic load test shall also be
carried out. Payment for the dynamic test shall be made separately.
g) Report on test result shall be prepared in accordance with sub-clause 3.6.7 “Test
Result”

3.1 BORING
3.1.1 BORING NEAR RECENTLY CAST PILES
Piles shall not be bored so close to piles which have recently been cast and which contain
workable or unset concrete such that a flow of concrete could be induced from or damage
caused to any of the piles.
3.1.2 STABILITY OF PILE EXCAVATION USING DRILLING FLUID
Where the use of drilling fluid is approved for maintaining the stability of a bore, the level of
the fluid in the excavation shall be maintained so that the fluid pressure always exceeds the
pressures exerted by the soils and external groundwater or at not less than 1m above the level
of the external groundwater. An adequate temporary casing may be required in conjunction
with the method to ensure stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has been
placed.
In the event of a rapid loss of bentonite suspension from the pile excavation, the excavation
shall be backfilled without delay and the instructions of the Engineer shall be obtained
before excavation at that location is resumed.
The bentonite slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water, and adequate time
shall be allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry
tanks shall be provided. No excavated slurry pits shall be allowed when slurry tanks are
required on the project without written permission of the Engineer. Adequate desanding
equipment shall be provided. Steps shall be taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from
"setting up" in the shaft excavation, such as, agitation, circulation, and adjusting the
properties of the slurry.
3.1.3 SPILLAGE AND DISPOSAL
All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent spillage of bentonite suspension at the site and
in areas outside the immediate vicinity of bore. Disposal of material from pile excavation
and waste bentonite shall be in accordance with the Contractor’s approved environmental
management plan.
3.1.4 PUMPING FROM BORED HOLES
Pumping from a bored hole will not be permitted unless a casing has been placed into a
stable stratum which prevents the flow of a significant quantity of water from other strata
into the bore, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect on the
surrounding soil or adjacent property.
3.1.5 CLEANLINESS OF PILE BASES
On completion of boring, loose, disturbed or remoulded soil shall be removed from the base
of the pile, using appropriate and approved methods, which may include airlifting, and
which shall be designed to clean while at the same time minimizing ground disturbance
below the pile base.
3.1.6 INSPECTION
For a boring without casing, the diameter of the boring hole for a representative number of
piles will be measured by calipers prior to the placing of concrete into it. The Contractor’s
Quality Control personnel shall do the measurement using approved equipment.
The Contractor shall provide an approved means by which inspection of the verticality of
bored piles and reinforcement cages can be performed.

3.2 FINAL PILE TOE LEVEL
Where indicated on the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer proposed pile toe levels
shall be confirmed by site investigation boreholes (prebores) located at or near pile positions.
Boreholes shall be in accordance with requirements and procedures of Specification - Soil
Investigation Borings and/or as required by the Engineer. Where so required, prebore results
shall be submitted to the Engineer, at least one month in advance of the piling work, to
confirm the design of the piles.
During pile boring, the Contractor shall produce a boring log indicating approximate depths
and types of the various earth layers found in the bore. Based on the existing conditions of
boring, the Engineer might require the Contractor to provide disturbed samples for visual
analysis.
Excavations required for shafts shall be performed through whatever materials are
encountered, to the dimensions and elevations in the Contract Documents or ordered by the
Engineer. The methods and equipment used shall be suitable for the intended purpose and
materials encountered. The first pile in a group of a pile cap shall be constructed to
demonstrate the suitability of construction methods.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if, during the installation of piles, the
ground conditions are different from those indicated on the drawings or observed in the
prebore.
The Engineer will confirm the final pile toe level after his inspection of the earth layers
penetrated by the pile.
The Contractor shall prepare for carrying out sampling and tests to check bottom soils and
excavation geometry.
3.3 REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with the sizes and dimensions shown
on the drawings, and shall be placed, centered and braced in the pile hole to the approval of
the Engineer.
Particular care shall be taken in locating projecting "column dowel bars", with a tolerance
not exceeding 10 mm in any direction, and pouring will not be permitted until the Engineer
is satisfied that adequate provisions have been made.
Adequate "shoes" or spacers shall be firmly anchored to the reinforcement to ensure that the
reinforcement is kept centered in the concrete.
The Contractor shall include in his construction method for pile construction submitted to
the Engineer for his approval, the working drawings and details related to the placing of the
reinforcement cage, splicing procedures, measures and equipment to prevent damage to the
bored hole and maintain the stability of the bore while the cage is being placed and
procedures to control the verticality and consistency of the cage during placing operations.
3.4 CONCRETING
Immediately after the activities for boring excavation, placement of reinforcement cage and
cleaning of the borehole have been completed, the Contractor shall request the Engineer’s
approval for the commencement of concreting.
Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no accumulation of
silt or other material at the base of the bore.
Once the Engineer’s approval for the commencement of concreting has been obtained,
concreting shall start without delay and continue without interruption. In a boring which
contains water or drilling fluid the concrete shall be placed by tremie.
Concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.

During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete due to
pumping and dewatering operations.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall
extend to around 20-30cm from the base of the pile and a sliding plug or barrier shall be
placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete and the water.
The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete that has previously been placed and shall
not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting. At all times a sufficient
quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the concrete pressure
exceeds the water pressure. The tremie pipe shall be kept at least 2.0m but never more than
5.0m. under the concrete level. The internal diameter of the tremie pipe shall not be less than
150mm for concrete made with 20mm aggregate and not less than 200 mm for concrete
made with 40mm aggregate. It shall be so designed that external projections are minimized,
allowing the tremie to pass through reinforcing cages without causing damage. The internal
face of the pipe of the tremie shall be free from projections.
During placement of concrete, the Contractor shall plot a graph indicating the relation
between volume of placed concrete and level of concrete surface, and investigate any
deviations from the expected relationship. Measurement of the level of concrete surface
shall also be taken immediately before and after any vertical movement of the tremie pipe.
The Contractor shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which could
impair the free flow of concrete from the pipe of the tremie, has not accumulated in the
bottom of the hole.
A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the bore using an
approved sampling device. If the sand content exceeds 2% the placing of concrete shall not
proceed. In this event, the Contractor shall carry out desanding or replace with fresh
bentonite fluid to meet the specification.
3.5 EXTRACTION OF CASING
3.5.1 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently
workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. Should a semi-dry mix be used the means
of ensuring that the semi-dry concrete does not lift during extraction of the casing shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
3.5.2 CONCRETE LEVEL
When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained
within it to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is
neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
Concrete shall be placed continuously as the casing is extracted until the desired concrete
level is obtained. The pile shall be cast to an over-height approved by the Engineer to allow
for cutting back to the required level to ensure sound, uncontaminated concrete in the head
of the pile. No concrete shall be placed in the bore once the bottom of the casing has been
lifted above the top of the concrete.
Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess hydraulic heads could occur as
the casing is withdrawn due to the displacement of water by the concrete as it flows into its
final position against the walls of the shaft.
The use of vibrating casing extractors shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.5.3 WATER LEVEL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval suitable proposals for dealing
with groundwater levels higher than the required pile head casting level shown on the

drawings prior to placing concrete. The pile head shall not be left below the groundwater
level unless approved precautions are taken.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL OF PILING
3.6.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall comply with his approved Quality Assurance Plan.
3.6.2 TESTING OF MATERIALS FOR DRILLING FLUID
Prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall propose the method and
procedure of sampling and the frequency of testing drilling fluid based on the referenced
standards for drilling fluids. The frequency may subsequently be varied depending on the
consistency of the results obtained.
Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension using suitable apparatus. The
density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on the
quality of the suspension being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to
within 0.01g/ml. Bentonite supplied to the pile bore shall be tested to determine density,
viscosity, shear strength and pH values. For average soil conditions the results shall
generally be within the ranges stated in the table in this specification clause. The tests shall
be continued until a consistent working pattern has been established, account being taken of
the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension and previously used
bentonite suspension and any process which may be used to remove impurities from
previously used bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent behaviour, the tests
for shear strength and pH value may be discontinued, and tests to determine density and
viscosity shall be carried out as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the method proposed for the
sampling and checking of contaminated bentonite and for the cleaning of the base of the bore.
In the event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength and pH
value shall be reintroduced for a period if required.
Property to be Requirement Test method

measured
1. Density 1.05 – 1.15 g/cm3 Mud density balance
(ASTMD4380)
2. Viscosity 18-45 seconds Marsh cone (ASTM D6910)
3. Sand content <6% Sand content set (ASTM
D4381)
4. Proportion of colloidal >95% Measuring beaker
material
5. Fluid loss < 30ml / 30 min Filtrate or fluid loss test
6. Thickness of clay layer 1 -3 mm in 30 minutes Filtrate or fluid loss test
7. Shear strength (gel 1 minute 2-3 N/m2 Fann viscometer
strength) 10 minute 5-10 N/m2
8. Stability < 0.03 g/cm2
9. pH 7-9 pH indicator strips or electrical
pH meter
 Where the Fann viscometer is used, the fluid sample should be screened by a # 52 sieve (300
micrometer) prior to testing.
3.6.3 PILING
The Contractor shall designate a competent and experienced technician to be in charge of the
piling operations at the site and to be responsible for the quality control of the work
including, but not limited to, the following:
a) Ensuring proper storage and handling of all the materials for pile fabrication.

b) Ensuring proper maintenance and cleanliness of plant (including that for
bentonite preparation), cranes, trucks, and other equipment.
c) Work in close coordination with Contractor’s staff responsible for quality
control under other specification sections.
d) Continuous monitoring of the quality of bentonite and other materials used for
piling.
e) Proper preparation of the work before, during and after concrete pouring.
f) Proper preparation and performance for piles including the preliminary test piles
as stated in this Specification.
g) Proper preparation and timely submittal of the data and reports specified in
clause 3.8 of this Specification.
h) Preparation of working drawings, details, equipment related to the measures to
prevent, or to correct, defective piles or to be carried out in the event that a
borehole collapses during or before concreting work.
3.6.4 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES
The number of piles to be tested to determine their integrity shall be as stated on the
drawings. Testing shall be by Sonic Test and Core Test as required by the Engineer.
For the purpose of testing the pile integrity by Sonic Test and core drilling at pile tip, all
bored piles shall be constructed with steel pipes cast in place of the diameters, thicknesses,
and grades as detailed on the Drawings.
All the following requirements shall be satisfied:
a) The Contractor shall submit a complete plan of testing describing the
methodology and equipment to be used for testing.
b) The length of steel tubing shall extend to the limits indicated on the drawings.
c) All tubing shall extend to at least 30 mm above the top of any permanent or
temporary pile casing.
d) The bottom of the tube shall be permanently sealed
e) The top of the tube shall be provided with a screw type plug, to prevent the
intrusion of foreign materials into the tube.
f) Tubes shall be placed continuously straight from the bottom to the top so as to
allow later introduction of sonic coring and core drilling apparatus.
g) During placement, the tubes shall be kept free of all foreign materials.
h) The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective work necessary if testing
and/or coring cannot be accomplished because of improper placement and/or the
presence of obstructions in the tubing.
i) When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall fill all tubes with an
expansive grout, acceptable to the Engineer, which is capable of displacing any
water in the tubes. The grout shall be continuously injected into the tubes from
the bottom of the tube to the top.
3.6.5 CROSS HOLE SONIC LOGGING
Cross hole sonic logging shall be carried out promptly after pile construction, within 5 to 10
days of casting.

Testing shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm, from whom a full method
statement shall be obtained and approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of testing.
One hundred percent (100%) of piles shall be tested, between all pairs of tubes.
The interpretation of the results shall be carried out by competent persons and an indication
of the result of all testing shall be passed to the Engineer immediately on completion of all
tests. A full written report shall be provided directly to the Engineer within 10 days of the
completion of the test.
When large energy and velocity reductions are observed, consideration may be given to
retesting once concrete has gained strength.
If cross hole sonic logging results indicate possible defects in the upper 10D of the pile
where D is the diameter, the Engineer may require coring from the top of the pile to obtain
samples in the area of the possible defect and compressive strength testing.
If cross hole sonic logging results indicate possible defects in the pile base, the Engineer may
require coring through the base of the access tube and compressive strength testing of
concrete samples. The Engineer will consider the cross hole sonic logging results, the
condition of the concrete as shown by core samples, results of testing on the core samples,
and other information when determining the acceptability of the pile. Construction of
substructures or structures above a pile shall not proceed until the Engineer has accepted the
pile.
If examination of the cored concrete confirms the presence of a defect in the pile, payment
will not be made for coring, testing on the core samples, or excavation costs, even if the
drilled shaft is accepted.
If the Engineer determines a pile is not acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a plan for
remedial action to the Engineer for acceptance.
Upon completion of ultrasonic cross hole logging and acceptance of the pile, the access
tubes shall be grouted by a neat cement grout with a maximum w/c ratio of 0.45.
3.6.6 STATIC LOAD TEST ON WORKING PILES
The contractor shall submit his proposal for conducting a load test by static load method
using kentledge, tension pile, Osterberg cell or equivalent, or ground anchor system in
accordance with ASTM D1143 “Test Method for Piles under Static Axial Compressive
Load” with minimum vertical load equivalent to 1.5 times of design working load (design
working load is the load which the pile is designed to carry) to the Engineer for this approval.
Application of the standard TCVN 9393:2012 as an alternative is also permitted.
The head of static test piles must be higher than the surrounding surface by 20 - 30cm, and
provided with a steel casing thickness 5- 6mm, length 1m to prevent damage during the test.
During load testing if damage to the pile or failure is caused by the Contractor’s construction
errors, the Contractor will bear all related remedial costs.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer the test load shall be applied in the following
sequence:
a) Apply an initial load of 5% required pile – working load.
b) Remove the initial load and set recording instruments to zero.
c) Increase load to the required pile-working load, as shown on the Drawings, by
four equal increments.
d) Deflection shall be read just after each load increment or decrement is applied
and at 15 minutes intervals thereafter. The next increment or decrement shall not
be applied until the rate of settlement has decreased to 0.05 cm/hour and the load
has been sustained for at least one hour.

e) The pile-working load shall be maintained for at least 12 hours.
f) Reduce load to zero by similar equal decrements.
g) Increase load to 1.5 times the required pile-working load by six equal increments
and maintain at this load for at least 24 hours.
h) Reduce load to zero by similar equal decrements.
i) When directed by the Engineer, a third test cycle shall be carried out as follows:
Increase load to 2.0 times the required pile working loads by eight equal
increments and maintain at this load for 12 hours or as directed by the Engineer.
j) For acceptance, the total pile top displacement under 1.5 times pile working load
and after its subsequent removal shall not exceed the following values:
Loaded; 1.50% of the pile diameter
Unloaded; 0.75% of the pile diameter
k) Instrumentation shall be installed as directed by the Engineer and readings taken
at each increment, all in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
procedures.
3.6.7 TEST RESULTS ON PRELIMINARY TEST PILE AND WORKING PILE
The Contractors shall submit within 48 hours of the completion of the pile test to the
Engineer for each pile tested a detailed record of testing and, in addition, graphs showing:
 Load and pile top displacement plotted above and below a common base line of time
for static load tests.
 Pile top displacement plotted vertically against a base line of load for static load
tests.
 Top pile displacement Vs mobilized static resistance plot as assessed from dynamic
load test using CAPWAP – Method.
 Cross hole sonic logging test results
A full comprehensive written report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 10 working
days for approval.
After the completion of loading tests, all equipment and load used shall be removed from the
site.
If the results of the load tests on “Working piles” shall be considered as not having complied
with the criteria specified or required a further pile shall be tested. If this second pile test also
does not comply with specifications or requirements, the Engineer shall order changes to the
pile group as he considers necessary. New pile or piles shall be installed to replace the
defective pile in a position or positions as instructed by the Engineer.
3.6.8 CORING AND CONCRETE TESTING AT PILE BASE
Coring of the concrete at the base of piles shall be carried out via the access tube for selected
piles to at least 600 mm below the base of the pile. The core samples obtained shall be placed
in core boxes and the drill-hole identification shall be clearly marked on each respective core
and box. The core sample shall be examined to determine the condition of the concrete at the
pile base, and the nature of the material at the pile / soil interface, and a log prepared with
material and strength / density description in accordance with TCVN 5747:1995
“Engineering Soil – Classification”
Compression test for cored concrete samples shall be conducted for three (03) samples per
pile.

In case possible defects are indicated by cross hole sonic testing, further coring and concrete
testing may be requested by the Engineer. No additional payment and extension of time for
completion shall be granted due to the additional coring and concrete testing at pile bases.
Upon satisfactory completion of tests, all voids formed by core drills shall be grouted.
3.7 POSITIONAL TOLERANCE
The positional tolerances for cast in-situ piles shall be as follows:-
a) The centre of the completed pile at the cut off level shall not deviate more than
80mm from the theoretically correct position shown on the Drawings.
b) The inclination of the pile shall not deviate more than 1:75 from the required
vertical alignment.
c) After completion of all piling work and prior to casting the pile top into the pile
cap or foundation, the top of the reinforcement cage shall be no more than 150
mm above and no more than 75 mm below the correct position and the top of the
concrete shall be within 25 mm of the correct elevation.
d) The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis of the pile within
60 mm per meter of pile diameter
e) Where a casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less than the shaft
diameter shown on the Drawings. The diameter of cast in-situ piles shall be at
least 97% of the specified diameter
3.8 REPORTING
3.8.1 DAILY PILING RECORDS
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a detailed daily record of soils encountered
during excavation and construction of the piles.
The Contractor shall keep records of the installation of each pile and shall submit two signed
copies of these records to the Engineer not later than 24 hours after the pile was installed.
The signed records shall be as indicated in the following table.
Table 1 Records of Pile Borings
(a) Contract Name and Date
(b) Pile reference number (location)
(c) Pile type
(d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
(e) Nominal diameter of under-ream
(f) Length of performed pile
(g) Standing groundwater level
(h) Date and time of boring
(i) Date of concreting
(j) Ground level at commencement
(k) Working level
(l) Depth from working level to pile toe
(m) Toe level
(n) Depth from working level to pile head level
(o) Length of temporary casing
(p) Length of permanent casing
(q) Vertical of borehole
(r) Set of pile or pile tube in mm per 10 blows or number of blows per 25 mm of
penetration
(s) Soil samples taken and in-place tests carried out
(t) Length and details of reinforcement
(u) Concrete mix
(v) Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in practice and
corresponding levels of concrete and casing
(w) All information regarding obstructions, delays and other interruptions in the
sequence of work
(x) Strength of corresponding concrete cylinders
(y) If grouting done, mix and quantity of grout used.

Testing frequencies shall be accordance with Vietnamese Standard: TCVN 9395:2012 or
22TCN 257-2000 or other international standard subject equivalence being demonstrated by
the Contractor and the satisfaction of the Engineer of the Vietnamese standard shall apply:
Item Test Description Test Frequency Remarks
1 TCVN 9395:2012 or 22TCN 257-2000 : Bored Pile - Code of Construction and
Acceptance Procedure
A Material testing & preparation work before
Bentonite liquid : Article 11.2 Table 1
Cement concrete for bore piles : Article 11.5
B During construction period:
Boreholes checking : Article 11.3 Table 2; Table 3
Reinforcement grid tolerance : Article 11.4 Table 4
Cement concrete for bore piles : Article 11.5 Table 5
C After construction period: (For acceptance of
construction works)
Loading testing for bore plies : Article 11.6 (static
load, & PDA)

Bored piles shall be measured for payment by linear meters of piles cast and left in place in
the completed and accepted work. Measurement shall be made from the bottom of the pile to
the bottom of the foundation (the lower plane as defined for structural excavation) indicated
on the Drawings. Portions of piles cast deeper than required through over-excavation
procedures shall not be measured for payment.
Preliminary piles shall be measured by number of piles constructed and load tested.
Static load tests on working piles shall be measured by number of piles tested.
Coring and concrete testing of pile bases shall be measured by number of piles tested.
Cross hole sonic logging shall be measured by number of section (pair of tubes) tested.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including, but not
necessarily limited to, the following:
4.2.1 BORED PILES
Payment shall be considered to be full compensation for all costs involved with:
 excavation, disposal of excavated material, and the furnishing and placing of
concrete and reinforcing steel, integrity testing tubing, and the breaking down of pile
heads, including all labour, materials, equipment, and all other costs relevant to
construction of cast-in-situ piles, and if required the remedial expense.

 providing barges and other vessels required for working over water, guide frames,
piling platforms, temporary casing, pumps, cofferdams, braced sheet piling or any
other methods approved by the Engineer;
 provision and disposal of support fluid including storage and desanding equipment
 coring and investigation of suspected defects
 grouting of integrity testing tubes and core holes
 all expenses resulting from the Contractor's observance of all rules and regulations
of relevant competent authorities regarding the interference or maintenance of flow
in the canals, water courses, channels or pipes related to the Project
 provisions for underwater works;
 provision for pumps and dewatering by submersible pumps;
 Investigation and remedying of defects including coring, compressive strength
testing, grouting or construction of replacement / additional piles
 And for furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals
to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these
Specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer.
4.2.2 CASINGS
Permanent and temporary casing shall be considered incidental to the prices in the Bill of
Quantities and shall not be measured and paid separately.
4.2.3 PRELIMARY PILES
Payment shall be considered to be full compensation for construction of preliminary test
piles, provision and removal of test equipment, testing to failure, analysis and reporting of
results, and breaking down of pile heads if required.
4.2.4 STATIC LOAD TESTS
Payment shall be considered to be full compensation for preparation of pile heads for testing,
provision and removal of test equipment, load testing to the specified loads, and analysis and
reporting of results.
4.2.5 CORING AND CONCRETE TESTING OF PILE BASES
Payment shall be considered to be full compensation for coring through the base of the
access tube, coring through concrete and soil, taking samples, carrying out compressive
strength tests of samples, analysis and reporting of results.
4.2.6 CROSS HOLE SONIC LOGGING
Payment shall be considered to be full compensation for carrying out, analysing and
reporting of the results and recommendations by a specialist company.
07300-01 Bored Pile 1,000 mm diameter (on land) m
07300-02 Bored Pile 1,000 mm diameter (in water) m
07300-16 Preliminary pile including ultimate load test for Bored Pile
1,000mm diameter each

07300-21 Static Load Test on working pile (Dia. 1,000 mm pile) each
07300-26 Coring and concrete testing at pile base (per pile) each
07300-27 Cross hole sonic logging per section (pair of tubes) each

SECTION 07350 - PILE DYNAMIC TESTING
1. DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, and labour necessary for
conducting high-strain dynamic tests on driven and cast-in-place piles. The Contractor shall
appoint an Independent Specialist to conduct all testing and shall supply materials,
equipment and labour as specified, for work prior to, during, and after the tests all to the
approval of the Engineer. Testing procedures shall conform to ASTM D4945-89 unless
noted otherwise. The shaft used for the test will be instrumented and tested by the
Independent Specialist, as approved by the Engineer, meeting requirements outlined in the
ASTM D4945-89 specification as well as those outlined below.
2. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall supply all labour, materials and equipment required to prepare and
dynamically load the test pile, and return the pile to a condition suitable for use in the
finished structure. The Contractor’s equipment and methods shall include but not be limited
to:
 The extension of the pile top if a permanent casing has not been used to construct the
pile. The extension shall be formed of a thin walled casing or equivalent and shall be
at least equal to two and a half (2 ½) pile diameters such that the extended pile head
can be readily accessed by the testing engineer at the time of the test. If the pile top is
below grade, the Contractor shall remove the surrounding soil to expose the pile top
in a safe working environment.
 A flat, level, and sound concrete top to the pile perpendicular to the vertical axis of
the pile. The top of the concrete should be level with or above the casing. Prior to the
test, four “windows” approximately 150mm. by 150mm. shall be provided in each
quadrant of the casing.
 A drop weight in the range of one and half to two percent (1.5% to 2%) of the
anticipated pile capacity to be approved by the Engineer.
 A guide allowing variable drop heights typically between 2 to 3m to be approved by
the Engineer.
 A shaft top cushion consisting of new sheets of plywood with total thickness
between 50mm. and 150mm. to be approved by the Engineer.
 A steel striker plate at least 50mm. thick and an area between 70% and 90% of the
area of the pile top, but not less than the area of the impacting surface of the drop
weight, shall be placed on top of the plywood cushion.
 Where reinforcement protrudes above the top of the pile the Contractor may:
a) Incorporate the reinforcement into the test area in the manner of a pile extension.
Upon successful completion of the dynamic test the extension can be removed to
make the pile suitable for use in the structure.
b) Ensure at least 20% of the pile cross sectional area is available for sufficient
length such that the ram impact will not interfere with the reinforcing bars. In
such case steel striker plates and plywood cushions must be sized so that they
cover as much as the impact area as possible.
 AC Power.

 Surveyor’s level, laser light or equivalent for measurement of pile set under each
impact.
3. SPECIALIST
Testing is to be performed by an accredited Specialist from a firm with a minimum of four
(4) year experience in dynamic load testing. The actual test shall be conducted and/or
supervised by a practicing Geotechnical Engineer with at least five (5) years of dynamic
testing experience. The firm selected by the Contractor must be approved by the Engineer.
The Specialist must supply the following testing instrumentation in addition to
instrumentation outlined in ASTM specification D4945-89 Section 5:
a) Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA)
b) Calibrated Strain Transducers
c) Calibrated Accelerometer
4. REPORTING RESULTS
The Specialist shall promptly submit a report of the testing results to the Engineer for
approval. The field results from at least one (CAPWAP) analysis (case Pile Wave Analysis
Program) shall be submitted. The CAPWAP analysis shall be performed by an experienced
and qualified Engineer. The report shall also provide the following:
a) Wave Equation analysis results obtained prior to testing
b) CAPWAP analysis result.
c) For each impact the maximum measured force, maximum calculated tension
force, transferred energy to the gauge location, corresponding stresses, and the
Case Method bearing capacity.
d) Assessment of the test result with respect to both pile capacity and integrity.
5. METHOD OF PAYMENT
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of bored piles tested and accepted. Any item
indicated and not otherwise described hereto shall be considered subsidiary to the work item
and shall not be paid for separately.
6. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made for each test together with the relevant report accepted by the
Engineer at the contract price shown below. The payment shall constitute full compensation
for the cost of Pile Dynamic Testing, the cost of appointing an Independent Specialist, all
instrumentation, testing and testing equipment, analysis and reporting, tools, labour and all
other incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:
07350-01 Pile Dynamic Test for Precast Concrete Pile each
07350-02 Pile Dynamic Test for Bored Pile (Dia. 1,000mm) each

SECTION 07400 - STEEL PIPE PILES - NOT USED

SECTION 07450 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the construction of pre-stressed concrete structures and pre-stressed
concrete portions of composite structures in conformity with the design, lines, grades, and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as may be established by the Engineer in accordance
with this and other relevant specifications.
The work shall include the supply and installation of any items necessary for the particular
pre-stressing system to be used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies and
grout used for pressure grouting ducts.
It shall include the manufacture, transportation, and storage of beams, slabs, and other
structural members of pre-cast concrete pre-stressed by either pre tensioning or
post-tensioning methods. It shall also include the installation of all pre-cast pre-stressed
members.
AASHTO M235 Epoxy Resin Adhesives
22TCN 272-05 Specification standard for Bridge design
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Deflection Criteria for Girders, Section
2.5.2.6.2.
ASTM A421-91 Un-coated Stress Relieved Steel Wire for Pre-stressed Concrete;
ASTM A416-99 Steel Strand, Un-coated Seven Wire Stress Relieved Strand for
Pre-stressed Concrete.
ASTM A722M-07 Uncoated High Strength Bars for Pre-stressing Concrete
22TCN 247-98 Construction and Inspection of pre-stressed RC bridge girder
TCVN 9114:2012 Product of pre-prestressed concrete – Technical specification and
acceptance
2.2 MATERIAL FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
2.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
All materials to be furnished and used, but not covered in this specification, shall conform to
the requirements stipulated in other applicable specifications.
2.2.2 PRESTRESSING STEEL
High tensile strength steel wire shall be stress relieved and shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM A421-91 or equivalent for Un-coated Stress Relieved Steel Wire for Pre-stressed
Concrete
High tensile steel strand with low-relaxation shall be weld free and stress relieved after
stranding and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A416-99, EN 10138 or equivalent
Steel Strand, Un-coated Seven Wire Stress Relieved Strand for Pre-stressed Concrete.
ASTM A416-99 EN 10138
Nominal diameter (mm) 12.7 15.2 15.7 (super)
Cross sectional area (mm2) 98.7 140 150
Nominal weight (kg/m) 0.775 1.10 1.17
Tensile strength (MPa) 1,860 1,860 1,860
Minimum characteristic breaking load (kN) 183.7 260.7 279.0
Elastic modulus (GPa) 195
Maximum relaxation at 0.7 Rm (20°C) at 1,000 h 2.5
(%)
High strength steel bars shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM A722M or equivalent
for Uncoated High Strength Bars for Pre-stressing Concrete.
Testing of pre-stressing reinforcement shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
ASTM Specifications for the type of system intended to be used or subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Table 1 Stress Limits for Prestressing Tendons
Condition Tendon Type
Stress-Relieved Strand Low Relaxation Deformed
and Plain Strand High-Strength Bars
High-Strength Bars
Pretensioning
Immediately prior to 0.70 fpu 0.75 fpu -
transfer (fpt + ΔfpES)
At service limit state 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy
after all losses (fpe)
Posttensioning
Prior to seating – short 0.90 fpy 0.90 fpy 0.90 fpy
term fs may be allowed
At anchorages and 0.70 fpu 0.70 fpu 0.70 fpu
couplers immediately
after anchor set (fpt +
ΔfpES + ΔfpA)
At end of the seating 0.70 fpu 0.74 fpu 0.70 fpu
loss zone immediately
after anchor set (fpt +
ΔfpES + ΔfpA)
At service limit state 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy
after losses (fpe)
fpu – Specified tensile strength of pre-stressing steel (MPa)
fpy – Yield strength of pre-stressing steel (MPa)
2.2.3 ANCHORAGES FOR POST TENSIONING
All anchorage assemblies shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
All post-tensioned pre-stressing steel shall be secured at the ends by means of approved
permanent type anchoring devices. The Contractor shall submit information and details,
including test certifications for by the Engineer.
End anchorage devices (stress and dead anchors) shall be designed and manufactured for the
types of tendons to be used. They shall have a previous service record of performance and
durability when used on similar type work.
All anchorage devices for post-tensioning shall be capable of holding the pre-stressing steel
at a load producing a stress of not less than 95 percent of the guaranteed minimum tensile
strength of the pre-stressing steel.
Fixed anchorages for tendons in pre-cast beams shall be of steel bearing plate type while all
remaining anchorages shall be those capable of adjustment by means of a threaded anchor
head and ring nut.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm the required bursting
reinforcements in the local zone for the particular shape and design of the anchorage devices
proposed.
All externally exposed steel parts shall be protected from corrosion. All threaded parts and
fittings shall be protected by greased wrappings or plugs until used. Anchorages shall be
kept free from dirt, mortar, loose rust or other deleterious materials. Damaged anchorage
parts shall not be used.
2.2.4 DUCTS (SHEATH)
Ducting for internal tendons shall be fully compatible with the proposed pre-stressing
system. The ducts shall be fabricated from corrugated galvanized sheet steel or semi-rigid
conduit.
Minimum duct thickness shall be as follows:
* 26 gauge for duct diameter less than or equal to 67 mm
* 24 gauge for duct diameter greater than 67 mm
* 31 gauge for bar tendons
Ducts shall have grouting connections at each end and shall have vent/drains at all
intermediate high and low points, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.5 GROUT FOR DUCTS
Unless otherwise specified in other prevailing sections or subject to approval by the
Engineer as a result of grouting trials, the grout shall:
a) Consist only of ordinary Portland cement, water and expansive admixtures
approved by the Engineer and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions;
b) Have a water to cement ratio as low as possible consistent with the necessary
workability, and under no circumstances shall the water/cement ratio exceed
0.40;
c) not contain admixtures containing chlorides, nitrates or similar electrolytic
conducting materials.
Premixed grouting material shall be used.
The grout shall conform to the following Standard ASTM Tests:
Property Test Value Test Method
Total Chloride Ions Max. 0.08% by weight of ASTM C 1152
Cementitious material
Fine Aggregate (If utilized) Max. Size: No. 50 Sieve (300 ASTM C 33
micron)
Volume Change at 24 hours 0.0% to + 0.3% ASTM C 1090
and 28 days
Expansion 2.0% for up to 3 hours ASTM C 940
Compressive Strength at 28 45 MPa ASTM C 942
days (Average of 3 cubes)
Initial set of the grout 3 hours minimum ASTM C 953
12 hours maximum
Bleeding at 3 hours Maximum 0.0 % ASTM C 940
Permeability at 28 days Maximum 2500 coulombs at 30 ASTM C 1202
Volts for 6 hours
Fluidity test
Efflux Time from Flow Cone ASTM Method
(a) Immediately after 20 Seconds Minimum ASTM C 939
mixing 30 Seconds Maximum
(b) 30 minutes after mixing 30 Seconds Maximum ASTM C939
with remixing for 30
seconds
The Contractor shall perform the following tests and report the results to the Engineer:
(1) One pressure bleed test per day per lot.

(2) Two mud balance tests per day or when there is a visual or apparent change in the
characteristics of the grout.
(3) Minimum of one strength test per day per lot in accordance with ASTM C942.
(4) Minimum of two fluidity tests (flow cone) – one at the mixer and one at the duct
outlet. The efflux time shall be between 11 and 30 seconds.
2.2.6 CONCRETE
Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the drawings and shall conform to the
requirements of Specification - Concrete and Concrete Structures and the requirements
specified below unless otherwise stated on the drawings or as may be required by the
Engineer.
The maximum size of aggregate for use in the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete shall be
25 millimetres.
The main properties of concrete such as compressive strength after 28 days, Modulus of
Elasticity (Young Modulus), and other properties that were used for the detailed design shall
be confirmed by testing of samples of the approved mix design. The Contractor shall
perform the tests in accordance with the appropriate standards, or as may be required by the
Engineer.
2.2.7 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare, check and submit detailed Contractor’s Drawings and
Schedules together with calculations to the Engineer for his review and approval well before
superstructure construction is programmed to start. Details and design shall be checked by a
properly qualified engineer who shall confirm the adequacy and safety of the proposed
details by certifying and stamping the designs and drawings. Expenses incurred in
connection with this certification shall be borne by the Contractor. Concrete shall not be cast
prior to the Engineer’s approval of these requirements.
The Contractor’s submittals shall include where required, but not limited to, the following:
 Geometry Control Plan
Detailed procedures and methods for controlling the geometry at every stage of construction.
 Temporary works
Temporary fixing/stabilizing method of the supports and closures during erection operations
Travelling forms, suspended false-work or scaffolding, girder erection gantries
Form-work and false-work
Dimensions and complete descriptions of all devices, joints, bearings, and anchorages not
specified or detailed in the Specifications
 Pre-stressing
Method and timing of the insertion of pre-stressing cables.
Post-tensioning or Pre-tensioning hardware, jointing, jacking, grouting equipment, and men
and materials of any kind
Vertical alignment and deflection control measures with calculations of pre-camber by
pre-stressing forces, loads, temperature range and effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete
 Grouting
Statement for grouting of ducts
 Casting and curing
Detailed Casting Manual describing all the activities in a step-by-step procedure
Methods of controlling of deflection to ensure the accuracy of alignment of the completed
superstructure
 Segmental Construction
Structural verification for each step in the construction procedure.
Shop drawings showing each step in the construction procedure.
Joint processing
 Anchorage Zone
Calculations and shop drawings for the reinforcing details.
 Erection of members
Equipment for all machinery, devices, labour and material which are to be used for erection
Methods of tie-down and closure of superstructures during erection
 Cross Beam: Installation and pre-stressing methods of cross beam
 Deck Slab:
Fabrication and Installation methods of Concrete Form Works
Installation methods of Cast in Situ Slab on the Concrete Form Works
3.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall assign an experienced technician, skilled in the use of pre-stressing
system, who shall supervise the work being performed in compliance with these
specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for construction and pre-stressing. The
equipment shall be of a currently manufactured model, and shall be in good working
condition. A pre-stressing system approved by the Engineer shall be used. If hydraulic jacks
are used they shall be equipped with accurate pressure gauges. The combination of jack and
gauge shall be calibrated and a graph or table showing the calibration shall be provided to the
Engineer. Should other types of jacks be used, calibrated proving rings or other devices shall
be furnished so that the jacking forces may be accurately known.
The requirements for concrete construction in Specification - Concrete and Concrete
Structures shall be complied with, except as may be modified in this specification.
Pre-stressed concrete shall be formed, stressed, placed, cured, and protected at shops,
manufacturing plants, and locations where the fabrication of such members may be properly
inspected and controlled and approved by the Engineer.
Vertical alignment and girder lengths shown on the drawings represent dimensions at the
time of final creep. Deflection criteria for girders shall be in accordance with 22 TCN 272-05,
longitudinal deflections may be rectified by an appropriate approved method.
3.2 SAMPLING AND TESTING
3.2.1 GROUTING TRIALS
Where full scale trials are required they shall begin at least 21 days before the planned
commencement of the fixing of ducts for pre-stressing in the permanent works unless
otherwise specified in the Contract.

The trials shall incorporate all relevant details of ducts, vents, duct supports, pre-stressing
anchorages and couplers, pre-stressing strands and grout inlets and outlets. Tendons shall be
sufficiently tensioned such that the strands within the duct take up a representative alignment.
All systems, methods and materials shall be those proposed for the permanent works and
shall have been submitted to the Engineer as part of the Contractor’s detailed method
statement.
Grouting shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Sub-section 3.6.2 of
this specification, and the following information shall be recorded:
* fluidity of the grouting using a flow cone;
* results of bleeding tests;
* compressive strength of the grout;
* temperature of the grout at the point of injection;
* shade temperature;
* grouting pressure close to the point of injection;
* type of any admixture and results of control tests carried out by the manufacturer to
demonstrate its properties including those at appropriate hydration temperatures; and
* results of a visual inspection for detection of leakage.
The arrangement of ducting, end plates injection and outlet connections shown on the
drawings shall be rigidly supported and an actual or simulated bar tendon inserted but not
stressed.
After the grout strength has reached 17 MPa, at least three samples, each one of 1 meter long,
shall be cut from the grouted duct at the locations chosen by the Engineer. Each of the
samples shall be sectioned longitudinally by cutting with a high speed abrasive cutting wheel,
friction saw or similar. The sectioned samples shall be delivered to the Engineer, who will
assess the acceptability of the grouting trials particularly in respect of the presence and
location of any voids in the samples.
If the presence and location of voids are deemed to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall
amend the properties of the grout and/or grouting procedures and carry out further trials,
until an acceptable result is obtained.
Before commencing grouting trials the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of the
proposed ducting, method of support and calculations substantiating that the ducting and any
surrounding supporting material will withstand the grouting pressure used during the trials.
3.2.2 TESTING OF PRE-CAST PRE-STRESSED MEMBERS
Where required by the Engineer, one or more beams may be subjected to a loading test. The
Contractor shall obtain the prior approval of the Engineer for the detailed arrangements for
testing. The cost of tests and records shall be included in the unit prices.
3.3 PLACING STEEL
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown on the drawings and
rigidly held in place during placing and setting of the concrete. Distance from the forms shall
be maintained by stays, formwork spacers, ties, hangers, or other approved support.
Formwork spacers for holding units from contact with the forms shall be of approved
material, shape and dimensions. Layers of reinforcement shall be separated by suitable wire
spacers. Wooden blocks shall not be used.
3.4 PRETENSIONING METHOD
The pre-stressing elements shall be accurately held in position and stressed by jacks.
Stressing shall be applied to produce the stresses required in the wires, strands or bars
immediately after the anchorage as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Suitable allowances shall be made for friction in the jacks and for slip and yield in the grips
or anchorages.

Curing shall be by steam methods as described in clause 3.9.2, or other methods subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
A record shall be kept of the jacking forces and the elongations produced and the minimum
age in hours of the concrete for each unit until the time the tendons were released.
No bond stress shall be transferred to the concrete, nor shall end anchors be released, until
the concrete has attainted a compressive strength of not less than 85% of the specified
28-day strength as shown by standard specimens cured in a similar fashion to the element.
The elements shall be cut or released in such an order that eccentricity of pre-stress is
minimized subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.5 POST-TENSIONING METHOD
Post-tensioning shall be carried out in accordance with an approved method, with an
approved control method, and in the presence of the Engineer unless permission has been
obtained to the contrary.
Immediately before tensioning, the Contractor shall prove that all tendons are free to move
in the ducts.
Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of action of the corresponding
post-tensioning tendon and shall be securely fixed in position and gradient to prevent
movement during the placing and compaction of concrete.
Except where dead-end anchorages are cast in the concrete, tendons shall not be installed
until just prior to stressing. Tendons shall be pulled or pushed through the duct in such a
manner as to avoid damage to either the tendon or the duct.
Unless approved otherwise, concrete shall not be stressed until 2 test cylinders taken from it
have attained a compressive strength of not less than 80% of the specified 28-day strength as
shown by standard specimens cured in a similar fashion to the element unless specifically
noted otherwise on the drawings. The test cylinders shall be cured in conditions similar to
the concrete to which they relate in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Where members consist of jointed elements, the strength of transfer of the jointing material
shall be at least equivalent to the specified strength of the members.
The Contractor shall establish the datum point for measuring extension and jack pressure to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Allowance shall be made for the friction in the jack and
anchorage for pull-in of the tendon during anchorage.
The tendons shall be stressed at a gradual and steady rate until the required extension and
tendon load are reached or are approved by the Engineer. The sequence of stressing shall be
as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
The force in the tendons shall be obtained from readings on a load cell or pressure gauge
incorporated in the equipment and the extension of the tendons measured. The extension of
the tendons under the approved total forces shall be within the limits given below of the
agreed calculated extension.
Transverse Tendons for Segments: ±10% average for one tendon
± 7% for average of one segment
Longitudinal Tendons for Segments ± 5%
All other Tendons ± 5%
If the measured extensions are not within the specified tolerance then the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer his method of rectifying the discrepancy.
When the pre-stressing force has been applied to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the tendons
shall be anchored. The force exerted by the tensioning apparatus shall then be decreased
gradually and steadily so as to avoid shock to the tendon or anchorage.

Full records shall be kept of all tensioning operations including measured extensions,
pressure gauge or load cell readings and draw-in at anchorage. Copies of records shall be
supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning operation.
A check shall be made of pre-camber and if significantly different to the calculated value,
the Contractor must investigate before construction of further girders.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, tendons shall not be cut less than 2 days after
stressing.
3.6 GROUTING
3.6.1 PLANT FOR GROUTING
The grout mixer shall produce a grout of colloidal consistency. The grout injector shall be
capable of continuous operation with a sensibly constant pressure up to 0.70-N/mm2 and
shall include a system of circulating or agitating the grout whilst actual grouting is not in
progress. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with 1.18 mm sieve strainers.
The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted ducts and
shall be fitted with a nozzle that can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.
The pressure gauges shall be calibrated before they are first used in the Works, and thereafter
as required by the Engineer. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed with
clean water at least once every 3 hours during the grouting operations and at the end of use
for each day.
During the grouting operation, the Contractor shall provide adequate flushing-out plant to
facilitate complete removal of the grout in the event of a breakdown of the grouting
equipment or other disruption before the grouting operation has been completed.
3.6.2 GROUTING OF DUCTS AND SHEATHING
Grouting trials shall be undertaken when directed by the Engineer. Prior to using the grout in
any trial or in the works the Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for grouting
procedures covering proposed materials, sheathing, anchorage and vent alignment
equipment, and quality control to the Engineer for his approval.
All ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned out by means of flushing with water and/or
water/compressed air.
Grouting of ducts shall be carried out within 72 hours after the tendons inside the ducts have
been stressed, and the Engineer’s permission to commence grouting has been obtained. If
due to the requirements of the stressing procedure or practical reasons, tendons cannot be
grouted within this time the sheathing shall be sealed to protect the tendons from corrosion.
Injection shall be continuous and slow enough to avoid producing segregation of the grout.
The method of injecting grout shall ensure complete filling of the ducts and complete
surrounding of the steel. Grout shall be allowed to flow from the free end of the duct until its
consistency is equivalent to that of the grout injected. The opening shall then be firmly
closed. Any air vents shall be closed in a similar manner one after the other in the direction
of flow. The injection tubes shall then be sealed off under pressure until the grout has set.
The filled ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 1 day of grouting. Not less
than 2 days after grouting the level of grout in the injection and vent tubes shall be inspected
and made good as necessary.
The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date when each duct was
grouted, the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure, details of any
interruptions and topping up required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the
Engineer within 3 days of completing grouting.

3.7 PROTECTION OF PRESTRESSING ANCHORAGES
As soon as possible after tensioning and grouting are completed, exposed end anchorages,
strands and other metal accessories shall be cleaned of rust, misplaced mortar, grout and
other such materials.
Immediately following the cleaning operation the entire surface of the anchorage recess and
all exposed metal shall be thoroughly dried and uniformly coated with an epoxy bonding
agent conforming to AASHTO M235 Class III in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The anchorage recess shall then be filled with an approved non-shrinkage mortar. The
mortar shall not contain aluminium powder, iron particles, chlorides, sulphates, fluorides or
nitrates.
Where the protection will form part of the exposed works, the anchorage recess shall be
filled with concrete of the same quality and colour as that of the adjacent concrete and shall
be applied and cured in accordance with these specifications or as may be required by the
Engineer.
Exposed surfaces of anchorages not in an anchorage recess shall be coated for corrosion
protection with a coal tar epoxy or equivalent as approved by the Engineer. Prior to coating,
all surfaces shall be wire brushed to remove all loose rust, mill scale or other deleterious
substances, and the surfaces cleaned with a suitable solvent to remove oil and grease.
3.8 SUPERSTRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
This work consists of the setting of temporary bearings if applicable, pre-cast girders in
fabrication yard, cast-in-place segmental construction and post-tensioning at site, and setting
of the superstructure on permanent bearings.
The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule showing in chronological order every
phase and stage of erection and construction of the superstructure.
Construction joints will be limited to the locations shown on the drawings.
Surfaces of the girder joints shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of
Specification - Concrete and Concrete Structures immediately prior to the placement of
concrete for joint construction.
For placement of closure concrete between girders, the girders shall be fixed to prevent
rotation or movement of one girder relative to the other. The system for locking the girders
and forming for the closure and the procedure for placing the concrete for the closure shall
be such that the concrete after the initial set shall not be subjected to tension which could
cause cracking.
The Contractor shall prepare a table of elevations and alignments required at each stage of
erection as detailed on the drawings, at the points listed below or alternate points of his
choosing for submission to the Engineer.
* One of the lowest corners at the top surface of any temporary bearing pads to be used as
datum during erection and to establish a reference point with the actual elevations and
alignment required of the permanently positioned superstructure.
* All corners and centre line of the top slab of pier to establish grade and crown.
* Two points on the longitudinal centre line of each pier cross section, one on each edge, to
establish alignment.
* One point on the longitudinal centre line and, at least, one corner of each girder along every
joint between girders to establish elevations and alignment at every stage of erection.
The temporary bearing pads at the piers, if required shall be carefully placed. The top
surfaces of these pads shall have the correct elevations, alignments and slopes as required in
the drawings. Shims may be used underneath the pads to accomplish accuracy. The

Contractor shall also devise and provide measures to hold temporary bearing pads in
position while the pier segment is being cast.
The Contractor shall check the elevations and alignment of the structure at every stage of
construction in accordance with his approved setting out procedures and shall maintain a
record of all these checks and of all adjustments and corrections made.
3.9 CURING
3.9.1 GENERAL
Except as specified herein or otherwise approved, wet (water) curing shall be provided in
compliance with the requirements in Specification - Concrete and Concrete Structures. If the
Contractor elects to cure by any other method, the method and details shall be subject to the
3.9.2 STEAM CURING
A steam curing process complying with the following conditions may be used as an
alternative of water curing, if proposed by the Contractor and subsequently approved by the
Engineer.
a) The casting bed for any unit cured with steam shall be completely enclosed to
prevent steam from escaping and exclude the outside atmosphere.
b) Two to four hours after placing concrete and after the concrete has undergone
initial set, the first application of steam shall be made. If retarding admixtures
have been used, the duration before application of the steam shall be increased to
four to six hours.
c) Water curing methods shall be used from the time the concrete is placed until
steam is first applied.
d) The steam shall have a relative humidity of 100% to prevent loss of moisture and
to provide moisture for proper hydration of the cement.
e) Steam shall not be directly applied to the concrete. During the application of the
steam, the ambient air temperature shall increase at a rate not exceeding 22°C
per hour until the maximum temperature is reached and shall be held until the
concrete has reached the desired strength.
f) In discontinuing the steam application, the ambient air temperature shall not
decrease at a rate exceeding 22°C per hour until the temperature has reached
10°C above the temperature of the air to which the concrete will be exposed.
g) The maximum curing temperature shall be from 60° to 67°C.
3.10 HANDLING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Pre-cast pre-stressed concrete shall not be moved from the casting position, or transported,
until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 90% of the specified 28-day
strength.
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving concrete members.
Pre-cast girders and slabs shall be transported in an upright position, shock shall be avoided
and the points of support and directions of the reactions with respect to the members shall be
approximately the same during transport and storage as when the members is in its final
position. If the Contractor deems it expedient to transport or store pre-cast pre-stressed units
in other positions than this, it shall be done at his own risk after notifying the Engineer of his
intention to do so. Any unit considered by the Engineer to have become substandard shall be
rejected and replaced by an acceptable unit at the Contractor’s expense.

3.11 MARKING OF PRECAST PRESTRESSED MEMBERS
Each pre-cast pre-stressed member shall be uniquely and permanently marked so as to show
its type and date of casting.
3.12 ERECTION OF PRE-CAST BEAMS
3.12.1 CONFIRMATION OF POSITION
Prior to the erection of the beams the Contractor shall survey the positions of the supporting
columns and confirm with the Engineer on the positions, both horizontal and vertical, of the
supports.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make all necessary adjustments to the bearing
seating and beam length to ensure that completed decks are true to line and level.
Any proposed deviation of beam length from that given in the drawings shall be agreed by
the Engineer before the beam is cast.
3.12.2 ERECTION
The Contractor shall submit a full method statement for his proposed methods for lifting and
placing beams in their permanent position. The method statement shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval within one month of the commencement date.
The statement shall particularly include but not be limited to the use of lifting and transfer
gantries supported on the new structure and particular locations. The statement shall include
full details of the equipment to be used to handle beams and to incorporate them into the
structure. The method statement shall be accompanied by full structural calculations and
appropriate workshop drawings for each stage of the procedure. The calculations shall be
appropriate for such temporary works and shall take into full consideration all temporary
loading cases arising from the procedures, the prevailing conditions at the site, in particular
likely wind loading, and the nature of the existing ground. The Contractor shall carry out all
additional soils investigation necessary to confirm his assumptions concerning the nature of
the existing ground. The calculations and drawings shall be certified and stamped by a
qualified structural engineer experienced in the preparation of such details.
The details shall include consideration of the effect of each stage of the procedure on the
completed permanent works on which the gantry is to be mounted and operated. The
procedures for lifting and transferring the beams into position and the order of erection of the
beams shall be such that the eccentricity of loading on the completed permanent works
(supporting piers and the foundations) is minimized.
When beams are being placed in position they shall be braced against overturning before
being released by the crane or other lifting devices.
Beams shall be prevented from moving laterally during the placing of in-situ concrete.
The lifting and placing of beams will not be permitted to commence until such time as the
Contractor’s method statement, calculations and shop drawings have been reviewed and
3.13 TOLERANCES FOR PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
The tolerances listed in Table 1 are the allowable deviations for pre-stressed concrete
structures. These tolerances will be included in assessments for the acceptance of work.
Table 1 Acceptance Tolerances of Pre-stressed concrete structures
 5 mm
Tolerance
 5 mm
Length
 10 mm
Center Location
 5 mm
Surface levels of Slab
Surface level of base of hand-railing

Width & Depth  10 mm
 5 mm
Compressive Strength Refer to subsection 07100
Surface Irregularity by 3m straight edge
Bowing
Testing frequencies shall be as follows:
1) PC Materials
Test Item Content Frequency By
- Breaking/yield strength,
Mechanical Properties Elongation, Elastic Modulus,
Relaxation - 01 set / 20 ton by
Prestressing
- Diameter mill's certificate,

Steel
As shown
- Helically placed outer wires - 01 set / 100 ton in
left
Dimensions & shall have uniform pitch of not Vietnam
Permissible Variations less than 12 and not more than - 01 set = 3 samples
16 times the nominal diameter
of the strand.
Wedge Plate Test
- - 01 set/delivery or
Requirements
Dimension
01set/1000 wedge
Independent
plates delivered at the
Laboratory
Surface - Site (whichever
in Vietnam
hardness lesser)
- 01 set = 3 samples
- 01 set/delivery or
- 01set/1000 wedges
Dimension
Wedge Performance Requirements
delivered at the Site

& Tolerance
(whichever lesser)
Minimum
Connections
specified
- Independent
surface
Laboratory
hardness
in Vietnam
Minimum
-
depth of
surface
hardness
Maximum
core -
hardness
- Under static forces, single
Strand-Wedge
Requirements
Performance
Connection
strand-wedge connection shall

Independent
hold 98% of the actual tensile One time for material
Static test Laboratory
strength of the type of strand, approval
in Vietnam
and reach 2% elongation prior
to rupture.
- Submission of mill's
- Diameter
Duct
sheet Site
Dimensions - Wall thickness
- 01 set/delivery/lot Inspector
- Visual check
Note: Low relaxation test on prestressing strand can be omitted if the manufacturer
submits the test results for the same low relaxation type of the same diameter of PC strand
for which the test was carried out within the past one year.
2) Grout
Test Item Trial Mixing Just Before Grout Injection

To be tested By Frequency By
Shrinkage - -
Compressive Strength @ 28 days
Twice per Girder On Site
(average of 3 cubes) Approved
Initial Set of Grout Yes Contractor's - -
Fluidity Test Laboratory Every Batch On Site
Temperature Measurement Every Batch On Site
Bleeding @ 3 hours - -

4.1.1 PRE STRESSED PRE-CAST MEMBERS
The quantity of pre-stressed pre-cast concrete members shall be measured for payment by
the number of pre-cast pre-stressed concrete structural members of each length or type
fabricated, hauled, erected and installed in place, completed and accepted. Each member
shall include the concrete, reinforcement and pre-stressing steel, inserts, boxouts and any
other material or incidental work contained in or attached to the above members.
4.1.2 CAST IN SITU, POST-TENSIONED MEMBERS
Cast in situ, Post-tensioned concrete members shall be measured for payment by the number
of cubic meters of concrete, the weight of reinforcing steel and the weight of tendons
respectively. For concrete, reference is made to Specification Section 07100 - Concrete and
Concrete Structures and for reinforcing steel reference is made to Specification Section
07500 - Reinforcing Steel.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this section, and for
furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the
work as shown on the Drawings, as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed by
the Engineer.
Payment for Tendons of Post Tensioning Members shall include the work of tensioning,
grouting, anchorages, ducts and all required testing for materials.
07450–01 Super T Girder type 1 (Lengths as shown in BOQ) each
etc.
07450–04 I Girder (L=33m) each
07450–05 PC Strand kg
07450–06 PC Steel Bar kg

SECTION 07500 - REINFORCING STEEL
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements and provisions for the supply, bending,
fabrication and placing of steel reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required in
accordance with the drawings as specified or as may be required by the Engineer.
TCVN 1651:2008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
AASHTO M31 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO T68 Distillation of Cut-Back Asphaltic (Bituminous)
Products
AASHTO M164M High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
AASHTO M232 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A82 Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A153 Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Reinforcement
ASTM A722M-07 Uncoated High Strength Bars for Pre-stressing Concrete
2.2 MATERIAL FOR REINFORCING STEEL
2.2.1 REINFORCING BARS
All reinforcing steel bars shall be deformed billet steel and shall meet the requirements of
TCVN 1651:2008. In case items are not covered by TCVN 1651:2008 then AASHTO
M31 (ASTM A615), Grade 60 or equivalent shall be used, except for plain round reinforcing
bars for which Grade 40 shall apply. Testing shall be in accordance with TCVN 1651:2008
with AASHTO T68 as the equivalent standard. Unit stress calculations for bars having an
area differing by 6 percent or more from the nominal bar area shall be made using the
measured bar area.
2.2.2 SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT STEEL
Spiral reinforcement steel shall comply with the requirements of TCVN 1651:2008 for spiral
reinforcement in reinforced concrete compression members.

2.2.3 SUBSTITUTION OF DIFFERENT SIZE
Substitution of bars of different size will be permitted only upon the specific approval of the
Engineer, and the substitute bars shall provide a steel area equal to or larger than that called
for in the drawings. The Contractor shall submit the details of the unit weight for each kind
and size of substitute bar for the purposes of Measurement and Payment.
Number-designated bars not equivalent in sectional area to bars with specified size in
millimeters may be substituted with bars having the closest designated number and sectional
area, and their spacing shall be adjusted to provide the same area per unit spacing.
Substitution of bars of which specified size in millimeters are not readily available from the
Contractor’s source may be made on the same basis. All bar substitutions shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.4 WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC
Welded steel wire fabric shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A185 and shall be as
indicated on the drawings. Welded fabric shall be placed as recommended by the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practices.
3.1 HANDLING AND PLACING REINFORCEMENT
All reinforcement steel shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury or
surface deterioration, from rusting or other causes from the time of shipment until it is placed.
Reinforcement steel stored at the site shall be laid on wood floors or pillows suitably spaced
so that no reinforcement steel shall be laid upon or come in contact with the ground. When
the weather is dry and the time for storage before installation is limited, housing may be
omitted, but if rainy or exceptionally humid weather occurs or is anticipated, bars shall be
stored under cover.
3.2 STEEL QUALITY AND SUPPLY
Representative samples of all reinforcement steel that the Contractor proposes to use in the
Works must be submitted together with the manufacturer’s certificates stating clearly for
each sample the place of manufacture, expected date and size of deliveries to the Site, and all
relevant details of composition, manufacture, strengths and other qualities of the steel before
work is commenced to the Engineer for his approval.
In the event a reinforcement steel sample under test fails to meet the specification
requirements at any time, or the Engineer considers that samples which were presented to
him for test were not truly representative, or if it becomes apparent that reinforcement steel
which has not been approved has been used on the Works, the Engineer may instruct the
Contractor to break out and remove completely all such sections of the work already
constructed using such suspect reinforcement steel.
All testing of reinforcement steel bars shall meet the requirements and specification limits of
the ASTM/AASHTO designation for the particular size, and grade of steel.
3.3 BAR LISTS AND BENDING DIAGRAMS
The Contractor shall provide detailed bar lists and bending diagrams to the Engineer for his
review and approval. Fabrication and bending of reinforcement shall not begin until such
lists have been approved. Any expense incidental to the revision of material furnished in
accordance with such lists and diagrams to make it comply with the design drawings shall be
borne by the Contractor.

3.4 FABRICATION
3.4.1 BENDING
Bar reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shapes shown on the Drawings. Fabrication
tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 315. All bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise
permitted. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as shown on the
drawings or as specifically permitted.
3.4.2 HOOKS AND BEND DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of hooks and the diameters of bends measured on the inside of the bar shall
be as shown on the drawings. When the dimensions of hooks or the diameter of bends are not
shown, they shall be in accordance with Division I, Article 8.23 of the AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges or ACI 318 Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
3.5 FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL
Reinforcement steel shall be assembled to the shapes and dimensions as indicated on the
drawings. The bars shall be of the cross-sectional areas indicated and shall be fixed rigidly
and accurately in the forms in the positions indicated on the drawings. The bars shall be
firmly bound together at intersections to ensure that the reinforcement framework as a whole
shall retain its shape, and the framework shall be so temporarily supported as to retain its
correct position in the forms during the process of depositing and consolidating the concrete.
The end of all tying wires shall be turned into the main body of the concrete and not allowed
to project towards the surface. Spacing blocks shall be of pre-cast concrete of strength at
least equal to that of concrete being placed. They shall be as small as practicable and shall be
securely fixed in position by means of wires cast into them. They shall be soaked with water
immediately prior to concreting.
No temporary metal supports to the reinforcement steel will be allowed to be incorporated in
the finished concrete, and metal clips or supports shall not be placed in contact with forms
for exposed surfaces. Use of plastic supports will not be allowed.
Clear cover for all reinforcement shall be as indicated on the drawings. Where no cover is
indicated it shall be 50mm or such other dimension approved by the Engineer.
At the time of concreting, all reinforcement steel shall have been thoroughly cleaned and
free of all loose rust, scale, mud, oil or any other coatings that might destroy or reduce the
concrete bond and it shall also have been cleaned of all set or partially set concrete which
may have been deposited during previous concreting operations.
The placing of all reinforcement steel bars shall be checked by the Engineer and in no case
shall concrete be placed around any reinforcement steel that has not been approved by the
Engineer. The insertion of bars into, or the removal of bars from concrete already placed,
will not be permitted. Reinforcement steel temporarily left projecting from the concrete at
the joints shall not be bent without the prior approval of the Engineer.
Dowels shall project a minimum of 40 bar diameters unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Metal supports which extend to the surface shall not be used. Placing bars on
layers of fresh concrete as the work progresses and adjusting bars during the placing of
concrete will not be permitted.
Main reinforcement steel carrying determinate stresses shall be spliced only where indicated
on the drawings or on approved Shop Drawings.
The minimum spacing centre to centre of parallel bars shall be 2.5 times the diameter of the
bar, but in no case shall the clear distance between the bars be less than 1.5 times the
maximum size of the coarse aggregate in the concrete.
Bundled reinforcement shall be tied together at a spacing not exceeding 1.80 meters.

3.6 SPLICING OF BARS
All reinforcement shall be furnished in full lengths as indicated on the drawings unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Except for splices shown on the drawings and splices
for 16mm or smaller bars, splicing of bars will not be permitted without the approval of the
Engineer. Splices shall be staggered as far as possible.
3.6.1 LAPPED SPLICES
Lapped splices shall be of the lengths shown on the drawings. If not shown on the Drawings,
the length of lapped splices shall be no less than 35 bar diameters. The bars in lapped splices
shall be placed and wired in such as manner as to maintain the minimum concrete cover and
the minimum spacing between the bars as detailed in this specification.
3.6.2 WELDED SPLICES
Welded splices shall be used only if specified on the drawings or if approved by the Engineer.
Where approved welding shall conform to the Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel,
AWS D1.4 of the American Welding Society and applicable special provisions. Welding of
reinforcement steel will be allowed if the chemical composition of the steel exceeds the
percentages shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Reinforcing Steel Components
Chemical Composition Percent
Carbon (C) 0.30
Manganese (MA) 1.50
Carbon Equivalent (C. E. ) 0.55
3.6.3 MECHANICAL COUPLER
Splices made with mechanical couplers shall be used only if detailed on the drawings or
previously approved by the Engineer in lieu of welding. Such couplers shall develop in
tension or compression as required, at least 125 percent of the specific yield strength of the
bar.
When requested by the Engineer, up to two field splices out of each 100, or portion thereof,
placed in the work and chosen at random by the Engineer, shall be removed by the
Contractor and tested to 125 percent of the specified yield strength.
3.7 SPLICING OF MESH OR MATS
Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall be spliced by overlapping sufficiently to
maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened at the ends and edges. The lap
shall not be less than one mesh in width plus 50 mm.
Testing frequencies shall be accordance with Vietnamese Standard: TCVN 1651-2008.
Item Test Frequency
1 Source approval - Chemical composition 2 samples / 50 ton lot or part thereof
(product analysis)
2 Source approval – Tensile strength, 15 – 60 samples / 50 ton lot or part thereof,
Rebend strength, Mass per metre and testing to determine characteristic values
3 Construction - Tensile strength, Rebend 1 test / 50 ton lot or part thereof
strength, Mass per metre

Reinforcing steel shall be measured for payment by weight for both deformed bars, plain
bars, based on the total computed weight for the sizes and lengths of bars as indicated in the
reinforcing schedules and as approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcing steel in precast items, or reinforcing steel in work items for which the
Specification states that the price and payment for the work item includes reinforcing steel
shall not be measured separately for payment.
Reinforcing Steel Bars shall be paid for in accordance with the applicable unit prices of the
pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for all
labour, materials, tools, equipment and appurtenances for the complete supply and
installation of all reinforcement steel bars.
No separate payment shall be made for clips, wires, separators, wire chairs, and other
material used in fastening the reinforcement in place. In the event that bars are substituted
upon the Contractor’s request and as a result more steel is used than specified, only the
amount specified shall be included in the quantity for payment.
No separate payment shall be made for the following: couplers, welding for welding splices,
clamps for clamped splices, or other mechanical connections.
When laps are made for splices for the convenience of the Contractor, in addition to those
indicated on the drawings the extra steel shall not be included for payment.
For computing the weight of reinforcement steel bars for payment, The Contractor shall be
comply with the Standard Unit Weight Table provided according with table 2 TCVN
1651-1: 2008 (for plain bar) & table 2 TCVN 1651-2:2008 (for ribbed bar)
Table 2 TCVN 1651-1:2008 (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – part 1: Plain
bar)
Title diameter Cross section area Theory quantity of 1m length
d,mm mm2, An
Requirement (kg/m) Tolerance (%)
6 28.3 0.222 ±8
8 50.3 0.395 ±8
10 78.5 0.617 ±6
12 113 0.888 ±6
14 154 1.21 ±5
16 201 1.58 ±5
18 254.5 2.00 ±5
20 314 2.47 ±5
22 380 2.98 ±5
25 490.9 3.85 ±4
28 615.8 4.83 ±4
32 804.2 6.31 ±4
36 1017.9 7.99 ±4
40 1256.6 9.86 ±4
An = 0.7854 x d2
Unit weight per length = 7.85 x 10-3 x An

Table 2 TCVN 1651-2:2008 (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – part 2: Ribbed
bar)
Title diameter Cross section area Theory quantity of 1m length
d,mm mm2, An
Requirement (kg/m) Tolerance (%)
6 28.3 0.222 ±8
8 50.3 0.395 ±8
10 78.5 0.617 ±6
12 113 0.888 ±6
14 154 1.21 ±5
16 201 1.58 ±5
18 254.5 2.00 ±5
20 314 2.47 ±5
22 380.1 2.98 ±5
25 491 3.85 ±4
28 616 4.84 ±4
32 804 6.31 ±4
36 1017.9 7.99 ±4
40 1257 9.86 ±4
50 1964 15.42 ±4
If diameter of Ribbed bar is greater than 50mm, it is recommended to have agreement between
Manufacturer and Purchaser, and tolerance allowable for each ribbed bar must be ±4%
An = 0.7854 x d2
Unit weight per length = 7.85 x 10-3 x An
07500-01 Reinforcing Steel ton

SECTION 07600 - STEEL STRUCTURES - NOT USED

SECTION 07650 - RAILINGS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing railings on bridges.
Railings constructed at each location shall conform to the type and details specified in the
Contract Documents for that location.
ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
1.3 CONSTRUCTION
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, railing shall not be placed until the centering or
falsework for the span has been released, rendering the span self-supporting.
1.4 LINE AND GRADE
The line and grade of the railing shall be true to that specified in the Contract Documents and
may include an allowance for camber in each span but shall not follow any unevenness in the
superstructure.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, railings on bridges, whether
super-elevated or not, shall be vertical.
2. METAL RAILING
2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
2.1.1 STEEL RAILING ON CABLE STAYED BRIDGE
The materials shall conform to the standards specified in the Table 1or equivalent.
Fabrication of steel railings shall conform to the applicable requirements of Specification for
Bridge Design 22TCN 272-05 and AWS D1.5-2002 “Bridge Welding Code”
Table1 Materials for Steel Railing
Member Material Standards
Cold-formed welded and

seamless carbon steel ASTM A500 Grade.B
Post, Horizontal beam, Top rail structural tubing or equivalent
f y ,min
( = 245 N/mm2)
f ASTM A36 or
Sleeves structural steel ( y ,min =
245 N/mm2) equivalent
M16, M18,M20
f t ,min ASTM A325
Bolts = 800 N/mm2
or equivalent
f y ,min
= 640 N/mm2
Note: Material for nuts shall be appropriate for the corresponding bolts.

2.1.2 STEEL RAILING ON PARAPETS (INTERCHANGE RAMPS)
Steel railing on parapets for interchange ramps shall be of the material types, grades,
dimensions, and with coatings as shown on the Drawings.
2.1.3 WELDING
All exposed welds shall be finished by grinding or filing to give a smooth surface.
2.2 INSTALLATION
Metal railings shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in place to ensure proper matching at
abutting joints, correct alignment, and camber throughout their length. Holes for field
connections shall be drilled with the railing in place on the structure at proper grade and
alignment.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Document, installation tolerance for railing
height shall be -10 to +20 mm.
All bolts and nuts shall be point welded to each other.
2.3 FINISH
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, bolts, nuts, and all steel portions of
railings shall be galvanized. Galvanizing of all steel material shall meet the requirements
shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Galvanizing of Rail Element
Member Symbol Minimum Coating Mass
(g/m2)
Bolt, Nut, Washer, Plate 1~2 mm thick HDZ 35 350

Plate 2~3 mm thick HDZ 40 400
Plate thicker than 6mm HDZ 55 550
Note: Damage to galvanized surfaces shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.

3.1 MEASUREMENT
Railings shall be measured by the linear meter between the ends of the railing or the outside
ends of end posts, whichever is greater. Measurement shall be made on the Drawings
without taking account of the slope of the railing and no deduction shall be made for small
openings called for in the Contract Documents.
3.2 PAYMENT
Railings shall be paid for by the contract prices per linear meter for the various types listed in
the Contract Documents. Such payment shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labour, materials, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all work involved in constructing
the railings or barriers complete in place, including the furnishing and installation of steel
dowels or anchor bolts which are either placed or drilled and bonded into the structure for
attachment of the railing.
The items of work payable under this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
07650-01 Metal Bridge Railing at Shoulder, Type 1 (Main Cable Stayed
Bridge) / Metal Bridge Railing at Side (Type A and C) m

07650-02 Metal Bridge Railing at Shoulder, Type 2 (Approach to Cable
Stayed Bridge) m
07650-03 Metal Bridge Railing at Median on Cable Stayed Bridge (Type B) m
07650-04 Railing on Parapet (Interchange Ramps) m

SECTION 07660 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL
1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing metal items in structures which are not
otherwise provided for.
The following miscellaneous metal works shall be carried out under the provision of this
section:
(a) Stairs, Ladder, Door and Access Hatch and Handrails
Stairs and ladders shall be installed inside the pylons as shown on the Drawings. Handrails
shall be installed on pylon crossbeam as shown in the Drawings. Access hatch shall be
provided at top of pylon and crossbeam. Ladders shall be installed at girder end to access to
the inspection way. All these facilities shall be fabricated with galvanized steel, stainless
steel, or aluminium shapes, bars and expanded metals as indicated on the Drawings.
(b) Inspection way, Platform for Electric Facilities, Cable Rack Support for
Electric and Communication Cables
Inspection way, platform for electric facilities, cable rack support for electric and
communication cables shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings. All the
elements of inspection way shall be fabricated with galvanized steel shapes, bars and
expanded metals.
(c) Miscellaneous Metal
Miscellaneous Metal shall include anchors for roadway lighting poles, tie-down cable fixing,
steel covers for inspection holes (including steel cover, fixture, fittings and all other
incidentals).
2. MATERIALS
Miscellaneous metal items shall be constructed of materials conforming to the following
AASHTO (or ASTM) material specifications or JIS equivalent:
Table 1 Materials
Materials Specifications
Steel bars, plates, and shapes ASTM A 36/A 36M, Grade 36 (Grade 250)
Bolts and nuts ASTM A 307
High-strength bolts, nuts, and washers AASHTO M 164 (AASHTO M164M) (ASTM A
325 (ASTM A 325M))
Steel castings As per Article 11.3.5, "Steel Castings"
Grey iron castings AASHTO M 105 or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30
Sheet metal Commercial quality
Expanded metal (with carbon steel) ASTM A569
Expanded metal (with stainless steel or Commercial quality
aluminium)
Steel tubes for piping ASTM A53(F)
Bronze Commercial quality
3. FABRICATION
Fabrication of miscellaneous metal items shall be performed in a manner in conformance
with the practice in modern commercial shops. Burrs, rough and sharp edges, and other
flaws shall be removed. Warped pieces shall be straightened after fabrication and
galvanizing.

4. GALVANIZING
Galvanizing shall in general conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-111 or JIS H 8641
Class 3-55C and JIS H 0401. Material thinner than 3.2 mm may be galvanized before
fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM A525. Galvanizing of iron and
steel hardware and nuts and bolts shall conform to the specifications of AASHTO M232 or
equivalent.
Except for pre-galvanized standard pipe, galvanizing of material 3.2 mm thick or thicker
shall be performed after fabrication into the largest practical sections.
All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to remove all slag or other
material that would interfere with the adherence of the zinc. When it is necessary to
straighten any sections after galvanizing, such work shall be performed without damage to
the zinc coating.
Galvanizing surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the
zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and removing
all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with three
applications of zinc anticorrosive paint as approved by the Engineer.
Table 2 Galvanizing Specifications
Structures applied Members Specifications
Inspection Facilities Steel plate, Shape, Steel tube JIS H 8641 HDZ 55 or equivalent
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Stud JIS H 8641 HDZ 35 or equivalent
Shear Connectors
5. MEASUREMENT
Measurement of miscellaneous metal shall be by the scale weight (mass) except for the
following items:
 stairs, ladder, inspection ways, and handrails inside the pylons
 Manhole door to box girder
Measurement of stairs, ladder, inspection ways and handrails to the pylons is as a lump sum,
since these works are composed of various metal types including stainless and structural
steels, and aluminium.
Measurement of manhole doors to box girders shall be measured by each completed door.
When requested by the Engineer, each delivery shall be accompanied with a certified weigh
master's ticket. Scale weight (mass) is not required when calculated weight (mass) is shown
in the Contract Documents, in which case this weight (mass) shall be used as the basis of
payment.
Measurement shall include the weight of galvanized bolts for connections, but the weight of
galvanizing on the bolts is not included.
6. PAYMENT
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment,
and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in furnishing and installing
miscellaneous metal, complete in place, as specified in the Contract Documents, specified in
these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
07660-01 Inspection Way, Platform for Electric Facilities, Cable Rack
Support for Electric and Communication Cables (under bridge) kg
07660-02 Stair, Ladder, Handrail, Door, and Access Hatch to Pylon lump sum
07660-03 Miscellaneous Metal kg
07660-04 Manhole Door to Box Girder each

SECTION 07680 - FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM (CABLE STAYED BRIDGE) -
NOT USED
SECTION 07700 - CABLE-STAYED BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED
SECTION 07720 - STAY CABLE - NOT USED
SECTION 07740 - WIND TUNNEL TEST - NOT USED

SECTION 07800 - BRIDGE BEARINGS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements and procedures for the supply and
installation of bridge bearing pads as indicated on the drawings, or as may be directed by the
Engineer.
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges and the following Standards in their
latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works covered by this Specification Section.
 AASHTO M183 Structural Steel
 ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel
 ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel
Products
 ASTM A570 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural
Quality
 ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
 ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
 ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
 ASTM D412 Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and
Thermoplastic Elastomer Tension
 ASTM D429 Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates
 ASTM D518 Standard Test Method for Rubber
Deterioration-Surface Cracking ASTM D573 Rubber -
Deterioration in an Air Oven
 ASTM D746 Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastometers
by Impact
 ASTM D1149 Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a
Chamber
 ASTM D2240 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
 ASTM D3182 Materials, Equipment, and Procedures for Mixing
Standard Compounds and Preparing Standard
Vulcanized Sheets
 ASTM D3183 Preparation of Pieces for Test Purposes from Products
 ASTM D3184 Evaluation of NR (Natural Rubber)
 ASTM D3185 Evaluation of SBR (Styrene-Butadiene Rubber)
Including Mixtures With Oil

 ASTM D3186 Rubber-Evaluation of SBR (Styrene-Butadiene
Rubber) Mixed With Carbon Black or Carbon Black
and Oil
 ASTM D3187 Evaluation of NBR (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene Rubber)
 ASTM D3188 Evaluation of IIR (Isobutene-Isoprene Rubber)
 ASTM D3189 Evaluation of Solution BR (Poly-butadiene Rubber)
 ASTM D3190 Evaluation of Chloroprene Rubber (CR)
 ASTM D3192 Carbon Black Evaluation in NR (Natural Rubber)
 ASTM D3192 Carbon Black Evaluation in NR (Natural Rubber)
 ASTM D4014 Plain and Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearings for
Bridges
2.2 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the following to the Engineer for his approval. The
Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer before beginning fabrication of the
bearings.
a) Certification by the manufacturer that the elastomer in the elastomeric bearing
pads to be provided conforms to all of the requirements indicated in these
Specifications. The certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the
results of tests performed by the manufacturer upon samples of the elastomer to
be used in the pads.
b) Certification by the manufacturer that the bearing devices to be provided have
been widely applied in other projects, listing the project name, country and
bearing codes and properties.
c) Drawings for the bearings prepared according to Section 18 of the AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges Division II, Volume II, or
equivalent method approved by the Engineer. The drawings shall show all
details of the bearings including the material proposed for use and confirmation
that the proposed bearings have been designed to comply with the loading
requirements detailed in the drawings.
d) Shop drawings and calculations demonstrating the compliance of all bearings
with the schedule shown on the drawings.
e) Detailed statement describing the procedures for packaging, handling and
storage of the bearing devices to be used for the Project.
f) Detailed schedule for all the required testing of materials or bearing devices to
be used for the Project.
g) Detailed statement of the method for construction and installation of the bearing
devices to be used for the Project.
h) Once the Engineer has approved these methods, they shall not be changed
without prior approval by the Engineer.
3. ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
3.1 GENERAL
Elastomeric bearings shall consist of laminated elastomeric pads or assemblies of laminated
elastomeric pads as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

Variation in thickness of an individual elastomer lamination shall not exceed 3 mm within
the width or length of a bearing pad and the variation in thickness of all elastomer
laminations within a bearing pad shall be such that each metal or fabric lamination will not
vary by more than 3 mm from a plane parallel to the top or bottom surface of the bearing pad.
The total out to out thickness of a bearing pad shall not be less than the thickness indicated
on the Drawings nor more than 6 mm greater than that thickness. Variation of total thickness
within an individual bearing pad shall not exceed 3 mm.
The length and width of a bearing pad shall not vary more than 3 mm from the dimensions
indicated on the Drawings.
The bond between the elastomer and the steel laminate shall be such that, when a sample is
tested for separation, failure shall occur within the elastomer and not between the elastomer
and the steel.
3.2 MATERIALS
All materials used in the manufacture of the bearing assemblies shall be new and unused
with no reclaimed material incorporated into the finished assembly. All bonding of
components shall be done under heat and pressure during the vulcanizing process. The bond
shall be continuous throughout the plan area with no air spaces greater than 0.25 mm within
the bonding material. The bearing assemblies shall be furnished as complete units from one
manufacturing source.
The materials for the elastomeric bearings and assemblies shall comply with the following
requirements:
3.2.1 ELASTOMERIC MATERIALS
The elastomic materials of the compounds shall be 100% virgin polychloroprene synthetic
rubber meeting the requirements of Table.1. The properties of the elastomeric compounds
shall be determined from test specimens complying with ASTM D3182 through D3190
inclusive and D3192. A variation of ± 10% in tensile strength and ultimate elongation under
“physical properties” will be permitted when test specimens are cut from the finished
product.
3.2.2 INTERNAL STEEL LAMINATES
The internal steel laminates for the laminated elastomeric bearing pads shall be rolled carbon
steel sheets complying with ASTM A 570 or AASHTO N183 (ASTM A36).
3.2.3 LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS
Laminated elastomeric bearing pads shall be individually moulded to the required size.
Corners and edges may be rounded with a radius at the corners not exceeding 9 mm and a
radius at the edges not exceeding 6 mm. All edges of the steel laminations shall be covered
with not less than 4 mm and not more than 6 mm of elastomer. The characteristics of the
elastomeric bearing pads shall be within the following listed tolerances:
Table 1 Requirements of Elastomeric Bearing Pads
60  5
ASTM Standard Physical Properties Value
D2240 Hardness, ASTM D2240
D412 Tensile strength, min.kg/cm2 175
Ultimate elongation, min.% 425
Heat Resistance
Change in durometer hardness, max.points + 15
D573, 70 HR. Change in tensile strength, max. % - 15
@ 100°C Change in ultimate elongation, max. % - 40
Compressive Set
D395. 22 hours @ 100°C max. % 35
Method B

Ozone
ºC  1C, 100 hours mounting

D1149 100 pphm ozone in air by volume, 20% strain, 37.7 No
Cracks
Procedure D 518, Procedure A
Adhesion to Steel
Bond made during vulcanization 80% R(Z1)
D429, A Bond Strength (per square cm) 2.8kg
D429, B Peel Strength (per cm of width) 7 kg
Adhesion to TFE
Bond made during vulcanization
D429, B Peel Strength
Polychloroprene - Synthetic Rubber
ASTM Standard Physical Properties 60 Duro
Low Temperature Test-Durometer Change
@-28 °C, 2 °C. (The specimen shall have a 24 hr.

Bearing or sample to be exposed for 96 hrs.
conditioning period at room temperature prior to

low temperature exposure). The durometer test
shall be made at-28°C on an unbuffed surface.
Durometer hardness increase, Max. ASTM + 15(Z2)
D2240, 30 second reading. Durometer to be
placed in freezer with test specimen
D746 Brittleness temp., 3 min., at -40°C No cracks
Structural Steel. The internal steel laminates for
the laminated elastomeric bearings shall be rolled
mild steel sheets conforming to SAE 1020 or
AASHTO M183.
Laminated elastomeric bearings shall be
individually moulded to the required size. Corners
and edges may be rounded with a radius at the
corners not exceeding 9 mm and radius at the
edges not exceeding 6 mm. All edges of the steel
laminations shall be covered with not less than 3
mm and not more than 6 mm of elastomer. The
dimensions of the elastomeric bearings shall be
within the following listed tolerances:
Overall Vertical Rubber Dimension.

Average total rubber thickness 32 mm or less -0, +3 mm
Average total rubber thickness over 32 mm
-0, +6 mm
Overall Horizontal Rubber Dimension
90 cm or less 0, + 3 mm
Thickness of individual layers of elastomer (60 Durometer Only) 20%
Variation from a plane parallel to the theoretical surface per 300 mm tops 1.5 mm
sides 6 mm
Edge cover of embedded metallic laminate 4 mm min
6 mm max.
The rubber laminates shall be of uniform integral units, capable of being separated by
mechanical means into separate, well-defined elastomeric layers. The ultimate breakdown
limit of the elastomeric bearing under compressive loading shall be not less than 140
kgs/cm2. In addition to the requirements of Table No. 1, the stress-strain relationship of the
finished elastomeric bearings at room temperature shall not exceed the following
limitations.
Compression
Stress 35 kgs/sq.cm 56 kgs./sq.cm
Strain (Percent of total thickness of all 5% 7%

elastomer laminations
In addition, shear resistance of the bearing shall not exceed 2.1 kg/cm2 for 60 durometer,
Table 1 compounds at 25% strain of the total effective rubber thickness after an extended
four-day ambient temperature of -28°C.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer that the
elastomer, in the elastomeric bearing pads to be furnished conforms to all of the above
requirements. The certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the results of tests
performed by the manufacturer upon samples of the elastomer to be used in the pads.
3.2.4 ELASTOMERIC LAYER FOR DE-BONDED JOINTS ON VIADUCT
CONTINUOUS DECK SLAB
Elastomeric layer shall be smooth finish choloroprene rubber with minimum density
1.5g/cm3, and shore A hardness at least 40. Tolerance on plan dimension shall be +/-5mm
and tolerance on thickness shall be +/-1.5mm.
4. MECHANICAL BEARINGS
Mechanical Bearings shall be pot type bearings, pivot bearings or pin bearings as shown on
the Drawings. Pot bearing movement bearings will normally have sliding surfaces of
stainless steel and polytetrafluorethylene and may also have been fitted with guide bars or
keyways.
Bearings shall have surface protecting in accordance with requirements and procedures
noted under Specification section 07800.
4.1 MATERIALS
4.1.1 STEEL
All steel, other than stainless steel, used in the manufacture of the bearings shall conform to
ASTM A709. The stainless steel used in the manufacture of the sliding surface shall conform
to ASTM A 240 (Grade 304) and have a minimum thickness of 0.91 mm and a surface finish
in the finished bearing better than or equal to 0.20 micrometers, and the sliding surface in
contact with PTFE sheet shall be polished no less than 0.50 micrometers.
4.1.2 RUBBER PLATE AND SEAL RING
Rubber plate and compressive seal ring for pot bearings shall be Chloroprene Rubber with
material properties shall be as shown in the following Table.
Properties of Rubber Plate and Seal Ring
Item Unit Rubber Seal Ring Test
Plate Method
Shear Modulus Kgf/cm2 8±1.0 - ASTM
D412
Method A
Tensile Strength Kgf/cm2 - > 50 ASTM D
412 C
Elongation % > 400 > 200 ASTM D
412 C
Aging Test 25% elongation % -10 to +100 ASTM
(100ºC×70hr) stress change rate D573
Elongation change % - 50 max.
rate
Permanent compression deformation % 35 max - ASTM D
rate 395 B
(100ºC×20hr)

4.1.3 SLIDING PLATE
Sliding plate for pot bearings shall be PTFE with physical properties shall be as shown in the
following Table:
Properties of Sliding Plate
Items Specified Values Test Method and Applicable Standards
Sliding friction 0.03 – 0.1
Specific Gravity (25ºC) 2.10 to 2.40 ASTM D792
Tensile strength 14 N/mm2 ASTM D638 or ASTM D2256
Elongation > 90%
4.1.4 FINISHING
Surfaces of pot bearings exposed externally shall be finished by Al-Mg thermal spraying, Al
95% and Mg 5%, 150 micron thickness, with adhesion of 4.5 MPa. Prior to spraying,
blasting shall be used to give surface roughness prior to finishing Ra at least 8 micron and Rz
at least 50 micron in order to ensure adhesion. Evidence shall be provided of compliance of
the coated product with a cyclic neutral salt spray test to ASTM B117 for 6,000 hours (based
on 8 hour wetting / drying cycle) without unacceptable rust development on the specimen.
4.1.5 TAPERED STEEL FILLER PLATE
Tapered steel filler plate for pot bearing installation shall be steel plate to ASTM A36 cut to
the required dimensions with dimensional tolerance of +/- 1mm on thickness, +/- 2mm on
width and length, and flatness of cut edges to 2mm, hot dip galvanised.
4.2 FABRICATION TOLERANCE
Fabrication tolerance for components of pot bearing shall be in accordance with the
following Table:
Fabrication Tolerances for Pot Bearing Assembly Dimensions
Items Tolerances Remarks
Connection bolt Hole diameter +0.2mm to-0mm
hole – Distance between hole centers 1mm Deviation
Superstructure and 1000mm measured from
Substructure Distance between hole centers 1.5mm shear key
>1000mm
Anchor bolt hole Hole diameter 100mm +3.0mm to -1.0mm
T (main direction) > 100mm +4.0mm to -2.0mm
Distance between hole centers ± 2mm
Anchor bolt length ±2%
Shear key Diameter -1 to +0mm
Height 0 to +1mm
Top bearing lengths (longitudinal and transverse) ± 6mm
Assembly height Upper & lower surface finish ±3mm
(H) For concrete H 300mm ±3mm
structure H>300mm ±(H/200+3)mm in mm
Dimensions for Length ± 4mm
other components Thickness ± 7mm
Machining dimension ± 1.2 mm
Gas cutting dimension ± 3.5mm
4.3 PACKAGING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE OF MECHANICAL BEARINGS
Prior to shipment from the point of manufacture, bearings shall be packaged in such a
manner to ensure that during shipment and storage the bearings will be protected against
damage form handling, weather, or any normal hazard.

Each completed bearing shall have its components clearly identified, be securely bolted,
strapped or otherwise fastened to prevent any relative movement, and marked on its top as to
location and orientation in each structure in the project in conformity with the plans.
Dismantling at the site shall not be done unless absolutely necessary for inspection or
installation.
All bearing devices and components shall be stored at the work site in an area that provides
protection form environmental and physical damage.
When installed, bearings shall be clean and free of all foreign substances.
5. BEARING INSTALLATION
The bearings shall be clearly marked with their longitudinal and transverse axes, their type
number and their intended locations in the Works.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer bearing beds shall be of non-shrink grout
conforming to ASTM C1107, Grade A with compressive strength 50MPa, and should be
proposed by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer. Grout should have flow
characteristics such that the volume of the bed or plinth is completely filled with
homogeneous material when placed at the ambient temperatures, and having physical and
chemical properties compatible with the adjoining surfaces. Proposals for the thickness and
type of bearing plinths and beds shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer in advance of bearing installation.
Anchor bolts shall unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or otherwise approved by the
Engineer conform to ASTM F1554 Grade 55. Anchor bolts shall be either threaded full
length or equipped with a satisfactory mechanical end anchorage. Details for any mechanical
end anchorage shall be included in the shop plans submittal for prior approval. All nuts shall
be ASTM A563 Heavy Hex Grade DH.
Steel dowels shall be provided and installed in accordance with requirements and with
accessories noted on the drawings. Dowels shall be smooth plain billet-steel bars
conforming to requirements of ASTM A615, yield strength min 400 MPa and shall be zinc
(hot-dip galvanized) in accordance with ASTM A123. Dowels 32mm diameter or larger
shall be carbon steel grade 1035 (yield strength min 305 MPa, tensile strength min 510 MPa,
elongation min 23%, Brinell hardness 140 ≥ HB ≥ 200).
Rubber filler to dowel caps shall be natural rubber with shore hardness 53A ± 5 bonded to
the inner and outer sleeves. Dowel top caps shall comprise steel sleeves in carbon steel pipe
for high temperature service to ASTM A106 Grade B (yield strength min 240 MPa, tensile
strength min 415 MPa, elongation min 30% longitudinal, min 16.5% transverse). The
Contractor can propose alternative / equivalent materials or solutions for dowel bars and
fittings subject to approval by the Engineer.
Dowels may be cast-insitu as shown on the drawings or drilled and grouted with an approved
epoxy compound. If dowels are drilled and grouted:
 holes shall provide at least 10 mm in diameter greater than the largest diameter of the
dowel;
 holes shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air and water prior to grouting of
dowels so as to remove all loose or extraneous materials;
 the epoxy compound used shall be ASTM C881, Type IV or approved equivalent
and mixed and placed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
Bearings shall not be dismantled. Any transit bolts, straps or other temporary fixing shall not
be removed until the bearing is fixed in its final position and the structure immediately above

the bearing is in place. Care shall be taken to ensure that all transit bolts, straps or other
temporary fixings are finally removed.
All bearings shall be set horizontal in both directions and shall be positioned so that the
inscribed longitudinal axis is parallel to the structure axis at the point of support, unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings.
Any devices such as steel packs used to hold bearings level whilst being fixed, must be
removed so that the bearing seats only on its mortar bedding.
Where pre-cast beams and segments are placed on elastomeric bearings, immediately prior
to the placing of each beam and segment the top of the bearing shall be coated with a
sufficient thickness of approved mortar to take up any irregularities between the surface of
the beams and segment and the bearings.
The characteristics of all bearing shall be within the Manufacturer’s tolerances and to the
following tolerances:
Alignment, maximum departure from required vertical or horizontal plane:
Alignment, maximum departure from required vertical or horizontal plane:
Entire assembly 1:400
Lower part of bearing 1:1000 relative to upper
Plan position
Laterally 3mm
Longitudinally 6mm
Center/Center Spacing 3mm
6. TESTING OF BEARINGS
The testing of selected bearings shall be arranged with the Engineer prior to their inclusion
in the Works. The testing shall be done at an independent testing facility approved by the
Engineer.
6.1 MECHANICAL BEARING TESTS
6.1.1 VERTICAL PROOF LOAD TEST OF COMPLETE BEARING
The vertical proof load shall be 1.5 times the maximum vertical load specified in the bearing
schedule. The proof load shall be maintained for a minimum period of three minutes.
6.1.2 HORIZONTAL PROOF LOAD TEST OF COMPLETE BEARING
Bearings, which are required to resist lateral forces, shall be further tested to 1.5 times the
lateral load stated on the Drawings while loaded in compression to the minimum vertical
load shown on the Drawings. The load shall be maintained for three minutes.
6.1.3 ROTATION TEST OF COMPLETE BEARING
The bearings shall be tested in rotation to the value for rotation shown on the Drawings while
being loaded in compression to the maximum vertical load shown on the Drawings.
Bearings, which are required to resist lateral forces, shall also have the specified lateral load
stated on the Drawings applied during this test.
The direction of application of the lateral load and the axis of rotation shall be compatible
with the in-service loads and rotational requirements. The lateral load shall be applied using
a calibrated sliding surface to minimize any frictional restraint. All PTFE and stainless steel
interfaces shall be lubricated prior to the test. The test loads shall be maintained for three
minutes.

6.2 ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
6.2.1 LONG-DURATION COMPRESSION TESTS ON BEARINGS
Selected bearings shall be loaded in compression to 1.5 times their maximum design load for
a minimum period of 15 hours. If, during the test, the load falls below 1.3 times the
maximum design load, the test duration shall be extended by the period of time for which the
load is below this limit. The bearing shall be examined visually at the end of the test while it
is still under load. If the bulging pattern suggests laminate parallelism or a layer thickness
that is outside the specified tolerances, or poor laminate bond, the bearing shall be rejected.
If there are three or more separate surface cracks that are greater than 0.08 in. (2mm) wide
and 0.08 in. (2mm) deep, the bearing shall be rejected.
6.2.2 SHEAR MODULUS TESTS ON MATERIAL FROM BEARINGS
The shear modulus of the material in the finished bearing will be evaluated by testing a
specimen cut from the bearing using the apparatus and procedure described in Annex-A of
ASTM D4014, or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a comparable non-destructive stiffness
test may be conducted on a pair of finished bearings. The shear modulus shall fall within 15
percent of the specified value or within the range for its hardness given in AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Article 14.3 of Division I, if no shear modulus
is specified. If the test is conducted on finished bearings, the material shear modulus shall be
computed from the measured shear stiffness of the bearings, taking due account of the
influence on shear stiffness of bearing geometry and compressive load.
6.3 REJECTION OF BEARINGS
Any bearing that, as a result of the testing specified, exhibits any signs of failure such as:
a) Splitting or permanent deformation of the elastomer;
b) Tearing, cracking or permanent deformation of the PTFE sliding surface;
c) Cracking or permanent deformation of the sealing ring or other part of the
bearing;
d) Abrasive marks indicating abnormal contact between the metal surfaces of the
bearing plates or piston, and the pot;
or does not comply with the requirements and tolerances of this Specification Section, shall
be rejected and shall be replaced immediately.
Bearings damaged during transport, installation or subsequent construction operations shall
also be liable for rejection and replacement.

The bearings shall be measured for payment by the number of each type completed in place
in accordance with the drawings, and approved by the Engineer.
Galvanized steel dowels installed and approved by the Engineer shall not be measured
separately.
Non bonded joints at each pier beneath continuous concrete slab will be measured by square
meter.
Non-shrinkage mortar for bearing pads shall be measured by cubic meter. Tapered steel
filler plate for pot bearing installation shall be measured by ton.
unit of measurement for the pay items of Bill of Quantities listed below.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section for the supply,
bearing testing, fabrication, transport, coating and placing of all materials, and for furnishing
all labour, materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as
shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed by the
Engineer. Payment shall also include full compensation for bearing bedding and furnishing,
fabricating, transporting, coating and placing all galvanized steel dowel bars with epoxy
grout and proper placement of dowels and grout.
07800-01 Elastomeric Bearing Type A (dimensions as shown in BOQ) each
07800-02 Elastomeric Bearing Type B (dimensions as shown in BOQ) each
07800-03 Elastomeric Bearing Type C (dimensions as shown in BOQ) each
Etc.
07800-21 Elastomeric Layer for De-bonded Joints on Viaduct Continuous
Deck Slab (2.5cm thickness) m2
07810-01 Pot Bearing including anchor bolts, Type 1 (capacity, fix / movable
as shown in BOQ) each
Etc.
07820-01 Non-shrinkage mortar for bearing pads m3
07820-02 Tapered steel filler plate for pot bearing installation (nominal 30mm
thickness) ton
07830-01 Hinge Bearing including anchor bolts, Type A (capacity as shown in

BOQ) each
07830-02 Hinge Bearing including anchor bolts, Type B (capacity as shown in
BOQ) each
07830-03 Hinge Bearing including anchor bolts, Type C (capacity as shown in
BOQ) each
Etc.

SECTION 07840 - WATERPROOFING
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this Specification Section consists of the supply, transport and installation
of waterproofing membranes in accordance with the information, procedures and details
stated in this Specification Section and in conformance with the drawings, and as required by
the Engineer. Waterproofing membranes may include sprayed membranes, painted
waterproofing, and sheet membranes.
The Contractor shall apply bituminous membranes and deck waterproofing membranes to
all surfaces as indicated on the drawings, including but not limited to wing walls, retaining
walls, abutment walls, and similar foundations, and to the bridge decks.
 AASHTO M243 Field Applied Coating of Corrugated Metal Structural
Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches
 ASTM D41-05 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp proofing, and
Waterproofing
 ASTM D173-03 Bitumen Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
 ASTM D449-03 (Type III) Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in
Damp proofing and Waterproofing
 ASTM D517-98 (2003) Standard Specification for Asphalt Plank
2.2 BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
All the materials to be used for furnishing and installing the deck waterproofing membrane
shall be certified by the manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer before they are
used in the Works.
The Contractor must provide evidence to demonstrate that the proposed deck waterproofing
system meets the following performance criteria and mitigates concerns regarding common
problems such as leakage, poor bonding or softening of the membrane.
 Impermeable to water
 Good adhesion to the deck (at least 1MPa after 2 hours cure)
 Good adhesion to surfacing
 Capable of bridging shrinkage cracks in concrete (up to 2mm)
 Tolerant of deck texture and detail
 Tough to withstand site damage including paving equipment
 Safe to apply
 Able to withstand elevated surfacing temperatures
 Applied over a wide range of ambient conditions

 Non degradable
The proposed system shall have an established reputation for excellent performance under
similar conditions, and on similar structures, preferably in Vietnam.
2.3 BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer certification from the manufacturer that the
bituminous waterproofing membrane system has been used successfully in similar
applications during the preceding five years.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer evidence that the applier of the material is a
qualified, experienced applier and is approved by the manufacturer to apply his materials.
Primer: The furnished primer material shall be in accordance with ASTM-D41, or as
Mastic: The furnished primer material shall be in accordance with AASHTO-M243, as
applicable and as approved by the Engineer.
Asphalt: Asphalt for mop coat shall be in accordance with ASTM D449, Type III.
Waterproofing fabric: Asphalt saturated fabric shall be in accordance with ASTM D173.
Asphalt plank: Material for asphalt plank, if used or if approved by the Engineer, shall be in
accordance with ASTM D517.
2.4 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three samples of each type of the materials he
proposes to use in accordance with pertinent requirements of the Specifications.
For bituminous mastic and primer, one-pint containers shall be submitted.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer certification that materials to be provided
comply with the requirements of this specification.
3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
The Contractor shall deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers
clearly labelled with the manufacturer’s name, brand designation, type and class as
applicable.
The Contractor shall store products in an approved dry area and shall protect them from
contact with soil and from exposure to the elements. Products shall be kept dry at all times.
Products shall be handled in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers and damage
to products.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
The surface to which the waterproofing is to be applied shall be cleaned of all loose and
foreign materials, dirt, grease or oil and shall be dry. When necessary the Engineer may
require the surface to be scrubbed with water and a stiff brush, after which the surface shall
be allowed to dry before application of the primer.
Concrete to which the deck waterproofing membrane is to be applied shall be prepared in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 DECK WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
The deck waterproofing membrane shall be a proprietary waterproofing system of the
thickness indicated on the drawings and as approved by the Engineer, and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The installation shall be undertaken
by skilled operatives as approved by the product manufacturer. Acceptance testing shall
include testing by an electronic pinhole detector to demonstrate the absence of pinholes.
3.3.2 BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
The Contractor shall furnish and install the bituminous membrane as specified herein to all
surfaces indicated on the Drawings including, but not limited to, abutment, wing-walls,
retaining walls, and similar foundations where directed by the Engineer. The work shall
include the supply and application of bituminous membranes on all surfaces specified to
receive waterproof membrane.
Concrete or other surfaces, which are to be protected by bituminous membrane, shall be
thoroughly cleaned before the primer is applied.
They shall then be brush or spray painted with two coats of tar or asphalt primer for
absorptive treatment. Below ground not less than two coats shall be applied at a rate of 0.56
litters per square meter of surface.
On the well-primed surface one application of tar or asphalt seal coat shall be applied by
brush at a rate of 0.45 liters per square meter. Care shall be taken to confine all paints to the
areas to be waterproofed and to prevent disfigurement of any other parts of the structure by
dripping or spreading of the tar or asphalt.

Deck waterproofing membranes shall be measured for payment by square meters actually
completed in place in accordance with the Drawings.
No measurement and payment shall be made for bituminous membranes applied on other
concrete structures. All costs associated with this work shall be considered as a subsidiary
obligation and requirement under the applicable concrete pay items in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section for the supply
and installation of all the required membranes for waterproofing including all labour,
materials, tests, tools, equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as shown on the
Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer.
07840-01 Deck Waterproofing Membrane m2

SECTION 07850 - EXPANSION JOINTS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification Section describes the requirements for expansion and fixed joints as
indicated on the drawings, including pre-moulded joint filler and joint sealer. The Contractor
shall furnish all required materials and install expansion joints, fixed joints, pre-moulded
joint filler and joint sealer in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein. This work shall include the supply and installation or application of all
necessary hardware including anchor bolts and studs, sealants, adhesives, epoxies, and other
accessories.
Expansion joints are generally proprietary systems and for this reason the specification
requirements are indicative only. The Contractor may propose for consideration by the
Engineer alternative systems for consideration that meet other standards or use other
material types but should be able to demonstrate that the proposed joint systems are durable,
have proven reliability, and have equivalent or better performance.
 AASHTO M297 Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seals for
Bridges
 ASTM A36 Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet
Piling
 JIS G 5502 Spheroidal Graphite Iron Castings
 ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
 ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
 ASTM A588 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel, up to 345 MPa Minimum Yield Point,
with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
 ASTM A709 Standard Specification for Structural Steel for Bridges
 ASTM D395 Rubber Property—Compression Set
 ASTM D412 Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and
Thermoplastic Elastomer - Tension
 ASTM D471 Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids
 ASTM D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)
 ASTM D1149 Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a
Chamber
 ASTM D2240 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

 ASTM D6690 Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete
and Asphalt Pavements
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 ELASTOMERIC JOINTS
Elastomeric joints have a movement ranges of between 15 mm (+/- 7.5 mm) to 150 mm (+/-
75 mm) according to model and comprise two heavy steel edge profiles with anchor brackets
and a replaceable elastomeric sealing element guaranteeing the watertightness of the joint.
The elastomeric portion of elastomeric expansion joints shall be of neoprene which shall
have the physical properties as determined by the following ASTM requirements:
Standard Physical Properties Requirements
ASTM D412 Tensile strength 126kg/cm2 (min. )
50  5
ASTM D412 Elongation at break 400%
ASTM D2240 Hardness (Durometer A)
ASTM D395 Compression set 20% max.
(Method B) 22 hours at 70°C
ASTM D1149 Ozone resistance: No cracks
Exposure to 100 ppm ozone for 70 hours at 38°C
sample under 20% strain
ASTM D471 Oil deterioration: 120% max.
Volume increase after immersion in ASTM Oil # 3
for 70 hours at 100 °C
The dimensions of the neoprene portion of the joint shall be correct to zero millimeters under
and plus 6-mm over in width and length, and from zero millimeters under to plus 3-mm in
thickness of the exterior dimensions required on the drawings, measured at 21°C.
When test specimens are cut from the finished product a 10-percent variation in Physical
Properties will be allowed.
2.2.2 FINGER JOINTS
Finger joints shall have movement ranges of between 100mm (+/- 50 mm) to 450 mm (+/-
225mm) according to model and comprise cantilever interlocking steel fingers. Water
tightness is guaranteed by an elastomeric drainage channel.
Material for the steel fingers shall be either spheroidal graphite iron casting to ASTM A536
grade 65-45-12 or JIS G5502 grade FCD 450-15, or steel plate to ASTM A588 or ASTM
A709 Grade 50 or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The running surface of finger joints shall be treated to provide anti skid resistance through
application of a multilayered epoxy resin coating incorporating alumina crystals, or similar
method to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide evidence of testing to
demonstrate the durability of the anti skid coating.
2.2.3 FIXING
The sealant for sealing joints between the expansion joint units, along the edges of the
expansion joint, and the bolts and plugs shall be a high solid, one-part polyurethane based
sealant that cures quickly, without shrinkage, into a rubber with high elongation
characteristics and excellent recovery．Sealant shall be capable of bonding to concrete, steel,
and neoprene without the use of a primer. When cured, the sealant shall possess excellent
abrasion resistance and shall resist attack by salt, oil, and road chemicals. The sealant to be
used shall meet the requirements of the manufacturer of the neoprene expansion joint.
The flexible epoxy for filling voids around the nut fasteners shall consist of a
two-component flexible epoxy sealant having the following physical properties:
Base Material: Flexibilized Epoxy Resin

Hardness Shore A Durometer: 80  10
Flexible epoxy shall be supplied either in cans or preassembled cartridges. Flexible epoxy
shall meet the requirements of the manufacturer of the expansion joint. Flexible epoxy shall
also be compatible with and have the physical characteristics when cured, similar to the
neoprene of the joint.
The adhesive/sealant bedding epoxy for bonding the expansion joint to concrete or steel
shall be supplied in pre-measured cartridges or cans and shall consist of a two-component
flexible epoxy having the following physical properties:
Base Material: Epoxy Resin
Tensile Strength: 211 kg/cm2
Elongation: 7% at 24°C
Water Absorption: 1.0% maximum
Bond Strength to concrete: Concrete fails before bond
Structural steel anchors shall be fabricated and hot dip galvanized in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM A123.
Anchor bolts for joint seals shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153
commercial grade bolts set in epoxy mortar in holes cored in the deck in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
The surface of holes cored in the concrete shall be carefully prepared to provide a cleaned
textured surface to which the epoxy mortar can successfully bond. Faces shall be
mechanically tooled until surface glaze and contamination have been removed; dusted to
remove all residues; dried thoroughly and then primed with hydrophobic epoxy resin
immediately prior to setting the anchor bolts in epoxy mortar. Bolts shall be degreased with
white spirit alcohol and dried thoroughly. Coring and setting the anchor bolts shall not be
done until a minimum of 7 days after concrete is poured.
Epoxy mortar shall consist of a mixture of aggregate and epoxy binder. Aggregate shall
consist of clean, hard quartzite particles with a maximum size of 2 millimeters. Aggregate
shall be dried until the moisture content is less than 0.2 percent by weight and then shall be
sealed in plastic containers until required for mixing on site. Binder for epoxy mortar shall
be two part, cold curing, solventless epoxy produced by an approved manufacturer. Primer
shall be compatible with the epoxy resin binder and shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer. The type of resin selected shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for
this application and shall meet the requirements of the supplier of the component on which it
is to be used.
Components of the epoxies shall be proportioned, mixed, applied and cured strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Mixing shall be carried out
with an efficient mechanical device which ensures that all components are fully dispersed
and wetted. The two parts of the epoxy binder for the mortar shall be thoroughly mixed first
without frothing and the aggregate added progressively. Mixed epoxy mortar which has
begun to cure before it has been placed and compacted, will be rejected and a fresh batch
shall be mixed.
2.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his approval, complete Shop Drawings of
all expansion joints. The Shop Drawings shall include a movement chart showing the total
anticipated movement of the structure and the required setting width of the joint assembly at
various temperatures. All movements due to shrinkage, creep, mid-slab deflection, and
similar data, may not be incorporated into this chart but shall be considered by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to final installation and adjustment.

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer for review and approval manufacturer’s
literature verifying that all materials to be supplied conform to the requirements of these
specifications.
The Engineer may request the Contractor to furnish whatever samples which may be
required to perform any of the tests specified as necessary to approve the material. The use
of all joints to be used in the work shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
2.4 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
No materials shall be used or installed until they have been approved by the Engineer.
3.1 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall obtain installation instructions from the supplier of the expansion joint
material and comply with the instructions provided for the installation of the joint. The
adequacy of the joint design and installation details shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain the technical assistance of a field representative from
the manufacturer of the joint during its installation. Proper adjustment shall be made for
temperature at the time of installation.
Concrete on which expansion joints are to be set shall be dry, clean and free from dirt, grease,
latency and contaminants; level and sound with no broken or spilled concrete. No joint shall
be placed until the Engineer has inspected and approved the seat conditions.
After coating the seat area with the specified sealant adhesive, the joint shall be positioned
over the anchor bolts and the nuts securely tightened. All loose or long anchor bolts shall be
corrected in a manner approved by the Engineer.
All joints between units, around connecting bolts, and cavity plugs shall be carefully sealed
with sealant in a neat workmanlike manner to keep out water and protect against corrosion.
Neoprene surfaces to be in contact with sealant shall be buffed at the plant or wire brushed
prior to installation to provide a bonding surface for the sealant.
Prior to filling the space in the bolt wells, the Engineer shall inspect the anchor bolts and the
tightening of the nuts to the manufacturer’s specified torque. Any wells sealed without the
Engineer’s approval shall be opened and resealed after approval at the Contractor’s expense.
The finished joint shall present a smooth, neat appearance with no protruding bolts or rough
joints. Excess sealant shall be wiped or scraped away before it becomes hard.
3.2 PRE-MOULDED JOINT FILLER
Pre-moulded joint filler shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D994 with a nominal
thickness of 20 mm. Joint filler must be compatible with joint sealant.
The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width
required for the joint. When the use of more than one piece is required for a joint, the
abutting ends shall be fastened securely and held accurately to shape by stapling or other
positive fastening means.
3.3 JOINT SEALER
Joint sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM D6690.
Each lot or batch of sealing compound shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's
original sealed container. Each container shall be marked with the manufacturer's name,
batch or lot number, and the safe heating temperature and shall be accompanied by the
manufacturer's certification stating that the compound meets the requirements of this
specification.

3.4 TOLERANCES
3.4.1 TOLERANCE OF FINGER JOINTS
Tolerance of installed finger joint type expansion joints shall be as follows:
Item Tolerance Note
Length ±5mm
Elevation ±3mm At edges and center of
carriageway
Uniformity of elevation 3mm in 3 m
Differential elevation of fingers 2mm between centers of fingers
Longitudinal clearance ±2mm At edges and center of
carriageway
Transversal clearance 0 to +2mm At edges and center of
carriageway
3.4.2 TOLERANCES TO ASPHALT PAVING
All joint types shall be finished nominally flush with the road surface within the tolerance of
the asphaltic surfacing specification.

Expansion Joints shall be measured for payment by linear meters of the material installed
and approved by the Engineer, measured along the centre line of the joint.
The length of the expansion joint shall be in accordance with the drawings or as shown on
the Shop Drawings.
Payment for Item Expansion Joints shall be made in accordance with the applicable unit
prices of the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below,
Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, labour, tools, equipment and
appurtenances and execution of all work and any incidentals required for the complete
finishing and installation of all the respective expansion joint items.
Pre-moulded Joint Filler and Joint Sealer, epoxy mortar, specially formulated flexible
asphalt material for asphaltic plug joints, and grouts shall not be paid separately. They shall
be deemed to be included in the unit price of Expansion Joints.
07850-01 Bridge Expansion Joint - Finger joint, movement 100mm m

SECTION 07900 - BRIDGE DRAINAGE
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the provision and installation of the bridge drainage system. Work
shall be in accordance with the drawings subject to the approval of the Engineer.
 ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe
 ASTM A53 / A53M Standard Specification for pipe, steel, black and
hot-dipped, zinc coated, welded and seamless
 ASTM A48 Specification for grey iron casting, Class 50
 ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
 ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
2.2 DRAIN PIPES
Pipe and fittings shall be of the size and types indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on
the Drawings, PVC drainage pipes shall be to ASTM D1785 , Type I, Grade 1, Schedule 80,
and steel drainage pipes shall be to ASTM A53 / A53M Type F, schedule 80, hot dip zinc
coated.
2.3 CATCH PIT AND GRATING
Catch pits and gratings shall be Gray Iron Casting with reliability test greater than grade 50
as required by AASHTO A48 for heavy items, of the shape and size and with the connection
requirements as indicated on the drawings.
2.4 FIXING BRACKETS
The materials for fixing brackets shall conform to ASTM A36, hot dip galvanized to ASTM
A153 for steel drainage pipes, and ASTM A240 Grade 304 for PVC drainage pipes, or
equivalent standards to the approval of the Engineer.
2.5 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit his method statement to the Engineer for his approval. The
method statement shall include but no be limited to arrangements and details of pipes fittings
and joints, means of casting the catch pit into the structure and details of fixing pipe brackets
to concrete surfaces.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval manufacturer’s certificates
confirming that all materials meet the requirements of the relevant standards and
specifications. Certificates are required for pipes and all pipe fittings and the catch pit and
grating.

2.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with the
minimum handling. Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to ensure delivery to
storage or the point of installation in sound undamaged condition. Pipes shall be carried and
not dragged. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and
fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris.
2.7 INSTALLATION
Drainage catch pits and gratings shall be installed complete at the locations indicated on the
drawings. Catch pits shall be cast into the structure or cast into a previously formed box out
as detailed in the Contractor’s method statement. Where the catch pits are to be cast into a
box out all relevant details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where catch pits
are secured into box outs using concrete, the concrete shall be at least equal in strength to the
concrete in the surrounding structure and all box out faces shall be prepared as required for
construction joints. The inside faces of the catch pit shall be painted in accordance with
specification 08800 – Painting table 1, system for aggressive conditions subject to the
Gratings should be installed using anti-theft measures.
All pipes and fittings shall be installed to the locations, lines and grades indicated in the
drawings. Cutting of pipe shall be avoided. Where pipes are cut the cut end shall be cleaned
and trimmed and painted in accordance with specification 08800 – Painting immediately
after cutting. All joints shall be properly and securely made to ensure no leakage of water.
All pipe brackets shall be located and securely fixed in place before pipes are installed.

3.1.1 CATCH PITS AND GRATINGS
Drainage catch pits, frames and gratings inclusive of all fittings shall be measured for
payment by the number of drainage sets of each type, constructed and installed in
accordance with the requirements of the drawings and approved by the Engineer.
3.1.2 DRAINAGE PIPE
Drainage piping shall be measured for payment by linear meters along the centre and
between intersections of the centre of the pipe for the steel drain piping of the diameter and
type required by the drawings. The measurement by linear metre shall include all fixtures
and fittings including pipe covers, tees, pipe connectors, brackets and all necessary fitting,
supports and accessories indicated on the drawings or otherwise required. All rates shall
include protective coatings, and shall be for all items constructed, installed and approved by
the Engineer.
Bill of Quantities listed below, and shall include all labour, equipment and incidentals
necessary to install drainage catch pits, frames and gratings and all piping and fittings.
07900-01 Pipe DN150 m
07900-02 Pipe DN200 m
07900-03 Pipe DN300 m
07900-04 Catch Pit, Frame and Grating Set each

SECTION 07910 - RELOCATION OF NAVIGATION CHANNEL - NOT USED
SECTION 07920 - MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION AND MONITORING

EQUIPMENT - NOT USED

DIVISION 8 MISCELLANEOUS
SECTION 08100 - CEMENT MORTAR
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the preparation and supply of cement mortar in accordance with all the
requirements of this Specification Section for masonry and for any other incidental works.
covered by this Specification section.
 AASHTO M45-06 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
 AASHTO M85-06 Portland Cement
 ASTM C207-06 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
 TCVN 3121: 2003 Cement Mortar – Specification standard for testing
2.2 MORTAR
The materials to be used for preparation of mortar shall fulfil the following requirements:
a) Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M85-06.
b) Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M45-06.
c) Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements for residue, popping and pitting, and
water retention specified for Type N lime in ASTM C207-06.
d) Water shall conform to the requirements for concrete under Specification
Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
e) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, masonry mortar shall be composed
of one part Portland cement and three parts fine aggregate by volume, to which
hydrated lime may be added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by
weight. Mortar shall have a compressive strength of at least 50 kg/cm2 at 28
days.
All the materials except water shall be mixed, either in a tight box or in an approved mortar
mixer, until the mixture assumes a uniform color, after which water shall be added and the
mixing continued for a five to ten minutes period. The quantity of water shall be such as to
produce a mortar of the required consistency but shall be no more than 70 percent of the
weight of the cement used.
Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate use. If necessary,
mortar may be re-tempered with water within 30 minutes from the time of the initial mixing
process. Re-tempering after this time will not be permitted.
Mortar that is not used within 45 minutes after the water has been added shall be discarded.

Cement mortar will not be measured for direct payment.

This work will not be paid for separately, but will be deemed as a subsidiary obligation of the
Contractor for which full payment is included in the unit prices in the Bill of Quantities for
the work items in which it is called for or required.

SECTION 08200 - LANDSCAPING
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the provision and planting of grass, flowers, shrubs and trees at
locations shown on the Drawings, or as indicated by the Engineer.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be particularly applied.
 ASTM C602-07 Agricultural Liming Materials
2.2 GRASSING, TREES AND SHRUBS FOR PLANTING
2.2.1 GRASSING
(a) Grass seed
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval a selection of available suitable seed
for grass cover. Seed shall be free from disease, mildew or mould and clean of any noxious
weed seed. All selected seed shall be obtained from a reputable approved source.
(b) Sodding
The species of grass selected shall be rapid spreading, free of disease and noxious weeds and
shall be deep rooted. The source of sods will be approved by the Engineer before cutting and
delivery to the Project and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 3 days
before cutting of sods begins. Sods shall be planted with their root system substantially
undamaged and cut into blocks with moist earth in which they have grown. Sods shall be laid
within 5 days of cutting. Sod blocks shall be hauled and stored in such manner that they will
be protected from direct sunrays, provided with air circulation, and prevented against drying.
(c) Sprigs
These shall be healthy living stems (stolons or rhizomes) with attached roots or perennial
turf forming grasses such as Buffalo, Kikuyu, Paspalum, Carpet grass harvested without
adhering soil. They shall be obtained from approved sources which are quick spreading and
capable of forming a thickly matted growth.
2.2.2 TREES AND SHRUBS FOR PLANTING
The plants shall comply with the following requirements:
- Height of trees shall be between 3.0 m and 4.0 m, root bulb shall be removed with care,
bound in jute bags, with soil root bulb size of 60 x 60 x 60 cm.
- Height of shrubs shall be not less than 120 cm, width of canopy 0.8-1.2m, soil root bulb
size of 30 x 30 x 30 cm.
- When dispatching trees to the site the trees shall be tied to support posts or similar in
order that the trees are not damaged.
- Plants shall be free of disease, infestation and shall have good healthy branches.
- Planting holes: minimum size of 100 x 100 x 100 cm for trees, and 50 x 50 x 50 cm for
shrubs and ornamental plants.
Shrubs shall be of species suitable for the particular local environment and for planting in the
median of the highway. Species of the type “Nemimm Oleamder L.” or “Cassia sp” or other
similar species approved by the Engineer shall be used. Species shall be capable of providing
a dense growths and a height of 2m at maturity

Where planting is in pots the pots shall be of a size suitable for the plant at maturity and of a
type approved by the Engineer.
2.3 FERTILIZERS
Fertilizer shall be standard commercial fertilizer supplied separately or in mixtures
containing percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, and water soluble potash
based on the soil composition and shall meet Vietnamese and applicable local laws. They
shall be furnished in standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of
contents clearly marked thereon.
No cyanamide compounds or hydrated lime shall be permitted in mixed fertilizers.
The Contractor shall have his proposed sod planting beds tested by an acceptable
agricultural laboratory for available nutrients. Based on results of tests, the type, contents
and application rates of fertilizer and the need and application rates for lime shall be
established by the laboratory.
Fertilizers may be supplied in one of the following forms:
 A dry, free flowing fertilizer suitable for application by a common fertilizer
spreader;
 A finely ground fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by power
sprayers; or
 A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment.
2.4 LIME
If the use of lime is required, it shall be ground limestone containing not less than 85% of
total carbonates, and shall be ground to such fineness that 90% shall pass through a 250 µm
mesh sieve and 50% shall pass through a 150 µm mesh sieve. Dolomitic lime or a high
magnesium lime shall contain at least 10% of magnesium oxide. All liming materials shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C602-07.
2.5 TOPSOIL
Materials for topsoiling shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of Specification
Section 08300 “Topsoiling”.
2.6 SUBMITTALS
Prior to the commencement of the work for this item, the Contractor shall submit the
following to the Engineer for approval:
a) Details of his proposed sources for sod evidencing that the sod is heavy and
thickly matted and does not contain any objectionable grass, weeds, or other
detrimental material;
b) Details of his proposed sources for shrubs and trees evidencing that all the
shrubs and trees are in optimal conditions to be planted as indicated on the
Drawings;
c) Detailed description of the sod, shrubs and trees including the name, type, size
and major characteristics regarding the environment and their maintenance;
d) Details regarding the fertilizer suppliers proposed by the Contractor for the
Project;
e) Test results, and laboratory’s proposed fertilizer contents and application rates;
and
f) Test results of lime, if its use is allowed by the Engineer, confirming that the
Quality of the proposed lime sources comply with this Specification Section and
providing enough information to the Engineer regarding the lime properties for
respective approval.
3.1 HARVESTING
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before sods are to be harvested, and
the source shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting begins.
To begin harvesting, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75 mm and all
clippings removed. Sods shall then be loosened by cross-disking, shallow ploughing or other
acceptable methods. After being loosened from the soil, sods shall be gathered in small piles
or windrows, watered and kept moist until planted.
Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting, except that when
weather or other uncontrollable condition interrupts the work, in which case additional time
may be permitted, provided that the sods are still moist and viable. Sod, shrubs and trees that
have heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously damaged during
harvesting or delivery shall be immediately rejected and disposed of as directed by the
Engineer.
3.2 ADVANCED PREPARATION AND CLEANUP
After grading and before applying fertilizer and ground limestone, the areas to be sodged
shall be racked or otherwise cleared of stone larger than 50 mm in diameter, sticks, stumps
and other debris which might interfere with sodding, growth of grass, or subsequent
maintenance of grass-covered areas. If any damage by erosion or other causes has occurred
after grading of areas and before the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the
Contractor shall repair such damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing
irregularities, and repairing other incidental damage.
3.3 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
Placement of topsoil shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Specification
Section 08300 “Topsoiling”.
3.4 APPLYING FERTILIZER AND GROUND LIMESTONE
Following advance preparation and cleanup, fertilizer shall be uniformly spread at a rate
If the use of ground limestone is required, it shall be spread at a rate approved by the
Engineer.
Materials shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm by disking,
racking, or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter,
large clods, roots, and other litter brought to the surface by this operation shall be removed.
On steep slopes where fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be incorporated effectively by
mechanical equipment, they may be applied with power sprayers, blower equipment or other
approved method and need not be incorporated into the soil.
3.5 PLANTING
(a) General
Works shall not take place until tree planting in the area has been completed. Surfaces shall
be scarified and shaped after removing debris, gravel and weeds. All stones of more than 3
cm diameter shall be removed. The surfaces shall be made up as necessary with good quality
topsoil so as to ensure that the finished thickness of the work (including any sod or top
dressing) is not less than 30 cm. For grassing on embankments made of erodible material, a
cohesive material shall be incorporated with clay content at least 25% and plasticity index at

least 20%. The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring a healthy growth in sodded/
sprigged areas and necessary treatments before or after sodding will be at the Contractor's
own expense. This may include lime to neutralize any existing sour condition of the soil and
subsequently Urea or NPK fertilizer, to promote growth.
(b) Seeding
The area for seeding shall be lightly rilled to a depth of between 6 mm and 12 mm. The
pattern of rilling shall be as directed by the Engineer. The area shall be damp before rilling
commences and the seed is broadcast across the surface area. Broadcasting of seed must not
be carried out during windy or heavy rain periods.
Seed shall be distributed in an even layer at the cover rate as recommended by the Engineer.
Within 2 hours of seeding the surface shall be lightly rolled but extreme care must be taken
that the surface is not picked up by the roller.
(c) Sodding
Sod blocks shall be placed so as to cover 50% of the surface by forming sod strips at the
interval of 30 cm (this will be called "Strip Sodding"), or to cover entire surfaces (which
shall be called "Solid Sodding"), as noted in the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. In
strip sodding, joints shall be staggered to form a broken bond. Joints between adjacent sod
blocks shall not exceed 0.5 cm. Sod blocks shall be placed in smooth finish and compacted
by a roller of 100 kg weight or by tamper plate. Sand shall be spread over the grass sods
already laid and into the joints and the whole area shall be watered twice daily until the grass
has taken firm root. Sufficient bamboo stakes shall be used to prevent the sod blocks slipping
when sodding is provided on slopes.
(d) Sprigging
Before harvesting of the sprigs, the grass shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75 mm and all
clippings and waste materials removed. Sprigs shall then be loosened by cross disking
shallow ploughing or other acceptable methods. After loosening the sprigs from the soil they
shall be promptly gathered into small piles or windrows, watered and kept moist until they
are planted. The time between harvesting and planting shall not exceed 24 hours. Sprigs that
have been heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise damaged shall be rejected.
Sprigging shall not be done during windy weather, or when the ground is dry, excessively
wet, or otherwise untillable. The method shall be approved by the Engineer considering the
location and condition of the area to be treated, but will generally be one, or more, of the
following:
(i) Broadcast Sprigging: Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand or by suitable equipment in a
uniform layer with spacing between sprigs not to exceed 150 mm. The sprigs shall then be
forced into the soil to a depth of 50 to 100 mm with a straight spade or similar tool, or with a
disk harrow or other equipment set to cover the sprigs to the required depth.
(ii) Row Sprigging: Furrows shall be opened along the approximate contours of the slopes at
a spacing and depth approved by the Engineer. Sprigs shall be placed without delay in
continuous rows along the open furrow with successive sprigs touching. The sprigs shall
then be covered immediately.
(iii) Spot Sprigging: Spot sprigging shall be performed as specified under row sprigging
except that instead of planting in continuous rows, groups of four sprigs or more shall be
spaced 450 mm apart in the rows.
Within 24 hours of sprigging the area shall be lightly rolled or tamped but this work shall not
be done if the soil condition is such that it is picked up by the equipment.

3.6 COMPACTING
After planting of sods has been completed, and prior to compacting, the surface shall be
cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots and other litter brought to
the surface during sodding.
Sodded area shall be compacted within 24 hours from the time sodding has been completed,
In weather and soil conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rollers or other satisfactory
equipment operated at right angles to the slopes. Compaction shall not be done when the soil
is in such condition that the equipment cannot practically be operated. Clay shall not be
compacted if so directed by the Engineer.
3.7 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTED AREAS
The Contractor shall protect areas of sod against traffic by warning signs or barricades
approved by the Engineer. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following sodding shall
be repaired by re-grading and re-sodding as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
water and otherwise maintain sodden areas of sod and all other planting in the median or in
pots in a satisfactory condition until final inspection and the Acceptance of Work.

Sodding will be measured for payment by the number of square meters, measured on the
ground surface, completed and accepted. The area covered by the shrubs or trees planting
work shall be excluded from the area calculated for payment of sodding.
Planting of shrubs and trees shall be measured for payment by the number of shrubs or trees
counted on the ground surface, completed and accepted.
Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for the completed and
approved work, including furnishing and placing all materials, any required mulching of
sodden areas, labour, equipment, tools and any other incidentals to complete the work in
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
Topsoil placement shall be paid for as provided in Specification Section 08300
“Topsoiling”.
08200-01 Grassed Area, Solid sodding m2
08200-04 Shrub each

08200-05 Shrub for Dazzling Resistance (on bridge, including pot and topsoil)
each
08200-06 Tree each
08200-07 Flower each

SECTION 08300 - TOPSOILING
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the preparation of the ground surface for topsoil application, removal
of topsoil from areas to be stripped on the site or from approved sources off the site, and
placing and spreading of the topsoil on prepared areas.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works.
 ASTM C117-04 Materials Finer than 75-μm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be the surface layer of soil with no admixture of refuse or any material toxic to
plant growth, and it shall be reasonably free from subsoil and stumps, roots, brush, stones
(50 mm or more in diameter), clay lumps or similar objects.
Brush and other vegetation that will not be incorporated into the soil during handling
operations shall be cut and removed.
Ordinary sods and herbaceous growth such as grass and weeds are not to be removed but
shall be thoroughly broken up and intermixed with the soil during handling operations.
The topsoil or soil mixture, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall have a pH range of
approximately 5.5 to 7.6.
The organic content shall be not less than 3% but not higher than 20%.
The material passing the 0.075 mm sieve, as determined by the wash test in accordance with
ASTM C117-04, shall be not less than 20% but not higher than 80%.
The Contractor may amend natural topsoil with approved materials and methods to meet the
above specifications.
2.3 OBTAINING TOPSOIL
Prior to the stripping of topsoil, briars, stumps and large roots, rubbish or stones found on
such areas, which may interfere with subsequent operations, shall be removed.
Heavy sod or other cover, which cannot be incorporated into the topsoil by disking or other
means, shall be removed.
When suitable topsoil is available on the site, the Contractor shall remove this material from
the areas. The topsoil shall be spread on areas already tilled and smooth graded, or
stockpiled in areas approved. Any topsoil stockpiled by the Contractor shall be re-handled
and placed without additional compensation. Any topsoil that has been stockpiled on the site
by others, and is required for top soiling purposes, shall be removed and placed by the
Contractor. The sites of all stockpiles and areas adjacent thereto which the Contractor has
disturbed, shall be graded if required and put into a condition acceptable for seeding.
When suitable topsoil is secured off site, the Contractor shall locate and obtain the supply,
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Topsoil shall be hauled to the site of the work and
placed for spreading, or spread as required. Any topsoil hauled to the site of the work and
stockpiled shall be re-handled and placed without additional compensation.

2.4 COHESIVE EMBANKEMENT MATERIAL
Cohesive Embankment material shall be placed as sealing layer in the locations and to the
depths indicated on the drawings or as may be required by the Engineer and shall comply
with the relevant requirements of specification 03400- Embankment construction.
3.1 GENERAL
The areas to be topsoiled are shown on the Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer. If
topsoil is available on the site, the Engineer will approve the location of the stockpiles or
areas to be stripped of topsoil and the stripping depths.
Suitable equipment necessary for proper preparation and treatment of the ground surface,
stripping of topsoil, and for the handling and placing of all required materials shall be on
hand and in good condition.
3.2 PREPARING THE GROUND SURFACE
Immediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil on any area (except directly on a
rock surface), the surface shall be loosened by discs or spike tooth harrows, or by other
approved means, to a minimum depth of 50 mm to facilitate bonding of the topsoil to the
covered subgrade soil. The surface of the area to be topsoiled shall be cleared of all stones
larger than 50 mm in any diameter and all litter or other material which may be detrimental
to proper bonding, the rise of capillary moisture, or the proper growth of the desired planting.
Limited areas, as shown on the Drawings, which are too compact to respond to these
operations, shall receive special scarification.
Grades on the area to be topsoiled, which have been established by others as shown on the
Drawings, shall be maintained in a true and even condition. Where grades have not been
established, the areas shall be smooth graded and the surface left at the prescribed grades in
an even and properly compacted condition to prevent, insofar as practical, the formation of
low places or pockets where water will stand.
Areas to be topsoiled that require filling material to reach the lines and levels described on
the Drawings, shall be filled up to a level that topsoiling can be applied properly as
specified in this Specification Section.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be evenly spread on the prepared areas to a uniform depth of 150 mm after
compaction, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Spreading shall not be done when the
ground or topsoil is excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition detrimental to the work.
Spreading shall be carried out so that seeding operations can proceed with a minimum of soil
preparation or tilling.
After spreading, any large, stiff clods and hard lumps shall be broken with a pulverizer or by
other effective means, and all stones or rocks (50 mm or more in diameter), roots, litter, or
any foreign matter shall be raked up and disposed of by the Contractor. After spreading is
completed, topsoil shall be satisfactorily compacted by rolling or by other approved means.
The compacted topsoil surface shall conform to the required lines, grades, and cross sections.
Any topsoil or other dirt falling upon pavements as a result of hauling or handling of topsoil
shall be promptly removed.

Topsoiling shall be measured for payment by square meters (m2) of topsoil provided or
re-used, placement to the depth as required and in accordance with requirements of this
Specification Section, and as approved by the Engineer.
Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for the completed and
approved work, Including for excavation in accordance with specification 03100 “Common
Excavation” stockpiling as necessary, furnishing as necessary, pre-preparation to meet
specification requirements, ground surface preparations, hauling, placing materials,
spreading and preparing final topsoil surface and all necessary clean-up and remedial work,
labour, equipment, tools and any other incidentals to complete the work in accordance with
the Drawings and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
08300-01 Furnishing and Placing Top Soil m3
08300-02 Topsoil from excavations m2

SECTION 08500 - TRAFFIC SIGNS AND KM POSTS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Item consists of the supply and installation of traffic signs in accordance with the
Drawings, or as required by the Engineer.
The traffic signs shall comply in all respects with the applicable Vietnamese signage
standards. The categories of road signs are designated as warning signs, regulatory signs,
and guide signs.
Traffic signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs have a standard
shape and a fixed range of sizes. All other signs are classified as non-standard signs.
The size is the length of the side of triangular signs (measured from the points of intersection
of the extension of the edges), the horizontal width of octagonal signs and the diameter of
circular signs.
All traffic signs shall be made retro-reflective by the application of retro-reflective sheeting,
fixed over aluminium sheeting as per these specifications.
 QCVN 20:2010/BGTVT National technical regulation on aids to navigation
 QCVN 39-2011/BGTVT National technical code on inland waterway signaling;
 QCVN 41:2012/BGTVT National Technical Regulation on Road Signs and
Signals
 22TCN 269:2000 Regulations on Navigation signals equipped for
domestic waterways in Viet Nam;
 22TCN 331-05 Instruction panels on Expressway
 TCVN 7887:2008 Specification for Retro-reflective sheeting for traffic
Control
 AASHTO M111-04 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
 ASTM A53-07 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
 ASTM B209-07 Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate
 ASTM D4956-07 Standard Specification for Retro-reflective Sheeting
for Traffic Control
 ASTM E810-08 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of
Retro-reflection of Retro-reflective Sheeting
 TCVN2101:1993 Painting – method to determine brightness of
retro-reflective sheeting

Package J2: July 2014Package J2: July 2014
2.2 MATERIALS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNS
2.2.1 SIGN PANELS
Sign panels for warning, regulatory, and guide signs shall be flat sheet steel, complying with
the requirements specified by ASTM B209-07, and having a minimum thickness of 2.5 mm.
Such sheets shall be degreased, etched, neutralized and processed prior to use as traffic sign
panels.
2.2.2 REFLECTIVE SHEETING
The retro-reflective sheeting used on the signs shall consist of white or colored sheeting
having a smooth outer surface, which has the property of retro-reflection over its entire
surface. The sheeting shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4956-07 in respect of
outdoor weathering, colourfastness, shrinkage, flexibility, liner removal, adhesion, impact
resistance, and specular gloss. It shall be weather-resistant and show colour fastness. It shall
be new and unused and shall show no evidence of cracking, scaling, pitting, blistering, edge
lifting, or curling, and shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion. The sheeting shall be
part of a family of matched component products required for the manufacture and imaging
of permanent traffic signs. The material (sheeting, inks, overlay films) for use in the
production of finished traffic control devices shall all be from the same manufacturer.
Retro-reflective sheeting type VIII of very high reflection shall be used for expressway. This
sheeting type has retro-reflective beads of non-plated micro-prism. Minimum service life of
sheeting type VIII is 10 years.
(a) Coefficient of retro-reflection:
Table 1 Minimum coefficient of retro-reflection (RA) of sheeting type VIII
(cd.lx-1.m-2)
Obse Entra Wh Yell Ora Gre Re Blu Bro Fluores Fluor Fluor
rvati nce ite ow nge en d e wn cent escent escen
on angle yellow- yellow t
angle (degr Green oran
(degr ees) ge
ees)
0.1 -4 100 750 375 100 150 60 30 800 600 300
0.1 +30 0 345 175 46 69 28 14 370 280 135
0.2 -4 460 525 265 70 105 42 21 560 420 210
0.2 +30 700 245 120 33 49 20 10 260 200 95
0.5 -4 325 190 94 25 38 15 7,5 200 150 75
0.5 +30 250 86 43 12 17 7 3,5 92 69 35
115
Table 2 Minimum coefficient of retro-reflection (RA) for sheeting type IX
(cd.lx-1.m-2)
Observ Entra White Yell Ora Gree Red Blu Fluorescen Fluoresc Fluoresce
ation nce ow nge n e t ent nt orange
angle angle yellow-Gre yellow
(degree (degr en
s) ees)
0,1 -4 660 500 250 66 130 30 530 400 200
0,1 +30 370 280 140 37 74 17 500 220 110
0,2 -4 380 285 145 38 76 17 300 230 115
0,2 +30 215 162 82 22 43 10 170 130 65
0,5 -4 240 180 90 24 48 11 190 145 72
0,5 +30 135 100 50 14 27 6 110 81 41
1,0 -4 80 60 30 8 16 3,6 64 48 24
1,0 +30 45 34 17 4,5 9 2 36 27 14

(b) Outdoor Weathering:
Outdoor Weathering: All retro-reflective sheeting samples exposed to outdoor weathering
do not show any crack, blistering or cavitation. There is neither remarkable curling on edges
nor shrinkage/expansion of more than 0.8mm. After outdoor weathering, reflection at
observation angle 0.2 degree and entrance angles –4 degrees and +30 degrees are measured.
Required duration for outdoor weathering test for minimum reflection coefficient of
sheeting type VIII is 36 months; RA = 80% of the values stated in Table 1.
Accelerated Outdoor Weathering: In case there is not enough time for outdoor weathering
test, accelerated outdoor weathering method can be applied. All the sheeting samples
exposed to accelerated outdoor weathering test do not show any crack, blistering or
cavitation. There is neither remarkable curling on edges nor shrinkage/expansion of more
than 0.8mm. Upon accelerated outdoor weathering test, sheeting samples shall satisfy the
below criteria:
 Minimum coefficient of reflection after accelerated outdoor weathering test for
2,200 hours, RA = 80% of the values stated in Table 2.
 Colour fastness: colour fastness of retro-reflective sheeting shall be in accordance
with TCVN 7887: 2008.
(c) Other regulations on technical specifications of retro-reflective sheeting and
applied test methods: shall be in accordance with TCVN 7887:2008.
2.2.3 ROAD SIGN POSTS
Road sign posts shall be constructed of steel pipe, hot dip galvanized, complying with
ASTM A53-07 and having a minimum internal diameter of 75mm. All open ends shall be
capped to prevent water entry. A steel bar of 16 mm diameter x 450 mm long shall be welded
in the middle horizontally to the foot of the post to prevent the rotation of the post in its
foundation. The length of the post and the depth of embedment shall be as shown on the
Drawings but the post shall be at least 0.80 m in the ground when the sign is at its correct
height.
2.2.4 FRAMES AND FASTENINGS
Sheet metal sign plates exceeding 500 mm in any dimension shall be stiffened by the
attachment of a frame or stiffening member(s) to the back of the sign plate, as shown on the
Drawings. Where details for construction of the frame and the attachment thereof to the sign
plate are not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall design it himself and submit the
details to the Engineer for approval before manufacture.
The method of fixing sign plates, frames and brackets to posts shall be such as will facilitate
removal for replacement or maintenance purposes and permit adjustment in the position of a
sign without detaching it from its post or posts, but the sign and any framing shall be held
firmly enough to withstand the load to which it will be subjected.
All components of signs and their supports (other than the sign face) shall be prepared and
painted in accordance with Specification Section 08800 “Painting”.
2.2.5 NUTS AND BOLTS
Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M111-04.
2.2.6 CONCRETE FOUNDATION BLOCKS
The concrete for foundation blocks shall be the class of concrete indicated on the Drawings
and in accordance with Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
Foundations shall be of the size shown on the Drawings.

2.2.7 PAINTING
Painting shall be in according with specification section 08800 – painting
2.3 BRIDGE NAME PLATES
Bridge name plates shall be of the material and dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
2.4 TEXT ON SIGN PANELS
Letter size, fonts, and colours on sign panels shall be in accordance with the relevant
provisions of 22TCN 331-05 Instruction panels on Expressway, QCVN 41/2012/BGTVT
National Technical Regulation on Road Sign and Signals.
3.1 CONFIRMATION OF DESIGN
The designs shown on the Drawings shall be subject to amendment, and confirmation of the
details shall be obtained from the Engineer before any signs are made.
3.2 APPLICATION OF SHEETING TO THE SIGN PLATE
The preparation of the sign plate, and the application of the sheeting to the plate, shall be
done in accordance with the sheeting manufacturer’s instructions. The material shall cover
the sign surface evenly and shall be free from twists, blisters, cracks and folds. Cut-outs to
produce legends and borders shall be bonded with the sheeting in the manner specified by
the sheeting manufacturer.
3.3 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall obtain the following from the sheeting manufacturer and then submit
the same to the Engineer:
a) A Lot Certificate stating that the sheeting material lot being supplied to the sign
supplier under the purchase order conforms to the standards specified herein for
retro-reflective sheeting, and
b) A seven-year warranty for satisfactory field performance including stipulated
retro-reflectance of the retro-reflective sheeting.
In addition, a seven-year warranty for satisfactory in-field performance of the finished sign
inclusive of the letters / legends and their bonding to the sheeting shall be obtained from the
sign supplier and passed on to the Engineer, who shall keep it until the expiration of the
Defects Liability Period of the Contract (the time when the warranty will be transferred to
the Client). The warranty shall place the obligation on the sheeting manufacturer, as well as
the sign supplier, to replace, repair, or restore the retro-reflective efficiency in any case of
defects. All signs shall be dated during fabrication with an indelible marking to indicate the
type of sheeting used, the name of the manufacturer, and the start date for the warranty.
Warranty shall be provided in the original and shall have legal jurisdiction in Vietnam.
3.4 ERECTION OF POSTS
The posts shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block
prior to the placing of the concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent
movement of the post during the placing and setting of concrete. The foundations shall be as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. After the concrete has set sufficiently,
the spaces around the concrete foundation shall be refilled to the required elevation with
suitable material, which shall be thoroughly tamped in layers of not more than 150 mm
thickness. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by
the Engineer.

3.5 SIGN PANEL INSTALLATION
Any chipping or bending of the sign panels will be considered as sufficient cause to require
replacement of the panels at the Contractor's expense.
The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall be painted with
enamels matching the background color.

Standard Warning, Regulatory and Guide signs shall be measured for payment by the
number of such signs of the size specified, and shall include the necessary posts and supports
erected and accepted.
Non-standard signs shall be measured by the area (m2) of such signs, and shall include the
necessary posts and supports and erection.
Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation blocks, and
all blocks, labour, equipment, tests, tools and any incidentals to complete the work as shown
on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer.
08500-01 Traffic sign for ETC ahead each
08500-02 Guide Sign Type A each
08500-03 Guide Sign Type B each
08500-04 Guide Sign Type C each
08500-05 Guide Sign Type D (toll gate bridge) each
08500-06 Warning and Regulatory Sign Type 1 (single) each
08500-07 Warning and Regulatory Sign Type 2 (double) each
08500-08 Warning and Regulatory Sign Type 3 (two post) each
08500-09 Kilometer Sign Board each
08500-10 Guide post Type 1 (concrete) each
08500-11 Guide post Type 2 (plastic) each
08500-12 Navigation / waterway signs (complete set for one bridge) each

SECTION 08600 - GUARDRAIL
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the supply and construction of posts and guardrails
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be applied to the works.
Signals
 TCVN 5729-97 Specification for expressway design
Products
 AASHTO M183 Structural Steel
 AASHTO M232-06 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
2.2 GUARDRAILS
The rail shall be corrugated sheet steel beams of the type, section and thickness indicated on
the Drawings. All rails shall be free from abrasions, rough or sharp edges and shall not be
kinked, twisted or bent.
Guardrails shall be made of steel with a thickness of no less than 4mm and shall:
a) elongate not less than 12 percent in a 5 cm long specimen under tensile test;
b) have an ultimate tensile strength of not less than 3,700 kg/cm2;
c) have a beam strength including joints of 680 kg at a deflection of 5 cm when
tested on a clear span of 365 cm with a load applied through an 8 cm wide flat
surface at the center; and
d) have joints capable of withstanding a side pull of 2,200 kg;
e) Guardrails shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111-04. All
galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.
Where applicable, and if approved by the Engineer, the use of materials for guardrail
complying with the standards of Vietnam will be accepted.
2.3 GUARDRAIL HARDWARE
Offset blocks shall be steel sections of the type, dimensions, and thickness shown on the
Drawings.
Splices and terminal pieces shall be of the type, dimensions and thickness shown on the
Drawings, and shall be of such strength as to develop the full design strength of the rail
elements.
Unless otherwise specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories shall be
galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M232-06. All galvanizing
shall be done after fabrication.
Reflector tabs shall be made of 2 mm thick aluminium covered with High Intensity
retro-reflective sheeting in accordance with Specification Section 08400 “Road Signs”, and
shall be attached to the rail at the spacing shown on the Drawings using a secure,

corrosion-and theft-resistant fastening. Other types of reflector that are of at least equivalent
luminosity may be used, if approved by the Engineer.
2.4 GUARDRAIL POSTS
Posts shall be steel sections of the type, dimensions, and thickness shown on the Drawings.
They shall be of a copper bearing steel. Steel shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M183 for the grade specified.
Posts shall be galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M111-04. All
galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.
2.5 GALVANIZING REPAIRS
In the event that minor damage to the galvanized coating of the guardrail of guardrail
hardware occurs, the Engineer may rather than require removal and replacement allow the
Contractor to make repairs by three applications of zinc anticorrosive paint as approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all details and information including the
manufacturer’s application and surface preparation requirements for the approval of the
Engineer of the repair application coating that he may propose to use.
Repair of the coating application shall not proceed until such information and data have been
3.1 POSTS
Holes shall be dug or drilled to the depth indicated on the Drawings, or the posts may be
driven by approved methods and equipment provided that they are erected in proper position
and do not become distorted, burred or otherwise damaged.
Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown on the Drawings and, where embedded in a
concrete foundation block, shall remain undisturbed for a minimum 48 hours.
The space around the post shall be backfilled to the ground line with approved material in
layers not exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted.
When backfilling and tamping are completed the posts shall be held securely in place.
Posts for guardrails on bridges and culverts may be bolted to the structure as detailed on the
Drawings. The anchor bolts shall be set to the proper location and elevation with templates,
and carefully checked.
3.2 RAIL ELEMENTS
to line and grade. The height of the rail above ground level must be within 10mm of the
Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth, continuous beam that is true
height shown on the Drawings. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts
shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more than 100
mm.
Where galvanized surfaces have been abraded so that the base material is exposed, the
threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be protected in a
manner as using a zinc based coating in accordance with Subsection 2.5.
All rails shall be erected and adjusted so that the longitudinal tension shall be uniform
throughout the entire length of the rail.

Guardrail shall be measured for payment by linear meter from center of end posts.

The provision and installation of terminal sections such as fish-tail, connection pieces, and
additional posts, as shown on the Drawings, shall be deemed as incidental to the provision of
guardrail, and the costs thereof shall be included in the unit price for guardrail.
Precast concrete barrier shall be measured for payment by metre of barrier. Reinforcing bar
shall not be measured separately.
Gate for emergency crossing points in the central median barrier shall be measured by the
length of gate indicated on the Drawings.
Payment shall be made in accordance with the applicable unit price of the pay item of the
Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials and hardware, including all labour, equipment, tests, tools and any
incidental to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these
Specifications, or as directed by the Engineer.
08600-01 Guardrail Type A metre
08600-02 Guardrail Type B metre
08600-03 Guardrail Type C metre
08600-04 Removable steel guardrail (Type D1, D2) metre
08600-05 Precast concrete barrier (Jersey Barrier) metre
08600-06 Gate for emergency crossing point in central median barrier metre

SECTION 08700 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the provision and placing of markings on the finished pavement.
The thermoplastic compound shall be screeded or sprayed onto the pavement surface in a
molten state by a suitable machine capable of controlled preparation and laying together
with the surface application of glass beads at a specific rate. Upon cooling to ambient
pavement temperature, it shall produce an adherent pavement marking of specified thickness
and width and capable of resisting deformation by traffic.
The thermoplastic compound shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings
shown on the Drawings, or as required by the Engineer.
Signals
 TCVN 8786:2011 Traffic Paints. Road Marking Materials: Water based
paints Specification and Test Method
 TCVN 8787:2011 Traffic Paints. Road Marking Materials: Solvent based
paints Specification and Test Method
 TCVN 8788-2011 Traffic Paints. Road Marking Materials - Technical
requirements and test methods
 TCVN 8791-2011 Traffic Paints. Thermoplastic pavement markings -
Road markings, construction and acceptance
 AASHTO M247-05 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints
 AASHTO M248-03 Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints
 AASHTO M249-03 White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic Stripping
Material (Solid Form)
2.2 PAINT FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS
The thermoplastic material shall be homogeneously composed of aggregate, pigment, resins
and glass reflectorizing beads. The thermoplastic material shall be factory-mixed, from an
approved manufacturer, and shall be of a tropical grade suitable for application, by the
means proposed, to the specified road surfaces.
The thermoplastic material shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the appropriate
ASTM method (ASTM D7307-06 Standard Practice for sampling of Thermoplastic Traffic
Marking Materials and ASTM D4797-88 (2007) – Standard test methods for Chemical and
Gravimetric Analysis of White and Yellow Thermoplastic Traffic Machine Containing lead
Chromate and Titanium Oxide). The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a copy of
certified test reports from the manufacturer of the thermoplastic material showing results of
all tests specified herein and shall certify that the material meets all requirements of this
Specification.

2.3 GLASS BEADS FOR REFLECTIVE ROAD MARKINGS
The marking shall be reflectorized by incorporation of Type I glass beads into the mix and
by application of Type II glass beads to the surface of the marking. Both types of glass beads
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M247-05.
Glass beads shall be of good quality, optically clear, lead-free glass and not less than 90%
shall be reasonably spherical and free from flaws. The beads shall contain not more than one
percent of sharp angular particles and not more than one half percent of foreign matter and
shall be free flowing under normal atmospheric conditions. The grading of the glass beads
shall be as follows:
US Standard Sieve Percentage Passing
mm Alternative By Weight
1.180 No.16 100
0.850 No.20 65 - 75
0.600 No.30 45 - 55
0.300 No.50 15-25
0.180 No.80 0
The glass beads shall make up not less than 30-40% of the thermoplastic compound by
weight.
2.4 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory manner or to
incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location and do not have a uniform satisfactory
appearance both in daytime and nighttime shall be removed, the road pavement made good
and materials replaced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the Contractor's expense
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.1 PREPARATION OF ROAD SURFACE
The work of road marking shall include the following:
a) Cleaning of the pavement surfaces to remove all dust, dirt, grease, oil and other
foreign matter.
b) Application, protection and drying of paint coatings.
c) Protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic.
d) Protection of all parts of the road structure and its appurtenances against
disfigurement by spatters splashes or smirches of marking material.
e) Supply of all tools, labour and marking materials necessary for the entire work.
Thermoplastic shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when air is misty, or when
in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unfavourable for the work. Thermoplastic shall
not be applied on damp pavement surfaces, or on pavement which has absorbed heat
sufficient to inhibit the thermoplastic from setting properly.
3.2 APPLICATION OF THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
Thermoplastic shall not be placed on a sealed surface sooner than three (3) days after
application of the final seal coat or Asphaltic Concrete surfacing.
The precise dimensions and positions of all pavement markings shall be set out and marked
on the pavement before the thermoplastic is applied.
The thermoplastic material shall be melted in a heater fitted with a mechanical stirrer to give
a smooth consistency to the material and to avoid local overheating. The temperature of the
mass shall be maintained within the range specified by the manufacturer.

Road markings shall be carried out by suitable machines and equipment approved by the
Consultant. Hot plastic materials shall be thermal painted by glazing, pressing and spraying
methods. Materials that are already put in spreading machine must be maintained at a
temperature stipulated by manufacturer for specific spreading methods. For road marking by
machine, only one layer of painting with thickness of more than 2 mm shall be placed.
Before being used for a designated works, road marking machines must be tested at a
suitable location outside the work site. Calibration of the machine/equipment shall be carried
out in the next test. Only when it is properly calibrated and approved by the Consultant will
the equipment be used for the designated works. Capable and experienced workers shall be
assigned to operate the road marking machines. Number of machines shall be considered
and properly adjusted, if necessary, before putting into operation in a large-scale work site.
Daily checking and adjustment is also necessary throughout the work.
For locations or markings which are awkward to do by machine, approved manual methods
may be used with the prior approval of the Engineer.
Thermoplastic shall be applied in a uniform thickness of at least 2 mm (exclusive of the glass
beads applied to the surface) unless otherwise specified.
Type II glass beads shall be applied uniformly to the surface of the marking whilst it is still
molten. The glass beads shall be applied by pressure or spray application at a rate of 450
gm/m2.
The markings shall not deviate from the specified dimensions by more than 20mm. The
edges shall be smooth and distinct.
The upper surface of the markings shall be level, uniform and free from streaks. The surface
must not be slippery when wet.
All markings shall be protected from traffic until the markings have hardened sufficiently so
that there is neither pick-up of the material on tyres nor any imprint of tyre marks.
The markings shall show no appreciable deformation, discoloration, cracking, lifting or
peeling under traffic and under road temperatures up to 60°C.

The quantities of road marking to be paid for will be the number of square metres of the
relevant material applied to the surface, completed and accepted in accordance with the
Drawings, these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer. For the purposes of
measurement each type of material will be divided into two categories as follows:
 General Application - Centre lines, edge lines, lane markings and other work, which
is basically parallel to the centreline of a carriageway or ramp.
 Special Application - Arrows, pedestrian markings, striping and other work, which
is transverse or sharply angled to the direction of traffic flow
Payment shall be full compensation for the completed and approved work, including
furnishing and placing all materials, labour, equipment, tools and any other incidentals to
complete the work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and as directed by
the Engineer.
08700-01 Road Marking (general application, 2mm thick on normal
pavement) m2
08700-02 Road Marking (general application, 3mm thick on roughened
pavement) m2
08700-03 Road Marking (special application) m2

SECTION 08800 - PAINTING
1. GENERAL
This work consists of the removal of coatings and application of protective coatings to metal
(including galvanizing), timber, or concrete surfaces to control corrosion or deterioration.
This section is applicable to all painting works except for the painting of steel bridges, which
is addressed separately in Section 07670 Painting of Steel Bridges.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be applied to the works.
Products
 AASHTO M232-06 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
HM-22. ASTM A153/A153M-00
 ASTM A653/A653M-07 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
 ASTM D3359-08 (Method A) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
 ASTM D4138-07 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective
Coating Systems by Destructive Means
 ASTM D4285-06 Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air
 ASTM D4417-03 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned
Steel
 ASTM E337-07 Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer (the
Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures)
 SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning-Editorial (November 1, 04)
2.2 MATERIALS FOR PAINTING
Only certified manufacturers approved by the Engineer will be allowed to supply paints for
the Works.
All paints shall be obtained from the approved manufacturers, and variation on the paint
material (type, date, etc.) for a commenced work will be rejected.
In case of multiple coats painting system, each coat of paint shall be compatible with the
previous one.
Galvanization of metallic elements shall in general conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M111-04. Material thinner than 3.2 mm might be galvanized before fabrication in
conformity with the requirements of ASTM A653-07. Galvanization of iron and steel
hardware and nuts and bolts shall conform to the specifications of AASHTO M232-06.
2.3 SUBMITTALS
2.3.1 SAMPLES AND DATA
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with technical data, and the manufacturer’s
specifications for his review and approval.

2.3.2 PLAN FOR PROTECTION OF PUBLIC, PROPERTY, AND WORKERS
At least 28 days before beginning surface preparation for painting, the Contractor shall
submit a written plan for the Engineer’s approval on the measures to be used for protecting
the environment, public, adjacent property, and workers. The Plan shall include the
following:
a) Manufacturer's material safety data sheets and product data sheets for all
cleaning and painting products.
b) A detailed containment plan for removed material, cleaning products, and paint
debris, including details of attachment that do not require welding or drilling
holes in the existing structure; details of connections with clamps or other
approved devices.
c) A detailed disposal plan for removed material, cleaning products, and paint
debris.
d) Specific safety measures to protect workers from site hazards including falls,
fumes, fires, or explosions.
e) If the paint being removed is a hazardous material, specific safety measures to
comply with applicable environmental regulations shall be included.
f) Emergency spill procedures.
g) To perform Quality control functions, a competent person with the following
experience shall be assigned by the Contractor:
 Minimum 2 years of industrial field painting experience;
 Minimum 90 days of field supervisory or management experience in paint removal
work; and
 Documentation of the individual’s qualifications including records of training and
experience.
In general, the Contractor shall perform the work according to the accepted “Programme”. If
the measures fail to perform as intended, the Contractor shall immediately stop work and
take corrective action. Moreover, the Contractor shall collect and properly dispose of all
material including waste water that is used in preparations, cleaning, or painting.
3.1 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
The Contractor shall perform the following to protect the Works:
 Protect adjacent surfaces that are not to be painted by using tarps, screens, paper,
cloth, or other suitable means; and
 Prevent contamination of freshly-painted surfaces by dust, oil, grease, or other
harmful or deleterious material.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least 7 days before beginning
operations, shall prepare the surface, immediately before painting, according to the
following:
 Clean the surface to the specified cleanliness level;
 Remove dirt, dust, and other contaminants from the surface using methods
recommended by the paint manufacturer and approved by the Engineer;

 Thoroughly dry the surface;
 Determine that the surface temperature is between 10°C and 40°C;
 Determine that the surface temperature is 3°C or more above the dew point
according to ASTM E337-07;
 Determine that the humidity is 85 percent or less, unless specified otherwise on the
manufacturer's product data sheet; and
 Suitable engineering controls such as enclosures and dehumidification shall be used
to provide the conditions required above.
3.3 PAINT APPLICATION
The Contractor shall apply the paint according to the following:
 Use safe handling practices that conform to the manufacturer's safety data sheet and
instructions. Mix and apply paint according to the product instructions. Mix paint
with mechanical mixers for a sufficient length of time to thoroughly blend the
pigment and vehicle together. Continue the mixing during application. Do not thin
paint that is formulated ready for application.
 Paint in a neat and workmanlike manner that does not produce excessive paint
buildup, runs, sags, skips, holidays, or thin areas in the paint film. Measure the wet
film thickness during application and adjust the application rate.
 Use brushes that have sufficient bristle body and length to spread the paint in a
uniform film.
 Use airless or conventional spray equipment with suitable traps, filters, or separators
to exclude oil and water from the compressed air. Use compressed air that does not
show black or wet spots when tested according to ASTM D4285-06. Use the spray
gun tip sizes and pressures recommended by the manufacturer.
 Use rollers only on flat, even surfaces. Do not use rollers that leave a stippled texture
in the paint film.
 Use sheepskin daubers, bottle brushes, or other acceptable methods to paint surfaces
that are inaccessible for painting by regular means.
 Cure each coat of paint according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Correct
all thin areas, skips, holidays, and other deficiencies before the next application of
paint. Tint succeeding applications of paint to contrast with the paint being covered.
The colour for the finish coat shall be approved by the Engineer before its
application.
 Coat surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection with the full number of
undercoats required before erection. After erection, thoroughly clean all areas where
the undercoating is damaged or deteriorated, and spot coat these with the specified
undercoats to the required thickness before applying the final coat.
3.4 PAINTING OF STRUCTURAL IRON AND STEEL
3.4.1 PAINTING SYSTEMS
New surfaces or surfaces with all existing paint removed: The paint system shown in Table 1
shall be furnished.
Surfaces with existing sound paint: The paint system compatible with the existing paint shall
be furnished. The system shown in Table 2 or a system approved by the Engineer shall be
applied.
Table 1 Structural Iron and Steel Coating Systems for New Surfaces and Surfaces with
All Existing Paint Removed
Coat Paint System (1)
1 2 3 4 5
Aggressive Aggressive Aggressive Less Less
Environments Environments Environments Aggressive Aggressive
(Salt) (Salt) (Salt) Environments Environments
(No Salt) (No Salt)
Primer Inorganic Zinc rich Moisture-cured Acrylic latex Low VOC
zinc type I epoxy urethane 50-75μm dry alkyd
75-100μm 75-100μm 50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry
dry dry
Intermediate Epoxy Epoxy Moisture-cured Acrylic latex Low VOC
75-100μm 75-100μm urethane 50-75μm dry alkyd
dry dry 50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry
Top Aliphatic Aliphatic Moisture-cured Acrylic latex Low VOC
urethane urethane urethane 50-75μm dry alkyd
50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry
Total 200-275 μm 200-275 μm 150-225 μm 150-225 μm 150-225 μm
Thickness dry dry dry dry dry
(1) System 1, 2, or 3 is for the corrosion protection of iron and steel in aggressively corrosive
atmospheric environments such as marine, industrial, high humidity, or structures exposed to deicing
salts. System 4 or 5 is for use in those environments free from high concentrations of salts or
pollutants that cause aggressive corrosion environments.
VOC: Volatile Organic Compound
Table 2 Structural Iron and Steel Coating Systems for Surfaces with Existing Sound
Paint
Paint System (1)
6 7 8
Aggressive Environments Less Aggressive Less Aggressive
(Salt) Environments Environments
(No Salt) (No Salt)
Primer Moisture-cured urethane Low VOC alkyd Low viscosity epoxy
50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry sealer
25-50μm dry
Intermediate Moisture-cured urethane Low VOC alkyd Epoxy
50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry 75-100μm dry
Top Moisture-cured urethane or Low VOC alkyd Aliphatic urethane
aliphatic urethane 50-75μm 50-75μm dry 50-75μm dry
dry
Total Thickness 150-225 μm dry 150-225 μm dry 150-225 μm dry
(1) System 6 is for the corrosion protection of iron and steel in aggressively corrosive
atmospheric environments such as marine, industrial, high humidity, or structures exposed to deicing
salts. System 7 or 8 is for use in those environments free from high concentrations of salts or
pollutants that cause aggressive corrosion environments.
VOC: Volatile Organic Compound
At least 14 days before ordering paint, the Contractor shall verify compatibility of the
proposed system with the existing system as follows:
 Select a test area of at least 3 square meters in a condition representative of the
condition of the structure. Perform the specified level of surface preparation, and
apply the proposed system to the existing topcoat and to the existing primer. Observe
for lifting, bleeding, blistering, wrinkling, cracking, flaking, or other evidence of
incompatibility.

 Verify that no indication of incompatibility exists at least 14 days after the
application of each product. Perform adhesion tests according to ASTM D3359-08,
method A. Notify the Engineer immediately if adhesion testing fails at the interface
of the existing system and substrate or between the existing finish coat and primer.
An adhesion failure indicates incompatibility. Choose a more compatible paint
system.
3.4.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
The Contractor shall not remove sound paint unless specifically required by the Engineer or
indicated on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall prepare the surface to be painted according to the following process:
(a) New surfaces or surfaces with all existing paint removed
Remove all dirt, mill scale, rust, paint, and other foreign material from exposed surfaces by
blast cleaning to near white metal.
Use compressed air that is free from oil or moisture and does not show black or wet spots
when tested according to ASTM D4285-06. Do not use unwashed sand or abrasives that
contain salts, dirt, oil, or other foreign matter. Before blast cleaning near machinery, seal
bearings, journals, motors, and moving parts against entry of abrasive dust.
Blast clean with clean dry slag, mineral grit, steel shot, or steel grit. Use a suitable gradation
to produce a dense, uniform anchor pattern. Produce an anchor profile height of 25 to 50
micrometers, but not less than that recommended by the paint system manufacturer's product
data sheet. Measure anchor profile height using the tape method according to ASTM
D4417-03
On the same day when cleaning is performed, remove dirt, dust, and other debris from the
surface by brushing, blowing with clean dry air, or vacuuming and apply the first coat of
paint to the blast cleaned surfaces. If the cleaned surfaces rust or become contaminated
before painting, blast cleaning shall be repeated.
(b) Surfaces with existing sound paint
Wash all areas to be painted with pressurized water to remove dirt, surface chalking, loose
rust, and contaminants such as chlorides. Maintain a wash water pressure of at least 3.5 MPa.
Capture all wash water and removed waste according to appropriate regulations.
Clean by an Engineer’s approved method (e.g. hand tool cleaning, power tool cleaning, or
commercial blast cleaning) to remove dirt, loose mill scale, loose rust, or paint that is not
firmly bonded to the underlying surface. Clean small areas that show pinhole corrosion,
stone damage from traffic, or minor scratches. Clean at least 50 millimeters beyond the
damaged areas. Feather edges of remaining old paint to achieve a reasonably smooth
surface.
On the same day when hand- or power-tool cleaning is performed, remove dirt, dust, and
other contaminants from the surface with solvent-cleaning methods according to SSPC-SP 1,
and spot paint all bare steel areas with the first coat of paint. If the cleaned surfaces rust or
become contaminated before painting, repeat solvent cleaning. Repair all damage to sound
paint by applying the entire system.
3.4.3 APPLICATION OF PAINTS
Apply each coat to the wet film thickness as recommended by the paint manufacturer to
obtain the specified dry film thickness. Verify the application rate of each coat with a wet
film paint thickness gauge immediately after applying paint to the surface. Confirm the
application rate by measuring the dry film thickness after the solvent has evaporated from
the surface.

3.5 PAINTING OF GALVANIZED SURFACES
The Contractor shall apply the following process:
 Remove all oil, grease, or other contaminants on the surface by washing with a
mineral spirit solvent; and
 Apply the coating system shown in Table 3 for Other Metals .
3.6 PAINTING TIMBER STRUCTURES
Where painting of timber structures is required by the Engineer or is shown on the Drawings,
the Contractor shall apply the following process:
 Dry timber to a moisture content of 20 percent or less. On previously painted timber,
remove all cracked or peeled paint, loose chalky paint, dirt, and other foreign
material by wire brushing, scraping, or other approved methods. On timber treated
with creosote or oilborne pentachlorophenol preservative, wash and brush away
visible salt crystals on the wood surface and allow drying. Remove all dust or other
foreign material from the surface to be painted.
 Apply the coating system shown in Table 3. The primer may be applied before
erection. After the primer dries and the timber is in place, fill all cracks, checks, nail
holes, or other depressions flush with the surface using approved putty. Evenly
spread and thoroughly work the paint into all corners and recesses. Allow the full
thickness of the applied coat of paint to dry before applying the next coat.
3.7 PAINTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Where painting of concrete structures is required by the Engineer or is shown on the
Drawings, the Contractor shall apply the following process:
 Remove all laitance, dust, foreign material, curing compound, form oil, grease or
other deleterious material from the concrete surface. Remove form oil, grease, or
curing compound by washing with a 5 percent solution of trisodium phosphate and
rinsing with clean water. Allow the surface to dry completely.
 Give the cleaned surface a light abrasive sweep to remove mortar wash or other
contaminants. Remove all residues and dust by hand, broom, compressed air or other
approved methods.
 Apply the coating systems shown in Table 3. Evenly spread and thoroughly work the
paint into all corners and recesses. Allow the full thickness of the applied coat of
paint to dry before applying the next coat.
Table 3 Coating Systems Other Structures
Substrate Paint Coatings
Primer Intermediate Finish Total
Thickness
Smooth Exterior wood Exterior latex or Exterior latex or 130-170μm
Wood primer (1) alkyd alkyd dry
Rough Exterior latex or Exterior latex or Exterior latex or 105-150μm
Lumber alkyd (1) alkyd alkyd dry
Concrete Epoxy single coat 80-100μm dry. For 80-150μm dry
gloss finish, finish with
aliphatic-polyurethane (50μm dry)
Masonry Masonry block Exterior latex or Exterior latex or 120-160μm
Block filler alkyd alkyd dry

Aluminium Metal primer Exterior latex or Exterior latex or 100-140μm
30-40μm dry alkyd alkyd dry
35-50μm dry 35-50μm dry
Other Metal primer (2) Exterior latex or Exterior latex or 105-145μm
Metals 35-45μm dry alkyd alkyd dry
35-50μm dry 35-50μm dry
(1) For untreated wood, thin the primer with up to 0.1 liter of turpentine and 0.1 liter of linseed
oil per liter of paint.
(2) For galvanized surfaces, use an epoxy primer (35-45 micrometers dry thickness) or a vinyl
wash primer (7-13 micrometers dry thickness).
3.8 ACCEPTANCE OF PAINTING
The dry paint thickness on steel structures will be determined according to ASTM D4138-07.
Test locations used for testing for acceptance shall be repaired in an approved manner.
3.9 GALVANIZATION
3.9.1 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZATION
The specifications, requirements and procedure for surface preparation described above for
painting shall apply also for galvanizing works.
3.9.2 GALVANIZING PROCEDURE
Except for pre-galvanized standard pipe, galvanization of material 3.2 mm thick or thicker
shall be performed after fabrication into the largest practical sections.
All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to remove all slag or other
material that would interfere with the adherence of the zinc. When it is necessary to
straighten any sections after galvanizing, such work shall be performed without damage to
the zinc coating.
Galvanizing surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the
zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and removing
all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with three
applications of zinc anticorrosive paint as approved by the Engineer.

Painting and galvanization shall not be measured for direct payment.
Performance of this work shall not be paid for separately, but shall be deemed as a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor for which full payment is included in the applicable unit prices
indicated on the Bill of Quantities for the work items in which it is called for or required.

SECTION 08900 - CONCRETE CURB
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the construction of concrete curbs.
Moreover, this work shall also include curb markings of red and white paint where shown on
the Drawings or where indicated by the Engineer.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be applied to the works covered by this
Specification.
 AASHTO M33-03 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)
 AASHTO M248-03 Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints
2.2 BEDDING
The thickness of bedding material shall be in accordance with the requirements shown on the
Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.
2.3 CONCRETE
Concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be in accordance with the provisions
and requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.4 CEMENT MORTAR
Cement Mortar, shall be in accordance with the provisions and requirements of Specification
Section 08100 “Cement Mortar”.
2.5 CURB PAINT
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or by the Engineer, paint for curbs shall be in
accordance with the specifications of AASHTO M248-03 and Specification Section 08800.
3.1 CONCRETE CURBS
Excavation shall be made to the required depth, and the base shall be compacted to a firm
even surface.
All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with a material that complies
with the provisions and requirements of its respective specifications, and it is approved by
the Engineer.
If so indicated on the Drawings, the bed course material shall be placed and compacted to
form a uniform bed course of the required thickness.
Mortar joints shall be filled for whole cross section, and the joint shall be of 10mm.
The finished work shall be true to line grade and level to within 3 millimeters and shall
present a smooth appearance free from kinks and distortions visible to the eye.
Concrete shall be in accordance with the provisions and requirements of Specification
Section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”

3.2 CURB MARKINGS
Paint shall be applied on the surface that is thoroughly clean and dry as indicated on the
Drawings or required by the Engineer. All loose and detritus matter shall be removed prior to
paint application.
Applications shall not be made over old paint markings that are incompatible with the new
paint being applied.
If a primer or undercoat is necessary to ensure proper adhesion or discolouring, it shall be
fully compatible with the concrete surfaces and the paint being applied.
Paint shall be applied at the rate of application recommended by the manufacturer and
All paint shall be thoroughly mixed in the field to keep pigments in uniform suspension.
The use of thinners or other additives will be permitted unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

Concrete curbs will be measured for payment by the length in linear meters of the structures
of each type and size completed in place and accepted. Measurement will be made along the
center of the curb. No deduction will be made for flattening of curbs for entrances, or for
curb drainage inlets, or for flanged end sections.
Curb Markings shall not be measured separately for payment.
Payment shall be full compensation for the completed and approved work, including:
a) All excavation backfilling, tamping, bedding (in case of Concrete Curb and
Gutter),
b) All paints of required colors and Quality, preformed expansion joint filler (in
case of Curb Marking),
c) and including furnishing and placing all materials, and bedding, mortar, labour,
equipment, tools, and any other incidentals to complete the work in accordance
with the Drawings and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
08900-01 Concrete Curb, type A m
08900-02 Concrete Curb, type B m
08900-03 Concrete Curb, type C m
08900-04 Concrete Curb, type D m
08900-05 Concrete Curb, type E m

SECTION 08910 - INTERLOCKING BLOCK PAVEMENT (BRICK / BLOCK)
1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the furnishing and laying of interlocking concrete blocks (or
bricks) to the lines, grades and locations shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer.
2. MATERIALS
Concrete Blocks and bricks shall be made by an approved manufacturer with recent
experience of supplying blocks to the local authority and shall conform to the following
specifications:
(a) Shape and Colour
General shapes and colour of interlocking blocks shall be decided by the Engineer before
orders are given to the suppliers or manufacturers
(b) Thickness
The following minimum thickness shall apply: 6 cm for sidewalk for pedestrian; 8 cm for
medium/heavy traffic of passenger car, pickup, bus and truck; 10 cm for super heavy traffic
including crane, loader, et
(c) Dimension Tolerance
Dimension tolerances shall be 2 mm for length and width, and 3 mm for thickness
(d) Compressive Strength
The compressive strength average shall be not less than 45 MPa and the crushing strength of
any individual block shall be not less than 40 MPa.
Bricks/ tiles shall conform to TCVN 1450-86 and shall be Class A oven-burnt brick, of
accurate dimensions and size, dark brown color, no cracks or curves. Compressive strength
shall be > 7.5 MPa.
The base shall be granular base course material complying with clause in section 05100 of
these Specifications.
The sand for block/ brick/ tile bedding shall be course sand, which shall be clean, dry and of
moisture content approximately 4 - 8%.
Filler sand shall be finer than 1.18 mm and shall contain approximately 10% silt material
(a) Foundation
The base course shall be of the dimensions shown on the drawings and provide a minimum
CBR value of 50 - 80%. The base course surface shall be laid to the falls required for the
finished block surface. All work on kerbs and other edge boundaries shall be completed
before the blocks or bricks or tiles are laid.
(b) Bedding
The bedding sand shall be dry, spread loose 20% thicker than compacted design thickness
shown on drawings. Using a wooden straightedge, the bedding sand shall be spread and
tamped to follow the designed road surface. Before and after being leveled, bedding sand
shall not be compacted. Where previously prepared bedding is compacted unintentionally,
that portion shall be made loose and leveled again.
(c) Placing of Block/Brick
Placing of blocks or bricks shall start from the edge of the kerbs and follow the design
pattern instructed by the Engineer. The space between the units shall be 2 to 4 mm to
accommodate insertion of filler sand, and work shall be straight and controlled by string
lines and straightedges. Cuts in blocks shall be made with a concrete saw or proprietary
block cutter. Damaged blocks/ bricks shall be rejected and shall not be placed.
(d) Compaction
After blocks/ bricks are laid they shall be compacted with a vibrating plate compactor of
specification as follows:
- Plate area 0.35 - 0.50 sq.m
- Centrifugal force 16 - 20 KN
- Frequency 75 - 100 Hz
- No. of passes Approximately 3 to 4 passes
Block/ brick damaged by this initial compaction shall be replaced by new blocks. After
initial compaction is completed, filler sand shall then be spread and swept to fill the spaces
between block/ bricks. Final compaction shall be done using the same vibrating plate
compactor until the bedding of the blocks/ bricks has been completed. Block/ brick for heavy
traffic shall also be given a final compaction by a tyre roller (TR) of 10 - 14 tonne capacity.
(e) Maintenance
For several weeks or as directed by the Engineer after the block road is opened to traffic,
maintenance is required by refilling the spaces between block/ bricks with filler sand. Ideally,
refilling sand shall be continued before interlocking of block/ brick takes place.

Interlocking block/ brick paving will be measured by the square meter of paved area
complete in place and accepted.
The quantities determined as provided above will be paid for at the contract price per unit of
measurement, which price and payment will be full compensation for ground preparation,
foundation works, supply of block/ brick, the sand bedding, the installation, tamping or
vibrating of the paving, and for all other incidentals necessary to complete the work as
shown on the Drawings.
Pay Item Name Unit of Measurement
08910 - 01 Colour Concrete Paving Blocks square metre

SECTION 08950 - SLOPE PROTECTION
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the supply and installation of slope protection to cuttings and
embankments, and slope protection for abutments as shown on the drawings or as may be
required by the Engineer.
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 CONCRETE
Concrete shall be class C20 concrete, either pre-cast or cast in-situ as indicated on the
drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 07100 “Concrete
and Concrete Structures”.
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Specification Section 07500
“Reinforcing Steel”.
2.1.3 CRUSHED AGGREGATE
Crushed aggregate shall be placed in layers and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density determined according to 22TCN 333-06
The material shall be well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel, stone, rock-fill or natural
sand or a well-mixed combination of any of these. Grading requirements for Granular
Backfill shall be as follows:
Maximum size 5 cm
Liquid limit AASHTO T89 or TCVN4197-95 30% max.
2.1.4 MORTAR
Mortar shall conform to the requirements of this specification Section 08100 “Cement
Mortar”.
Fabrication and construction of slope protection shall be as shown on the drawings.
Construction shall not begin until such time as the construction of the Embankment to the
correct line and level has been approved by the Engineer.
Pre-cast elements shall not be transported to the work site until the concrete has been cured
and has reached the required strength. Ends of pre-cast units to be cast into joints shall be
prepared in accordance with the requirements for construction joints in but without shear
keys.
Excavation shall be carried neatly to the required line and level. Excavations shall not be
further compacted and they shall be free of high or low spots such that the pre-cast beam
sections, when placed, are fully supported along their length and not subject to undue
bending such that they may crack or otherwise be damaged.
Joints shall be cast in-situ fully in accordance with Specification Section 07100 “Concrete
and Concrete Structures” despite the small volume required. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the “box” formed by the beam ends is properly sealed to avoid grout loss during casting.
For type 2 protection crushed aggregate shall not be placed until such time as the concrete in
the joints has reached an acceptable strength subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Slope protection shall be measured for payment by the square metres furnished, placed and
unit of measurement for the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed below. Precast beams,
crushed aggregate bedding, foundation block at toe of slope and its timber pile foundation
shall not be measured separately for payment and their cost shall be deemed included in the
price for slope protection. Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section including transport, handling, furnishing all labour, materials, tests, tools,
equipment and any incidentals to complete the work as shown on the drawings and as
required by these Specifications subject to the approval of the Engineer.
08950-01 Slope Protection Type 1 (RC Cribwork) m2
08950-02 Slope Protection Type 2 (Precast Slab ) m2
08950-03 Slope Protection Type 3 m2
08950-04 Slope Protection for Abutment (Precast Slab type 1) m2

SECTION 08960 - FENCING AND NOISE BARRIERS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification section details the requirements for furnishing and erecting Type 1 (Chain
Link) and Type 2 (Barbed Wire) fencing and noise barriers in accordance with these
specifications and the details lines and grades shown on the drawings to the approval of the
Engineer.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 FABRIC AND WIRE
The chain link fabric shall be woven 4 mm galvanized steel wire in a 63 mm mesh and shall
meet the requirements of ASTM A 392 Class 2.
Barbed wire shall be zinc coated wire in accordance with ASTM A121 - 07 Standard
Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire
2.2 POSTS, RAILS AND BRACES
Line posts, rails, and braces shall be galvanized steel pipe conforming to the requirements of
ASTM F 1083. The steel used in all structural shapes shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 572, Grade 45, and shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM F 1234, Type A. Post, rails, and braces shall demonstrate the ability to withstand
testing in salt spray in accordance with ASTM B 117 with 5% or less red rust over a
1,000-hour period.
2.3 GATES
Gate frames shall consist of galvanized steel pipe and shall conform to the specifications for
the same material under clause 2.2 above. The fabric shall be of the same type material as
used in the fence.
2.4 WIRE TIES AND TENSION WIRES
Wire ties for use in conjunction with a given type of fabric or barbed wire shall be of the
same material and coating weight identified with the fencing type. Tension wire shall be 4.5
mm marcelled steel wire with the same coating as the fabric type or barbed wire and shall
conform to ASTM A 824.
2.5 CONCRETE
Concrete shall be the grade noted on the drawings in accordance with and Specification
section 07100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
2.6 MARKING
Each roll of fabric or barbed wire shall carry a tag showing the kind of base metal (steel,
aluminium, or aluminium alloy number), kind of coating, the gauge of the wire, the length of
fencing or wire in the roll, and the name of the manufacturer. Posts, wire, and other fittings
shall be identified as to manufacturer, kind of base metal (steel, aluminium, or aluminium
alloy number), and kind of coating.
3. CONSTRUCTION
3.1 INSTALLING POSTS
All posts shall be set in concrete at the required dimension and depth and at the spacing
shown on the Drawing. If not indicated, posts shall be spaced not more than 3 meters apart
and shall be set a minimum of 0.90 meters in to concrete footings. The postholes shall be in
proper alignment so that there is a minimum of 75 mm of concrete on all sides of the posts.

The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted around the posts and shall have a smooth finish
slightly higher than the ground and sloped to drain away from the posts. All posts shall be set
plumb and to the required grade and alignment. No materials shall be installed on the posts,
nor shall the posts be disturbed within 7 days after the individual post footing is completed.
3.2 INSTALLING TOP RAILS
The top rail shall be continuous and shall pass through the post tops. The coupling used to
join the top rail lengths shall allow for expansion.
3.3 INSTALLING BRACES
Horizontal brace rails, with diagonal truss rods and turnbuckles, shall be installed at all
terminal posts.
3.4 INSTALLING FABRIC OR BARBED WIRE
The wire fabric or barbed wire shall be firmly attached to the posts and braced in the manner
shown on the Drawing. All wire shall be stretched taut and shall be installed to the required
elevations. The fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground, with the bottom of the
fence fabric between 25 mm and 100 mm above the ground surface. Grading shall be
performed where necessary to provide a neat appearance.
At locations of small natural swales or drainage ditches and where it is not practical to have
the fence conform to the general contour of the ground surface, longer posts may be used and
multiple strands of barbed wire fixed to the posts to span the opening below the fence.
Tension wire is to be installed along the entire fence length.
3.5 ELECTRICAL EARTHING
Electrical earthing shall be constructed at 150-meter intervals where a power line passes
over the fence. The earthing shall be installed directly below the point of crossing. The
earthing shall be accomplished with a copper clad rod 240-cm long and a minimum of 15
mm in diameter driven vertically until the top is 150 mm below the ground surface. A 16 sq.
mm solid copper conductor shall be clamped to the rod and to the fence in such a manner that
each element of the fence is earthed.
4. SUBMITTALS
Prior to placing any fencing, the Contractor shall submit for review and approval complete
fencing shop drawings. Shop drawings shall indicate all materials to be used, line posts, rails
and bracing gates, fence and gate foundations, and fabric and wire. Drawings shall include
all dimensions and location information for the field erection of all fence and gates.
Prior to or concurrent with the submittal of fence shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for review and approval manufacture’s information and data for all fencing
materials supposing conformance with specification requirements.

5.1 MEASUREMENT
Chain-link and Barbed Wire fence will be measured for payment by the linear meter.
Measurement will be along the top of the fence from center to center of end posts, excluding
the length occupied by gate openings.
Gates will be measured as complete units in square meters (m2) of the gate unit from the
outside of the gate frame(s).
5.2 PAYMENT
Payment for chain-link and barbed wire fence and noise barrier will be made at the contract
unit price per linear meter. Payment for driveway or walkway gates will be made at the

contract unit price per m2 of each gate. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing
all materials and for all preparation, erection, and installation of these materials, and for all
shop drawings, necessary grounding, labour equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
Pay item Description Unit
08960-01 Chain Link Fence m
08960-02 Chain Link Fence Gates m2
08960-03 Barbed Wire Fence m
08960-04 Noise barrier (height as shown in Bill of Quantities) m

SECTION 08970 - ANTI-GLARE PANELS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification section details the requirements for furnishing and erecting anti-glare
panels fixed to the central median concrete barrier. The purpose is to prevent glare from
headlights of vehicles travelling on the opposite direction from distracting expressway users.
2. MATERIALS
Anti-glare panels and their fixings shall be entirely constructed of corrosion resistant
material, having stable chemical properties, and resistant to the effect of salt, ultraviolet rays.
Physical properties of the anti-glare board material shall meet the following, or shall provide
equivalent performance.
Tensile strength: ≥ 70MPa
Flexural Strength: ≥ 100MPa
Density: 1700-1800 kg/ m3
Board colour shall be green, and shall have good colour stability.
Working temperature range: 10 - 70 Degrees Centigrade
Board thickness shall be at least 4mm, and of the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Attachment to the concrete median shall be by stainless steel expanding bolts. To ensure
durability, no element of the anti-glare panel and fixings may use mild steel or galvanized
steel. Only plastics, aluminium and stainless steel are permitted. The fixing should allow
easy adjustment of the angle of the panels.
Anti-glare board shall be constructed of glass fiber reinforced plastic, with a matrix of
polyester or epoxy resin.
Lightly curved panels are preferred in order to give a uniform appearance even in case of
minor variation in installation angle of the panels.
3. CONSTRUCTION
Correct installation and alignment of the panels is critical to give a uniform appearance.
Tolerance for installation shall be +/-5mm for horizontal position of the base, +/-5mm for
horizontal position of the top of the board, +/- 1 degree for verticality, +/- 1 degree for
rotation angle of the boards.

4.1 MEASUREMENT
Anti-glare panels will be measured for payment by the number of panels.
4.2 PAYMENT
Payment for anti-glare panels will be made at the contract unit price per unit. The price shall
be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, erection, and
installation of these materials, labour, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
Pay item Description Unit
08970-01 Anti-Glare Panels each

SECTION 08980 - MECHANICALLY STABILISED EARTH WALL
1. GENERAL
Furnishing of a commercially available mechanically stabilized earth wall system at the
locations indicated on the drawings which shall be designed by and constructed under the
control of a specialist company.
The design life of the structures shall be 120 years, and the materials proposed for the facing
panels, connections, and soil reinforcement shall be selected for their durability.
The wall designer shall indemnify the Employer for any losses resulting from defects or
deficiencies in their design for a period of 5 years from completion of the walls. The wall
designer shall carry adequate professional indemnity insurance for this purpose and shall
submit evidence of this fact prior to their approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
further indemnify the Employer against any losses relating to patent infringement in the
works.
The design method used shall comply with the AASHTO Bridge Design Specifications for
mechanically stabilised walls, or equivalent. Fill shall be frictional fill in accordance with
the specification for sand fill material in Section 03200 of this Specification, and having
fines passing the 0.075mm sieve of less than 10%.
Highway loading used in design shall be to AASHTO standard.
Design shall include examination of both internal and external stability cases. If the
founding soil is shown on the drawings as being subject to improvement works whether by
deep soil mixing, sand drains or sand compaction piles or other, the wall designer shall
check whether the foundation as specified meets with the requirements of their design. If the
foundation is not adequate the wall designer shall carry out modification of the foundation
design so that it meets their requirements.
In cases where the wall designer believes that the soils data is insufficient or inadequate with
regards to quality or quantity, the Contractor shall carry out supplementary investigation as
necessary for the wall design. No additional payment for such supplementary investigation
will be made.
2. MATERIALS
Reinforcement shall be inextensible type i.e. metallic strips, sheets, grids or meshes with an
elongation at working stress of less than or equal to 1%.
Facing panel shape and decorative finish shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval by
the Engineer.
Facing panels shall in principle be precast concrete with raised-relief finish to give good
resistance to graffiti.
The reinforced wall system shall be capped by a parapet system and a finish that
complements or replicates the parapet detail of the adjacent bridge. The reinforced soil
designer shall incorporate parapet details indicated on the drawings.
The Contractor shall carry out a fully erected wall panel with the specified surface finish for
the approval of the Engineer at least 3 weeks before the erection of units on site. The cost of
the trial panels shall not be measured separately for payment but will be deemed included in
the unit rates.
3. CONSTRUCTION
Construction of mechanically stabilised earth wall shall not commence until soil
stabilisation works for the foundation have been completed.
Checking of the chemical, mechanical and compaction properties of the fill shall be made
during construction to ensure compliance with the wall designer’s requirements.

Mechanically stabilised earth wall shall be reimbursed on the basis of the number of square
metres of completed wall facing panel completed in accordance with the Contractor’s design
and to the Engineers satisfaction.
The work measured as provided above will be full compensation for design of the wall
including both internal and external stability, supplementary ground investigation where
required, checking of adequacy of foundation improvement and redesign if required,
provision and placing of shallow foundations, facing panels, parapet, soil reinforcement,
backfill, and monitoring during and after construction.
Payment for backfill to the wall shall be reimbursed under the relevant payment item in
Section 03200 of this Specification.
Pay Item No. Name Unit of Measurement
08980-01 Mechanically Stabilised Earth Wall Square metre

DIVISION 9 LIGHTING AND POWER SUPPLY
SECTION 09100 - LIGHTING AND POWER SUPPLY WORKS
1. DESCRIPTION
This Specification details the requirements and procedures for furnishing and installing all
materials and equipment necessary for the highway and bridge lighting systems, other
electrical systems and the modification of existing systems when required, all in accordance
with the Drawings, this Specification section, or such additional details and clarifications as
may be provided by the Engineer. The locations of poles, accessories and attachments shown
on the Drawings are approximate. Exact locations are to be determined on site and
confirmed by the Engineer. This section does not cover electrical works and lighting for
buildings.
The scope of work included in this Specification section covers the supply, delivery to site,
erection, testing and commissioning of all materials and equipment required in connection
with the Electrical Installation to the extent described and shown on the Drawings and
includes but is not necessarily limited to:
a) Preparation and submission of Shop Drawings
b) Submission of detailed Material Lists
c) All work associated with the removal of sections of the existing systems and the
incorporation of the remaining sections in the permanent works.
d) Site measurement of ambient lighting levels to assist the Engineer in his review
of the lighting details shown in the Drawings
e) Countermeasures to the phenomenon of Karman vortex on the bridge lighting
poles. The Contractor shall prepare and submit related data and proposed
countermeasures to the Engineer for approval.
f) Design of necessary power capacity based on the Contractor’s proposed
equipment and arrangement, and submission to the Engineer for approval. The
power capacities shown on the Drawings are for reference only.
g) Negotiation with the power company of a targeted power factor, and design of
appropriate arrangement of equipment to achieve the targeted power factor.
h) All other electrical equipment and services needed to complete a serviceable
facility fit for purpose in accordance with relevant codes and local regulations
for Electrical Installations.
The Electrical work shall be carried out under the supervision of a licensed Electrical
Engineer.
Permissible designed voltage drops are:
 Total Voltage Drop shall be 5 % maximum; and generally
 Voltage drop between the supply point / SS panel and MDP panel or DB panel
should be designed to be less than 3 % for any type of feeder;
 Voltage drop between DB panel and end of lighting circuit should be designed to be
less than 2 % maximum for any type of cable;

The work covered by this specification shall be carried out in accordance with the
regulations issued by the local Electricity Authority and with the following applicable
standards and codes as appropriate:
 QCVN 07:2010/BXD Chapter 7- Urban lighting and expressway light
standard
 QCVN 20:2010/BGTVT National technical regulation on aids to navigation
 QCVN 39-2011/BGTVT National technical code on inland waterway signaling;
Signals;
 11 TCN 18-19-20:2006 Electrical installation regulations in Viet Nam;
 22 TCN 269:2000 Regulations on Navigation signals equipped for
domestic waterways in Viet Nam;
 TCXDVN 259:2001 Artificial lighting design standard road, street, urban
squares
 TCXDVN 319:2004 Vietnamese Construction Standard
 TCVN 333:2005 Design standards of artificial outdoor lighting for
public buildings and urban infrastructure;
 TCVN 4756:1989 Specification on grounding for electrical equipment;
 TCVN 7447-5-51:2010 Installation system of low voltage – Part 5-51 Selection and
installation of electric facilities – General rules.
 TCVN 7447-5-52:2010 Installation system of low voltage – Power line installation
system
 TCVN 9385:2012 Anti-lightning for civil works – Instruction of design,
inspection and maintenance for its system;
 TCVXD5687:1992 Ventilation, Air conditioning and heating
 IEC 60076 Power transformers
 IEC 61024-1 Lightning protection systems
 IEC 61439 Low voltages switchgear and control gear assemblies
 IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switch and control gear – Common
specifications
 IEC 62271-200 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear for
rated voltages for rated voltages above 1kV and up to
and including 52kV
The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied himself that his selected materials and methods
of installation are in accordance with all of the Regulations issued by the local Electricity
Authority.

Regulations and requirements pertaining to navigation signals for vessels shall be in
accordance with international rules in accordance with the “22 TCN 269 – 2000” and
“IALA” requirements and recommendations.
Regulations and requirements for lightning rods and associated grounding systems, using
the rolling sphere method for lightning protection, shall be in accordance with all of the
Regulations issued by the local Electricity Authority and reference:
 TCVN 9385:2012;
 IEC 62305-1; and
 NFC 17-102.
2.2 DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the location of all other utility services so as to
maintain adequate clearance between electrical and other services. Supplied drawings
indicate the general arrangement of the work only.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings showing the exact routes of all underground or
overhead cables and ducts, the exact run of all conduits and trunking, the location of
manholes, draw-in and junction boxes, the number and size of wires in each conduit or
trunking, the final connection arrangements at street lighting panels, the detail of ducts and
the method of fixing street lighting panels for the approval of the Engineer before
commencing any portion of the Works.
The Contractor shall include all installations, cable routings as well as known locations of
existing electrical lines and utilities on his “As Built” drawings prepared in accordance with
the Conditions of Contract.
Upon completion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, the Contractor shall
supply Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
2.3 MATERIALS
2.3.1 MATERIALS FOR LIGHTING UNITS
(a) General
Lighting units as shown on the Drawings shall consist of lighting lantern, lamps, electrical
control ballast(s), and mounting accessories. Lamps for the bridge, Overpass Bridge,
Flyover Bridge, cross road under Bridge, main roads, Toll Plaza and Interchange shall be
high-pressure sodium type. The Contractor shall submit for approval, detailed light
distribution diagrams, technical specifications, and details of control software and software
compatibility for each type of lantern he proposes to install. Furthermore, calculations shall
be submitted showing the luminance in candela per sq.m (cd/m2) at street level for
carriageway, loop and ramp of interchange, and illuminance in lux at toll plaza areas.
Lamp shall have an average life of not less than 18,000 hours. Mean lumen depreciation
shall not exceed 10%.
(b) Luminaire Units (Pole Mounted)
Road luminaire 150W type: Lighting for Ramp way, degree of protection is IP66, body
made of high pressure die cast aluminium, toughened front glass, the reflector is made of
high purity aluminium. Lamps shall be 150 watts high-pressure sodium, AC 240V-50Hz.
Luminaire shall have a certificate of compliance with Standard EN/IEC 60598 or equivalent.
Road luminaire 250W type: Lighting for main road, degree of protection is IP66, body made
of high pressure die-cast aluminium, toughened front glass, the light reflector is made of
high purity aluminium. Lamps shall be 250 watts high-pressure sodium, used AC

240V-50Hz. Luminaire shall have a certificate of compliance with Standard EN/IEC 60598
or equivalent..
Flood light 400W type: Lighting for Tollgates, degree of protection is IP66; body made of
high pressure die cast aluminium, the reflector is made of high purity aluminium, toughened
front glass. Lamps shall be 400 watts high-pressure sodium, used AC 240V-50Hz.
Flood light 2x400W (800W) type: Lighting for Interchange, degree of protection is IP66,
body made of die-cast aluminium, the reflector is made of high purity aluminium, toughened
front glass. Lamps shall be two of 400 watts high-pressure sodium, used AC 240V-50Hz.
(c) Ballast’s for High Pressure Sodium Lamp
Ballast for high-pressure sodium lamps shall be designed to properly operate the lamp at the
two power levels as designated in the Drawings.
All ballasts shall be dry-proof canned polyester-filled in compliance with Standard EN/IEC
60922/60923 or equivalent and shall be equipped with terminal blocks for the electrical
connections.Instructions for making the electrical connection shall be printed clearly on the
can of the ballast.
The power factor of a lamp combination shall have a value higher than 0.85 and shall be
achieved by connecting parallel capacitors with sufficient capacitance across the mains. The
capacitors used for the purpose shall be suitable to operate at a normal voltage of at least 240
V 50 Hz and shall comply with Standard EN/IEC 61048/61049 or equivalent.
The bi power ballast function shall be equipped for reducing power consumption by 40% of
full power at night. The bi power ballast shall be operated by timer setting in the Lighting
Control Panel.
(d) Luminaire units (Ceiling / Wall mounted)
Floodlight 150W type: Underbridge lighting, degree of protection is IP66, body made of
high pressure die cast aluminium, the reflector is made of high purity aluminium. Lamps
shall be 150 watts high-pressure sodium, used AC 230V-50Hz. Luminaire is produced in
compliance with Standard EN60598 or equivalent.
Luminaire 36 watts fluorescent lamp type: Underpass lighting, degree of protection is IP65.
Other details are referred the drawing.
2.3.2 MATERIALS FOR LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
All lighting panels shall be as shown on the Drawings.
The components shall be designed for 3-phase 4-wire, 50 Hertz operation at 415/240 volts.
The components shall be in accordance with the following items:
(a) Circuit Breakers
 The circuit breakers shall be moulded case, air break type, rated for 600-volt AC
service. The circuit breakers shall have 3-poles or single-pole unless otherwise
noted.
 The circuit breakers shall provide inverse time tripping for overloads and
instantaneous action and overload ten (10) times the normal rating.
 The circuit breakers shall be arc resisting contact type and be provided with
trip-free lever handles and arc quenchers.

(b) Magnetic Contactors
 The magnetic contactors shall be moulded case type, rated for 440-volt AC service.
The magnetic contactors shall be of 3-poles and the rated current shall be not less
than 75% of the maximum load current.
 The magnetic contactors shall be controlled by AC 240 volt and shall be capable to
hold contact securely even if the control voltage drops by 85 percent.
(c) Control Equipment
 Power Switch
Power switching for multiple lighting circuits shall be possible by all of the 3 methods as
mentioned below:
 Photo electric device (if available in Vietnam, including maintaining)
 Programmable timer with spring reserve
 Manual operation
Selection of each of the above methods shall be possible by means of a rotary switch located
within the panel.
 Timer Switch
 Time switch units shall have two control elements: one shall be for "on" control
at evening and "off" at early morning and the other for reduced current control at
midnight for saving energy, all as shown on the Drawings.
 Both "on" and "off" time settings shall be available for any of the 24 hours and
the minimum setting increment shall be one minute.
 The timer switch shall operate on 240 volts, 50 Hz.
 Timer switches installed in the lighting control panels shall have an emergency
driving device capable of operating for 48 hours in the case of failure of the incoming
power source.
 Supervision signals for Power supply equipment
 In case of power failure at the substation and trip operation of circuit breakers for
feeder lines, failure and trip signals shall be equipped in the lighting control panel for
supervising power supply equipment.
 For future extension of supervising functions, panels shall have space for future
installation of watt hour meters for data acquisition.
2.3.3 MATERIALS FOR SUBSTATION
All power supply for lighting shall be as shown on the Drawings.
The components shall be designed for 3-phase 4-wire, 50 Hz operation at 415/240 volts.
The components shall be in accordance with the Power Supply Company’s Standards and
Vietnam Standards:
a) Distribution Panel
b) Lightning Arrestors
c) Cut-out Fuses
d) Transformers
e) Low Voltage Power Cable from Transformer to Distribution Panel

f) Concrete Poles and support fixtures
g) Overhead Medium Voltage Cables from existing distribution line including
support and insulators
2.3.4 MATERIALS FOR WATERWAY NAVIGATION LIGHT
(a) Lighting Units
Lighting units shall be flashing lights with swivel suspension. They shall be provided
complete with a battery box, rechargeable DC power storage batteries (having a minimum
operating time of two hours without charging), a control box with an AC-DC converter,
necessary breakers, a terminal board and all accessories and cables needed to provide a
complete operational system.
Lighting units shall be securely fixed to the edge beam or soffit of the bridge. The navigation
light shall have 240 volts 60 watts incandescent type long life lamps, or 10 watts or higher
LED lamps in accordance with the Vietnamese Standards.
The lighting unit shall be a bracket-mounted or ceiling mounted type. The minimum class
protection shall be IP 54 for the entire optical unit which shall be suitable for a humid
tropical environment.
(b) Flashing Lights
Lighting units shall be flashing type, white, and green or white, green and red (as required by
drawings) that flash on and off at regular intervals at the same intensity with an on-of time of
more than two seconds. Effective intensity shall not be less than 27candela.
(c) DC-DC Converter
The DC-DC converter shall convert an input voltage of DC 16V to DC 28V from the control
box to DC 12V for LED lanterns
(d) Control Box
The control box (in accordance with drawings) shall provide conversion of AC 240 volts to
DC 24 volts, operate the required functions of the system, provide “float” charging of the
stand-by battery (ies), provide automatic switch- over to DC power in case of power failure
and prevent stand-by battery over discharge. The control box shall be made of stainless steel
(SUS3O4, 2.3 mm thick).
(e) Stand-By Battery
Battery (ies) shall be rechargeable, fully sealed, lead-acid, maintenance free with a 24 volt
40 AH capacity.
2.3.5 MATERIALS FOR POLES AND HIGH MASTS
(a) Lighting Poles
Lighting poles shall be galvanized steel, in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings and/or as stipulated under Specification section 08800.
All pole items shall be galvanized steel and all hardware shall be galvanized steel. Scratches,
marks, dents or other damages to poles and fittings will be cause for rejection. Any marks or
stains resulting from wrapping materials shall be removed.
All poles and arms shall be individually spiral wrapped and, in addition, they shall be packed
for shipping in groups with suitable form fitting wood damage between all poles and
completely around each group at a minimum of 4 locations, and held with suitable metal
strapping. Arms shall be wrapped, packed and shipped to the job site with a minimum of
reloading between points of origin and destination. Packing not in conformance with this
provision shall be cause for rejection of poles and/or arms.

All miscellaneous pole line hardware required to complete the work shall be standard
material manufactured for pole line construction.
All metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized as stipulated under Specification section 08800
“Surface Treatment of Steel”.
(b) High Masts
The masts shall be made of steel folded in conical sections, automatically welded in one
longitudinal seam. The sections shall be telescopic jointed or by means of bolts. If bolted
joints are used, flanges shall not disturb the aesthetics of the silhouette of the mast and
should preferably be positioned inside the mast.
The steel parts of the mast shall be hot dip galvanized over their entire surface in accordance
with the requirements of Specification section 07300 “Surface Treatment of Steel”.
Anchor bolts shall conform to the specifications of JIS B 1180 and B 1181 or equal, and each
shall be provided with 2 nuts and 2 washers. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be
galvanized over their entire surface in accordance with the requirements of Specification
section 08800
For the maintenance purpose of lanterns and exchange of lamp, the position of lanterns
bracket shall be operated by motor and/or hand from top to bottom.
2.3.6 CABLE, GROUNDING, SPLICES AND CONDUIT
(a) Wiring for Lighting
All cables to be used for roadway lighting shall be of the type and size shown on the
Drawings.
Cables shall be pulled into a pole through ducts installed in the foundation of the pole, and
shall be connected to the terminals in the terminal box installed in the pole.
The mounting boards of all poles shall include an approved miniature circuit breaker rated 6
amperes, 240 volts accessible through the access plate of the pole. The circuit breaker shall
protect both the pole cables and the electrical control ballast.
Cables installed in the pole shall have two conductors of minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2
as prescribed in "Cable and Wire" herein.
Cables shall be attached to the lantern so that lantern terminals do not carry the cable weight.
(b) Cable and Wire
All cables shall be suitable for operation at the specified voltage in open duct or conduit
under the condition of the maximum conductor operating temperature which, at the rated
current, shall be less than 70 degrees C.
Cable colours shall comply with Vietnam Standards or other approved colour code
standards.
Cables shall be delivered to the Site on substantial wooden drums, each bearing a securely
fixed label stating gross weight, serial number, length of cable and other relevant
information.
Covers shall be provided around the periphery of the drum in order to protect the cable in
transit and the inner cable end shall be adequately protected by a metal guard or other
approved means. Both ends of the cable shall be sealed by a suitable method to prevent the
entrance of moisture.
All cables for the roadway lighting system to be installed underground shall be
Cu-XLPE/PVC/PVC or equivalent subject to approval by the Engineer.

Conductors shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 for use in underground
installations.
All cables shall be delivered with an appropriate test certificate and approved by the
Engineer before use.
(c) Grounding
Conduit, steel poles and cabinets shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form
a continuous system, and shall be effectively grounded. Bonding and grounding jumpers
shall be copper wire of the same cross-sectional area for all systems.
Metallic boxes shall employ hubs of double lock nuts and bushes. The bonding of all
conduits, junction boxes, lighting poles and panels to form a continuous ground system shall
be in accordance with applicable codes and standards. Lighting poles in embankment
sections shall be individually grounded and connected together to ensure safety. Lighting
poles on bridges shall be grounded separately for each pole group as shown on the Drawings.
Grounding wire shall be a minimum 10 mm2 cross section area Bare Copper Conductor
(BCC) or equivalent subject to approval by the Engineer.
Ground rods shall be galvanized steel D16x2400 millimetre minimum, depth 0.7 meter
below finished grade and thermo-welded or connected using connection hardware to the
poles and controllers.
The Contractor shall investigate each site and measure the grounding resistance of the site.
The Contractor shall provide the data to the Engineer and obtain his approval before
installation.
The grounding resistance shall be 10 ohms or less, or as approved by the Engineer.
Details of all grounding points shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(d) Electrical Splice
Splices and taps shall be made with pressure type solder-less connectors to securely joint the
wires both mechanically and electrically.
Epoxy resin, cast type insulation shall be formed in clear plastic moulds. The material used
shall be compatible with the insulation specified in the Contract Drawings or these
Specifications. Materials to be used for the work shall conform to the requirements of
IEC60587, or JIS C 2804, C 2805, and C 2806, or equivalent subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Insulating tape when specified for use in splice formation shall conform to JIS C 2336 or
equivalent.
(e) Cable tray and Mounting Bracket for Cable Tray
The Contractor shall design and provide necessary cable trays for the locations indicated on
the drawings. The trays shall be securely fixed so that distance between the supports is less
than 2 meters. The cable trays shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. For cable tray
installed in exposed locations, the cable tray, and all mounting bracket fittings shall be the of
the highest quality for durability.
2.3.7 MATERIALS FOR AIR OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (AHWL)

(a) General
The Air Obstruction Lights (AHWL) shall comply with International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO), Appendix 14, Volume 1; and be consulted Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America Lighting Handbook (published in 2007), or the latest version, and
shall have been approved by the following Organizations before starting the Works;
 Combatant Bureau – General Staff Vietnam People’s Army
 Executive and Management Division of the Air Defence and air force Armed
Service Staff
 Vietnam Air Traffic Management Corporation (Vatm) – Civil Aviation
Administration of Vietnam
(b) Type of AHWL
The type of and installation location on the pylon shall be:
Location Type Colour Intensity Step Duration Peak Intensity cd

Top A: Flush White: Day Day-time, < 10ms 270,000 ± 25%
time twilight and 20,000 ± 25%
Red: Night night-time 2,000 ± 25%
½ B: Steady Red Night-time 32.5
The Contractor shall select the appropriate lamps and system as shown in the detail
drawings.
3.1 EXECUTION OF THE WORK
The actual fabrication, installation, and testing of the work described in this Specification
section shall be carried out by trained and experienced personnel who are familiar with the
requirements for this work and with the manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of
the specified items.
All work shall comply with the Drawings, this Specification section and the codes,
regulations and requirements stipulated in this Specification section or by the relevant
Vietnamese Authorities.
3.2 LIGHTING UNITS
Lighting units as shown on the Drawings shall consist of lamps, canopy, body, electrical
control ballasts, and mounting accessories.
The Contractor shall submit for approval light distribution diagrams for each type of lantern
he proposes to install. Unless specifically shown on the drawings or instructed by the
Engineer, all lanterns should be of the semi-cut off or fully cut off type.
Permitted spill light levels shall be controlled on both the front and rear of the lighting unit as
follows: At the right of way limit on the opposite side of the road – maximum 5 Lx, and at
the right of way limit to the rear of the lighting unit – zero. The Contractor shall submit
factory test data to demonstrate conformance with these spill light levels.
3.3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
The lighting control panels shall be included as feeders of the power source fed to the
circuits of the street lighting. The panels shall be as shown on the Drawings or equivalent
subject to approval by the Engineer.
The panels shall be substantial, free-standing structures on a concrete foundation a minimum
of 40 cm above ground level or mounted on the substation pole.
Panel roofs shall be in conformance with the Drawings or equivalent subject to approval by
the Engineer.

The panel and door shall be made from fully-finished steel sheet not less than 2.3 millimetres
in thickness with the necessary steel frames. The welding for all outside joints shall be
smooth finished.
The panel shall have a bottom design that will permit tack welding to channels that shall be
set on the raised concrete foundation or mounted on the substation the pole.
The panel shall be fully assembled and wired at the factory.
Main and small wiring shall be easily accessible for maintenance and inspection. Small
wiring shall be effectively isolated from the main wiring.
Each panel shall have one or more nameplates for identification. Nameplates shall be made
of laminated plastic with white characters to show through a black top layer when cut or
engraved.
Panel housings shall be fitted with a substantial lock with a master key if appropriate.
3.4 SHIP NAVIGATION LIGHTING UNITS / AIR OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (AHWL)
3.4.1 SHIP NAVIGATION LIGHTING UNITS
General locations are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall propose the exact
location to the Engineer for his approval.
3.4.2 AIR OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (AHWL)
The air obstruction lights (AHWL) shall be set on the pylons of bridges as shown on the
drawings.
3.5 POLES
3.5.1 LIGHTING POLES
All poles supplied shall be of the anchor base type, and shall have a cast steel anchor base
fitted over the shaft.
The service door and cover plate for the terminal connection shall be 1.0 meter above ground
level.
Identification plates shall be attached to each lighting pole.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION
All workmanship shall be complete and in accordance with the latest accepted standards of
the industry, as determined by the Engineer.
Installation of ducts, construction of manholes, and excavation for cable or ducts shall be in
accordance with requirements indicated on the Drawings.
3.6.1 WIRE
Wiring shall conform to the requirements of appropriate codes. Wiring within cabinets,
manholes, etc. shall be neatly arranged and within cabinets shall be laced.
Powdered soapstone, talc, or lubricant shall not be used in placing conductors in conduit.
Splicing in conductors will be permitted only at manholes, transformer leads, in pole bases,
or at control equipment.
3.6.2 POWER SERVICE POINTS
Power service points are located within or close to the Site, normally, but not necessarily
always, at the sub-station transformer house nearest the project main lighting panel
designated on the drawings.
Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, each service point shall include a power
consumption meter (wattmeter) installed in accordance with serving utility requirements, a
three wire service breaker of size noted on the Drawings, the necessary conduit risers and
grounding assembly.
In general, all multiple lighting will be 240 volts, 50 Hz or as noted on the Drawings.
3.6.3 FIELD TEST
The Contractor shall conduct the following tests on the lighting circuits in the presence of
the Engineer prior to completion of the work.
 Test for continuity of each circuit.
 Test for grounding in each circuit.
 A megger test on each circuit between the conductor and ground with all
switchboards, panel boards, fuse holders, switches, and socket outlets and over
current devices in place and all readings recorded. The Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with three copies of the test results identifying observed readings with
their respective circuits. The insulation resistance between conductor and ground
shall be not less than 10 mega-ohms.
 A functional test in which it is demonstrated that each and every part of the system
functions as specified or intended herein.
If any fault in any material or in any part of the installation is revealed by these tests the
faulty work shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor in a manner approved by the
Engineer, and the same test shall be repeated until no fault appears.
3.6.4 PAINTING
All painting required should be in conformance with applicable portions of Specification
“Painting”.
If the enclosure of any electrical equipment (less signal heads) located above ground does
not have an exterior surface of either aluminium or galvanizing, then it shall be finished with
two coats of an approved zinc based paint, plus such finishing coat as may be approved by
the Engineer.
Controller cabinets shall be finished in accordance with the above requirements for electrical
equipment.
Galvanized steel or aluminium lighting poles and lighting lanterns shall not be painted
without prior approval by the Engineer.
3.6.5 LIGHTING POLES
Lighting poles shall at all times be handled and erected in such a manner that they will not be
damaged.
Any damage due to the Contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Lighting poles shall not be erected on concrete foundations until foundations have set at least
72 hours.
3.6.6 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Where specifically detailed on the Drawings for service locations where two or more
lighting circuits are operated from one time switch control device, the relays, service
breakers and any other necessary control equipment shall be grouped together and installed
in a suitable rain-tight enclosure of a sufficient size to accommodate all of the equipment
installed therein.
Each electrical control ballast assembly shall be protected by moulded circuit breakers.

The overall lighting system shall be capable of being monitored and controlled remotely
using software and hardware installed in the expressway maintenance office.
3.6.7 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall transfer to the Employer any guarantee or warranty required as a
normal trade practice in connection with the purchase of any materials or items used in the
construction of the lighting system included in this Contract.

The quantity of each item paid for under this clause will be the measured number of units or
linear meters, or shall be paid as lump sums as detailed below for items which are furnished
and installed in accordance with this specification, the drawings and the instructions of the
Engineer.
4.1.1 LIGHTING SET (UNIT-EACH)
Shall be paid for each lighting set including furnishing, transportation, erection, installation
and acceptance by the Engineer of the pole or mast, luminaire(s), inlet and outlet conduit for
cables, mounting board and accessories, ancillary materials. The costs for the cables inside
the lighting poles (between the circuit breaker and the luminaire) will be considered to be
included in the cost of the lighting set.
4.1.2 LIGHTING CONTROLLER (UNIT-EACH)
Shall be paid for each lighting controller, inclusive of the internal wiring, switches and
equipment, conduit for cable, site testing with collection of data, field painting, and
associated works for each controller furnished, mounted, and installed in place and accepted
by the Engineer.
4.1.3 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL
(UNIT-SUM)
Shall be paid for the lighting control system, inclusive of computer hardware, software,
cabling, ducting and power supply, switches and equipment, conduit for cable, site testing
with collection of data, and associated works for a control system furnished, operational and
4.1.4 UNDERGROUND CABLES AND BARE COPPER WIRE (UNIT-METRE)
The furnishing and laying of each type of cable shall be measured in place by the linear
meter of the cables or bare copper wire laid, field tests, and other requirements. The quantity
measured for payment shall be the number of meters of cables furnished, installed in place
and accepted by the Engineer. Cable length shall be the theoretical length as measured on the
drawings, and shall not include any allowance for waviness in cable trenches.
4.1.5 GALVANIZED STEEL GROUNDING ROD (UNIT-EACH)
The furnishing of steel grounding rod, steel grounding wire, grounding lug and driving the
rod according to the drawing.
4.1.6 ELECTRICAL POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEM INSIDE CABLE STAY
BRIDGE PYLONS
The electrical works inside the cable stay bridge pylons shall be paid as a lump sum.
4.1.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Lighting protection for all of the structures and facilities shall be paid as a lump sum.

4.1.8 TRAFFIC SIGNALS FOR INTERSECTION (UNIT – EACH)
Measurement of traffic signals shall be by the number of intersections furnished with a
complete traffic signal system. Payment for traffic signal systems shall be for the provision
of a complete system including power supply, poles and mounting fixtures, signal controller,
cabling and ducting and all associated civil works. For the provision of traffic signal systems,
no separate payment will be made for cabling, foundations, conduit, excavation and
backfilling or any other pay items.
4.1.9 BRIDGE NAVIGATION LIGHT / AIR OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (UNIT-EACH)
The work will include furnishing, transportation, and installation and acceptance by the
Engineer of each complete set of navigation or air obstruction lighting for one complete
bridge including beacon and mounting accessories, cable, conduit, power failure backup
battery, ancillary materials, testing and accepted by the Engineer.
The quantity measured as provided above, shall be paid for in accordance with applicable
Unit Prices as indicated on the Bid Price Schedule. The price and payment will be full
compensation for all the work shown on the Drawings or described in these Specifications.
The scope of work included in each pole item shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
described in these Specifications.
The payment for cables will be full compensation for the furnishing, laying or pulling, and
jointing cables.
Payment for power connection to EVN shall include all required costs for obtaining
agreement of the power company.
Payment for the power supply and lighting system inside cable stay bridge pylons shall
include panels, sockets, lighting units, cable, grounding, conduit and fixings for all of the
electrical works installed inside the cable stay bridge pylons.
Payment for the lightning protection system shall include all required lightning antennae,
elevation rods, lighting conductors, down conductors, and earth electrodes, grounding
connections and wiring, fitting and all necessary equipment, materials, devices and
incidentals necessary for complete operation.
Payment for traffic signal systems shall be for the provision of a complete system including
power supply, poles and mounting fixtures, signal controller, cabling and ducting and all
associated civil works. For the provision of traffic signal systems, no separate payment will
be made for cabling, foundations, conduit, excavation and backfilling or any other pay items.
Pay Item Description unit
09100-01 Street Lighting Type 1-HPS 250W x 1-12m each
09100-05 Street Lighting Type 5-HPS 150W (Ceiling / Wall mounted) each
09100-06 Street Lighting Type 10-Flood light 400W x 2-14m each
09100-07 Street Lighting Type 11-Flood light 400W x 4-14m each
09100-08 Street Lighting Type 12- Flood light 2x400W x 6-25m each
09100-09 Street Lighting Type 13- Flood light 2x400W x 9-25m each
09100-10 Warning Light at Interchange off-ramp each
09100-11 Lighting control system for remote monitoring and control each
09110-01 Panel PSS (240x240x350xM16) (including anchor bolts) each
09110-02 Panel DB (250x250x450xM24) (including anchor bolts) each
09110-03 Panel MDP (250x250x450xM24) (including anchor bolts) each
09120-01 CU/XLPE/PVC/PVC 4x25 mm2 m
09120-02 CU/XLPE/PVC/PVC 4x16 mm2 m
09120-02a CU/XLPE/PVC/PVC 4x10 mm2 m
09120-03 CU/PVC/PVC 2x6 mm2 m
09120-04 CU/PVC/PVC 4x2.5 mm2 m
09130-01 Grounding Wire 10mm2 m
09130-02 Grounding Wire CU/XLPE/PVC 1x10mm2 m
09130-03 Grounding Rod with Copper Plating each
09130-04 Protective Multiple Grounding Set each
09130-05 Connecting Protective Multiple Ground to Lighting Poles on Bridge
lump sum
09140-01 Lightning Protection System lump sum
09150-01 Perforated Steel Cable Tray Width 900mm including mounting
brackets m
09150-02 Power Supply and Lighting System inside Cable Stay Bridge Pylons
lump sum
09160-01 Power Connection to EVN each
09160-02 Pole Mounted Sub-station (SS) 22 kV/ 0.4kV/ 25 kVA each
09160-03 Pole Mounted Sub-station (SS) 22 kV/ 0.4kV/ 31.5kVA each
09160-04 Pole Mounted Sub-station (SS) 22/0.4kV/50 kVA each
09160-05 Pole Mounted Sub-station (SS) 22/0.4kV/75 kVA each
09170-01 Traffic signal system (per complete intersection) each
09180-01 Ship navigation lights (per complete bridge) each
09180-02 Air obstruction lights (per complete bridge) each

SECTION 09200 - CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this clause shall include the provision of foundations, lighting blisters,
anchor bolts, junction boxes and conduit, duct bank, for electrical works in both bridge and
earthworks sections as required in the drawings, and as necessary for the installation of the
electrical facilities as described in Specification Section 09100.
2. MATERIALS
All materials used shall conform to the details given in the Drawings. In the absence of any
details in the drawings, the work shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant sections
of the Specifications and the instruction of the Engineer.
(a) Conduit Pipe
Conduit/ducts to be installed below ground or embedded in concrete shall be HDPE or FEP
or equivalent, except where crossing roads where steel conduit shall be used. Conduit to be
installed above ground or on the surface of structures shall be steel or equivalent subject to
approval by the Engineer
HDPE (High density polyethylene) duct shall conform to IEC 61386-2, JISC 3653, or
equivalent and FEP (Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene) duct shall conform to IEC 61386 or
JISC 3653 or equivalent. Size of pipe / duct shall follow standard sizes manufactured in Viet
Nam.
Exterior and interior surfaces of all steel conduits shall be uniformly and adequately
zinc-coated by a hot-dip galvanizing process.
Conduit to be embedded in concrete shall be PVC in accordance with the requirements of
IEC61084-2-1 or JIS C 8430.
(b) Manhole
Manhole to be installed for underground cables and communication cables shall be pre-cast
concrete or as shown on the drawings in accordance with Vietnam standards.
(c) Junction box
Junction box type-A, B and C of appropriate dimensions shall be installed as shown in the
Drawings. The body shall be fabricated from 3.2 mm mild steel sheet, hot-dip-galvanized.
Covers shall be 3mm type SUS 304 stainless steel or hot dip galvanised 3.2 mm mild steel
sheet. No sharp projections from screws or other objects shall be permitted within the box.
The covers shall be watertight by rubber gasket.
3. CONSTRUCTION
3.1 ANCHOR BOLTS IN CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Details of anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be fixed
in the concrete structure positions and held in place by means of templates until the concrete
has set.
3.1.1 FOUNDATIONS FOR LIGHTING POLES
Concrete for foundations for lighting poles and pedestals of cabinets shall be of the class
shown on the Drawings.
All details of concrete and reinforcement for foundations shall conform to the requirements
of the appropriate specification.

The anchor bolts shall be hot dip galvanized. The top of the anchor bolts shall be protected
by hexagon cap nuts or equivalent means.
3.1.2 FOUNDATIONS AND MANHOLES
Concrete for foundations shall be the Class indicated on the drawings and shall be provided
in accordance with the appropriate Specifications.
The bottom of concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground.
Foundations shall be poured in one pour where practicable.
The exposed portions shall be formed to present a neat appearance.
Forms shall be true to line and grade.
Tops of footings for poles, except special foundations, shall be finished to ground line or
sidewalk grade, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in place.
Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in their proper position and height and shall be
held firmly in place until concrete sets.
Plumbing or raking of poles shall be accomplished by the adjustment of levelling nuts and
bolts. Shims or other similar devices shall not be used.
Formwork and ground in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened before
placing concrete.
Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has set for at least 3 days.
A "rubbed surface finish" shall be applied to exposed surfaces of concrete in accordance
with the requirements of requirements of “Concrete and Concrete Structures”.
Where obstructions prevent construction of a foundation as detailed, the Contractor shall
propose and construct an effective foundation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.1.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
The excavation and back-filling required for the foundations of poles and other appliances
should be performed in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Specifications
and the cost is deemed to be included in the unit rate.
3.1.4 CONDUIT
Installation of conduit shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications and in
reasonably close conformity with the locations as noted on the Drawings or as agreed by the
Engineer.
The size of conduit used shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Conduits smaller than 22mm electrical trade size shall not be used, unless otherwise
specified.
The Contractor may at his own expense use larger size conduit. Such larger size conduit
shall be for the entire length of the run from outlet to outlet and no reducing couplings will be
permitted.
The ends of all conduits shall be well reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Field cuts
shall be made square and true so that the ends will butt or come together for the full
circumference.
Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling conduit. When a standard
coupling cannot be used, an approved threaded union coupling shall be used.

The threads of all steel conduits shall be well painted with good quality lead or
rust-preventative paint before couplings are made up.
All screwed steel couplings shall tighten until the ends of the conduits are brought together
so that a good electrical connection will be made throughout the entire length of the conduit
run. Where coating on steel conduit has been damaged by handling or installation, such
damaged areas shall be painted with rust-preventative paint.
All conduit ends shall be threaded and capped with standard conduit couplings capped with
conduit push pennies until wiring is started.
When couplings and push pennies are removed the threaded ends shall be provided with
approved conduit bushings. The use of any plugs, even though temporary, in lieu of the
aforementioned conduit couplings and push pennies is expressly prohibited.
Conduit stubs from bases shall extend at least 15 cm from the face of foundations and at least
80 cm below the top of foundations.
Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than six times the inside
diameter of the conduit.
Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent using an approved conduit bending
tool employing correctly sized dies, without crimping or flattening, using the longest radius
practicable.
All PVC conduit bends shall be pre-formed.
Conduit terminating in poles or pedestals shall extend approximately 15 cm above the
foundation vertically and shall be sloped towards the hand-hole opening.
Conduit entering through the bottom of a junction box shall be located near the end walls to
leave the major portion of the box clear.
At all outlets, conduit shall enter from the direction of the run, terminate 15 to 20 cm below
the pull box lid and within 9 cm of the box wall nearest its entry location.
Suitable markers shall be set at the ends of conduits that are covered so that they may be
easily located.
A pull wire shall be installed in all conduits that are to receive future conductors. At least 60
cm of pull wire shall be doubled back into the conduit at each termination.
3.2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE) IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE
The installation of the required pipe shall be performed in accordance with the
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the locations as specified in the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The size of HDPE pipe used shall be as shown in the Drawings. Pipe which smaller than 50
mm diameter electrical trade size shall not be used, unless otherwise specified. It shall be the
option of the Contractor, at his own expense, to use larger size conduit if desired, and where
larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of the run from pull box to pull box.
No reducing coupling will be permitted.
3.2.1 JUNCTION (PULL) BOXES
Junction (Pull) boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings, and at such
additional points as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor may install, at his own expense, such additional boxes as may be desired to
facilitate the work.

3.3 PULL BOX IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE
Pull boxes shall be installed in concrete structure at the location shown in the Drawing, and,
at such additional point as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor may install, at his own
expense, such additional boxes as may be desired to facilitate the works.
Electrical Manhole / Handhole
All details of manhole or Handhole or both shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
Conduit or duct endings shall be fixed in the proper position and held in place by means of
templates until the concrete has set.
An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to exposed concrete surface in accordance with
section 7100 “Concrete and Concrete Structures” of these Specifications.
Excavation for cable installation shall be of the width necessary for satisfactory laying of the
cable and shall ensure that cables are at least 600 mm below finished level.
The bottom of the cable trench shall be level and free from stones or other sharp objects. The
depth of the cable may be increased if this is necessary to avoid existing obstructions.
3.4 UNDER GROUND DUCT
The location of duct will be as shown in Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Unless the Contractor elects at his own expense to install duct by jacking or drilling, all work
on ducts shall be completed before work is started on the sub-base course.
Full details of any ducts to be installed by jacking or drilling must be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval.
Unless otherwise instructed, all ducts shall extend at least 600 mm beyond the edge of the
pavement.
Suitable marker stakes shall be set at the ends of ducts which are buried so that they may be
easily located. Existing underground ducts to be incorporated into a new system shall be
blown out with compressed air and checked with a mandrel.
A galvanized pull wire shall be installed in all ducts which are to receive future cables.
At least 600 mm of pull wire shall be doubled back into the duct at each termination.
All ducts shall be laid in straight lines only, with a minimum number of joints throughout the
lengths of each duct run.
Where joints must be provided the ends of all ducts shall be well reamed to remove burrs and
rough edge.
Where metallic conduits have been specified field cuts shall be made square and true so that
the ends will butt or come together for the full circumference thereof. Slip joints or running
threads will not be permitted for coupling metallic ducts. When a standard coupling cannot
be used an approved threaded union coupling shall be used.
The threads on all ducts shall be well painted with a good quality of lead or rust preventive
paint before couplings are made up. All ducts shall be checked with a mandrel after
completion of each installation.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer ducts shall be laid to a depth of not less than 600
mm below the curb grade in the sidewalk and all other areas and to a depth of not less than
800 mm below the finished grade in road-crossing areas.
3.5 DUCT BANK
Underground duct bank shall be constructed of pipe(s) encased in concrete. Except where
rigid galvanized steel conduit is indicated or specified, the pipe shall be of HDPE pipe.

The kind of conduit used shall not be mixed in anyone duct bank. Ducts shall not be smaller
than 100mm inner diameter unless otherwise indicated.
The top of the concrete envelope shall not be less than 450 mm below grade except that
under roads and pavement, it shall be not less than 600 mm below grade.
Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away
from building with a pitch of not less than 76 mm in 30 meters.
Except at conduit risers, changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either
vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by a long sweep bends having a minimum
radius of curvature of 7.6 meters, sweep brands may be made up of one or more curved or
straight sections or combinations thereof.
Trenches shall be excavated along straight lines from structure to structure before ducts are
laid or structure constructed so the elevation can be adjusted, if necessary, to avoid unseen
obstruction.
3.6 TERMINATION OF DUCT
Pipes shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter underground structures. The joints
of the pipes shall be staggered by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having the
maximum strength. During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected
from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand dirt by means of suitable conduits plugs.
As each section of duct line is completed from structure to structure, a testing mandrel not
less than 300 mm long with a diameter of 6 mm less than the size of the conduit, shall be
drawn through each conduits, after which a brush having the diameter of the duct, and
having stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth,
sand and gravel, conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed.
Provide a plastic pull rope, having 1 meter or spare at each end of the ducts.
For duct line connections to concrete pads, break an opening on the pad out to the
dimensions required and preserve the steel in the pad.
During construction, wherever a construction joints is necessary in a duct line, debris such as
mud, sand and dirt shall be prevented from entering into the ducts by providing suitable
pipes plugs etc.
3.7 UNDERGROUND PIPE FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS
Underground pipes for branch circuits shall be HDPE pipe from the panel board and lighting
pole and projections thereof, the ends of the pipes shall be protected by caps. Pipes shall be
cleaned and plugged until conductors are installed.
The underground portion of the pipe shall be encased in a concrete envelope and shall be
buried as specified for underground ducting with concrete encasement.
3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACK-FILLING
After cable has been laid they shall be protected by concrete cable marker or cable protector
tile of a design approved by the Vietnam Power Authority, and by marker tape.
All excavation for hand holes, ducts, and cable installation shall be carried out so as to
minimize damage to existing surfaces.
The Contractor will reinstate all surfaces on completion of back-filling to the original
condition and in accordance with the Engineer's instruction.
To facilities reinstatement the outline of all areas to be removed in Portland cement concrete
and asphalt concrete sidewalks and pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 50 mm
with a saw, prior to removing the sidewalk and pavement materials.

Cut for remainder of the required depth may be made by a method satisfactory to the
Engineer. Cuts shall be neat and true and surfaces outside the removal area shall not be
damaged.
The Engineer may waive or modify the above requirements for excavation and reinstatement
when the excavation lies within an area to be overlaid or reconstructed under other clause of
the Specifications.
All backfill for manholes, duct banks, and ducts shall comply with the requirements of the
relevant sections of the Specifications.

The quantity of each item paid for under this clause will be the measured number of units or
linear meters, or shall be paid as lump sums as detailed below for items which are furnished
and installed in accordance with this specification, the drawings and the instructions of the
Engineer.
The price and payment shall be full compensation for all materials, labour, equipment and
other incidental necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Drawings, the
Specifications and as instructed by the Engineer.
4.1.1 MANHOLES (UNIT – EACH)
The unit prices for manhole shall include cover, fixing bolts, nuts, HDPE pipes and fittings,
installation and any repairs of civil works as the Engineer considers shall be required.
4.1.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT BANK FOR UNDERGROUND CABLE (UNIT-METRE)
The furnishing and laying of conduit shall be measured in place by the linear meter of the
conduit, including fittings.
4.1.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING CABLE (UNIT – METRE)
Measurement of excavation and backfilling of cable shall be measured in place by the linear
meter of cable trench. The same rate shall be paid regardless of the depth and width of the
trench, or the type of reinstatement required. Measurement shall be made for each trench for
burial of electrical cable whether cable for direct burial, duct, or duct bank. Measurement
shall be made once only for each trench, regardless of the number of cables or ducts installed
in the trench. Measurement shall not be made for excavation and backfilling of cables for
traffic signal systems.
Payment for items shall be deemed to be included furnishing, installing, and repairing in the
unit price for these items.
Payment for conduit or duct bank shall also be full compensation for all materials, labour,
plant, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to insert and pull the cable through the
conduit including all permits for testing and other miscellaneous items that may be required
to ensure the full operational and functional conditions of the electrical conduit systems. For
duct bank, and duct with protection concrete, the concrete surround shall not be measured
separately for payment.
Payment for excavation and backfilling of cables shall be full compensation for all materials,
labour, plant, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to install cable for direct burial,
duct, or duct bank and to carry out reinstatement of the trench and surface. Separate payment
shall not be made for provision of concrete / tile cable markers and marker tape. Payment for
cable, duct or duct bank installed in the trench shall be paid separately.
Pay Item Description unit

09200-01 Manhole Type (A+B) each
09200-02 Manhole Type (C+D) each
09200-03 HDPE Pipe 65/50 m
09200-04 HDPE Pipe 100/80 m
09200-05 Steel Conduit D80 mm and fitting with protection concrete 250mm
thickness m
09200-06 Junction Box (Type A, B, C) each
09200-07 PVC Pipe 60mm and fittings m
09210-01 Lighting Blister (including anchor bolts) each
09210-02 Foundation of Lighting Pole 9m (including anchor bolts) each
09210-03 Foundation for Lighting Control Panel (including anchor bolts) each
09210-04 Foundation of Lighting Pole 14m (including anchor bolts) each
09210-05 Foundation of High Mast 25m (including anchor bolts) each
09210-06 Foundation and pillar for warning light at Interchange exit ramp each
09220-01 Excavation and Backfilling Cable m
09220-02 Duct bank type-1 m

SECTION 09300 - DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR (DEG) SET - NOT USED
SECTION 09400 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) - NOT USED
SECTION 09500 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH - NOT USED


BLLT J2 Vol 2 Specification 131212 Rev14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BLLT J2 Vol 2 Specification 131212 Rev14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contract

Package J2 Civil Works

Project: North-South Expressway Construction

Employer: Vietnam Expressway Corporation

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification ii

SECTION 01100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. ABBREVIATIONS AND UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-1 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-2 01100

3. CONTRACTOR'S PROGRAM FOR THE WORKS

4. QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM (QA)

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-4 01100

5. PROVISION OF BONDS AND INSURANCE

6. MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-6 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-7 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-8 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-9 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-10 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-11 01100

8. SETTING OUT THE WORKS

10. HEALTH AND SAFETY

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-13 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-14 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-15 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-16 01100

11. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

12. LOCATION AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

14. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS

15. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

16. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING DRAINAGE

17. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO

18. CONTRACTOR’S SUBMISSIONS

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-21 01100

21. MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-23 01100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-24 01100

3. DUTIES OF EACH PARTY

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-26 01200

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 1-28 01300

SECTION 02100 - SITE CLEARING

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-1 02100

3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-2 02100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-3 02200

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-4 02200

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-5 02200

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 2-6 02200

SECTION 03100 - COMMON EXCAVATION

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-1 03100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-2 03100

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-3 03100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-4 03100

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-5 03200

3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-9 03200

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-10 03200

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-11 03300

Contract – Volume 2 – Specification 3-12 03300

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT